Keysight N9020A MXA

Signal Analyzers
This manual provides documentation for the following models:
N9020A Option 503 (20 Hz – 3.6 GHz)
N9020A Option 508 (20 Hz – 8.4 GHz)
N9020A Option 513 (20 Hz – 13.6 GHz)
N9020A Option 526 (20 Hz – 26.5 GHz)

Notice: This document contains references to Agilent.

Please note that Agilent’s Test and Measurement
business has become Keysight Technologies. For
more information, go to www.keysight.com.

Service Guide
Notices DOCUMENT THAT CONFLICT WITH
THESE TERMS, THE WARRANTY
government requirements
beyond those set forth in the
TERMS IN THE SEPARATE EULA shall apply, except to the
© Keysight Technologies, Inc. AGREEMENT WILL CONTROL.
2008-2017 extent that those terms, rights, or
Technology Licenses licenses are explicitly required
No part of this manual may be from all providers of commercial
reproduced in any form or by any The hardware and/or software computer software pursuant to
means (including electronic storage described in this document are the FAR and the DFARS and are
and retrieval or translation into a furnished under a license and may be
foreign language) without prior set forth specifically in writing
used or copied only in accordance
agreement and written consent from elsewhere in the EULA. Keysight
with the terms of such license.
Keysight Technologies, Inc. as shall be under no obligation to
governed by United States and U.S. Government Rights update, revise or otherwise
international copyright laws. modify the Software. With
The Software is “commercial respect to any technical data as
Trademark Acknowledgments computer software,” as defined defined by FAR 2.101, pursuant
by Federal Acquisition Regulation to FAR 12.211 and 27.404.2 and
Bluetooth®
(“FAR”) 2.101. Pursuant to FAR DFARS 227.7102, the U.S.
Manual Part Number 12.212 and 27.405-3 and government acquires no greater
Department of Defense FAR than Limited Rights as defined in
N9020-90218 Supplement (“DFARS”) 227.7202, FAR 27.401 or DFAR 227.7103-5
Edition the U.S. government acquires (c), as applicable in any technical
commercial computer software data.
Edition 1, May 2017 under the same terms by which

Supersedes: February 2017

the software is customarily Safety Notices
provided to the public.
Accordingly, Keysight provides
Published by:
the Software to U.S. government
Keysight Technologies
1400 Fountaingrove Parkway customers under its standard
Santa Rosa, CA 95403 commercial license, which is
embodied in its End User License A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard. It
Warranty Agreement (EULA), a copy of calls attention to an operating
which can be found at procedure, practice, or the like that,
THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS if not correctly performed or adhered
DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” http://www.keysight.com/find/sweula
to, could result in damage to the
AND IS SUBJECT TO BEING The license set forth in the EULA
product or loss of important data. Do
CHANGED, WITHOUT NOTICE, IN represents the exclusive authority
not proceed beyond a CAUTION
FUTURE EDITIONS. FURTHER, TO by which the U.S. government notice until the indicated conditions
THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED may use, modify, distribute, or are fully understood and met.
BY APPLICABLE LAW, KEYSIGHT disclose the Software. The EULA
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, and the license set forth therein,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH does not require or permit,
REGARD TO THIS MANUAL AND among other things, that
ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED
Keysight: (1) Furnish technical
HEREIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT
information related to A WARNING notice denotes a hazard.
LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
commercial computer software It calls attention to an operating
WARRANTIES OF
or commercial computer procedure, practice, or the like that,
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
software documentation that is if not correctly performed or adhered
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
to, could result in personal injury or
KEYSIGHT SHALL NOT BE LIABLE not customarily provided to the
death. Do not proceed beyond a
FOR ERRORS OR FOR INCIDENTAL public; or (2) Relinquish to, or
WARNING notice until the indicated
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN otherwise provide, the conditions are fully understood and
CONNECTION WITH THE government rights in excess of met.
FURNISHING, USE, OR these rights customarily provided
PERFORMANCE OF THIS to the public to use, modify,
DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION
reproduce, release, perform,
CONTAINED HEREIN. SHOULD
display, or disclose commercial
KEYSIGHT AND THE USER HAVE A
SEPARATE WRITTEN AGREEMENT computer software or
WITH WARRANTY TERMS commercial computer software
COVERING THE MATERIAL IN THIS documentation. No additional
Where to Find the Latest Information
Documentation is updated periodically. For the latest information about this instrument, including firmware
upgrades, application information, and product information, click the website link below.
http://www.keysight.com/find/n9020a
To receive the latest updates by email, subscribe to Keysight Email Updates at the following URL:
http://www.keysight.com/find/MyKeysight
Information on preventing instrument damage can be found at:
www.keysight.com/find/PreventingInstrumentRepair

Is your product software up-to-date?

Periodically, Keysight releases software updates to fix known defects and incorporate product enhancements. To search
for software updates for your product, go to the Keysight Technical Support website at:
http://www.keysight.com/find/techsupport

3
4
 Contents

Table of Contents

1. Overview
What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Keysight MXA Signal Analyzer Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Instrument Option Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Signal Analyzer Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Manual Set on CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
50 Ohm Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
50 Ohm/75 Ohm Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
75 Ohm Matching Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AC Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AC Probe (Low Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
RF and Transient Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Power Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Static Safe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Before You Start Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Lithium Battery Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ESD Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Protection from Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Handling of Electronic Components and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Test Equipment Usage and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
For Additional Information about ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Service Equipment You Will Need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Calibration Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Front End Controller Troubleshooting Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
USB Keyboard and Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
USB Storage Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Required Test Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
After an Instrument Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Contacting Keysight Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Instrument Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
How to Return Your Instrument for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Service Order Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Original Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Other Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

2. Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Check the Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Instrument Boot Up Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Typical instrument boot-up process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Potential Problems During Boot Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Yellow Standby LED Does Not Illuminate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

5
Contents

Green Power On LED Does Not Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fan(s) Are Not Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
No Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Instrument Hangs at the Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
PCI Enumeration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Instrument Cannot Completely Load or Run the
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Troubleshooting a Blank Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Verify LCD Backlight Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Verify Video Signal Path Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Video Controller / LCD Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Initializations Did Not Complete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fails an Initial Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Signal Level Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Signal Level Problem with
Input Frequencies < 3.6 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Signal Level Problem with
Input Frequencies > 3.6 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

3. Instrument Messages
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Event vs. Condition Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Event and Condition Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Event Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Event Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Advisory Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Event Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
–800, Operation Complete Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–700, Request Control Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–600, User Request Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–500, Power on Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–400 to –499, Query Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
–300 to –399, Device-Specific Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
–221 Settings Conflict Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
–200 to –299, Execution Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
–100 to –199, Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
0 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Condition Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Condition errors 1 to 99, Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Condition Errors 101 to 199, Measurement Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Condition Errors 201 to 299, Signal Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Condition Errors 301 to 399, Uncalibrated Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Condition Errors 401 to 499, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Condition Errors 501 to 599, Frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Condition Errors 701 to 799, Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Condition Errors 801 to 899, Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

6
 Contents

4. RF Section Troubleshooting
What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
RF Section Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
RF Section Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Quick Check to Verify the Low Band Signal Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Troubleshooting a Low Band Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Quick Check to Verify High Band RF Path #1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Troubleshooting a High Band Problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
High Band Preamp (Option P08, P13, P26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
High Band Mixing Equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Microwave Preselector Bypass (Option MPB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

5. Front End Control Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
A15 Front End Control Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Verifying Input Attenuator A, Input Attenuator B, Low Band Switch Logic and Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . 211
Input Attenuator A Control Logic Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Input Attenuator B Control Logic Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Low Band Switch Control Logic Verification
(all except Option 503) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Preselector Tune Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Front End Assembly Control Logic Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Verifying SW1 and SW2 (Option MPB only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Oscilloscope Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Verifying Aux IF Out, Rear Panel (Option CR3, CRP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Standard Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Verifying Option CR3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Verifying Option CRP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

6. Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
25 MHz BW IF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
A2 Analog I.F. Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
A3 Digital I.F. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
40 MHz BW IF Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
A2 Analog IF Assembly Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
A2 Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
A2 Analog IF Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
A3 Digital IF Assembly Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

7
Contents

A3 Digital IF Assembly Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

A3 Digital IF Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
A25 Wideband Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
A26 140 MHz Wideband Digital IF Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

7. L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Brief Description of the Major Blocks: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Verifying the 4800 MHz Input Power & Frequency Stability: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Verifying the 1st L.O. Output Power: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
A16 Reference Assembly Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

8. CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
A4 CPU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Front Panel Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Graphics Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Power Supply Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Rear Panel Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
System Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
A5 Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Troubleshooting software related issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Reloading the X-Series Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Disk Drive Recovery Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Agilent Recovery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Using the Instrument Recovery System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Replacing the instrument disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

9. Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
A6 Power Supply Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Power Supply Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

8
 Contents

A6 Power Supply Basic Troubleshooting

(Cover On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
A7 Midplane Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

10. Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
A8 Motherboard Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
A8 Motherboard Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
A1 Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A1A3 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A1A4 LCD Inverter Board/DC-DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
A1A5 Front Panel USB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Option BBA Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
A17 LED Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
A18 BBIQ Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
A19 BBIQ Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

11. Block Diagrams

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
RF Lowband Path Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
RF Highband Path #1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
RF Highband Path #2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Reference and Synthesizer Block Diagram
(Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233 without Option B85, B1A, or B1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Reference and Synthesizer Block Diagram
(Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233 and all with Option B85, B1A, or B1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
25 MHz Bandwidth I.F. System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
40 MHz Bandwidth I.F. System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
≥ 85 MHz Bandwidth IF System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
MXA Computer Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
BBIQ System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

12. Service and Diagnostics Menus

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Controlling Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Secure Service Access, Software Versions A.01.xx through A.03.xx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Summary of Requirements for Service Menu Access, Software Versions A.01.xx through A.03.xx:. . . . . . . . 354
Secure Service Access, Software Version ≥ A.04.00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Service Key Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Timebase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

9
Contents

Band Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

LO Band Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
LO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Align. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

13. Replaceable Parts

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
How to Order Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Replaceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

14. Assembly Replacement Procedures

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Tools you will need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Adjustments Tests after an instrument repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Major Assembly Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Instrument Outer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Standard Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Option PRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Top Brace and Reference Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
RF Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Low Band Switch -
Standard Instruments with Serial Number < MY/SG50510001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Low Band Switch -
Standard Instruments with Serial Number > MY/SG50510001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Low Band Switch and Coaxial Switches
Options DP2, MPB, B40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
YTF Preselector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
RF Front End Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Front End Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
L.O. Synthesizer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Reference Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Removal

10
 Contents

(Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233

without Option B85, B1A, or B1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Removal
(Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233
and any with Option B85, B1A, or B1X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
CPU Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Rear Panel Removable Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Internally Mounted Disk Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Disk Drive Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Separate AIF/DIF Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Wide Band Analog IF and Digital IF Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Midplane Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Motherboard Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Input Connector Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Front Frame Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Bail Handle Removal (Option PRC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Front Frame Assembly Components - LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Front Frame Assembly Components - LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Option BBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

15. Post-Repair Procedures

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Post-Repair Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

11
Contents

Additional Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

16. Functional Tests

Functional Test Versus
Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Before Performing a Functional Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Test Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Frequency Readout Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Second Harmonic Distortion (SHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Testing Preamp Option (P03, P08, P13, P26). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
Frequency Response (Flatness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Scale Fidelity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
BBIQ Input Frequency Response
(Option BBA only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

17. Instrument Software

What You Will Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Instrument Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Software Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Instrument Measurement Application Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
89601 VSA Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

12
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

1 Overview

What You Will Find in This Chapter

This chapter provides overview information on your spectrum analyzer.
The following sections are found in this chapter:
Keysight MXA Signal Analyzer Overview on page 14
Instrument Option Descriptions on page 15
Signal Analyzer Accessories on page 16
Before You Start Troubleshooting on page 19
ESD Information on page 21
Service Equipment You Will Need on page 23
After an Instrument Repair on page 38
Contacting Keysight Technologies on page 39
How to Return Your Instrument for Service on page 43

13
 Overview
Keysight MXA Signal Analyzer Overview

Keysight MXA Signal Analyzer Overview

The Keysight MXA signal analyzer measures and monitors complex RF and
microwave signals. The analyzer integrates traditional spectrum
measurements with advanced vector signal analysis to optimize speed,
accuracy, and dynamic range. The MXA has Windows built in as the operating
system, which expands the usability of the analyzer. You will be able to
manipulate various file types on your analyzer just like your personal computer.
Having a Windows based instrument provides many benefits such as easier file
management, built-in Windows based programs such as Internet Explorer, and
much more.
The Keysight MXA signal analyzer is readily adaptable to meet changing
measurement needs. Optional features, whether hardware or measurement
application software, will enable the analyzer to be configured as a
comprehensive analytical tool to test communications systems and
components.
If customer requirements should change or expand, post sale upgrades can be
purchased at any time. Many upgrades require a license key, which is obtained
using the Keysight licensing process. If the Keysight Delivery Option is ordered,
the entitlement certificate will be emailed to the customer the same day and
the license key can be generated and installed in the MXA Signal Analyzer
within minutes. Once the license key is entered into the analyzer, the new
option is enabled and fully functional.
The service strategy for the MXA is assembly level repair, not component level.

14
 Overview
Instrument Option Descriptions

Instrument Option Descriptions

The MXA signal analyzer has a variety of options and measurement
applications that can be installed depending on your application. These
options and measurement applications can be purchased and installed at the
time of sale or as a post-sale upgrade. In order to find out all the requirements
about installing an upgrade into the analyzer, refer to

http://www.keysight.com/find/n9020a_upgrades
Description information of Option BBA, Analog Baseband IQ Inputs can be
found on page 331.

15
 Overview
Signal Analyzer Accessories

Signal Analyzer Accessories

A number of accessories are available from Keysight Technologies to help you
configure your analyzer for your specific applications. They can be ordered
through your local Keysight Sales and Service Office and are listed below.

Manual Set on CD/DVD

The documentation set that is shipped with the instrument on CD/DVD
provides information for the signal analyzer. Documentation is updated
periodically. The latest updates can be accessed via the web at:

http://www.keysight.com/find/MXA_manuals.
Each manual is described below:
— Getting Started Guide: Describes analyzer features in detail. In addition, this
manual covers unpacking and setting up the analyzer, analyzer features,
and information on options and accessories, and what to do if you have a
problem.
— Specifications Guide: Documents specifications, safety, and regulatory
information.
— Instrument Messages: Includes instrument messages (and suggestions for
troubleshooting them).
— Functional Tests: Includes manual functional tests.
— User’s/Programmer’s References: Multiple manuals which include
programming information and SCPI command descriptions for basic
spectrum analyzers and for applications such as IQ analyzer, WCDMA, and
802.16 OFDMA.
— Measurement Guides and Programming Examples: Multiple manuals which
provide details on how to how to use catalogs and files, and how to
measure various signals for basic spectrum analyzers and for applications
such as IQ analyzer, WCDMA, and 802.16 OFDMA.

16
 Overview
Signal Analyzer Accessories

50 Ohm Load
The Keysight 909 series loads come in several models and options providing a
variety of frequency ranges and VSWRs. Also, they are available in either
50 ohm or 75 Ohm. Some examples include the:
909A: DC to 18 GHz
909C: DC to 2 GHz
909D: DC to 26.5 GHz

50 Ohm/75 Ohm Minimum Loss Pad

The Keysight 11852B is a low VSWR minimum loss pad that allows you to
make measurements on 75 Ohm devices using an analyzer with a 50 Ohm
input. It is effective over a frequency range of DC to 2 GHz.

75 Ohm Matching Transformer

The Keysight 11694A allows you to make measurements in 75 Ohm systems
using an analyzer with a 50 Ohm input. It is effective over a frequency range of
3 to 500 MHz.

AC Probe
The Keysight 85024A high frequency probe performs in-circuit measurements
without adversely loading the circuit under test. The probe has an input
capacitance of 0.7 pF shunted by 1 MΩ of resistance and operates over a
frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz. High probe sensitivity and low distortion
levels allow measurements to be made while taking advantage of the full
dynamic range of the spectrum analyzer.

AC Probe (Low Frequency)

The Keysight 41800A low frequency probe has a low input capacitance and a
frequency range of 5 Hz to 500 MHz.

Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers

Preamplifiers and power amplifiers can be used with your spectrum analyzer to
enhance measurements of very low-level signals.
— The Keysight 8447D preamplifier provides a minimum of 25 dB gain from
100 kHz to 1.3 GHz.
— The Keysight 87405A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain from
10 MHz to 3 GHz. (Power is supplied by the probe power output of the
analyzer.)
— The Keysight 83006A preamplifier provides a minimum of 26 dB gain from
10 MHz to 26.5 GHz.

17
 Overview
Signal Analyzer Accessories

— The Keysight 85905A CATV 75 ohm preamplifier provides a minimum of

18 dB gain from 45 MHz to 1 GHz. (Power is supplied by the probe power
output of the analyzer.)
— The 11909A low noise preamplifier provides a minimum of 32 dB gain from
9 kHz to 1 GHz and a typical noise figure of 1.8 dB.

RF and Transient Limiters

The Keysight 11867A and N9355C RF Limiters protect the analyzer input
circuits from damage due to high power levels. The 11867A operates over a
frequency range of dc to 1800 MHz and begins reflecting signal levels over
1 mW up to 10 W average power and 100 watts peak power. The N9355C
microwave limiter (0.01 to 26.5 GHz) guards against input signals over
10 milliwatts up to 1 watt average power.
The Keysight 11947A Transient Limiter protects the analyzer input circuits from
damage due to signal transients. It specifically is needed for use with a line
impedance stabilization network (LISN). It operates over a frequency range of
9 kHz to 200 MHz, with 10 dB of insertion loss.

Power Splitters
The Keysight 11667A/B/C power splitters are two-resistor type splitters that
provide excellent output SWR, at 50 Ω impedance. The tracking between the
two output arms, over a broad frequency range, allows wideband
measurements to be made with a minimum of uncertainty.
11667A: DC to 18 GHz
11667B: DC to 26.5 GHz
11667C: DC to 50 GHz

Static Safe Accessories

9300-1367 Wrist-strap, color black, stainless steel. Four adjustable
links and a 7 mm post-type connection.
9300-0980 Wrist-strap cord 1.5 m (5 ft.)

18
 Overview
Before You Start Troubleshooting

Before You Start Troubleshooting

Before troubleshooting, complete the following tasks:
— Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols marked on the instrument and
read the general safety considerations in the front of this guide.
— Read the ESD information below.
— Familiarize yourself with the troubleshooting information in Chapter 2,
“Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting.”, and how it relates to
information on troubleshooting the other assemblies.

These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only.

To avoid electrical shock, do not perform any servicing unless you
are qualified to do so.

The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose

dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage
sources while it is being opened.

The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain

live for 5 seconds after disconnecting the plug from it’s power
supply.

The detachable power cord is the instrument disconnecting device.

It disconnects the mains circuits from the mains supply before other
parts of the instrument. The front panel switch is only a standby
switch and is not a LINE switch (disconnecting device).

Always position the instrument for easy access to the disconnecting

device (detachable power cord).

To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the analyzer from mains

before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly dampened with
water to clean the external case parts. Do not attempt to clean
internally.

This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective earthing

ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains plug shall only
be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth
contact. Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or
outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous.
Intentional interruption is prohibited.

19
 Overview
Lithium Battery Disposal

Always use the three-prong ac power cord supplied with this product.
Failure to ensure adequate earth grounding by not using this cord may
cause product damage.

This instrument has an autoranging line voltage input; be sure the supply
voltage is within the specified range.

Lithium Battery Disposal

The X-Series Signal Analyzer uses an internal 3.0 VDC battery that contains
Lithium/Manganese Dioxide (Li/MnO2). The battery is located on the A4 CPU
assembly to power the instrument clock and back up data in SRAM. When the
battery is exhausted and ready for disposal, dispose of it according to your
country’s requirements. The Keysight part number is 1420-0356. The
manufacturer’s part number is CR2032. You can return the battery to your
nearest Keysight Technologies Sales and Service office for disposal, if required.
Refer to “Contacting Keysight Technologies” for a list of Keysight Technologies
Sales and Service offices.

20
 Overview
ESD Information

ESD Information

Protection from Electrostatic Discharge

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic components.
All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a static-safe
workstation. Figure 1-1 shows an example of a static-safe workstation using
two types of ESD protection:
— Conductive table-mat and wrist-strap combination.
— Conductive floor-mat and heel-strap combination.
Both types, when used together, provide a significant level of ESD protection.
Of the two, only the table-mat and wrist-strap combination provides adequate
ESD protection when used alone. To ensure user safety, the static-safe
accessories must provide at least 1 megohm of isolation from ground.

These techniques for a static-safe workstation should not be used

when working on circuitry with a voltage potential greater than 500
volts.

Figure 1-1 Example of a Static-Safe Workstation

21
 Overview
ESD Information

Handling of Electronic Components and ESD

The possibility of unseen damage caused by ESD is present whenever
components are transported, stored, or used. The risk of ESD damage can be
greatly reduced by paying close attention to how all components are handled.
— Perform work on all components at a static-safe workstation.
— Keep static-generating materials at least one meter away from all
components.
— Store or transport components in static-shielding containers.

Always handle printed circuit board assemblies by the edges. This will
reduce the possibility of ESD damage to components and prevent
contamination of exposed plating.

Test Equipment Usage and ESD

— Before connecting any coaxial cable to an analyzer connector, momentarily
short the center and outer conductors of the cable together.
— Personnel should be grounded with a 1 megohm resistor-isolated
wrist-strap before touching the center pin of any connector and before
removing any assembly from the analyzer.
— Be sure that all analyzers are properly earth-grounded to prevent build-up
of static charge.

For Additional Information about ESD

For more information about preventing ESD damage, contact the Electrical
Over Stress/Electrostatic Discharge (EOS/ESD) Association, Inc. The ESD
standards developed by this agency are sanctioned by the American National
Standards Institute (ANSI).

22
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Service Equipment You Will Need

There are certain things that will be required to troubleshoot, adjust, and test
the MXA Signal Analyzer. They include the following:
— Calibration Application Software
— Front End Controller Troubleshooting Kit
— USB Keyboard and Mouse
— USB Storage Device
— Test Equipment

Calibration Application Software

Information regarding the Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Calibration
Application Software can be found at the following web site:

http://www.keysight.com/find/calibrationsoftware

23
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Front End Controller Troubleshooting Kit

The Front End Troubleshooting kit contains a PC board, required cables, and
installation instructions to verify the switch control logic from the A15 Front
End Control board to the lower level front end components is correct.
Oftentimes when troubleshooting an RF front end problem, the logic needs to
be verified before one of the front end components is changed. This
troubleshooting kit will help identify the defective area in a timely manner. In
order to effectively isolate A15 Front End Control board problems from front
end component problems, it is highly recommended that the N9020-60005
Front End Troubleshooting kit is purchased.
The Front End Troubleshooting kit lower level items can be purchased
individually or as a complete kit with instructions. The complete listing of kit
components, descriptions, and part numbers can be found below.

Keysight Part Keysight Part Number Notes

Front End Troubleshooting kit N9020-60005

Front End Troubleshooting board E4410-60115 Part of N9020-60005 Troubleshooting kit
Cable, Low Band switch E4410-60160 Part of N9020-60005 Troubleshooting kit
Cable, RF Downconverter E4410-60156 Part of N9020-60005 Troubleshooting kit
Cable, YTF Preselector E4410-60158 Part of N9020-60005 Troubleshooting kit
Cable, Input Attenuators E4410-60157 Part of N9020-60005 Troubleshooting kit
Cable, Troubleshooting 8121-1400
Connector, MMCX (f) to SMA (f) n/a www.hubersuhner.com
item number: 31_MMCX-SMZ-50-1/111_OE

24
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

USB Keyboard and Mouse

A USB keyboard and mouse will be needed to accomplish many of the different
troubleshooting tasks, as well as updating the instrument software. Any
standard USB keyboard and mouse should work, but you can use the optional
keyboard and mouse sold for the instrument. These can be purchased as:

Description Option Number Upgrade Option Part Numbera

USB Keyboard N9020A-KYB N9020AK-KYB 0960-2933

USB Mouse N9020A-MSE N9020AK-MSE 0960-2670

a. Part number is subject to change.

USB Storage Device

The main reason why a USB storage device will be needed is to backup
calibration data when the hard drive in an instrument needs to be replaced,
installing instrument software upgrades, and installing new option licenses.
Recommended size is 2 gigabytes minimum, to allow storing at least one
instrument software installer file.

25
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Required Test Equipment List

The following table identifies the equipment recommended for
troubleshooting, adjusting, and verifying the performance of the instrument.
Only the recommended and alternate equipment is compatible with the
performance verification testing. Some tests can use various models of a
particular equipment type. The “Recommended Keysight Model” is the
preferred equipment. However, the “Alternative Keysight Model” is an
acceptable substitute.
Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Signal Sources
Microwave Signal Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz E8257D For Adjustments: A, P, T
Generator #1 Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz (Option 567, 83630A/B/L
Harmonic level: < −30 dBc 1EA/1EU, 1E1) (Option 001, 008),
Amplitude range: -40 dBm to +13 (Option 007, 83640A/B/L
Amplitude resolution: 0.02 Analog Ramp (Option 001, 008),
VSWR: Sweep, required 83650A/B/L
< 20 GHz: 1.6:1 for Frequency (Option 001, 008),
≤ 31 GHz: 1.8:1 Response
Adjustments) PSGc

For Performance
Tests:
83630A/B
(Option 001, 008),
83640A/B
(Option 001, 008),
83650B
(Option 001, 008)

PSGc
Microwave Signal Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz E8257D 83630A/B P
Generator #2 Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz (Option (Option 008),
(only required for Third Harmonic level: < −30 dBc 1EA/1EU) 83640A/B
Order Intermodulation and Amplitude range: -20 dBm to +13 (Option 008),
Gain Compression) Amplitude resolution: 0.02 83650A/B
VSWR: (Option 008)
< 20 GHz: 1.6:1 PSGc
≤ 31 GHz: 1.8:1
Low Noise Frequency: 50 MHz to 1.0 GHz E8257D 8663A A, P, T
Signal Generator Harmonics: < -30 dBc ≤ +13 dBm (Options UNR,
(one PSG may be used for Spectral Purity SSB Phase Noise @ 1 GHz: UNX) PSGc
multiple sources. −112 dBc at 100 Hz offset (Options UNR,
See footnote c) −121 dBc at 1 kHz offset UNX)
−131 dBc at 10 kHz offset
VSWR: < 1.5:1

26
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Ultra Low Noise Phase Noise (dBc/Hz) for 1 GHz tone and these Wenzel P, T
Reference Frequency offsets: Associates Inc.d
Source 100 Hz −104 dBc/Hz Ultra Low Noise
(required for testing PXA 1 kHz −132 dBc/Hz Reference
Phase Noise) (required for 10 kHz −144 dBc/Hz Frequency
MXA’s with Option EP2) 30 kHz −146 dBc/Hz Source Model
100 kHz −148 dBc/Hz 500-13428 Rev
1 MHz −157 dBc/Hz C
10 MHz −164 dBc/Hz
RF Signal Generator Frequency: 300 kHz to 3.6 GHz E8257D 8665B A, P
(one PSG may be used for Frequency Resolution: 1 Hz (Options UNR, (for Freq Resp
multiple sources. Harmonic level: < −40 dBc UNX) Phase Noise > 30
c
See footnote ) Amplitude range: -20 dBm to +13 kHz test only)
Amplitude resolution: 0.02
Harmonic level: PSGc
< 2 GHz, < -30 dBc (Options UNR,
≥ 2 GHz & < 26.5 GHz, < -50 dBc UNX)
VSWR:
< 20 GHz: 1.6:1
≤ 31 GHz: 1.8:1
For Option UNR or UNX:
Harmonics: < −30 dBc ≤ +13 dBm
Spectral Purity SSB Phase Noise @ 1 GHz:
−112 dBc at 100 Hz offset
−121 dBc at 1 kHz offset
−131 dBc at 10 kHz offset
VSWR: < 1.5:1
Function Generator Frequency: 10 Hz to 300 kHz 33250A 33120A A, P
Amplitude Resolution: 0.1 mv (required for (Option 001)
Harmonic Distortion: −35 dBc Channel Match
(Option BBA)
test)

Counters
Universal Counter Frequency: 10 MHz 53132A 53131A A, P, T
Gate time: 10 to 100 seconds
Must be capable of measuring signal at
+7 dBm (0.5 Vrms)
Meters
Digital Multimeter Frequency: 3 Hz to 300 kHz 3458A A, P, T
AC Accuracy: ± 0.31% of reading

27
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Power Meter Dual Channel N1914A E4419A/B A, P

Instrumentation Accuracy: ± 0.5% N1912A
Power Reference Accuracy: ± 0.6%
Compatible with 8480 series power sensors
dB relative mode
RF Power Sensor Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 3.6 GHz 8482A N8482Af A, P
(2 required) Amplitude Range: −30 to +20 dBm (Option H84)
N8482A CFTf
Zero Set: ± 50 nW
Zero Drift: < ± 10 nW 8482Af
Measurement Noise: < 110 nW (Non-H84
VSWR sensors will
100 kHz to 1 MHz: ≤ 1.20:1 increase
1 MHz to 2 GHz: ≤ 1.10:1 measurement
2 GHz to 3 GHz: ≤ 1.30:1 uncertainty)
Cal Factor Uncertainty (std): < 1.6%
Option H84 Cal Factor: Characterized by
standards lab to: ± 0.6%e
Input Connector: Type-N (m)
Microwave Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz N8485Af N8485A CFTf A, P
(2 required) Amplitude Range: -30 to +20 dB
Zero Set: ± 50 nW 8485Af
Zero Drift: < ± 10 nW
Measurement Noise: < 110 nW
Cal Factor Uncertainty: < 3.0%
VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.15:1
100 MHz to 2 GHz: 1.10:1
2 GHz to 12.4 GHz: 1.15:1
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz: 1.20:1
18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.25:1
Input Connector: 3.5 mm (m)
Low Power Microwave Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 8485Df A, P
Power Sensor Amplitude Range: −70 to +20 dBm
(2 required) Zero Set: ± 50 pW
(for Option P08, P13, Zero Drift: < ± 4 pW
or P26 only) Measurement Noise: < 4 pW
Cal Factor Uncertainty: < 3.0%
VSWR: 50 MHz to 100 MHz: 1.15:1
100 MHz to 2 GHz: 1.10:1
2 GHz to 12.4 GHz: 1.15:1
12.4 GHz to 18 GHz: 1.20:1
18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: 1.25:1
Input Connector: 3.5 mm (m)
Power Sensor Cable 11730A A, P, T
(2 required)

28
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Standards
Frequency Standard Frequency: 10 MHz Symmetricom Keysight 5061B, A, P
Accuracy: < ±1 e10−10 5071A 5071A

50 MHz, Frequency Drift: < 2.5 kHz Z5602A A

−25 dBm Calibrator Typical VSWR: 1.06:1 Opt H51
Output Power Variation: ±.004 dB
Total Harmonic Content: -45 dBc
Attenuators
10 dB Range: 0 to 80 dB 8496G 8496H P
Step Attenuator Accuracy: (Option 001, (Option 001, H50)
Characterized by standards labg H50)
Calibrated at 50 MHz
VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.05:1
1 dB Range: 0 to 9 dB 8494G 8494H P
Step Attenuator Accuracy: (Option 001, (Option 001, H50)
Characterized by standards labg H50)
VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.05:1
Attenuator Type N connector kit to connect 8496G to 11716A P
Interconnect Kit 8494G
Attenuator Driver Compatible with the 8496G and 8494G step 11713B 11713A P
attenuators
3 dB Frequency: 50 MHz 8491A 8491B P
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 3 dB (nominal) (Option 003) (Option 003)
VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.2:1
Connector: Type-N (m, f)
6 dB Frequency: 50 MHz 8491A 8491B P
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 6 dB (nominal) (Option 006, (Option 006,
VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.05:1 H33h) H33h)
Connector: Type-N (m, f)
6 dB Frequency: 50 MHz to 3.6 GHz 8493C A
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 6 dB (nominal) (Option 006)
(2 required) VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.10:1
Connector: 3.5 mm (m, f)
10 dB Frequency: 50 MHz 8491A 8491B P
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 10 dB (nominal) (Option 010, (Option 010,
VSWR: at 50 MHz: ≤ 1.05:1 H33h) H33h)
Connector: Type-N (m, f)

29
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

10 dB Frequency: 50 MHz to 19.5 GHz 8493C A, P

Fixed Attenuator Loss: 10 dB (nominal) (Option 010)
VSWR:
321.4 MHz to 8 GHz: ≤ 1.1:1
8 GHz to 12.4 GHz: ≤ 1.15:1
12.4 GHz to 19.5 GHz: ≤ 1.25:1
Connector: 3.5 mm (m, f)
20 dB Frequency: 10 MHz 8491A 8491B A, P
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 20 dB (nominal) (Option 020) (Option 020)
VSWR: 10 MHz: ≤ 1.20:1
Connector: Type-N (m, f)
30 dB Frequency: 50 MHz 11708A A, P
Fixed Attenuator Loss: 30 dB ± 0.05 dB
VSWR: 1.05 @ 50 MHz
(For use with Low Power Sensors)
Terminations
Type-N (m) Frequency: 10 kHz to 18 GHz 909A P, T
(for Option 503, 508, 513) VSWR: ≤ 1.05:1 (Option 012)
3.5 mm (f) 50 Ω 909D P, T
(for Option 526) Frequency: 10 kHz to 50 GHz (Option 526)
BNC (m) Frequency: 50 Hz to 300 kHz 1250-0207 P
(required for Option BBA)
Miscellaneous Devices
RF Power Splitter Frequency: 9 kHz to 3.6 GHz 11667A A, P
VSWR: ≤ 1.10:1
Tracking Error: < ± 0.15 δΒ
Connector: Type-N (f)
Microwave Power Splitter Frequency: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11667B A, P
VSWR:
10 MHz to 3 GHz: < 1.22:1
3 GHz to 26.5 GHz: < 1.22:1
Tracking Error: < ± 0.40 δΒ
Connector: 3.5 mm (f)

30
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Directional Bridge Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 3 GHz 86205A P

Directivity:
50 MHz to 2 GHz:40 dB
2 GHz to 3 GHz: 30 dB
VSWR:
≤ 2 GHz: ≤ 1.15:1
≤ 3 GHz: ≤ 1.22:1
Insertion Loss: ≤ 1.5, +0.1 dB/GHz (nominal)
Coupling (nominal): 16 dB
Connector: Type N (f)
Directional Coupler Frequency 2 GHz to 20 GHz 87300B P
Directivity > 16 dB
Transmission arm loss: < 1.5 dB (nominal)
Coupled Arm Loss: ~10 dB (nominal)
VSWR: ≤ 1.35:1
Connector: SMA (f)
Microwave Power Divider Frequency: DC to 500 MHz 11636B A, P
VSWR: < 1.10:1
Tracking Error: < ± 0.25 δΒ
Connector: 3.5 mm (f)
Hybrid Power Divider Frequency: 500 MHz to 3.6 GHz 87302C A
Isolation: 19 dB
Insertion Loss: 4.5 dB (nominal)
VSWR: <1.45:1
Cables
3.5 mm (m) to 3.5 mm (m) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz 11500E 8120-4921 A, P
(2 required) Length: ≤ 92 cm (36 in)
Insertion Loss: ~2 dB
VSWR:
DC to 18 GHz: ≤ 1.25:1
18 GHz to 26.5 GHz: ≤ 1.35:1
Type-N Frequency: 10 MHz to 8 GHz 11500C A, P, T
(2 required) Precision Type-N (m), both ends
62 cm (24 in.)
VSWR: ≤ 18 GHz: 1.4:1
Insertion Loss: 1.5 dB
BNC Frequency: DC to 10 MHz 10503A A, P, T
(3 required) 50 Ω Coax BNC (m), both ends
120 cm (48 in.)

31
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Filters
50 MHz Low Pass Cutoff Frequency: 50 MHz Telonic Berkeley 0955-0306 P,T
Rejection at 65 MHz: > 40 dB TLA 50-5AB2
Rejection at 75 MHz: > 60 dB
Insertion Loss: ~1 dB
VSWR: ≤ 1.5:1
BNC (m) to BNC (f)
300 MHz Low Pass Cutoff Frequency: 300 MHz Telonic Berkeley 0955-0455 P
(2 Required) Rejection at > 435 MHz: > 45 dB TLP 300-4AB4
VSWR: ≤ 1.5:1
BNC (m, f)
1.8 GHz Low Pass Cutoff frequency: 1.8 GHz RLC L-1636 0955-0491 P
(2 Required) Rejection at 2.1 GHz to 6 GHz: > 45 dB
Insertion Loss @ 1.8 GHz: < 1 dB
VSWR: ≤ 1.50:1 DC to 1.8 GHz
Connector: SMA (f) to SMA (f)
4.4 GHz Low Pass Cutoff frequency: 4.4 GHz K+L 9135-0005 P
(2 Required) Rejection at > 5.5 GHz: > 42 dB ML253-4499/XU 360D
Insertion Loss @ 1.8 GHz: < 1 dB -N/NP
VSWR: ≤ 1.50:1 DC to 1.8 GHz
Connector: SMA (f) to SMA (f)
5.0 GHz Low Pass 3 dB frequency: 5.25 GHz RLC P
60 dB Rejection: > 6.7 GHz F-30-5000-RF
VSWR: 1.35:1
8.0 GHz Low Pass 3 dB frequency: 8.4 GHz RLC P
60 dB Rejection: > 10.8 GHz F-30-8000-RF
VSWR: 1.35:1
12.4 GHz Low Pass 3 dB frequency: 13.0 GHz RLC P
60 dB Rejection: > 16.74 GHz F-30-12.4-RF
VSWR: 1.35:1
Adapters
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1472 P
VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1
Type-N (m) to Type-N (m) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1475 P
VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1
Type-N (f) to BNC (m) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1477 P, T
VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1
Type-N (m) to BNC (m) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1473 P, T
VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1

32
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

Type-N (m) to BNC (f) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1476 P

VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1
Type-N (m) to Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1743 P
3.5 mm (m) VSWR: ≤ 1.08:1
Type-N (m) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1744 P
(2 Required) VSWR: ≤ 1.08:1
3.5 mm (f) to Type-N (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1745 A, P
(for 3.5 mm source) VSWR: ≤ 1.08:1
Type-N (f) to 3.5 mm (m) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 1250-1750 A, P
VSWR: ≤ 1.14:1
3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz 83059B 1250-1749 P
(for 3.5 mm source) VSWR: ≤ 1.05:1
3.5 mm (m) to 3.5 mm (m) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz 83059A 1250-1748 P
(2 Required) VSWR: ≤ 1.12:1
3.5 mm (f) to 2.4 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 26.5 GHz 11901B P
(for 2.4 mm source) VSWR: ≤ 1.05:1
Type-N (f) to 2.4 mm (f) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 11903B P
(for 2.4 mm source) VSWR: ≤ 1.08:1
BNC (m) to SMA(f) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1700 P
VSWR: ≤ 1.13:1
BNC Tee (BNC f,m,f) 1250-0781 A, P
SMB (f) to BNC (f) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1236 A, P
BNC (f) to SMA (m) Frequency: DC to 1.3 GHz 1250-1200 A, P
BNC (f) to Dual Banana 1251-2277 A, P
3.5 mm (f) to Type-N (m) Shipped with the 8485A for adapting to the 08485-60005 A, P
Power Reference. Only to be used for power
sensor cal.
Type-N Tee 1250-0559 P
Optional Equipment
10 MHz Distribution Symmetricom Keysight 5087A A, P
Amplifier 5087B
(only needed when using
the 10 MHz Distribution
Amplifier Setup)

33
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-1 Required Test Equipment

Instrument Critical Specifications Recommended Al ternative Useb

Model a Model

1 GHz Notch Filter Center Frequency: 1.0001 GHz Trilithic P

(for alternate Phase Noise CFN-2-1000.1
setup)

a. Keysight model numbers unless otherwise noted.

b. A = Adjustments, P = Performance Testing, T = Troubleshooting
c. Supported PSG models:
E8244A
E8247C
E8254A
E8257C
E8257D
E8267C
E8267D
Note: One PSG with Option 567, 1EA, 1E1, 007, and UNX or UNR can be used as the Microwave Signal
Generator #1, Low Noise Signal Generator (for MXA’s without Option EP2), and the RF Signal Genera-
tor.
d. Wenzel Associates Inc., 2215 Kramer Ln., Austin, TX 78758 (512) 835-2038 Fax (512) 719-4086
e. The 8482A power sensor uses cal factors to compensate the power sensor for frequency response
errors. Cal factors are stated in percentages. The 8482A factory cal factor uncertainty ranges from
2.2% to 3.1%. The cal factor uncertainty can be reduced to < 1.0% by using metrology grade calibra-
tion techniques. The power sensor cal factor uncertainty becomes one component of the Verification
Test uncertainty analysis. Lower cal factor uncertainties will translate to wider test margins.
f. When ordering a new STD or CFT Power Sensor from Keysight to be used with the N7800A series
applications, order with Option 1A7. The 1A7 option provides an ISO17025 calibration and includes
calibration data. When re-calibrating your STD or CFT Power Sensor for use with the N7800A series
applications, we recommend the Keysight ISO17025 calibration.
g. The step attenuators should be permanently joined via the 11716A Interconnect Kit as shown in the
following diagram.

For more information on step attenuator characterization, see the “Step Attenuator Loss Charac-
terization” section below.

34
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

h. 8491A Option H33 is a fixed attenuator which has been characterized to have a VSWR ≤ 1.05:1 at 50
MHz. A VSWR of 1.05:1 is recommended to test Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty, Display
Scale Fidelity, and Absolute Amplitude Accuracy performance tests. Any 8491A/B attenuator can be
mapped into this device if the VSWR at 50 MHz has been characterized to be ≤ 1.05:1. When map-
ping the attenuator, to indicate that is meets the required specification, the Option H33 checkbox will
need to be checked in the configure test station Administration screen.

35
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Step Attenuator Loss Characterization

The step attenuator combination should have each attenuator setting
characterized by a metrology lab at 50 MHz. The following tables show which
sections of the 10 dB and 1 dB step attenuators are utilized for each attenuator
setting. The tables also list the Allowable Uncertainty for each attenuator
setting. The interconnect cable should NEVER be disconnected once the loss
characterization is performed.
Table 1-2 1 dB Step Attenuator

Nominal Attenuation Attenuator Section Allowable Uncertainty

(dB) (dB)
#1 #2 #3 #4
(1 dB) (2 dB) (4 dB) (4 dB)

0 Off Off Off Off 0 (Reference)

1 On Off Off Off < 0.005

2 Off On Off Off < 0.005

3 On On Off Off < 0.005

4 Off Off Ona Off < 0.005

5 On Off On Off < 0.005

6 Off On On Off < 0.005

7 On On On Off < 0.005

8 Off Off On On < 0.005

9 On Off On On < 0.005

a. TME requires that Section 3 be characterized.

Table 1-3 10 dB Step Attenuator

Nominal Attenuation Attenuator Section Allowable Uncertainty

(dB) (dB)
#1 #2 #3 #4
(10 dB) (20 dB) (40 dB) (40 dB)

0 Off Off Off Off 0 (Reference)

10 On Off Off Off < 0.010

20 Off On Off Off < 0.015

30 On On Off Off < 0.020

40 Off Off Ona Off < 0.025

50 On Off On Off < 0.030

36
 Overview
Service Equipment You Will Need

Table 1-3 10 dB Step Attenuator

Nominal Attenuation Attenuator Section Allowable Uncertainty

(dB) (dB)
#1 #2 #3 #4
(10 dB) (20 dB) (40 dB) (40 dB)

60 Off On On Off < 0.035

70 On On On Off < 0.040

a. TME requires that Section 3 be characterized.

37
 Overview
After an Instrument Repair

After an Instrument Repair

If any instrument assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform the
related adjustments and performance verification tests. These tests are done
using the N7814A Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Calibration Application
Software. Refer to Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures” for a list of
post-repair adjustments and performance tests based on which hardware has
been changed.
Information regarding the N7814A Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer
Calibration Application Software can be found at

http://www.keysight.com/find/calibrationsoftware

38
 Overview
Contacting Keysight Technologies

Contacting Keysight Technologies

If you have a problem with your instrument, see Chapter 2, “Boot Up and
Initialization Troubleshooting”. This section contains a checklist that will help
identify some of the most common problems.
There is also support on the world-wide web. The address is:
http://www.keysight.com/find/mxa_support
FAQs, instrument software updates, documentation, and other support
information can be accessed from this site.
To obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts, contact the
nearest Keysight office listed in Table 1-4. In any correspondence or telephone
conversations, refer to the instrument by its model number (N9020A) and full
serial number (ex. MY49250887). With this information, the Keysight
representative can quickly determine whether your unit is still within its
warranty period.
By internet, phone, or fax, get assistance with all your test and measurement
needs.

39
 Overview
Contacting Keysight Technologies

Table 1-4 Contacting Keysight

Online assistance: http://www.keysight.com/find/contactus

Americas

Country Phone Number

Canada (877) 894 4414

Brazil 55 11 3351 7010

Mexico 001 800 254 2440

United States 1 800 829-4444

Asia Pacific

Country Phone Number

Australia 1 800 629 485

China 800 810 0189

Hong Kong 800 938 693

India 1 800 112 929

Japan 0120 (421) 345

Korea 080 769 0800

Malaysia 1 800 888 848

Singapore 1 800 375 8100

Taiwan 0800 047 866

Other AP Countries (65) 6375 8100

Europe and Middle

Country Phone Number

Austria 0800 001122

Belgium 0800 58580

Finland 0800 523252

France 0805 980333

Germany 0800 6270999

Ireland 1800 832700

Israel 1 809 343051

Italy 800 599100

40
Overview
Contacting Keysight Technologies

Europe and Middle

Country Phone Number

Luxembourg +32 800 58580

Netherlands 0800 0233200

Russia 8800 5009286

Spain 0800 000154

Sweden 0200 882255

Switzerland 0800 805353

Opt. 1 (DE)
Opt. 2 (FR)
Opt. 3 (IT)

United Kingdom 0800 0260637

For other unlisted countries:

http://www.keysight.com/find/contactus

41
 Overview
Contacting Keysight Technologies

Instrument Serial Numbers

Keysight makes frequent improvements to its products enhancing
performance, usability, or reliability. Keysight service personnel have access to
complete records of design changes to each type of instrument, based on the
instrument’s serial number and option designation.
Whenever you contact Keysight about your instrument, have the complete
serial number available. This will ensure that you obtain accurate service
information.
A serial number label is attached to the rear of the instrument. This label has
two instrument identification entries: the first provides the identification
number for each option built into the instrument and the second provides the
instrument’s serial number.
The serial number has two parts: the prefix (two letters and the first four
numbers), and the suffix (the last four numbers). Refer to the following figure.

Figure 1-2 Example Serial Number

The first two letters of the prefix identify the country in which the unit was
manufactured. The remaining four numbers of the prefix identify the date of the
last major design change incorporated in your instrument. The four digit suffix
is a sequential number and, coupled with the prefix, provides a unique
identification for each unit produced. Whenever you list the serial number or
refer to it in obtaining information about your instrument, be sure to use the
complete number, including the full prefix and the suffix.
The serial number is located on the rear panel serial sticker or when the
analyzer is power up, press System, Show, System. The system information
can be very useful for updates and post-sale upgrades.

42
 Overview
How to Return Your Instrument for Service

How to Return Your Instrument for Service

Service Order Number

If an instrument is being returned to Keysight for servicing, the phone numbers
are mentioned in Table 1-4, “Contacting Keysight,” on page 40. In order for
Keysight to expedite the repair please be as specific as possible about the
nature of the failure.

Helpful failure descriptions:

— Signal level measures 10 dB too low at 1 GHz
— L.O. Unlock error message appears on screen in spans < 10 MHz
— Analyzer will not complete boot up sequence to signal analyzer mode

Failure descriptions that will most likely increase repair time:

— Analyzer broken
— Analyzer will not make accurate measurements
— Signal drifts
If you have recorded any error messages that appeared on the analyzer display,
or have completed a Functional Test or Performance Verification Test, or have
any other specific data on the performance of the instrument, please send a
copy of this information with the instrument.

Original Packaging
Before shipping, pack the unit in the original factory packaging materials if
they are available. If the original materials were not retained, see “Other
Packaging” on page 44.

43
 Overview
How to Return Your Instrument for Service

Other Packaging

Instrument damage can result from using packaging materials other than
those specified. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as packaging
materials. They do not adequately cushion the equipment or prevent it
from shifting in the carton. They cause equipment damage by generating
static electricity and by lodging in the instrument louvers, blocking airflow.

You can repackage the instrument with commercially available materials, as

follows:
1. Protect the control panel with cardboard.
2. Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of
damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
3. Use a strong shipping container. A double-walled, corrugated cardboard
carton with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting strength is adequate. The carton must
be both large enough and strong enough to accommodate the instrument.
Allow at least 3 to 4 inches on all sides of the instrument for packing
material.
4. Surround the equipment with three to four inches of packing material and
prevent the equipment from moving in the carton. If packing foam is not
available, the best alternative is S.D.-240
Air Cap™ from Sealed Air Corporation, Hayward, California, 94545.
Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with 1-1/4 inch air bubbles. Use the
pink-colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity. Wrapping the equipment
several times in this material should both protect the equipment and
prevent it from moving in the carton.
5. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive tape.
6. Mark the shipping container “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE” to assure
careful handling.
7. Retain copies of all shipping papers.

44
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

2 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

This chapter provides information that is useful when starting to troubleshoot a
spectrum analyzer. It includes procedures for troubleshooting common failures
and provides information on isolating problems in the analyzer.
The following sections are found in this chapter:
Check the Basics on page 46
Instrument Boot Up Process on page 47
Typical instrument boot-up process flow on page 48
Potential Problems During Boot Process on page 51
Yellow Standby LED Does Not Illuminate on page 51
Green Power On LED Does Not Illuminate on page 53
Fan(s) Are Not Operating on page 55
No Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen Displayed on page 57
Instrument Hangs at the Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen on page 58
PCI Enumeration Error on page 58
Instrument Cannot Completely Load or Run the Operating System
on page 59
Troubleshooting a Blank Display on page 59
Initializations Did Not Complete on page 63
Fails an Initial Alignment on page 64
Signal Level Verification on page 70
Signal Level Problem with Input Frequencies < 3.6 GHz on page 70
Signal Level Problem with Input Frequencies > 3.6 GHz on page 71

45
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Check the Basics

Check the Basics

Before calling Keysight Technologies or returning the instrument for service,
please make the following checks:
1. Is there power at the power outlet? At the power receptacle on the
instrument?
2. Is the instrument turned on? Check to see if the front panel LED is green,
which indicates the power supply is on.
3. If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with the
instrument, make sure they are connected properly.
4. Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when the
problem appeared. Are all the settings correct?
5. If the instrument is not functioning as expected, return the unit to a known
state by pressing the Mode Preset key.
6. Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are expected,
within the specifications and capabilities of the instrument? Refer to the
specifications book for specifications.
7. In order to meet specifications, the instrument must be aligned. Press
System, Alignments, Align Now, All. The diagnostic tests should all pass.
If the instrument displays a failure during these tests, refer to “Fails an
Initial Alignment” on page 64.
8. Check to see if the instrument has the latest firmware before starting the
troubleshooting procedure. Press System, Show System. The firmware
revision is listed under Firmware Revision. For more information, refer to
“Instrument Software” on page 631.
9. Is the instrument displaying an error message? If so, refer to Chapter 3,
“Instrument Messages”, on page 73 for more information.
10.If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the functional checks
in Chapter 16, “Functional Tests”, on page 595.

46
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Instrument Boot Up Process

Instrument Boot Up Process

This section describes the signal analyzer boot up process from initial AC
power to a normal analyzer sweep. The boot process time from start to finish
will take 3 to 4 minutes. This boot time will vary slightly depending on the
analyzer hardware configuration, installed options and the number of
measurement applications.
By default, the measurement applications will preload before the spectrum
analyzer application is fully booted. The analyzer boot time can be shortened if
needed by turning off the preload process for applications that are not going to
be used. If this is done, the preload process will be bypassed during the
application boot up. If a certain measurement mode is selected that did not
preload during the original boot, that measurement application will preload at
that time. When this occurs the mode switching time will take longer. Once the
application is loaded all subsequent mode switches will be much faster.
If the user does not want the measurement applications to preload during the
application boot process, select the Configure Applications icon on the
desktop. This will bring up a window as shown in Figure 2-1 that shows the
various applications and what is selected to preload. By default all applications
are checked and therefore, will preload when the MXA application is launched.
Uncheck any applications to bypass the preloading process, select Apply, and
then OK to close the Configure Applications window when finished.

Figure 2-1 Configure Application

47
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Instrument Boot Up Process

Typical instrument boot-up process flow

1. Plug in the AC power cord from a known good AC power source into the
rear panel of the analyzer.
2. The yellow standby LED illuminates on the analyzer front panel to the
left-hand side of the On/Off button. If the yellow Standby LED is not
illuminating refer to the “Yellow Standby LED Does Not Illuminate” section
in this chapter.
3. To turn the analyzer on, press the On/Off button. The yellow Standby LED
should turn off and the green Power On LED should illuminate. A green
Power On LED indicates that the power supply has received an “On”
command from the A4 CPU assembly. If the green Power On LED is not
illuminating refer to the “Green Power On LED Does Not Illuminate”
section in this chapter.

If the analyzer AC power source was removed by the operator by pulling

the power cord or by turning off the analyzer via a power main switch on a
test rack, the analyzer will automatically power on without having to press
the On/Off button on the front panel.

48
Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Instrument Boot Up Process

4. The instrument fans should start running. The fans are mounted on the
left-hand side of the analyzer and draw air into the instrument to cool the
internal circuitry. If a fan is not running refer to the “Fan(s) Are Not
Operating” section in this chapter.
5. The Agilent/Keysight Technologies splash screen is displayed in white font
on a dark background for ~5-10 seconds after the analyzer is turned on. If
the Agilent/Keysight Technologies logo is not displayed refer to the “No
Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen Displayed” section in this chapter. If the
instrument hangs at the Agilent/Keysight Technologies splash screen refer
to the “Instrument Hangs at the Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen” section
in this chapter.
6. Verify text is displayed on screen where the user has the option of booting
Windows or running the Agilent Recovery System. The default selection is
to boot Windows. If a recovery is required, press the Down Arrow key on
the front panel of the analyzer within 5 seconds to highlight “Agilent
Recovery System” and press the Enter key on the analyzer, otherwise
Windows will begin to boot. If the Windows boot screen is not displayed
within a few seconds refer to the “Instrument Cannot Completely Load or
Run the Operating System” section in this chapter.
7. If the recovery system is not selected the Windows operating system will
begin to boot up. This will take ~20-30 seconds.

If a recovery was selected follow the on-screen instructions and perform a

system recovery. Additional information about performing a system
recovery can be found in Chapter 8, “CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting”, on
page 303 in this manual.

8. The Agilent/Keysight Technologies logo is displayed in white font on a

blue background while Windows finishes loading user preferences. This
can take up to 4 minutes. If this does not occur refer to the “Instrument
Cannot Completely Load or Run the Operating System” section in this
chapter.
9. By default, the initialization process of the MXA Spectrum Analyzer
application begins loading. The N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer screen
appears. The screen remains for slightly over 1 minute. If any of the
initializing processes do not complete, refer to the “Initializations Did Not
Complete” section in this chapter.
10.While the application software is loading the instrument will perform a
number of internal alignments before the analyzer begins to sweep. A
screen with a black background appears and the alignment progress is
shown in a yellow box. The number of alignments is dependent on which
hardware options are present. If an alignment fails, refer to the “Fails an
Initial Alignment” section in this chapter.

49
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Instrument Boot Up Process

11.If any of the initial alignments fail, check the alignment history for
troubleshooting hints.
The instrument alignment history can be found at:

E:\AlignDataStorage\AlignmentHistory.txt

Look for any failed status for the various internal hardware items listed in
this file.
Once the MXA application is fully initialized and aligned, the sweep should
resemble Figure 2-2 when delivered from the factory. This completes the boot
process from initial AC power to the spectrum analyzer application.

IMPORTANT If the power up state has been changed from the factory power on state by
the user, the analyzer will boot to that state.

Figure 2-2 Typical Instrument Sweep at Power-up

(Display theme changed for printing clarity)

50
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Potential Problems During Boot Process

This section describes potential problems that may occur if there is an internal
hardware issue that prohibits the MXA from completing a full boot up to the
spectrum analyzer application.

Yellow Standby LED Does Not Illuminate

Control of the yellow front panel Standby LED comes from the A4 CPU board
assembly. This signal is routed through the A7 Midplane board and is then
buffered on the A8 Motherboard before being sent to the A1A2 Front Panel
Interface board through W1. Of course, the power for this all originates with
the A6 Power Supply Assembly. When the Standby LED does not come on it
could be due to any one of these assemblies. This procedure will help to
determine which one is the cause.
If the instrument turns on and operates properly but the yellow Standby LED
does not work then all that will need to be done is to trace where the control
signal for the LED is being lost using the routing information in the preceding
paragraph.
1. The Standby LED will only turn on when the instrument is connected to an
AC source that has a voltage level and frequency of that specified for the
instrument. Before proceeding verify that these requirements are being
met. Refer to the instrument rear panel for these requirements.
2. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to the Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in
this manual.
3. Refer to Figure 2-3, verify the +5.1V standby LED on the A7 Midplane
board is on.

51
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Figure 2-3 A7 Midplane Board +5.1V LED

All DC power supplies come from the A6 Power Supply assembly.

However, the most convenient measurement location for all the DC
supplies is the A7 Midplane. All power supply LED's are accessible once
the instrument cover has been removed.

Is the +5.1SB LED on the A7 Midplane board on?

If yes:
After verifying that the connections from the front panel Standby LED back
to the A4 CPU board are not at fault, replace the A4 CPU board.
If no:
Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.

Before replacing the power supply, verify the midplane and motherboard
interconnects are mechanically secure.

52
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Green Power On LED Does Not Illuminate

Control of the green front panel Power On LED comes from the A4 CPU board
assembly. This signal is routed through the A7 Midplane board and is then
buffered on the A8 Motherboard before being sent to the A1A2 Front Panel
Interface board through W1. Of course, the power for this all originates with
the A6 Power Supply Assembly. When the Power On LED does not come on it
could be due to any one of these assemblies. This procedure will help to
determine which one is the cause.
This procedure assumes that the yellow Standby LED does turn on when the
AC power is connected to the rear panel of the instrument. If it doesn't, refer to
the “Yellow Standby LED Does Not Illuminate” section before proceeding.
If the instrument turns on and operates properly but the green Power On LED
does not work then all that will need to be done is to trace where the control
signal for the LED is being lost using the routing information in the preceding
paragraph.
1. The Power On LED will only turn on when the instrument is connected to
an AC source that has a voltage level and frequency of that specified for
the instrument and the front panel On/Off button has been pressed. Before
proceeding verify that these requirements are being met. Refer to the
instrument rear panel for these requirements.
2. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this
manual.
3. Remove the MP7 Top Brace. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures”, on page 435 in this manual.
4. With AC power connected to the rear of the instrument but without
turning it on, leaving it in standby mode, measure the voltage at the top
side of R867 of the A7 Midplane board assembly. See Figure 2-4 for R867
location.
Does the voltage at R867 measure 5 VDC?
If yes:
Proceed to step 5.
If no:
Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.

Before replacing the power supply, verify the midplane and motherboard
interconnects are mechanically secure.

53
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Figure 2-4 A7 Midplane Board - R867

5. While monitoring the voltage at R867, turn the instrument power on by

pressing the front panel On/Off button.
Does the voltage at R867 measure 0 VDC?
If yes:
Proceed to step 6.
If no:
After verifying that the connections from the front panel On/Off
button back to the A4 CPU board are not at fault, replace the A4
CPU board.
6. Do all of the green power supply LEDs along the top of the A7 Midplane
board come on?
If yes:
After verifying that the connections from the front panel On/Off
button back to the A4 CPU board are not at fault, replace the A4
CPU board.
If no:
Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.

Before replacing the power supply, verify the midplane and motherboard
interconnects are mechanically secure.

54
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Fan(s) Are Not Operating

Control of the instrument fans comes from the A6 Power Supply assembly. This
signal is routed from the A6 Power Supply through the A7 Midplane board,
where there is a test point and LED to monitor the level, and is then routed to
the A8 Motherboard where it is filtered before being sent to the Fans. When the
Fans do not come on it could be due to any one of these assemblies. This
procedure will help to determine which one is the cause.
This procedure assumes that the green Power On LED on the front panel does
turn on when the instrument is turned on. If it doesn't, refer to the “Green
Power On LED Does Not Illuminate” section before proceeding.
1. The instrument fans will only turn on when the instrument is connected to
an AC source that has a voltage level and frequency of that specified for
the instrument and the front panel On/Off button has been pressed. Before
proceeding verify that these requirements are being met. Refer to the
instrument rear panel for these requirements.
2. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to the Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in
this manual.
3. Are both fans not spinning?
If yes:
Proceed to step 4.
If no:
Proceed to step 6.
4. Remove the MP7 Top Brace. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures”, on page 435 in this manual.
5. Refer to Figure 2-5, verify that the Fan LED on the A7 Midplane board is
on. Is the Fan LED on?
If yes:
Measure the voltage level at TP1 on the A7 Midplane board. Is the
TP1 voltage between +7 and +15 VDC
If yes:
Proceed to step 6.
If no:
Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.
If no:

55
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.

Before replacing the power supply, verify the midplane and motherboard
interconnects are mechanically secure.

Figure 2-5 A7 Midplane Board - Fan LED

6. With the instrument turned off, and the AC power cord removed, remove
the Fan Assembly including unplugging both fans from the A8
Motherboard. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”,
on page 435 in this manual.
7. Turn the instrument power back on and measure the fan voltage at both of
the fan connectors (J6 & J7) on the A8 Motherboard.
Both connectors have three pins. The outer conductors on both
connectors are the FAN_P supply and the center conductors are FAN_N.
The voltage between FAN_P and chassis ground should be between +7
and +15 VDC on both connectors.
Does the A8 Motherboard fan connector for the fan(s) that do not work
have the required voltage level?
If yes:
Replace the fan(s) that is not working
If no:
After verifying that the connections between the A7 Midplane board
and the A8 Motherboard are mechanically and electrically secure
replace the A8 Motherboard.

56
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

No Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen Displayed

(Black background with white “Agilent Technologies” text or “Keysight
Technologies” text)
A problem of not displaying the Agilent/Keysight splash screen could be
caused by many different things. It could be due to a down power supply, a
processor hardware problem, an instrument boot-up process error, a display
section failure, etc.
This procedure assumes that the green Power On LED on the front panel does
turn on when the instrument is turned on. If it doesn't, refer to the “Green
Power On LED Does Not Illuminate” section before proceeding.
1. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this
manual.
2. Remove the MP7 Top Brace. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures”, on page 435 in this manual.
3. With the AC power applied and the On/Off button turned on, verify that all
of the power supply voltages are at their proper level. This can easily be
done by viewing the power supply LEDs on the back side of the A7
Midplane board. See “A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting” on
page 325 of this manual.
Are all of the power supply voltages at the proper level?
If yes:
Proceed to step 4.
If no:
After verifying that the connections between the A6 Power Supply,
the A7 Midplane board, and the A8 Motherboard are all
mechanically and electrically secure, replace the A6 Power Supply
assembly.
4. Connect an external VGA monitor to the rear panel display output and
cycle power on the analyzer. If power is not cycled, the CPU might not
recognize that an external monitor is connected.
Does the external monitor display the correct information?
If yes:
Proceed to the “Troubleshooting a Blank Display” section in this
chapter.
If no:
Replace the A4 CPU Board assembly.

57
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Instrument Hangs at the Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen

A problem of the instrument hanging at the Agilent/Keysight splash screen
could be caused by many different things. It could be due to a down power
supply, a processor hardware problem, an instrument boot-up process error,
etc.
1. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this
manual.
2. Remove the MP7 Top Brace. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures”, on page 435 in this manual.
3. With the AC power applied and the On/Off button turned on, verify that all
of the power supply voltages are at their proper level. This can easily be
done by viewing the power supply LEDs on the back side of the A7
Midplane board. See “A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting” on
page 325 of this manual.
Are all of the power supply voltages at the proper level?
If yes:
After verifying that the connections from the A7 Midplane board to
the A4 CPU board are not at fault, replace the A4 CPU board.
If no:
After verifying that the connections between the A6 Power Supply,
the A7 Midplane board, and the A8 Motherboard are all
mechanically and electrically secure, replace the A6 Power Supply
assembly.

PCI Enumeration Error

When the instrument is first booting up it runs some BIOS level self tests, one
of which is that of the devices on the PCI bus. If there is a problem with a
device on the PCI bus a “PCI enumeration” error may be seen on the boot
screen. Since the only assembly connected to the PCI bus, other than the A4
CPU board, is the A3 Digital IF assembly, try removing this assembly and
rebooting the instrument to see if the error goes away. Of course, you will have
other error messages due to this assembly being missing, but this will allow
you to isolate this particular error.

58
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Instrument Cannot Completely Load or Run the

Operating System
A problem of the instrument not loading the operating system can be caused
by a few different things. It could be due to a down power supply, a processor
hardware problem, an instrument boot-up process error, corrupt hard drive,
etc.
This procedure assumes that the instrument can get past the Agilent/Keysight
splash screen at power on. If it doesn't, refer to the “Instrument Hangs at the
Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen” section before proceeding.
1. Verify that there are no external USB storage devices connected to the
instrument.
2. Does the instrument get far enough along in the boot process to run the
“Agilent Recovery System”?
If yes:
Run the “Agilent Recovery System” by referring to the “Disk Drive
Recovery Process” on page 310. If this does not correct the problem
replace the A5 Hard Disk Drive.
If no:
Replace the A5 Hard Disk Drive.

Troubleshooting a Blank Display

This section is intended to troubleshoot a display system problem that would
cause the internal LCD to be blank. It is assumed that the rest of the
instrument is booting up and functioning properly. To determine if the problem
is an internal display issue only, connect an external VGA monitor to the rear
panel display output. If the rear panel display output is also not working go to
the “No Agilent/Keysight Splash Screen Displayed” section in this chapter.
Once it has been determined that the rest of the instrument appears to be
functioning properly there are a few possible problems that could be causing
the display to be blank. They are:
— An LCD Backlight inverter or DC-DC converter problem
— A video signal path integrity problem
— A video controller / LCD problem

59
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Verify LCD Backlight Functionality

There are two backlights within the LCD assembly, one across the top and one
across the bottom. If only one of the backlights has burnt out, the other will
still function. Considering this fact, as well as the fact that the expected life
span of the backlights is much longer than the LCD itself, it is not very likely
that the backlights themselves would cause a completely blank display.
To determine if a blank display problem is backlight related:
1. Remove the AC power cord and then remove the instrument cover. Refer
to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this
manual.
2. Remove the MP7 Top Brace. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures”, on page 435 in this manual.
3. Turn the instrument on and allow enough time for it to completely
boot-up.
4. Shine a bright light at the display and look closely for the expected
information (a large flashlight should work). Since most of the display
section of the screen has a black background you will need to look at
either the area next to the softkeys or the area across the top of the
screen, since these sections will have the largest areas of lighter
information in them.
5. Can the expected display information now be seen?
If yes:
The problem is backlight related. Proceed to step 6.
If no:
The problem is not backlight related. Skip to “Verify Video Signal
Path Integrity”.

60
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

6. Refer to Figure 2-6, verify that the +12D VDC power supply is on.

Figure 2-6 A7 Midplane Board +12D LED

Is the +12D backlight supply voltage LED on?

If yes:
Proceed to step 7.
If no:
Replace the A6 Power Supply assembly.
7. With the instrument turned off remove the 8 screws that attach the front
panel assembly to the instrument chassis.
8. Without disconnecting any of the cables carefully lay the front panel
assembly face down on the work surface.
9. Refer to Figure 2-7, verify the 3 voltage levels listed in Table 2-1 are
correct.

The instrument does have a screen saver which can disable the display
backlight after a predefined period of time. If there is any question as to
whether or not this has been set by the user prior to the current failure,
and the “Inverter Enable” voltage measures too low, press a front panel
key and see if the voltage level increases to the expected level.

61
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Figure 2-7 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board LCD Backlight Inverter Control Voltages

Table 2-1 Expected Backlight Inverter Control Voltage Levels

Signal Expected Vol tage

Brightness Control 0 to 3 VDCa

Inverter Enable >6 VDC

Inverter Supply +12 VDC

a. On newer analyzers, the backlight is a string of LEDs, rather

than a fluorescent tube. The brightness control voltage for the
LEDs ranges from 0 to 2.5VDC, rather than 0 to 3VDC. If the
A1A2 Front Panel Interface board installed is either
W1312-60042 or N9020-60033, expect this voltage to range
from 0 to 3VDC.

62
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

10.Are all of the 3 voltage levels within their expected ranges?

If yes:
Replace the A1A4 LCD Inverter or DC-DC Converter board.
If no:
Replace the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board.

Verify Video Signal Path Integrity

The video controller is located on the A4 Processor assembly and is routed to
the front panel LCD through a few interconnections. These interconnections
are:
— A4 Processor assembly to A7 Midplane Board
— A7 Midplane Board to A8 Motherboard assembly
— A8 Motherboard assembly to A1A2 Front Panel Interface assembly via W1
ribbon cable
— A1A2 Front Panel Interface to A1A3 LCD via A1W1 flex-circuit
If all of these connections are properly made and none of the cables are
damaged proceed to “Video Controller / LCD Troubleshooting”.

Video Controller / LCD Troubleshooting

The video controller is located on the A4 Processor assembly. The video signals
that the controller outputs are LVDS. As described above, these signals are
routed to the LCD via the A7 Midplane Board, A8 Motherboard, and A1A2 Front
Panel Interface board.
On the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board the LVDS signals are buffered and
then sent to the LCD via the A1W1 Flex circuit.
The most likely cause for a video problem is the A4 Processor assembly;
however it could be the result of a defective LCD.

Initializations Did Not Complete

During the initialization of the MXA Signal Analyzer Application the following
messages will be displayed on the application splash screen:
— Checking for required services (1 of 7)
— Initializing License Services (2 of 7)
— Initializing Hardware (3 of 7)
— Initializing Data Services (4 of 7)
— Initializing SCPI Services (5 of 7)
— Initializing Message Services (6 of 7)
— Initializing Front Panel EEPROM Services (7 of 7)

63
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

If there is a problem with any of these initializations not completing or causing

an error message to be displayed refer to the instrument Event Log. This can
be accessed by using an external USB keyboard and mouse and selecting
Start, Run, enter Eventvwr.exe, and select OK.
Once the Event Viewer comes up, look under SA for the latest error entries.
Double-click on the entries to view further details, which should give you some
idea of what the problem is.

Fails an Initial Alignment

While the application software is loading the instrument will perform a total of
24 internal alignments before the analyzer begins to sweep. The alignment
numbers, descriptions and related hardware are described in the Table 2-2.
Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

Pre-tune 1st L.O. DAC A14 L.O. Synthesizer A16 Reference board is not
providing correct 4.8 GHz signal

Final Tune DAC Setting A14 L.O. Synthesizer A16 Reference board is not
providing correct 4.8 GHz signal

VCXO Tuning Curve A16 Reference

(Power up alignment only)

Measures the tuning voltage for the 100 MHz VCO at a
number of different frequencies.
Uses 10 MHz internal reference

VCXO Loop Band wid th A16 Reference

Adjusts gain of the PLL loop amplifier.

Uses the 10 MHz internal reference

2nd LO Tuning Curve A16 Reference

(Power up alignment only)

Measures the tune voltage for the 4800 MHz VCO at a
number of different frequencies.
Uses the 10 MHz internal reference

2nd LO Loop Band wid th A16 Reference

Adjusts gain of the PLL loop amplifier.

Uses the 10 MHz internal reference.

Dither Level Algorithm A3 Digital IF

(4 measurements)

64
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

AIF LC Wide Prefilter Passband Tuning A2 Analog IF

Algorithm

Adjusts the LC prefilter centering with the prefilter BW

set to about 1.12 MHz.
Uses 322.5 MHz Comb Calibrator on the A-IF.

AIF LC Wide Prefilter Passband Fine Tuning A2 Analog IF

Algorithm

AIF LC Narrow Prefilter Passband Tuning A2 Analog IF

Algorithm

Adjusts the LC prefilter centering with the prefilter BW

set to about 413 kHz.
Uses 322.5 MHz Comb Calibrator on the A-IF.

AIF LC Narrow Prefilter Passband Fine Tuning A2 Analog IF

Algorithm

AIF Xtal Wide Prefilter Passband Tuning A2 Analog IF A3 Digital IF or

Algorithm A16 Reference

Adjusts Centering, symmetry and dip of the crystal

prefilter BW set to about 80 kHz
Uses 322.5 MHz Comb Calibrator on the A-IF

AIF Xtal Narrow Prefilter Passband Tuning A2 Analog IF

Algorithm

Adjusts Centering, symmetry and dip of the crystal

prefilter BW set to about 13 kHz
Uses 322.5 MHz Comb Calibrator on the A-IF

AIF Variable Gain Algorithm A2 Analog IF

The Gain of the Analog IF System is measured and

compared with the ideal gain value. Several conditions
are tested, Dither on/ dither off, A-IF prefilter in and
bypassed, alias filter set wide and narrow.
Uses 322.5 MHz Comb Calibrator on the A-IF

65
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

AIF Step Gain Algorithm A2 Analog IF

Measures the relative gain of the IF for high gain (10 dB)
versus the low gain (0 dB) paths. In normal instrument
operation these two states can be controlled by the user
interface key called “Swept IF Gain”.
Uses the Comb calibrator on the A-IF

AIF 140 Variable Gain Alignment Algorithm A25 Wideband A-IF

(Option B85, B1A, or B1X)

LO Power Alignment Algorithm A13 Front End

Measure max LO power then backs off for each band Assembly or A15 Front
End Controller

AIF Variable Attenuator Algorithm A2 Analog IF

Measures the gain in all settings of the A-IF 1 dB step

attenuator. A reference power is measured with atten
4 dB
The Comb calibrator on A-IF is used to provide a CW
signal.

Mechanical Attenuator Algorithm A9 and A10 RF Input 50 MHz calibrator on A16

Attenuators Reference
Measures the attenuation of all DC coupled, and one AC
coupled (10 dB) settings of the RF input attenuators.
Reference atten setting is 10 dB

Electrical Attenuator Algorithm A13 Front End 50 MHz calibrator on A16

Reference.
Each setting from 0 to 24 dB in steps of 1 dB is
measured. The reference condition is electrical
attenuator set to 0 dB and RF input attenuators set to 10
dB. (Option EA3)

Electrical Attenuator Tail Algorithm A13 Front End

Attenuation set to 0 dB (Option EA3)

AIF 140 Variable Attenuator Algorithm A25 Wide band A-IF

Ref power at atten 12 dB (Option B85, B1A, or B1X)

DIF 40 Variable Attenuator Algorithm A3 Digital IF

Ref power at atten 21 dB (Option B40)

66
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

Narrow Band Step Cal Ad justment Alignment Alignment signal

Algorithm originates on A3 D-IF,
then goes through A16
Recalled adjustment from calibration file. (Option B40) Reference, through A13
Front End, through A2
Analog IF, and back to
A3 Digital IF.

DIF 40 Step Cal Ad justment Alignment Since this is wide band

Algorithm alignment done for
40 MHz BW signal
Recalled adjustment from calibration file. (Option B40) path, A2 Analog IF is
not included in the
signal path.

Narrow Band Step Cal Alignment Algorithm

DIF 40 Step Cal Alignment Algorithm

(Option B40)

AIF 160 Band 0 Chirp Cal Alignment Algorithm A25 Wide band A-IF
(Option B85, B1A, B1X)

AIF 160 μW Band Chirp Cal Alignment Algorithm A25 Wide band A-IF
(Option B85, B1A, B1X)

E Cal Path System Gain Algorithm Signal path from A13 A16 Reference may not be
Front End to A3 Digital providing 50 MHz E-Cal
Measures the amplitude error of the low band signal IF
path by injecting the 50 MHz E-Cal signal into the A13
Front End assembly. The E-Cal signal originates on the
A16 Reference assembly.

Low Band Nominal Path System Gain A13 Front End 50 MHz calibrator on A16
Algorithm Reference.

Aligns low band (3 Hz to 3.6 GHz path) with preamp and A9 and A10 Input attenuators
electronic attenuator OFF. Dependent on successful
E-Cal alignment.
Input attenuators set to 10 dB and DC coupled.

Low Band Preamp Path System Gain Algorithm A13 Front End 50 MHz calibrator on A16
Reference.
Aligns low band (3 Hz to 3.6 GHz path) with preamp ON.
A9 and A10 Input attenuators
Input attenuator set to 20 dB.
(Options P03, P07, P32, P44)

67
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

Low Band Elec Atten Path System Gain A13 Front End 50 MHz calibrator on A16
Algorithm Reference.

Aligns low band with electronic attenuator in the signal A9 and A10 Input attenuators
path and set to 0 dB.
(Option EA3)

Preselector Two Point Tuning Algorithm A12 YTF Preselector A13 Front End
or
Aligns the YTF preselector centering near the maximum A15 Front End
and minimum frequency points of the YTF. Controller
or
Uses the high band preamp noise as stimulus signal. All Low Band

High Band Nominal Path System Gain Anything in Band 1 4800 MHz calibrator on A16
Algorithm signal path Reference

High Band Preamp Path System Gain Algorithm A11 Low Band Switch 4800 MHz calibrator on A16
Reference
Measures change in signal level with high band preamp
turned ON and OFF. A9 and A10 Input attenuators
Input attenuator set to 30 dB.
(Options P07, P32, P44) A15 Front End Controller

High Band Preselector Bypass Path System SW1 and SW2, coax A15 Front End Controller
Gain Algorithm switches and cabling
(Options 503, 508, 513, 4800 MHz calibrator on A16
A12 YTF Preselector is bypassed and amplitude of 526) Reference
4800 MHz calibrator measured. System gain is then
computed. (Option MPB) A9 and A10 Input attenuators

High Band Preselector Bypass Preamp Path A11 Low Band Switch
System Gain Algorithm (Option MPB) SW1, SW2, or SW4
Preselector Bypass
Switches

Burst Carrier Trigger Curve Fit Algorithm A2 Analog IF

Detects the level of the signal envelope before filtering

at the 22.5 MHz IF, and compares that detected level
against the trigger threshold DC level.

Trigger Interpolation A3 Digital IF

DIF 25 Pulse Stretcher Alignment Algorithm A3 Digital IF

DIF 40 Pulse Stretcher Alignment Algorithm A3 Digital IF

Adjusts time between trigger and clock signal.

(Option B40)

68
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Potential Problems During Boot Process

Table 2-2 Initial Alignments

Alignment Description Most Probable Related Hard ware

Hard ware Failure

WBDIF Pulse Stretcher Alignment Algorithm A26 WBDIF

(Option B85, B1A, or B1X)

DC Offset Alignment Algorithm A19 BBIQ Main

(Option BBA) A18 BBIQ Interface

Using an external USB keyboard and mouse you can also access the alignment
history, which can be found in a text file at:

C:\ProgramFiles\Agilent\SignalAnalysis\Physics\AlignmentHistory.txt
You will find the most current alignment information at the bottom of this file.
Look for the failed alignments and troubleshoot the Related Hardware based
on the information provided in Table 2-2.

69
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Signal Level Verification

Signal Level Verification

Signal Level Problem with

Input Frequencies < 3.6 GHz
Measure the 50 MHz RF calibrator signal level by pressing Input/Output, RF
Calibrator, 50 MHz. Now press Freq, 50 MHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search. If
the analyzer is functioning correctly in low band, the 50 MHz calibrator level
should be −25 dBm ± 2 dB. See the figure below.

Is the signal level correct?

If yes:
The analyzer low band path is functioning properly at least at 50 MHz.
If no:
Refer to Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this manual.

It is possible that other input frequencies < 3.6 GHz could have an
amplitude problem even though the 50 MHz calibrator is within tolerance.
Using the internal RF calibrator provides a quick check of the low band
path.

70
 Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Signal Level Verification

Signal Level Problem with

Input Frequencies > 3.6 GHz
Measure the 4.8 GHz RF calibrator signal level by pressing Input/Output, {RF
Calibrator}, 4.8 GHz. Now press Freq, 4.8 GHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search. If
the analyzer is functioning correctly in high band, the 4.8 GHz calibrator level
should be −28 dBm ± 2 dB. See the figure below.

Is the signal level correct?

If yes:
The analyzer high band path is functioning properly at least at 4.8 GHz.
If no:
Refer to Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this manual.

It is possible that other input frequencies > 3.6 GHz could have an
amplitude problem even though the 4.8 GHz calibrator is within tolerance.
Using the internal RF calibrator provides a quick check of the high band
path.

71
Boot Up and Initialization Troubleshooting
Signal Level Verification

72
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

3 Instrument Messages

Introduction
The Error and Status messaging system of the instrument reports events and
conditions in a consistent fashion, as well as logging and reporting event
history.

Event vs. Condition Messages

— An Event is simply a message indicating that something has happened.
Events are sub-divided according to their severity, into Error, Warning or
Advisory categories. The sub-divisions are described in more detail in the
section “Event and Condition Categories” on page 74.
Event messages appear in the Message Line at the bottom left of the
instrument’s display window, as shown in Figure 3-1 below.
— A Condition is a state of the instrument, which is characterized by a
Detection event and a Clearing event. Conditions may be Errors or
Warnings.
Condition messages appear in the Status Panel at the bottom right of the
instrument’s display screen, as shown in Figure 3-1 below.

Figure 3-1 Instrument Message Line & Status Panel

73
 Instrument Messages
Introduction

Event and Condition Categories

The three categories of severity are described below, for both Events and
Conditions.

Errors Error messages appear when a requested operation has failed. (For example, “Detector not available”,
“File not saved”.) Error messages are often generated during remote operation when an invalid
programming command has been entered. (For example, “Undefined header”.)
Some errors are conditions rather than single events. They exist for a period of time, so they have
associated “Detected” and “Cleared” events. (For example, “LO Unlocked” or “External reference out
of range”.)
Error messages appear in the Status Panel at the bottom of the display. A message remains until you
press a key, or another message is displayed in its place.
Error messages are logged in the error queues. If the error is a condition, both the Detected and
Cleared events are logged.

Warnings Warning messages appear when a requested operation has completed successfully, but there are
modifications and/or side effects. (For example, if you requested too high a stop frequency, then
“Data out of range” is displayed and the analyzer sets itself to the highest available stop frequency.)
Some warnings are conditions rather than single events. They exist for a period of time, so they have
a “Detected” event and a “Cleared” event. (For example, if you set the sweep time too fast for a
measurement to meet the instrument specifications then the “Meas Uncal” message is displayed until
you slow down the sweep time.)
Warning messages appear in the Status Panel at the bottom of the display. The message remains
until you press a key, or another message is displayed in its place.
Warnings are logged in the error queues. If the warning is a condition, both the Detected and Cleared
event messages are logged.

74
 Instrument Messages
Introduction

Ad visories Advisory messages tell the front panel user some useful information. (For example, “File saved
successfully” or “Measuring the fundamental”.)
Advisory messages appear in the Status Panel at the bottom of the display. The message remains
until you press a key, or another message is displayed in its place.
Advisory messages are not logged in the error queues.
Grayout messages are a special type of Advisory, which appear when you attempt to access a
function that is not available. This could be a grayed out front panel key, or an inappropriate SCPI
command. There are two types of grayout messages: Benign and Forced.

1. Benign: the requested function is not available because it does not make sense
with the current instrument settings. Changing it does not affect the current
measurement. (For example, setting the number of FFTs/Span when you are not in
the FFT mode.)
A benign grayout gives an Advisory type of message only when the front panel key
is pressed.
The requested function cannot be changed from the front panel, but it can be
changed remotely.
2. Forced: the requested function is not available either because changing it would
cause an invalid measurement, or because of hardware limitations, or because the
selection conflicts with other settings. (For example, selecting the electrical
attenuator when the frequency span includes frequencies above 3.6 GHz.)
A forced grayout function cannot be changed either from the front panel or
remotely. It generates a special type of Advisory message. It also only appears on
the front panel when the key is pressed. Remotely, the message will appear in the
event queue as a warning “-221, Settings conflict; <conflict description>”.

Event Message Format

The event messages are listed in numerical order according to their message
number. Advisory messages do not have numbers, and are listed in
alphabetical order.
An explanation is included with each error to further clarify its meaning. Some
errors are specified in industry standards, and may include references to
Section 21.8 of the 1999 SCPI Syntax & Style Standard
(http://www.ivifoundation.org/docs/scpi-99.pdf).

75
 Instrument Messages
Introduction

Figure 3-2 Error Message Example

Event Queues
There are several different event queues that are viewed/queried and managed
separately. Note that Conditions are logged in the queues as pairs of events: a
“Detected” event and a corresponding “Cleared” event.

Table 3-1 Event Queue Types

Front Panel Status Error messages can be viewed by pressing, System, Show Errors, Status. The Status screen
shows error conditions that currently exist. When an error event is caused by a command sent over a
remote interface, the resulting messages are logged in the queue for that interface. For convenience,
they are also logged in the front panel queue.

Front Panel History Error messages can be viewed by pressing, System, Show Errors, History. The History
screen shows all the error events that have occurred since the instrument was turned on, with a
maximum of 100 messages. When an error situation is caused by a command sent over a remote
interface, the resulting messages are logged in the queue for that interface. For convenience, they
are also logged in the front panel queue.

Remote interfaces When an error event is caused by a command sent over a remote interface, the resulting messages
are output to the queue for that interface. To return an error, you must query the queue for that
(GPIB/LAN)
interface. An error event that is caused by a front panel action is not reported to any remote interface
queue. However, a status condition is usually caused by an internal event that is not related to a
particular interface, so the Detected/Cleared events for status conditions are reported to all the error
queues.

76
 Instrument Messages
Introduction

Table 3-2 Characteristics of the Event Queues

Characteristic Front-Panel Status Front-Panel History Remote Interfaces (GPIB/LAN)

Capacity (maximum
100 100 100
number of messages)

Circular (rotating). Circular (rotating). Linear, first-in/first-out.

Overflow Handling Drops oldest error as new Drops oldest error as new Replaces newest error with:
error comes in. error comes in. −350, Queue overflow

Send SCPI query to the desired

Press: System, Show Press: System, Show interface.
Viewing Entries
Errors, Status Errors, History
SYSTem:ERRor?

Press: Press: Send *CLS command to the

desired interface.
System, Show System, Show
Errors, Errors, Clears errors in the queue for this
Clearing the Queue particular interface only.
Clear Error Queue Clear Error Queue
Clears the errors in all the Clears the errors in all the
queues. queues.

Table 3-3 Summary of Event Reporting Modes

Event Type SCPI Error Front Panel Status Panel Display

Queues History Queue

Error Event Logged Logged Displayed in Message Line

Warning Event Logged Logged Displayed in Message Line

Advisory Event Logged Logged Displayed in Message Line

Error Condition Detected Logged Logged Displayed in Status Line

Error Condition Cleared Logged

Warning Condition Detected Logged Logged Displayed in Status Line

Warning Condition Cleared Logged

Grayout Advisory (Benign) Not logged Logged Displayed in Message Line

Grayout Advisory (Forced) See notea Logged Displayed in Message Line

a. Not logged, unless the cause of the Advisory was remotely generated, in which case a Warning mes-
sage, type –221, is logged.

77
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Advisory Messages
An advisory is simply a message that lets you know something useful; for
example “File saved successfully” or “Measuring fundamental.” Operation
completion and running status indications are common types of advisories.
Advisories have no number and are not logged in the error queue.
Advisories include gray-out “settings conflict” errors. These gray-outs are
benign (that is, changing them has no impact on the current measurement).
Advisories are event-type errors only. They are never conditions.

Message Description/Correction Information

All Auto/Man functions Message generated by pressing the Auto Couple front-panel key
have been set to Auto

Allowable Center When rotating the knob or step up/down keys to change the Center frequency, the
Frequency exceeded for value of the Span is kept constant. Therefore, the center frequency is limited by the
the current span frequency range of the instrument

Allowable Span exceeded When rotating the knob or step up/down keys to change the Span, the value of the
for the current center Center frequency is kept constant. Therefore, the span is limited by the frequency
frequency range of the instrument

Allowable Start Frequency When rotating the knob or step up/down keys to change the Start frequency, the
exceeded for the current value of the Span is kept constant. Therefore, the start frequency is limited by the
span frequency range of the instrument

Allowable Stop frequency When rotating the knob or step up/down keys to change the Stop frequency, the
exceeded for the current value of the Span is kept constant. Therefore, the stop frequency is limited by the
span frequency range of the instrument

Already in Single, press The instrument is already in the single state. If you want to start a new sweep or
Restart to initiate a new sequence, press the Restart key instead
sweep or sequence

Auto sweep time rules do FFT sweeps do not use the auto sweep time rules, so the rules setting cannot be
not apply in FFT sweeps changed from the front panel. The setting can be changed remotely and it will have
no effect on the current operation unless the analyzer is switched out of FFT
sweeps

Band Adjust has no effect If a Marker is a Fixed type marker, the marker's value does not change from when it
on a Fixed marker first became fixed. So you cannot change the band of a fixed marker

Band Adjust has no effect If Marker Function is off, changing the band has no effect
with Mkr Function Off

Band-pass filter set to Turning on any high-pass or low-pass filter turns off band pass filters
OFF

Cal Cancelled; User has canceled the cal either directly or indirectly by changing the setup
Calibration data cleared parameters. The current cal data has been erased. Perform a new user cal to obtain
calibrated results again

78
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Message Description/Correction Information

Cal Invalid: meas freq When freq points being measured are above 3.6 GHz and a calibration has been
pt(s) > 3.6GHz are > successfully performed, and the number of points are changed, the new points are
50MHz from existing Cal required to be within 50 MHz of the current cal points or the preselector optimize
pts frequencies become inaccurate and the whole cal needs to be invalidated.
Interpolation of the cal can only be performed if the new freq points are within 50
MHz of the cal points. To overcome this problem, change the number of freq points
back to match cal points or perform another user cal

Carrier power is too low For better dynamic range, transmit band spur measurements require >10 dBm
for optimum dynamic signal power at the RF input port
range.

Connecting to source… The External Signal Generator is being interrogated via SCPI, to see whether it is
suitable for the instrument to control. Please wait until complete before pressing
any buttons

Demod Time is not The Demod Time function is not available in zero span because in zero span we are
available in Zero Span al ways demodulating

Detector <X> changed due You have selected more detectors than the instrument hardware can implement.
to physical constraints An existing detector selection has been changed to allow the current detector
choice to be selected.
<X> indicates the trace number for which the detector was changed

Dynamic range is not

optimum. Set AUTO RF
input.

Exp. Averaging not

available when AUTO
PhNoise is active.

FFT Width is not settable You must select the FFT sweep type before you can set the FFT Width
unless Sweep Type is set
to FFT

File <filename> saved The file save operation executed successfully

Filter BW function is Flattop and CISPR/MIL filters have defined shapes that cannot be altered. Only the
only available for Gaussian filter type allows filter bandwidth definition changes
Gaussian filter type

Fixed LO freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The LO fixed freq should be greater than the RF freq’s for an LSB or
DSB (for DSB measurements the setup uses LSB values) downconverter setup. Use
the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the setup required

Freq Scale Type=Log is Logarithmic scaling cannot be used for time domain sweeps (0 Hz span)
not available in Zero
Span

79
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Message Description/Correction Information

Frequency Hopping The demodulated burst type has not been found in the originally demodulated slot
enabled, waiting for location within the frame
valid burst

Frequency menu has The frequency context parameter has been changed either by the user or the
changed to reflect system. The frequency menu will now contain the frequencies for the new context.
frequency context switch No action required

Gate required for valid

results

High-pass and Low-pass Turning on any band pass filter will turn off high-pass and low-pass filters
filters set to OFF

High-pass filter set to Turning on any band pass filter will turn off high-pass filters
OFF

IF Fixed freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than LO Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The IF fixed freq should be greater than the LO Stop freq for a USB
upconverter swept LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify
the setup required

IF Fixed freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The IF fixed freq should be greater than the RF Stop freq for an
upconverter swept LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify
the setup required

IF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than LO Fixed measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The IF start freq should be greater than the LO fixed freq for an USB
upconverter fixed LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the
setup required

IF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Start measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The IF start freq should be greater than the RF Start freq for an
upconverter fixed LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the
setup required

Input is internal The instrument’s input is set to internal (the internal amplitude reference signal). So
any signals connected to the front/rear panel inputs cannot be measured

LO Fixed freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than IF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The LO fixed freq should be greater than the IF Stop freq for an LSB
upconverter fixed LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the
setup required

80
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Message Description/Correction Information

LO Fixed freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The LO fixed freq should be greater than the RF Stop freq’s for an LSB
or DSB (for DSB measurements the setup uses LSB values) downconverter fixed LO
setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the setup required

LO Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for an upconverter measurement. The
greater than IF Fixed measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The LO Start freq should be greater than the IF fixed freq for an LSB
upconverter swept LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify
the setup required

LO Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Start measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The LO start freq should be greater than the RF Start freq’s for an LSB
downconverter swept LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to
clarify the setup required

LO Stop freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than RF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The LO Stop freq should be greater than the RF Stop freq’s for a DSB
(for DSB measurements the setup uses LSB values) downconverter swept LO
setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the setup required

Low-pass filter set to Turning on any band pass filter will turn off low-pass filters
OFF

No spurs have been found You started a measurement in examine meas type in single or continual sweep
mode, or full meas type in single sweep mode, but no spurs were found

Preparing Calculation…

Preselector is centered The preselector has been successfully centered

Preselector not used in You cannot center or adjust the preselector because it is not used at all at the
this frequency range. current marker frequency or between the current start and stop frequencies

Probe connected, cal data A probe has been connected, calibration data is being reapplied
is being reapplied;
<port>; <probe>

Probe connected, no probe A probe has been connected and no probe calibration data is available. The latest
cal; using cable cal cable calibration data will be used
data; <port>; <probe>

Probe disconnected, A probe has been disconnected, calibration data reverting to the last cable
reverting to cable calibration data
calibration data; <port>

Reading SNS data… The Keysight Smart Noise Source has been connected and the application is
reading the device EEPROM data. Please wait until complete before continuing

Recalled File <filename> A file recall (open/load) was successfully completed

81
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Message Description/Correction Information

Refer to online help for The Double Side Band measurement requires careful setup to obtain valid results.
assistance with DSB Please refer to the manuals for help with this setup
measurements

Requested timeslot number The selected timeslot is not on. (Timeslot is referenced to the trigger point)
is not present.

RF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than IF Fixed measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The RF Start freq should be greater than the IF Fixed freq for a DSB (for
DSB measurements the setup uses LSB values) downconverter swept LO setup.
Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the setup required

RF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than IF start measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The RF start freq should be greater than the IF Start freq’s for an LSB
downconverter fixed LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify
the setup required

RF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than LO fixed measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The RF start freq should be greater than the LO fixed freq’s for an USB
downconverter fixed LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify
the setup required

RF Start freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than LO Start measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
freq continuing. The RF start freq should be greater than the LO Start freq’s for an USB
downconverter swept LO setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to
clarify the setup required

RF Stop freq should be The setup frequencies break the rules for a downconverter measurement. The
greater than IF Stop freq measurement will still run, but check setup frequencies are correct before
continuing. The RF Stop freq should be greater than the IF Stop freq’s for an USB or
DSB (for DSB measurements the setup uses LSB values) downconverter fixed LO
setup. Use the graph icon on the DUT setup form to clarify the setup required

Scale/Div only applies in Setting the Scale/Division only makes sense when you are using a logarithmic Y
Log Y Scale scale

Signal Track is turned Signal Track is not available when you have selected Zero Span. So if Zero Span is
off when Zero Span is entered while in Signal Track is On, Signal Track is turned off
selected

Signals deleted The signals in the signal list were successfully deleted

Sweep Points/Span is < The sweep point to span ratio is below the minimum required to ensure the bucket
minimum. Results may be ratio is large enough to test DVB-T masks
inaccurate.

Sweep Setup is not Zero span is a display at a single frequency, so there is no “sweeping” to set up
available in Zero Span

82
 Instrument Messages
Advisory Messages

Message Description/Correction Information

Sync is RF Ampl (not

Training Sequence). Bits
are not accurate.

Trace file saved. The trace saving operation was successful

Use Gate View Sweep Time When in Gate View you use Gate View Sweep Time, rather than Sweep Time, to
in the Gate menu. control the Gate View window

User Cal valid. Apply Cal The measurement setup has changed such that the current cal data can be applied
from Meas Setup menu to the results. To apply the cal, press Meas Setup/Cal Setup/Apply Calibration. A
new cal can be performed if required

83
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Event Messages
Event messages are displayed in the MSG area in the bottom left of the
instrument display. Event messages and message numbers are defined by the
SCPI standard.
In the X-Series, sub-messages are often attached to add additional
information, to help you better understand the event being reported. For
example, error –221 is defined as Settings Conflict, but in the X-Series
you will often see a longer message appended to error –221, such as
Settings Conflict; Function not available in Zero Span. This
helps you understand the exact cause of the Settings Conflict error.

84
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

–800, Operation Complete Event

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–800 Operation complete The instrument has completed all selected pending operations in accordance
with the IEEE 488.2, 12.5.2 synchronization protocol

–700, Request Control Event

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–700 Request control The instrument requested to become the active IEEE 4881
controller-in-charge

–600, User Request Event

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–600 User request The instrument has detected the activation of a user request local control

–500, Power on Event

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–500 Power on The instrument has detected an off to on transition in its power supply

–400 to –499, Query Errors

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–400 Query Error There was a problem with a query command. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–410 Query INTERRUPTED Some condition caused an INTERRUPTED query to occur. For example, a query
was followed by DAB or GET before a response was completely sent

–420 Query UNTERMINATED Some condition caused an UNTERMINATED query to occur. For example, the
device was addressed to talk and an incomplete program message was
received

–430 Query DEADLOCKED Some condition caused a DEADLOCKED query to occur. For example, both the
input buffer and the output buffer are full and the analyzer cannot continue. The
analyzer automatically discards output to correct the deadlock

–440 Query UNTERMINATED A query was received in the same program message after a query requesting an
after indefinite indefinite response was executed
response

85
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

–300 to –399, Device-Specific Errors

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–300 Device-specific error An instrument error occurred and the exact problem cannot be specifically
identified. Report this error to the nearest Keysight Technologies sales or
service office

–310 System error; An internal system-type error has occurred. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified. Report this error to the nearest Keysight Technologies
sales or service office

–310 System error; A The indicated feature/software will expire in the specified time. Contact
license will soon Keysight Technologies to purchase continued use of this functionality
expire;<feature code>
will expire in <time>

–310 System Error; enable Press System, I/O Config, GPIB and set GPIB Controller to Enabled so
GPIB controller mode that the analyzer can control the source over GPIB

–310 System error; Error Communication with the network driver failed
transmitting a LAN
event to the network.

–310 System error; Failed Failure communicating with the DMC libraries’ PTP controller
to initialize the PTP
clock to current
time.

–310 System error; Failed Failure in the starting up the DMC libraries’ PTP controller
to instantiate the
PTP ordinary clock.

–310 System error; feature The specified feature, for example “N9073A-TR2”, is not licensed. The license
<feature code> not may have expired. You cannot use it until you obtain a license
licensed

–310 System error; Feature The specified feature has expired. The license is no longer valid
expired; <feature
code>

–310 System error; License The license installation of the specified feature, for example "N9073A-TR2",
installation has failed. You should refer to the event log in the control panel for more details
failed;<feature code>

–310 System error; License The license removal of the specified feature, for example “N9073A-TR2” has
removal failed; failed. You should refer to the event log in the control panel for more details
<feature code>

–310 System error; No The specified feature will stop working in the specified time due to the license
license; <feature expiration You will be prompted to save results and exit
code> will terminate
in <time>

86
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–310 System Error; No Signal source at given IP address is not responding / IP does not belong to a
supported source source. Check IP address and network connection
found

–310 System Error; source Signal source at given IP address is not responding / IP does not belong to a
connection lost, source. Check IP address and network connection
check interface
connection

–310 System error; The The PTP driver failed on initialization

configured PTP
hardware driver could
not be instantiated.

–310 System error; The PTP Failure in the execution of the PTP driver. The most likely cause of this error is a
hardware driver mismatch between versions of the PTP driver and the LXI middleware
reported a
configuration error.

–310 System error; The PTP Failure in execution of the DMC libraries’ PTP controller
ordinary clock
reported a
configuration error.

–310 System error; The Delayed LAN events cannot occur too close together (within 20 ms)
Trigger alarm delayed
LAN event was not
scheduled due to an
existing pending
event.

–310 System error; The Delayed LAN events cannot occur too close to a scheduled Alarm (within 20
Trigger alarm delayed ms)
LAN event was not
scheduled due to a
conflict with an
existing scheduled
alarm.

–310 System error; The Alarms cannot be scheduled to happen too close together (within 20 ms)
Trigger alarm was not
scheduled due to a
conflict with an
existing scheduled
alarm.

–311 Memory error There is a physical problem with the instrument memory, such as a parity error

–312 PUD memory lost Protected user data saved by the *PUD command has been lost

–313 Calibration memory The nonvolatile calibration data used by the *CAL? command has been lost
lost

87
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–314 Save/recall memory The nonvolatile data saved by the *SAV? command has been lost
lost

–315 Configuration memory The nonvolatile configuration data saved by the instrument has been lost
lost

–320 Storage fault; A problem was found while using data storage. The error is not an indication of
physical damage or failure of any mass storage element

–321 Out of memory An internal operation needed more memory than was available. Report this
error to the nearest Keysight Technologies sales or service office

–330 Self-test failed A self-test failure occurred. Report this error to the nearest Keysight
Technologies sales or service office

–340 Calibration failed The instrument requires an Align All Now. Restore the alignment by pressing
System, Alignments, Align All Now
–340 Calibration failed; The calibration for one of the I-Q ports did not succeed. The information in the
<failure msg> “failure msg” field can be used to troubleshoot this problem. Contact Keysight
<port> technical support

–350 Queue overflow An error occurred that did not get put in the error queue because the queue
was full

–360 Communication error There was a problem with instrument remote communications. The exact
problem cannot be specifically identified

–360 Communication error; The Keysight Smart Noise Source connected to the instrument has failed to be
SNS data read read by the application. Please disconnect and reconnect the SNS. If this
failure. Disconnect continues to fail, then the SNS may have had its EEPROM corrupted or another
then reconnect SNS hardware fault exists. Check SNS on another instrument, NFA and ESA are also
SNS compatible instruments. Check that the device is not an Keysight power
sensor which uses the same cable interface

–360 Communication error; The Keysight Smart Noise Source connected to the instrument has failed to be
SNS is not connected read by the application. Please disconnect and reconnect the SNS. If this
continues to fail, then the SNS may have had its EEPROM corrupted or another
hardware fault exists. Check SNS on another instrument, NFA and ESA are also
SNS compatible instruments. Check that the device is not an Keysight power
sensor which uses the same cable interface

–361 Parity error in A parity bit was not correct when the data was received. For example, on a
program message parallel port

–362 Framing error in A stop bit was not detected when data was received. For example, on a remote
program message bus port

–363 Input buffer overrun A software or hardware input buffer on a port overflowed with data because of
improper or nonexistent pacing

–365 Time out error There was a time-out problem in the instrument. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

88
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

–221 Settings Conflict Errors

This is one of the errors in the standard SCPI error range –200 to –299. For all
other errors in this range, see “–200 to –299, Execution Errors” on page 101.

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 De-emphasis only The de-emphasis function is only available if FM demod is selected
available in FM

–221 Function not The function you are trying to access is not available in zero span
available in Zero
Span

–221 Setting conflict; The trigger source (Video, RF Burst, I/Q Mag, etc.) is not available with the
<trigger source> current input port (RF, IQ, etc.)
trigger is not
available while input
is <input port>

–221 Setting conflict; A probe is connected that has a built in Differential setting. The setting
Differential setting cannot be changed manually
determined by probe
type

–221 Setting conflict; A probe is connected and the Input Z is set based on the probe type. It
Input Z unavailable cannot be changed manually
when probe sensed

–221 Settings conflict; A legal command was received but it could not be executed due to the
current device state

–221 Settings conflict; You cannot load or save base instrument traces, as this is not supported by
*.CSV file format is the Log Plot measurement
not available in this
measurement.

–221 Settings conflict; <Q When the Q Same as I parameter is set to Yes, the I parameter value is
Param> cannot be copied to <Q Param> and the <Q Param> value cannot be changed. Set Q
changed when Q same Same as I to No to enable explicit control of the <Q Param> value
as I

–221 Settings conflict; A Optimize Preselector can only be performed if a valid user cal exists and is
Valid User Cal is applied to current results. Perform a user cal first or apply existing cal
required. Optimize
aborted

–221 Settings conflict; The Auto Tune feature cannot be used when you are using a Tracking Source
Auto Tune not
available in Tracking
Source mode

–221 Settings conflict; Base Transceiver Station gain correction is not available in some Modes, or in
BTS gain is not some measurements (for example, the SA measurement)
available in this
Mode

89
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; You must be in Tracking Source mode to use the Cal functions under
Cal only available Normalize. Press Source, Source Mode and set it to Tracking
when Source Mode is
Tracking

–221 Settings conflict; The cal ENR table has no values in it, and hence the cal cannot be performed.
Calibration cannot be Correct by either populating the cal ENR table, set ENR mode to Spot, or set
performed without the ‘Use Meas Table Data for Cal’ to ‘On’
valid ENR data

–221 Settings conflict; Phase Noise cancellation does not make sense when measuring the DANL
Cancellation is not Floor, so for this reason it has been disabled
available while
measuring DANL floor.

–221 Settings conflict; When performing phase noise cancellation, you need to supply a reference
Cancellation Ref trace that will be used to cancel out the background noise of the analyzer.
trace has no data. The reference trace must be in Reference (View) mode, and selected by the
Ref Trace parameter under the Cancellation menu

–221 Settings Conflict; Reference trace for the cancellation has a different range of X-axis against
Cancellation trace the target trace
has different X-Scale

–221 Settings conflict; Optimize Preselector cannot be performed while a user cal is in progress. The
Cannot optimize while user cal performs an optimize preselector prior to taking the noise source
user cal in progress on/off level results for the cal data

–221 Settings conflict; The resolution bandwidth cannot be set to auto while you are in zero span
Can't Auto-Couple Res (time domain)
BW in Zero Span

–221 Settings conflict; The transmit band spur measurement only allows bottom (B), middle (M), and
Carrier freq not top (T) channel frequencies for each supported frequency band. The carrier
allowed with BMT. frequency must be set to the bottom, middle or top frequency of the current
(Bottom/Middle/Top frequency band
only)

–221 Settings Conflict; This error is reported when the given code channel overlaps other code
Code channel channel
duplication

–221 Settings conflict; The continuous peak feature cannot be used with a marker that is fixed. By
Continuous Peak is definition that marker value cannot change
not available with
Fixed marker

–221 Settings conflict; The continuous peak feature cannot be used while you are also using the
Continuous Peak is signal tracking function
not available with
Signal Track on

90
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; The resulting trace data (from doing a trace math function) cannot be put into
Destination trace for the any of the traces that are being used by the math operation
Trace Math cannot be
a trace operand

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. The System Downconverter can only be set to ‘On’ when
Downconv only the DUT type is amplifier. Change DUT type to Amplifier if the System
available when DUT is Downconverter is required
Amplifier

–221 Settings conflict;

EDGE EVM only
supports EDGE TCH
burst type.

–221 Settings conflict; You are using the mechanical attenuator, and have not enabled the electronic
Electronic attenuator attenuator. You cannot set the value of the electronic attenuator because it
is disabled automatically sets/changes when enabled

–221 Settings conflict; The maximum frequency of the electronic attenuator is 3.6 GHz. This is
Electronic attenuator because of switching capacitance
is not available
above 3.6 GHz

–221 Settings conflict;

Electronic attenuator
unavailable in
current state

–221 Settings conflict; The internal preamp is on. Electronic attenuator cannot be used while you are
Electronic attenuator using the internal preamp
unavailable with
Preamp on

–221 Settings conflict; QPD, EMI Average, EMI Peak, and MIL Peak are not allowed when in the
EMI Detectors are not manually selected FFT sweep mode
available in FFT
sweep

–221 Settings conflict; A command has been sent to reference the External Mixer in a model that
External Mixer not does not contain it
available

–221 Settings Conflict;

FAST method can only
be used while Radio
Std is W-CDMA

–221 Settings conflict; Some functionality is available in one View, but not in another. (See the Views
Feature not available under the View/Display key.) This error occurs if you send a SCPI
in this View command or push a grayed-out key that is not available in the current
selected View

91
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; You have selected a feature that the selected source does not support
Feature not supported
for selected source

–221 Settings conflict; Some functionality is not available when certain Inputs are selected. For
Feature not supported example, Trigger Holdoff is not available for the BBIQ input
for this Input.

–221 Settings conflict; Some functionality is available in one measurement, but not in another. (See
Feature not supported the measurements under the Meas key.) This error occurs if you send a
for this measurement. SCPI command or push a grayed-out key that is not available in the current
selected measurement

–221 Settings conflict; This functionality is not a part of the instrument you are using, but may be
Feature not supported found in other models in the X-Series
for this model number

–221 Settings conflict; When Swept IF Gain is manually set to Low, you cannot set the FFT IF Gain to
FFT IF Gain High not High because that would make the Reference Level couplings wrong in FFT
available when Swept mode
IF Gain = Manual Low

–221 Settings conflict; If you are using level gating, you cannot select the FFT Gate Method
FFT method is
unavailable for level
gating

–221 Settings conflict; The gated LO function turns the LO on and off as it sweeps, so the FFT sweep
FFT sweep type is not type is not available if you have selected gated LO
available while in
Gated LO

–221 Settings conflict; The FFT sweep type is not available if you have selected the gated video
FFT sweep type is not function
available while in
Gated Video

–221 Settings conflict; Since FFTs do not sweep, you cannot use a Tracking Source while doing FFTs
FFT Sweeps
unavailable in
Tracking Source mode

–221 Settings conflict; If a Marker Function is on for a Fixed marker, the marker's reported value is
Fixed marker adjust derived from the function. Therefore, you cannot directly set the X or Y value
not available while of a Fixed marker that has a marker function turned on
Marker Function is on

–221 Settings conflict; If Normalize is on the Amplitude scale is in dB units, so adjusting the Y value
Fixed Marker Y value of a Fixed marker is not possible
is not adjustable
with Normalize On

92
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; The electronic attenuator does not function above 3.6 GHz, so if you have
Freq > 3.6 GHz that attenuator enabled, you cannot change the center frequency so that
unavailable while frequencies above 3.6 GHz are displayed/measured
electronic attenuator
enabled

–221 Settings conflict; The frequency offset feature cannot be used when you have selected a log
Function not scale for the frequency axis
available in External
Mixing

–221 Settings conflict; The feature cannot be used when you are using a Tracking Source
Function not
available in Tracking
Source mode

–221 Settings conflict; The feature cannot be used unless you are using a Tracking Source
Function only
available in Tracking
Source mode

–221 Settings conflict; You cannot center or adjust the preselector because the Microwave
Function unavailable Preselector is currently off
with MW Presel off

–221 Settings conflict; You cannot use level triggering to control the gate if you are using the FFT
Gate control is Edge gating method
for Gated FFT

–221 Settings conflict; You cannot use level triggering to control the gate when you are using the
Gate control must be currently selected gate source
Edge for this Gate
Source

–221 Settings conflict; The gate function cannot be used while you have marker count turned on
Gate is not available
when Marker Count on

–221 Settings conflict; The sweep time for FFT sweeps is set by the calculations, so sweep time
Gate Length is not settings cannot be adjusted
settable in FFT
sweeps

–221 Settings conflict; The sweep time for FFT sweeps is set by the calculations, so sweep time
Gate Length is not settings cannot be adjusted
settable in FFT
sweeps

–221 Settings conflict; If the Gate is On and you have the FFT Sweep Type manually selected, then
Gate Method is not the Gate Method cannot be selected
compatible with
current Sweep Type
setting

93
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; The Gate functions are unavailable when Source Mode is Tracking with an
Gate not available external source. This is because the Gate circuitry is used to sync the external
with external source
Tracking Source

–221 Settings conflict; If the Source Type is Tracking Generator, the Gate circuitry is used for TG
Gate not available sync and is not available for gating
with Tracking
Generator

–221 Settings conflict; The gated FFT function is not available if you have selected the swept type of
Gated FFT is not sweep. You must be in the FFT sweep type
available while Sweep
Type is set to Swept

–221 Settings conflict; The FFT sweep type moves the LO frequency in steps. So the gated LO
Gated LO is not function is not available if you have selected FFT sweep
available while Sweep
Type is set to FFT

–221 Settings conflict; The gated video function is not available if you have selected the FFT sweep
Gated Video is not type
available while Sweep
Type is set to FFT

–221 Settings conflict;

Incorrect RBW for
demod. Change RBW

–221 Settings conflict; The Independent I and Q setting is not available for the current
Ind I/Q is not measurement. Only some measurements (initially, only VXA) support this
available for this setting
measurement

–221 Settings conflict; The subopcode used to specify the trace number is invalid for this
Invalid trace number measurement or query

–221 Settings conflict; You should select a specific value for this function. Scrolling through values
Knob is not available with the knob is not allowed
to modify this
function

–221 Settings conflict; LO For instruments without the Dual-Loop LO, this feature is not available
Phase Noise Adj not
available

–221 Settings conflict; Signal Track not available unless the trace containing Marker 1 is updating
Marker 1 Trace
Update=off turns off
Signal Track

–221 Settings conflict; A marker must be set relative to another marker, not to itself
Marker cannot be
relative to itself

94
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; The marker count function cannot be used while you have gating turned on
Marker Count is not
available when Gate
on

–221 Settings conflict; If a Marker is a Fixed type marker, the marker's value does not change from
Marker Function is when it first became fixed. You cannot turn on or change a Marker Function
not available for a because there is no ongoing measurement data to use for the marker
Fixed marker function calculation

–221 Settings conflict; Mkr?->Span and Mkr?->CF require that the selected marker be a delta
Marker type must be marker
delta

–221 Settings conflict; Most of the Marker To functions are not available if you are in zero span
Marker-> function is (span = 0 Hz, or time domain), so you cannot send the commands for these
not available in zero functions
span

–221 Settings conflict; The current span setting is either narrower than the mask width or so wide
Mask unavailable for that there are too few display points to allow the mask to be drawn. Increase
current Span. or decrease the span to display the mask
Increase to display
mask.

–221 Settings conflict; Average Mode has been changed to Exponential. Full Meas Type is not
Meas Type was changed available for Exponential Average Mode, therefore Meas Type has been
to Examine for Exp changed to Examine
Avg Mode.

–221 Settings conflict; Average Mode has been changed to Repeat. Examine Meas Type is not
Meas Type was changed available for Repeat Average Mode therefore Meas Type has been changed to
to Full for Repeat Full
Avg Mode

–221 Settings Conflict;

MinPts/RBW limit not
met

–221 Settings conflict; The marker to center frequency functionality does not work when the X-axis
Mkr -> CF is not is in the time domain
available when the
x-axis is time domain

–221 Settings conflict; The modulation scheme auto detection is unavailable when the burst sync is
Mod Scheme AutoDet set to RF Amptd (GSM/EDGE)
unavailable when
Burst Sync=RF Amptd

–221 Settings conflict; MS Mobile Station gain correction is not available in some Modes, or in some
gain is not available measurements (for example, the SA measurement)
in this Mode

95
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; These special units only apply when you are doing antenna measurements,
Must apply Amplitude so you must have a correction that includes Antenna Units enabled
Correction to make
this unit available

–221 Settings conflict; No Optimize Preselector can only be performed on frequencies in high band,
meas frequencies are that is, above 3.6 GHz. The current setup does not have input frequencies (IF)
above 3.6 GHz in this range so an Optimize Preselector cannot be performed

–221 Settings conflict; no You must select a source using Select Source before you can do this
source selected

–221 Settings conflict; Normalize does not support Linear amplitude scale, since the results are
Normalize is not always presented as a dB ratio
available when Scale
Type = Lin

–221 Settings conflict; The normalization (correction) function cannot be used if you are using the
Normalize is not Demod View
available while Demod
View is on

–221 Settings conflict; The Normalize function works by doing trace manipulation, so if trace math is
Normalize is not on you cannot turn on normalization
available while Trace
Math is on

–221 Settings conflict; When a correction with antenna units is turned on, the only Y-axis units you
Only active Antenna can have are those that match the Antenna Unit. Turn off the Correction or
Unit available; no the Antenna Unit under Input/Output, Corrections
other Y axis units

–221 Settings conflict; You have attempted to perform an action for which a required option is not
Option not available installed

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. The sideband and freq context parameters are only
Param only available available when a freq conversion setup is in use. Change setup to contain a
when DUT is a freq freq conversion to use these parameters
converter

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. This parameter is only available when the LO mode is set
Param only available to Swept. Change the LO Mode to Swept
when External LO Mode
is Swept

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. This parameter is only available when the LO mode is set
Param only available to Fixed. Change the Freq Mode to Fixed
when External LO Mode
is Fixed

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. This parameter is only available when the Freq mode is
Param only available set to Fixed. Change the Freq Mode to Fixed
when Frequency Mode
is Fixed

96
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. This parameter is only available when the Freq mode is
Param only available set to Swept. Change the Freq Mode to Swept
when Frequency Mode
is Swept

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. The ‘Apply Calibration’ parameter is only available when
Param only available the stored cal data matches the current setup. Perform a fresh ‘Calibrate
when valid cal data Now’ or change setup such that current cal data is valid
exists

–221 Settings conflict; Preamp gain correction is not available in some Modes or Measurements
Preamp gain is not
available in this
Mode

–221 Settings conflict; The electronic attenuator is on. Internal preamp cannot be used while you are
Preamp unavailable using the electronic attenuator
with electronic
attenuator on

–221 Settings conflict; A delta marker and its reference must be in the same window. This error
Reference marker must occurs when you try to turn on a delta marker for which the reference is in a
be in same window different window

–221 Settings conflict; To do Relative Triggering in this measurement requires optional hardware
Relative Trigger that is not present in this analyzer
needs hardware
support for this meas

–221 Settings conflict; Only the Log amplitude scale is available in Normalize, since the results are
Scale Type = Lin is always presented as a dB ratio
not available when
Normalize is on

–221 Settings conflict;

Settings conflict;
Pre-trigger is
insufficient for
demod. Decrease Trig
Delay.

–221 Settings conflict; The signal tracking feature cannot be used while you are also using the
Signal Track is not continuous peak function
available with
Continuous Peak

–221 Settings conflict; The signal track functionality can be used when making a swept SA
Signal Track is only measurement. It is not available in the SA measurement when you are using
available in Swept SA FFT sweeps
measurement

97
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; Signal Track is not available when you have selected Zero Span. So if Zero
Signal Track is Span is entered while in Signal Track is On, Signal Track is turned off
turned off when Zero
Span is selected

–221 Settings Conflict;

Span limited to XXX

–221 Settings conflict; Span Zoom does not work with a time domain X-axis. You must select a span
Span Zoom is not greater then 0 Hz
available in Zero
Span

–221 Settings conflict; You should select a specific value for this function. Using the Up/Down
Step keys are not step keys to scroll through values is not allowed
available to modify
this function

–221 Settings conflict; The current measurement uses FFT mode, so does not use the Sweep Setup
Sweep Setup only menu
available in swept
measurements

–221 Settings conflict; The sweep time for FFT sweeps is set by the calculations. So sweep time
Sweep Time cannot be settings cannot be adjusted
auto-coupled in FFT
sweeps

–221 Settings conflict; You cannot send the remote command to set the sweep time to auto while
Sweep Time cannot be you are in zero span
auto-coupled while in
Zero Span

–221 Settings conflict; The sweep time for FFT sweeps is set by the calculations. It cannot be
Sweep Time cannot be manually controlled
set while in FFT
sweeps

–221 Settings conflict; When FFT IF Gain is manually set to Low, you cannot set the Swept IF Gain to
Swept IF Gain High High because that would make the Reference Level couplings wrong in
not available when swept mode
FFT IF Gain = Manual
Low

–221 Settings conflict; SCPI only message. The LO Mode cannot be set to Swept when the freq
Swept LO not mode is set to fixed. Change the freq mode away from fixed, or perform the
available when freq measurement at several fixed frequencies
mode is Fixed

–221 Settings conflict; If you have selected gated FFT then you are using the FFT sweep type and
Swept Type=Swept is you cannot select the swept type of sweeping
not available while
in Gated FFT

98
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings conflict; This is an override that turns off many of the annotations. This is available as a
System Display security feature
Settings, Annotation
is Off

–221 Settings conflict; T The Tcold value set under Meas Setup, ENR, Tcold needs to be lower
hot must be greater than the Thot value currently being set. Tcold is often taken as the ambient
than T cold temperature of the noise source. If using an SNS the Tcold value may be read
automatically before every sweep

–221 Settings Conflict;

The parameter cannot
be changed in FAST
mode

–221 Settings conflict; The Normalize function works by doing trace manipulation, so trace math is
Trace Math is not not available while normalization is running
available while
Normalize is on

–221 Settings conflict; Since FFTs do not sweep, you cannot use a Tracking Source while doing FFTs
Tracking Source
unavailable in FFT
Sweeps

–221 Settings conflict; If Point Trigger is being used with an external trigger input to synchronize an
Trigger input in use external source to the analyzer, that trigger input is unavailable for triggering
for source
synchronization

–221 Settings conflict;

Trigger is not
available with span >
0 Hz.

–221 Settings conflict; Tx The transmit band spur measurement does not support all of the
Band Spur meas does commercially available frequency bands. You need to change your selection
not support this under Mode Setup, Rad io, Band to one of the supported bands
frequency band.

–221 Settings conflict; Tx Only base station testing is available

Band Spur measurement
is not defined for
mobiles.

–221 Settings You must be logged in with administrator privileges to do this. Log out and
conflict;Administrat log back in as the Administrator, then restart the SA application
or privileges
required

99
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings The Auto Scan Time/Meas Time are not available when Scan Type =Stepped
conflict;Auto Scan Scan
Time/Meas Time do not
apply in Stepped Scan
Type.

–221 Settings The Auto Scan Time/Meas Time are not available when Scan Type =Stepped
conflict;Auto Scan Scan
Time/Meas Time do not
apply in Stepped Scan
Type.

–221 Settings Cannot perform Clear List & Start during (Re)measure, because we require
conflict;ClearList & the frequency information of the peaks in signal list to perform (Re)measure
Start not available
when ScanSeq =
(Re)measure

–221 Settings conflict;EMI You cannot turn on any EMI Detector and Average detector together. They
Detectors and Average are always mutually exclusive
detector can’t be
used together

–221 Settings Frequency is limited to 1GHz while RF Input 2 is enabled

conflict;Freq > 1 GHz
is not available
while RF Input 2
enabled

–221 Settings Settings change is not allowed while measurement is running. You must stop
conflict;Function not the current measurement if you wish to change the settings
available while
measurement is
running

–221 Settings
conflict;function
unavailable with this
EMC Standard

–221 Settings conflict;Log The Log Percent rule is not available when Scan Type=Swept Scan because
Percent Auto Step we are always doing linear sweep
Rule does not apply
in Swept Scan Type.

–221 Settings conflict;QPD You cannot turn on all 3 EMI detectors together. You must turn off one of the
+ EMI Average + RMS EMI Detectors before you turn this on
Average is not
allowed

100
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–221 Settings Max of Total range points is 400000. Reduce Scan Points or increase Step
conflict;Range <0> is Size in order to turn on that range
turned off as total
range points > 40001

–221 Settings conflict;RF If the frequency range is set above 1GHz, you cannot change to RF Input 2
Input 2 is not
available above 1GHz

–221 Settings The Scan Time & Points are not available when Step/Time Control is set to
conflict;Scan Time & Step & Dwell
Points do not apply
in current Step/Time
Control.

–221 Settings The Step Size & Meas Time are not available when Step/Time Control is set to
conflict;Step Size & Scan Time&Pts
Meas Time do not
apply in current
Step/Time Control.

–200 to –299, Execution Errors

This section lists all messages in the range except –221 error messages. For
details of –221 messages, see “–221 Settings Conflict Errors” on page 89.
Note that Execution Errors are divided into subclasses, as follows:

–21x Trigger errors

–22x Parameter error

–23x Data corrupt or stale (invalid data)

–24x Hardware error

–25x Mass storage error

–26x Expression data error

–27x Macro error

–28x Program error (a downloaded program-related execution error)

–29x Memory use error

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–200 All ranges are off. There are no range turn on in scan table. You need to turn on at least a range to
Turn on at least a initiate a scan
range

–200 At Full Zoom Marker Zoom is not available as it has reached full zoom

101
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–200 At Full Zoom Marker Zoom is not available as it has reached full zoom

–200 Execution Error A program execution error has occurred. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–200 Execution error; The entered channel/carrier frequency is not within the range of your current
Carrier frequency mode setup selection of standard and device
outside device’s
transmit band

–200 Execution error; A GSM-like burst was acquired, but its timing is not valid. Ensure the correct
Invalid GSM burst Burst Type has been selected
timing

–200 Execution error; The IP address supplied is either not valid or does not belong to a compatible
Invalid IP address Signal Generator. Please check the IP address and instrument connection and
try again

–200 Execution error; Cannot place markers on the reference trace, because the reference trace is
Invalid Marker Trace. currently turned off or has no data

–200 Execution Error; No No signal peak was found within the defined parameters of the search. (Note:
peak found. for ESA/PSA compatibility, the Swept SA measurement uses 780 for this error
number; all other measurements use –220)

–200 Execution error; No There are no active ranges in the range table. You will need to activate at least
ranges are defined. one range
Activate a range.

–200 Execution Error; Algorithm failed to center the preselector. This maybe caused by the signal
Preselector centering peak being too low in amplitude, or it could be due to excessive CW input
failed signal, alignment error, or hardware failure

–200 Execution Error; The signal that you have selected to track is changing too much for the function
Signal not stable to track it properly
enough to track

–200 Execution Error; The Reference trace data must be stored in the Ref trace before you turn on the
Store ref trace Normalization function
before turning on
Normalize

–200 Execution error; Sync NADC & PDC: In an EVM measurement, the sync word is not found and the
word was not found. synchronization cannot be established when Sync Word is selected in the Burst
Sync menu.
Flexible Digital Demodulation: The sync word cannot be detected because of
inappropriate parameter settings or incorrect signal

–200 Execution error; The trace file may have been created by another version of the Phase Noise
Trace file contains personality, which uses a different trace format that is incompatible with the
no compatible traces. version you are running. Please check that you are running the most
up-to-date version of the personality

102
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–200 Execution error; The trace file may have been created by another version of the Phase Noise
Trace file created by personality, which uses a different trace format that is incompatible with the
incompatible version version you are running. Please check that you are running the most
of Phase Noise App up-to-date version of the personality

–200 Function not Function not available before perform Marker Zoom
available before
Marker Zoom is
performed

–200 Must perform Scan Cannot perform Search as the trace data is empty
before do Search

–200 No marked signal Cannot perform the selected function because no signal was marked. You must
mark the peak of interest before selecting the function

–200 No Measure At Marker No signal peak was added into Signal List as there is no valid measure to
Added to Signal List Marker result. You must perform Measure at Marker before selecting Measure
At Marker --> List

–200 No Peak Added to No signal peak was added from the Search to Signal List as no signal peaks
Signal List were found within the defined parameters of the search criteria

–200 Signal List is Empty Cannot perform the selected function because the signal list contains no data

–200 Signal List is Full Cannot perform the selected function because the signal list is full. Please
clear the list

–200 Signal Selected is The signal selected is not the list. You only can perform the operation on signal
not in the Signal that is already available in the list
List

–201 Invalid while in The command cannot be executed while the instrument in Local control
local

–202 Settings lost due to A “return to local” control was forced and some settings were lost as a result of
rtl this

–203 Command protected The command could not be executed because it is disabled. It was disabled by
licensing or password protection

–203 Command protected; The specified feature, for example “N9073A-TR2” is not licensed. The license
feature not licensed may have expired. You cannot use it until you obtain a license

–210 Trigger error A trigger error has occurred, but the exact problem cannot be specifically
identified

–211 Trigger ignored A GET, *TRG or other triggering signal was received, but was ignored because
of timing considerations. For example, maybe the instrument was not ready to
respond when the command was received

–212 Arm ignored An arming signal was received, but it was ignored

–213 Init ignored An initiate trigger/sweep request was received and ignored, because another
measurement was already in progress

103
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–214 Trigger deadlock The trigger source for the initiation of a measurement is set to GET, and the
following measurement query was received. The measurement cannot be
started until a GET is received, but the GET would cause an INTERRUPTED
error

–215 Arm deadlock The arm source for the initiation of a measurement is set to GET and the
following measurement query is received. The measurement cannot be started
until a GET is received and the GET would cause an INTERRUPTED error

–220 Parameter error A problem was found with a program data element. The exact problem cannot
be specifically identified

–221 Settings conflict; There are many types of settings conflict errors. For full details, see “–221
Settings Conflict Errors” on page 89
–222 Data out of range; A data element was found but the instrument could not be set to that value
because it was outside the range defined for the command. A descriptive
message may be appended, such as “clipped to upper limit”

–222 Data out of Range; A source parameter has been entered that exceeds the range of the selected
clipped to source source. The parameter has been clipped to match the range of the source
max/min

–222 Data out of range; You tried to use a trace that has a number of sweep points that differs from the
Invalid list data current sweep points setting

–222 Data out of range; When entering values for limit lines, you cannot have more than two Y-axis
Two entries already (amplitude) values entered for a specific X-axis (frequency) value
exist at this x-axis
value.

–223 Too much data A data element (of block, expression, array type, or string type) had more data
then allowed by the command, or by the available memory

–223 Too much data; 200 There are too many spurs for the table (the limit is 200), and any additional
spurs found. spurs that are found will be ignored
Additional spurs
ignored.

–224 Illegal parameter An exact data value (from a list of the allowed values) was required, but not
value found. See the specific feature description for information about the expected
parameter values

–224 Illegal parameter The seconds parameter of an LXI time may not contain a fractional portion. For
value; <Value> example 123456789.0 is valid, but 123456789.1 is not valid
invalid. Fractional
values are not
allowed.

–224 Illegal parameter The value does not fall within the valid range
value; <value> out of
range.

104
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–224 Illegal parameter The list parameters have a maximum allowed length. You are trying to set a
value; Exceeding the length longer than the maximum
max list length

–224 Illegal parameter The gated FFT function is not available if you have selected the swept type of
value; Gated FFT is sweep. You must select the FFT sweep type
not available while
Sweep Type is set to
Swept

–224 Illegal parameter The FFT sweep type moves the LO frequency in steps, so the gated LO function
value; Gated LO is is not available if you have selected FFT sweep
not available while
Sweep Type is set to
FFT

–224 Illegal parameter The gated video function is not available if you have selected the FFT sweep
value; Gated Video is type
not available while
Sweep Type is set to
FFT

–224 Illegal parameter The value for the LXI LAN identifier parameter must be unique (that is, LAN0
value; Illegal and LAN7 must have different identifier strings)
identifier
<identifier>. This
value may already be
in use.

–224 Illegal parameter When querying the LXI Event Log or the Servo Log, an index may be used to
value; Index out of look at a specific entry. This error occurs if the index provided does not point to
range a valid entry

–224 Illegal parameter You are trying to set some list measurement settings, but the multiple lists that
value; Invalid list you sent had differing lengths. The number of settings must be consistent from
length list to list

–224 Illegal parameter This error occurs when you try to add an LXI Event that has already been added
value; LXI Event
<event> already
exists.

–224 Illegal parameter When a new LXI Event is created, it may not use the comma, semicolon, or
value; LXI Event newline characters. All other printable ASCII characters are valid
<event> contains
illegal characters.

–224 Illegal parameter The requested event has not been added yet
value; LXI Event
<event> does not
exist.

105
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–224 Illegal parameter You tried to turn on a measurement that is not available in the current mode
value; Measurement
not available

–224 Illegal parameter You cannot set AC coupling in this instrument

value;This instrument
is always DC coupled

–224 Illegal parameter You cannot set DC coupling in this analyzer

value;This model is
always AC coupled

–225 Out of memory There is not enough memory to perform the requested operation

–225 Out of memory; If you attempt to load a mode via SCPI that will exceed memory capacity, the
Insufficient Mode does not load and this message is returned. “mode name” is the SCPI
resources to load parameter for the Mode in question (for example, SA for Spectrum Analyzer
Mode <mode name> Mode.) You can free up resources using the System, Power On,
Configure Applications menu
–225 Out of memory; Memory
limit caused Data
Acquisition to be
truncated

–226 List not same length You are using the LIST structure, but have individual lists of differing lengths

–230 Data corrupt or A legal data element was found, but it could not be used because the data
stale; format or the data structure was not correct. This could occur if a new
measurement had been started but had not completed

–230 Data corrupt or Measurement data not available. The measurement that you are trying to get
stale; Measurement data from must be the current active measurement. Maybe you have not
data is not available initiated the measurement, or it has not completed all the sweeps/averages
needed

–230 Data corrupt or Trace cannot be displayed because currently there is no data assigned to it.
stale; Trace contains Use the functions under the Trace/Detector menu, or load a previously
no data. saved trace, to assign data to the trace

–230 Data corrupt or There is something wrong with the state data in the desired file. Maybe the file
stale; Unable to load is corrupt, or it is from an instrument/version that is not recognized by the
state from file current instrument

–231 Data questionable Indicates that the measurement accuracy is suspect

–232 Invalid format A data element was found but it could not be used because the data format or
the data structure was not correct

–232 Invalid format; Map Instrument failed to load the burst mapping information from the selected file
information not
loaded

106
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–233 Invalid version A legal data element was found but could not be used because the version of
the data is incorrect. For example, state data changes as new instrument
features are added, so old state files may not work in an instrument with a
newer version of software

–240 Hardware error A legal program command or query could not be executed because of a
hardware error. The exact problem cannot be specifically identified

–240 Hardware error; See The internal data acquisition system detected a problem at startup and logged
details in Windows the details in the Windows Event Log
Event Log under SA

–241 Hardware missing The operation could not be performed because of missing hardware; perhaps
the optional hardware is not installed

–241 Hardware missing; The hardware required is not part of this model or the option is not installed
Input not available

–241 Hardware missing; The Internal Preamp is currently turned on, but the measurement is being
Internal preamp not performed completely or partially outside the range of the preamp. It is
available at all recommended that the user turns preamp off to ensure consistent results
frequency points across the entire measurement

–241 Hardware missing; not The hardware required is not part of this model
available for this
model number

–241 Hardware missing; The optional hardware is not installed

Option not installed

–250 Mass storage error; A problem was found with the mass storage device (memory, disk drive, etc.).
The exact problem cannot be specifically identified

–250 Mass storage error; Access is denied

Access denied

–250 Mass storage error; The specified path is invalid

Bad path name

–250 Mass storage error; Trace files containing multiple traces can not be imported. However, if you
Can only import need to recall multiple traces you can use the Save and Recall functions,
single trace .csv rather than the Import and Export functions
files

–250 Mass storage error; The only Correction register that supports Antenna Units is number 1. You have
Can only load an attempted to load an Ampcor file that contains antenna units into another
Antenna Unit into register
Correction 1

–250 Mass storage error; The directory or file cannot be created

Cannot make

–250 Mass storage error; Attempt to import Corrections file with Antenna Unit that differs from an in-use
Different Antenna correction
Unit already in use

107
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–250 Mass storage error; The system cannot find the path specified
Directory not found

–250 Mass storage error; The load trace operation could not be completed, as the input file was not in
Failed to Load trace. the expected format. You can only load traces that were previously saved using
Bad file format. the Save, Trace feature

–250 Mass storage error; Attempt to import a data file that is not the proper type for this operation
File <filename> wrong
type

–250 Mass storage error; While opening a file, there was a mismatch between file version or model
File <filename> and number with instrument version or model number. The import still tried to load
instrument version as much as possible, but you should check it closely
mismatch

–250 Mass storage error; There is a mismatch between the file data type of the file specified and the
File contains destination indicated. For example, a correction set cannot be loaded/imported
incorrect data for into a limit line
this operation

–250 Mass storage error; Cannot save trace because it contains no data. Check that the trace is turned
File empty on and contains some valid data

–250 Mass storage error; You have used the *SAV command to save a state to a non existent state
Invalid register register.
number for *SAV or Or
*RCL Mass Storage
error You have used the *RCL command to recall a state register that wasn’t
previously saved with the *SAV command

–250 Mass storage error; The process cannot access the file because another process has locked a
Lock violation portion of the file

–250 Mass storage error; You have to have a Marker Table on the screen before you can save it. Turn on
Mkr Table must be on the Marker Table and try again
to save Mkr Table as
Meas Results

–250 Mass storage error; Attempt to use the auto file name generation when all 10,000 file names are
No file names taken
available

–250 Mass storage error; The system cannot open the device or file specified. This could be because the
Open failed storage media is full, or possibly due to a filename error. If using an external
storage device, check that the device is properly formatted

–250 Mass storage error; You must have a Peak Table on the screen before you can save it. Turn on the
Pk Table must be on Peak Table and try again
to save Pk Table as
Meas Results

–250 Mass storage error; The system cannot read from the specified device
Read fault

108
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–250 Mass storage error; Attempt to recall a register with nothing in it

Register <number>
empty

–250 Mass storage error; The process cannot access the file because it is being used by another process
Sharing violation

–250 Mass storage error; You must have a Spectrogram on the screen before you can save it. Turn on the
Spectrogram must be Spectrogram and try again
on to save as Meas
Results

–250 Mass storage error; The system cannot open the file
Too many open files

–250 Mass storage error; The system cannot write to the specified device
Write fault

–252 Missing media A legal command or query could not be executed because of missing media

–253 Corrupt media A removable media was found to be bad or incorrectly formatted. Any existing
data on the media may have been lost

–254 Media full A legal command/query could not be executed because the media was full

–255 Directory full A legal command or query could not be executed because the media directory
was full

–256 File name not found; A legal command or query could not be executed because the file name was
not found in the specified location

–257 File name error; A legal command or query could not be executed because there was an error
with the file name on the device media. For example, maybe you tried to copy
to a duplicate file name

–257 File name error; You are using the wrong type of file extension for the current data/file type
Allowable extension
is .csv

–257 File name error; You are using the wrong type of file extension for the current data/file type
Allowable extension
is .png

–257 File name error; You are using the wrong type of file extension for the current data/file type
Allowable extension
is .state

–257 File name error; The filename, directory name, or volume label syntax is incorrect
Invalid file name

–257 File name error; name

too long

–258 Media protected A legal command or query could not be executed because the media was
protected. For example, the write-protect was set

109
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–260 Expression error An error was found with an expression type of data element. The exact problem
cannot be specifically identified

–261 Math error in An expression that has legal syntax could not be executed because of a math
expression error. For example, maybe you are dividing by zero

–270 Macro error Indicates that a macro-related execution error occurred

–271 Macro syntax error Indicates a syntax error within the macro definition

–272 Macro execution error Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be
executed due to some error in the macro definition

–273 Illegal macro label Indicates that the macro label defined in the *DMC command was a legal string
syntax, but could not be accepted

–274 Macro parameter error Indicates that the macro definition improperly used a macro parameter
placeholder

–275 Macro definition too Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be
long executed because the string or block contents were too long for the device to
handle

–276 Macro recursion error Indicates that a syntactically legal macro program data sequence could not be
executed because the device found it to be recursive

–277 Macro redefinition\ Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *DMC command could not
not allowed be executed because the macro label was already defined

–278 Macro header not Indicates that a syntactically legal macro label in the *GMC? query could not be
found executed because the header was not previously defined

–280 Program error There was an execution error in a down-loaded program. The exact problem
cannot be specifically identified

–281 Cannot create program Indicates that an attempt to create a program was unsuccessful. A reason for
the failure might include not enough memory

–282 Illegal program name The name used to reference a program was invalid; for example, redefining an
existing program, deleting a nonexistent program, or in general, referencing a
nonexistent program

–283 Illegal variable name An attempt was made to reference a nonexistent variable in a program

–284 Program currently Certain operations dealing with programs may be illegal while the program is
running running; for example, deleting a running program might not be possible

–285 Program syntax error Indicates that a syntax error appears in a downloaded program. The syntax
used when parsing the downloaded program is device-specific

–286 Program runtime error

–290 Memory use errors

–291 Out of memory

110
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–292 Referenced name does

not exist

–293 Referenced name

already exists

–294 Incompatible type Indicates that the type or structure of a memory item is inadequate

111
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

–100 to –199, Command Errors

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–100 Command error There is a problem with the command. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–101 Invalid character An invalid character was found in part of the command

–102 Syntax error An unrecognized command or data type was found, for example a string was
received for a command that doesn’t accept strings

–103 Invalid separator The command was supposed to contain a separator but we found an illegal
character. For example, the semicolon was omitted after a command string

–104 Data type error A data type differed from what was expected. For example, numeric or string
data was expected, but block data was found

–105 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger was received within a program message

–108 Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than were expected for the command. For
example, the *ESE common command only accepts one parameter, so
sending *ESE 0,1 is not allowed

–109 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than required for this command

–110 Command header error This is a general error that is generated when a problem is found in a command
header, but no more specific information is available

–111 Header separator An illegal character was found in a command where a separator was expected
error

–112 Program mnemonic too The command contains a keyword that has more than twelve characters
long

–113 Undefined header The command meets the SCPI syntax requirements, but is not valid in the
current measurement environment

–114 Header suffix out of The value of a numeric suffix that is attached to a program mnemonic makes
range the header invalid. (A suffix is usually units, like Hz or DB)

–115 Unexpected number of The number of parameters received does not correspond to the number of
parameters parameters expected.

–120 Numeric data error An error was found in a data element that appears to be numeric. The exact
problem cannot be specifically identified

–121 Invalid character in A character was found that is not valid for the data type. For example, an alpha
number in a decimal numeric or a “9” in octal data

–123 Exponent too large The magnitude of an exponent was greater than 32000

–124 Too many digits The mantissa of a decimal-numeric contained more than 255 digits, excluding
leading zeros

–128 Numeric data not A legal numeric data element was found, but that is not a valid element at this
allowed position in the command

112
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–130 Suffix error A problem was found in a suffix (units). The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–131 Invalid suffix There is a syntax problem with the suffix. You need to use the suffix (units) that
are allowed by this command

–134 Suffix too long The suffix contained more than twelve characters

–138 Suffix not allowed A suffix was found after a numeric element that does not allow suffixes (units)

–140 Character data error A problem was found with a character data element. The exact problem cannot
be specifically identified

–141 Invalid character Either the character data element contains an invalid character or the element
data itself is not valid for this command

–144 Character data too The character data element contains more than twelve characters
long

–148 Character data not A character data element that you sent is valid, but it is not allowed at this point
allowed in the parsing

–150 String data error A problem was found with a string data element. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–151 Invalid string data A string type of data element was expected, but it is invalid for some reason.
For example, an END message was received before the terminal quote
character

–158 String data not A string data element that you sent is valid, but it is not allowed at this point in
allowed the parsing

–160 Block data error A problem was found with a block data element. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–161 Invalid block data A block data element was expected, but it was invalid. For example, an END
message was received before the end length was satisfied

–168 Block data not A legal block data element was found, but it is not allowed at this point in the
allowed parsing

–170 Expression error A problem was found with an expression data element. The exact problem
cannot be specifically identified

–171 Invalid expression An expression data element is not valid. For example, there may be unmatched
parentheses or an illegal character

–178 Expression data not A legal expression data was found, but it is not allowed at this point in the
allowed parsing

–180 Macro error A problem was found with a macro element. The exact problem cannot be
specifically identified

–181 Invalid outside macro Indicates that a macro parameter placeholder was encountered outside of a
definition macro definition

113
 Instrument Messages
Event Messages

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

–183 Invalid inside macro Indicates that the program message unit sequence, sent with a *DDT or *DMC
definition command, is syntactically invalid

–184 Macro parameter error Indicates that a command inside the macro definition had the wrong number or
type of parameters

0 Error

Err# Message Verbose/Correction Information

0 No error The queue is empty. Either every error in the queue has been read, or the queue
was cleared by power-on or *CLS

114
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Messages
Condition messages are displayed in the STATUS message area in the bottom
right of the display. Condition messages are classified as either “Errors” or
“Warnings.” In the tables in this section, an E in the Error or Warning column
means that an error is displayed on the front panel and sent out to SCPI when
this condition is detected. A W in this column means that a Warning is
displayed on the front panel, but nothing is sent to SCPI.
For each Condition Message, there is a corresponding bit in one of the SCPI
Status Registers. These bits are listed in the tables below. Some messages
exist only as status bits; for these messages the Error or Warning column entry
specifies “status bit only”.

Condition errors 1 to 99, Calibration

These errors correspond to the STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration
register. Since this register is fanned out to three sub-registers, with summary
bits in the main STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration register, each
sub-register has its own range of error numbers.

Condition Errors 6 to 34, Calibration Skipped

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIPped sub-register. The second
column in the table shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 6 indicates that the “RF Alignment being skipped” condition
has been detected, and error 1006 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 11 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration register, as described in section
“Condition Errors 36 to 64, Calibration Needed or Failed” on page 116.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

6 0 Align RF Skipped W

8 1 unused

10 2 unused

12 3 unused

14 4 unused

16 5 unused

115
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

18 6 unused

20 7 unused

22 8 unused

24 9 unused

26 10 unused

28 11 unused

30 12 unused

32 13 unused

34 14 unused

Condition Errors 36 to 64, Calibration Needed or Failed

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration register. The second column in the
table shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 42 indicates that the “RF Alignment Failure” condition has
been detected, and error 1042 indicates that failure has been cleared.
Several bits in this register are “summary bits” for registers at a lower level.
There are no error messages associated with these bits; they exist only as
status bits, which can be read with a STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration?
event query or a STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? query.
Note that these summary bits summarize the state and history of the event
registers at the lower level. This is true even for bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration condition register. This means that:
— The summary bits read by the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? query are true if any
event bits are set in any of the :CALibration sub-registers :SKIPped,
:EXTended:NEEDed or :EXTended:FAILure.
— The summary bits read by the STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration?
event query are true if any event bit has undergone a false-to-true
transition with the PTRansition filter set, or a true-to-false transition with
the NTRansition filter set, in any of the :CALibration sub-registers :SKIPped,
:EXTended:NEEDed or :EXTended:FAILure.

116
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Thus, the summary bits cannot be used to determine the current state of a
lower level condition bit; only the state and history of the lower level event bits.
This register is itself summarized as bit 8 of the STATus:QUEStionable
register, as described in the section “Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error
Summaries” on page 133.

Err# Bit in status Message Error or More Information

register Warning

36 0 unused

38 1 unused

40 2 TG Alignment Failure E

42 3 RF Alignment Failure E

44 4 IF Alignment Failure E

46 5 LO Alignment Failure E

48 6 ADC Alignment Failure E

50 7 FM Demod Alignment Failure E

52 8 Extended Align Needed status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
Summary only STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXT
ended:NEEDed sub-register.

54 9 Extended Align Failure status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
Summary only STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXT
ended:FAILure sub-register.

56 10 unused

58 11 Align Skipped Sum Summary status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:SKIP
ped sub-register.

60 12 Align Now, RF required E

62 13 unused

64 14 Align Now, All required E In PSA, this was error 64

117
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Errors 65 to 92, Calibration Needed (Extended)

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:NEEDed sub-register.
The second column in the table below shows the corresponding bit in that
register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 72 indicates that the “Input Attenuation not calibrated”
condition has been detected, and error 1072 indicates that failure has been
cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 8 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration register, as described in the section
“Condition Errors 36 to 64, Calibration Needed or Failed” on page 116.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

65 0 unused

66 1 Align 9kHz–30MHz required E An EMI conducted frequency range

alignment is needed.

68 2 Align 30MHz–1GHz required E An EMI radiated frequency range

alignment is needed.

72 4 Input Attenuation not E Corrected measurements have been

calibrated requested and the required RF front-end
setting of x dB has not been calibrated.

74 5 unused

76 6 unused

78 7 unused

80 8 unused

82 9 unused

84 10 unused

86 11 unused

88 12 unused

90 13 unused

92 14 unused

118
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Errors 67 to 95, Calibration Failure (Extended)

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure sub-register.
The second column in the table shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 71 indicates that the Characterize Preselector Failure has
been detected, error 1071 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 9 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration register, as described in the section
“Condition Errors 36 to 64, Calibration Needed or Failed” on page 116.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

67 0 Align 9kHz to 30MHz W In PSA, this was error 13749

failed

69 1 Align 30MHz to 1GHz W In PSA, this was error 13751

failed

71 2 Characterize Preselector W The preselector characterization routine failed.

failure

73 3 unused

75 4 unused

77 5 unused

79 6 unused

81 7 unused

83 8 unused

85 9 unused

87 10 unused

89 11 unused

91 12 unused

93 13 unused

95 14 unused

119
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Errors 101 to 199, Measurement Integrity

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register. The second column in the table
shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 141 indicates an Input Overload condition has been
detected, error 1129 indicates that failure has been cleared.
Two bits in this register are “summary bits” for registers at a lower level. There
are no error messages associated with these bits; they exist only as status bits,
which can be read with a STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity? event query
or a STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? query.
Note that these summary bits summarize the state and history of the event
registers at the lower level. This is true even for bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity condition register. This means that:
— The summary bits read by the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:CONDition? query are true if any
event bits are set in any of the :INTegrity sub-registers :SIGNal or
:UNCalibrated.
— The summary bits read by the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity? event
query are true if any event bit has undergone a false-to-true transition with
the PTRansition filter set, or a true-to-false transition with the NTRansition
filter set, in any of the :INTegrity sub-registers :SIGNal or :UNCalibrated
Thus, the summary bits cannot be used to determine the current state of a
lower level condition bit; only the state and history of the lower level event bits.
This register is itself summarized as bit 9 of the STATus:QUEStionable register,
as described in the section “Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries” on
page 133.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

133 0 Signal Summary status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal
sub-register.

135 1 No Result E

135 1 No Result;Turn on MCE E To calculate Timing and Phase results in the

Code Domain Power view of Mod Accuracy, the
"Multi Channel Estimator" must be set to ON.
Otherwise these results are invalid.

120
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

135 1 No Result; Meas invalid E The current measurement does not support I/Q
with I/Q inputs input; switch to the RF or another input or
select a different measurement

137 2 unused

139 3 Uncalibrated Summary status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated
sub-register.

141 4 Input Overload Ea

141 4 Input Overload;ADC over Ea The signal at the input to the IF section is too
range high. You should increase the attenuation or
lower the signal level.

141 4 Input Overload;I/Q ADC over Ea The I or Q input exceeds the ADC upper limit.
range

141 4 Input Overload;I/Q Voltage Ea The input voltage on the I or Q channel

over range exceeds the channel limit. In differential mode
the over voltage may occur without causing an
ADC overload, for example, if I is at +5.01 V and
I-bar is at +5.0 the ADC will be in range but
both I and I-bar will exceed the voltage limit.

141 4 Input Overload; RF Ea The level at the input of the MXE RF

Preselector Overload Preselector has exceeded tolerances, reduce
the input level

143 5 unused

145 6 unused

147 7 Insufficient Data E

147 7 Insufficient Data; Incr. E There is insufficient acquisition data to provide

Demod Time accurate metrics. You should increase the
Demod Time to acquire enough data.

147 7 Insufficient Data; E A measurement was attempted with List

frequency list empty frequency mode or a SCPI query of the
frequency list table was made and the
frequency list table is empty.

147 7 Insufficient Data; ENR E A measurement was attempted or a SCPI query

table empty of an ENR table was made and there were no
entries in the relevant ENR table (Common,
Meas or Cal).

147 7 Insufficient Data; Loss E A measurement is attempted or a SCPI query

table empty of a before or after loss table is made and there
are no entries in the relevant loss table

121
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

149 8 Meas Error

151 9 Memory Error E

151 9 Memory Error;Shorten E A shortage of free memory related to longer

capture interval capture intervals has occurred. The
measurement is aborted and all results return
invalid values

153 10 I/O Error E

153 10 I/O Error; Ext Source needs E No IP address entered for external source and
IP Addr external LO control is ON.

155 11 Trig Error E

157 12 Invalid Data Status bit This is the “invalid data indicator”, same as the
only “*” in the upper right corner of the screen. It
means that the on-screen annotation does not
match the on-screen data, usually because a
measurement is pending after a settings
change. There is no message in the status line
and nothing in the history queue, but there IS
an on-screen indication and a status bit.

159 13 Settings Alert W

159 13 Settings Alert;LO may W If the sweep type is Swept, the start frequency
overload IF of the instrument is less than 10 MHz, and you
put Swept IF Gain in Manual High, then a
warning condition is generated and remains in
effect as long as this condition exists.
In some older analyzers this was error 1109.

159 13 Settings Alert; Diff probe W The attenuation values of the two probes on
mismatch; <I|Q|I,Q> the I and/or Q channels differ by too much for a
valid differential reading.

159 13 Settings Alert; Acquisition W In the Analog Demod mode, certain extreme
truncated settings combinations will result in a required
acquisition length in excess of the capacity of
the analyzer. Increase the AF Spectrum RBW
or the RF Spectrum RBW, decrease the
Channel BW, and/or decrease the Demod
Waveform Sweep Time.

122
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

159 13 Settings Alert; Analog Out W The user has manually set the Analog Output
settings conflict under the Input/Output menu to a setting that
conflicts with the current measurement. There
will be no output on the Analog Out port until
this conflict is resolved. In most cases, simply
set Analog Out to Auto for the optimal setting.

159 13 Settings Alert;I/Q W The impedance, differential, or attenuation

mismatch:<Differential|Inpu settings for the I and Q channels do not match.
t Z|Attenuation> For valid I+jQ measurements the impedance
and differential settings should be the same on
both channels and the attenuation should
match within 1 dB

159 13 Settings Alert;Parm/data W For Bluetooth, the detected parameters did

mismatch not match the data

159 13 Settings Alert; Src pwr W You have selected a Power Sweep range that
ramp>ALC range exceeds the ability of the external Source to
follow without changing mechanical
attenuation. Lower the Power Sweep range.

159 13 Settings Alert; Sweep Rate W The auto coupled sweep time exceeds the
Unavailable maximum allowed. Therefore, full amplitude
accuracy cannot be attained. Please increase
the RBW or reduce the span.

159 13 Settings Alert; Span:RBW W The chosen large ratio of span to RBW is not
Ratio too big possible. Please reduce the span or increase
the RBW and/or FFT Width.

161 14 Setting Modified E

161 14 Setting Modified; Filter E The filter you have selected is larger than the
not applied sampling frequency. You should select a
different filter.

a. The Input Overload error is not reported to the SCPI queue unless the :SYSTem:ERRor:OVERload ON
command has been issued, however it always sets the status bit. For details of the :SYS-
Tem:ERRor:OVERload command, see any X-Series User’s & Programmer’s Reference.

Condition Errors 201 to 299, Signal Integrity

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:SIGNal sub-register. The second
column in the table shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.

123
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

For example, error 207 indicates a Burst Not Found condition has been
detected, error 1207 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 0 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register, as described in the section
“Condition Errors 101 to 199, Measurement Integrity” on page 120.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

203 0 unused E

205 1 unused E

207 2 Burst Not Found E The burst signal cannot be detected because of
inappropriate parameter settings or incorrect signal.
An in appropriate parameter setting could cause the
signal to be partially, rather than fully, on the display,
Burst Search Threshold and/or Burst Search Length
may need to be adjusted.
An incorrect signal could have either insufficient power,
the rising or falling edges cannot be detected, or the
burst is less than 126 microseconds.
Carrier signal is not actually bursted.
W-CDMA: Either the signal being analyzed has
insufficient power, the rising or falling edges cannot be
detected, or the burst is less than 126 microseconds.
W-CDMA: Cannot synchronize measurement with
PRACH channel for Power Control measurement,
because the signal cannot be found. Make sure PRACH
is present in the W-CDMA uplink signal, and that the
preamble signature and scramble code are set
correctly.
GSM: Data was acquired but a GSM burst was not
found, with the timeslot mode disabled.
NADC, PDC: A valid burst is not found when the Device
is MS.
1xEV-DO: Data was acquired but a 1xEV burst was not
found, with the timeslot mode disabled.
Bluetooth: The burst that has been found does not
correspond to the currently selected Bluetooth packet
type (the burst length may be too short).
WLAN: The instrument cannot find a valid WLAN burst.
You may need to extend the search length.
In PSA, this error was reported as one of the following
error numbers: 10772, 13104, 10160, 10286, 10420,
10454, 10614, 10904, 10928, 13074, 10287

124
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

207 2 Burst not E The selected timeslot does not contain the expected
found;with burst.
selected Time
Slot

209 3 Timing Error E

209 3 Timing Error:No E The pilot burst used for time reference is not active.
time ref pilot
burst

211 4 Carrier(s) E In PSA, this error was reported as one of the following
incorrect or error numbers: 10165, 10173, 10178, 10419, 10421,
missing 10535, 10560, 10642, 10648, 10650, 10960

213 5 Freq Out of Range E

213 5 Freq Out of E One or more system input frequencies are out of range.
Range; System If using a frequency list, check that all entries are valid
input (IF) for current measurement mode.

213 5 Freq Out of E One or more external LO frequencies are out of range.
Range; External Check that the LO frequency limits are set correctly and
LO check the entered measurement frequencies and
measurement mode.

215 6 Sync Error E W-CDMA: Cannot sync DPCCH pilot.

Cannot synchronize measurement with DPCCH pilot for
Power Control measurement, because the pilot signal
cannot be found. Make sure DPCCH is present in the
W-CDMA uplink signal, and that the slot format and
scramble code are set correctly.

215 6 Sync Error;No E There is no Pilot burst detected.

pilot burst

215 6 Sync Error;Sync E Synchronization code is not found in the measured time
code not found slot.

215 6 Sync Error;No E The pilot burst used for frequency reference is not
freq ref pilot active.
burst

215 6 Sync E Failed to find the uplink slot, which caused the
Error;Midamble synchronization with the Midamble to fail.
sync fail

215 6 Sync E Burst type is "Data" or "Preamble" and the

Error;Preamble measurement cannot find a Preamble
length zero

125
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

217 7 Demod Error E This error is normally generated because of one of the
following reasons:

1. There is no carrier signal.

2. Walsh channels other than the pilot are
active.
3. There is some other modulation problem
that will prevent the measurement from
being made.
This problem must be corrected before the
measurement can continue.
cdma 2000 & W-CDMA: Cannot correlate to the input
signal and no active channel is found. (from composite
EVM measurement) An active channel must meet the
default threshold criteria that it is within 20 dB of the
highest power code channel. The threshold can be
changed using the active set threshold function in the
Meas Setup menu.
cdmaOne: A correlation failure with the pilot CDMA
channel occurred during synchronous demodulation.
1xEV-DO: Cannot correlate to the input signal and no
active channel is found. (from composite EVM
measurement) An active channel must meet the default
threshold criteria that it is within 20 dB of the highest
power code channel. The threshold can be changed
using the active set threshold function in the Meas
Setup menu.
In PSA, this error was reported as one of the following
error numbers: 10872, 10962, 13070, 10228, 10768

217 7 Demod Error;Can’t E Cannot correlate to the input signal and no active
correlate channel is found. (from composite EVM measurement)
An active channel must meet the default threshold
criteria that it is within 20 dB of the highest power code
channel. The threshold can be changed using the active
set threshold function in the Meas Setup menu.

217 7 Demod Error;Data E There are not enough input I/Q pairs for the
interval too measurement calculation. This may be caused by an
short incorrect data capture.

217 7 Demod Error;No E There is no active channel detected.

active channel

217 7 Demod Error;Not E There is no active slot detected.

an active slot

126
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

217 7 Demod Error;No E No sub-frame or only part of one sub-frame is detected.

full subframe
found

217 7 Demod Error;Muxed E Multiplexed Data Demod Bits are not generated even
bits not found though Data channel is selected, because all 16 data
code channels are not active

217 7 Demod Error;Acq E For Bluetooth, the detected packet type doesn’t
Time too short match the captured packet type because the payload
start, end or data could not be found.

219 8 Signal Too Noisy E NADC & PDC: The valid EVM measurement cannot be
performed, because the input signal is too noisy.
GSM & EDGE: In a GSM measurement, indicates that a
burst could not be found in a signal that appears noisy.
In PSA, this error was reported as one of the following
error numbers: 10702, 10824, 10906, 10930, 13024,
10626, 111

221 9 Slot Error E

221 9 Slot error;No E No valid active slot found in captured data, or no active
active slot found slot found in captured interval. Synchronization may
succeed and pilot found when this message is issued,
but no results are included in peak/average calculation.

221 9 Slot Error; No E No valid idle slot found in captured data, or no idle slot
idle slot found found in captured interval. Synchronization may
succeed and pilot found when this message is issued,
but no results are included in peak/average calculation.

223 10 unused E

225 11 unused E

227 12 unused E

229 13 unused E

231 14 unused E

Condition Errors 301 to 399, Uncalibrated Integrity

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:UNCalibrated sub-register. The
second column in the table shows the corresponding bit in that register.

127
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 301 indicates a Meas Uncal condition has been detected,
error 1301 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 3 of the
STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register, as described in the section
“Condition Errors 101 to 199, Measurement Integrity” on page 120.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

301 0 Meas Uncal W

303 1 Signal ID on W

305 2 No Long Code Phase W

307 3 AC coupled: Accy W AC input coupling will function at lower

unspec’d <10 MHz frequencies, but the performance is not specified
below 10 MHz.

309 4 User cal W

128
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

309 4 User Cal; Cal E,W The existing user cal has been invalidated for one
invalidated of the following reasons:
Frequency: Setting the frequency outside the
current valid user cal set (for example: If the
current sweep range is 2 to 3GHz, then setting
the start frequency to 1.9 GHz will invalidate the
current user cal. Other frequency changes that
will invalidate the user cal are:

• If the cal was performed at a fixed

frequency and you change this
frequency.
• If you are in "Freq List" mode and you
change it to extend beyond the current
user cal range. In this case you will see
an error message.
DUT Type: If the DUT Type parameter changes,
causing the measurement frequencies to be
pushed outside the current cal.
Attenuation: If an attenuation setting is selected
but has not been calibrated.
Preamp: If set to condition different from current
cal settings, for example: if calibrated with the
preamp on, turning it off will invalidate the cal.
Points: Changing the number of measured
frequency points can make the stored preselector
offsets become inaccurate and hence invalidate
the calibration. This occurs when the following
conditions exist:

• A successful calibration has been

performed.
• Some measured freq points are > 3.6
GHz.
• The new points > 3.6 GHz are located
more than 50 MHz away from the
current calibration points.

309 4 User Cal; Freq E The existing user cal has been invalidated
outside cal range because the current measurement frequencies lie
partially or wholly outside the range of
frequencies used for user-cal. (UNCAL)

309 4 User Cal; Cal will be W The measurement frequency range has been
interpolated changed such that it is a subset of the calibrated
range. (~CAL)

129
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

309 4 User Cal; Adjusted W The measurement RBW has been changed since
for new RBW the last calibration (~CAL)

311 5 Calibration W

311 5 Calibration; ENR W One or more calibration or measurement

table extrapolated frequency points exceed the currently loaded Cal
or Meas ENR Table frequency ranges. The
corresponding ENR table’s lowest frequency ENR
value will be re-used for frequencies less than the
table range, and the highest frequency ENR value
will be re-used for frequencies greater than the
table range.
(~ENR)

311 5 Calibration; No ENR W No ENR Data (ENR)

data present

313 6 Source Uncal W

313 6 Source Uncal;adj W While using a Tracking Source, you must make
Start Freq or RBW sure the Start Frequency is high enough to avoid
capturing LO feedthrough in the trace. This
depends on both Start Freq and RBW. If you get
this message, increase the Start Freq or narrow
the RBW.

315 7 Preamp: Accy unspec’d W Preamp will function at lower frequencies, but the
<XX kHz performance is not specified below XX kHz (XX is
model number specific).

317 8 unused W

319 9 unused W

321 10 unused W

323 11 unused W

325 12 unused W

327 13 unused W

329 14 unused W

130
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Errors 401 to 499, Power

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:POWer register. The second column in the table
shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 409 indicates a 50 MHz Oscillator Unleveled condition has
been detected, error 1409 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 3 of the STATus:QUEStionable register, as
described in the section “Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries” on
page 133.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

401 0 RPP Tripped W (not currently in use)

403 1 Source Unleveled W

405 2 Source LO Unleveled E (not currently in use)

407 3 LO Unleveled E (not currently in use)

409 4 unused

411 5 unused

413 6 unused

415 7 unused

417 8 unused

419 9 unused

421 10 unused

423 11 unused

425 12 unused

427 13 unused

429 14 unused

Condition Errors 501 to 599, Frequency

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency register (s. The second column in the
table shows the corresponding bit in that register.

131
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 503 indicates a Frequency Reference Unlocked condition
has been detected, error 1503 indicates that failure has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 5 of the STATus:QUEStionable register, as
described in the section “Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries” on
page 133.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

501 0 Source Synth Unlocked E

503 1 Frequency Reference E

Unlocked

505 2 2nd LO Unlocked E

507 3 unused

509 4 LO Unlocked E

511 5 unused

513 6 IF Synthesizer Unlocked E

515 7 Calibration Oscillator E

Unlocked

517 8 unused

519 9 Demodulation E

521 10 Ref missing or out of E

range

521 10 Ref missing or out of E The external frequency reference signal is

range; External missing or is not within the proper
amplitude range.
In PSA, this error was reported as error
622

521 10 Ref missing or out of E The pulse reference signal is missing or is

range; Pulse not within the correct amplitude range.

523 11 unused

525 12 unused

527 13 unused

529 14 unused

132
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the STATus:QUEStionable
register, read with a STATus:QUEStionable? event query or a
STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? query.
The second column in the table shows the corresponding bit in the status
register. These bits do not have any corresponding error messages, although
error numbers have been reserved for them as seen in the Err# column; they
are status bits only.
The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable register are “summary bits” for
registers at a lower level. Note that these summary bits summarize the state
and history of the event registers at the lower level. This is true even for bits in
the STATus:QUEStionable condition register. This means that:
— The summary bits read by the STATus:QUEStionable: CONDition?
query are true if any event bits are set in any of the :QUEStionable
sub-registers :POWer, :TEMPerature, FREQuency, CALibration or :INTegrity.
— The summary bits read by the STATus:QUEStionable? event query are
true if any event bit has undergone a false-to-true transition with the
PTRansition filter set, or a true-to-false transition with the NTRansition filter
set, in any of the :QUEStionable sub-registers :POWer, :TEMPerature,
FREQuency, CALibration or :INTegrity.
Thus, the summary bits cannot be used to determine the current state of a
lower level condition bit; only the state and history of the lower level event bits.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

601 0 unused

603 1 unused

605 2 unused

607 3 Power status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:POWer sub-register.

609 4 Temperature status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature sub-register.

611 5 Frequency status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:FREQuency sub-register.

613 6 unused

615 7 unused

617 8 Calibration status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration sub-register.

133
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

619 9 Integrity status bit This bit is the summary bit for the
only STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity sub-register.

621 10 unused

623 11 unused

625 12 unused

627 13 unused

629 14 unused

Condition Errors 701 to 799, Operation

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the STATus:OPERation
register, which can be read with a STATus:OPERation? event query or a
STATus:OPERation:CONDition? query.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated.
For example, error 721 indicates that the DC Coupled condition has been
detected; error 1721 indicates that condition has been cleared.
Unless otherwise noted in the Error or Warning column below, these are status
bits only, with no corresponding error message or number

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

701 0 Calibrating status bit

only

703 1 Settling status bit

only

705 2 unused

707 3 Sweeping status bit

only

709 4 Measuring status bit

only

711 5 Waiting for Trigger status bit

only

713 6 Waiting for Arm status bit

only

134
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

715 7 unused

717 8 Paused status bit

only

719 9 Source Sweeping status bit The “Source Sweeping” bit is used to indicate
only various conditions, depending on the Mode of
operation:
In the List Sequencer mode, it is used to indicate
that the sequencer is running
In the EMI Receiver mode, it is used to indicate
that scan results are available from the Frequency
Scan measurement

721 10 DC Coupled W

723 11 unused

725 12 Source Waiting for status bit

Trigger only

727 13 unused

729 14 unused

Condition Errors 801 to 899, Temperature

This series of errors corresponds to the bits in the
STATus:QUEStionable:TEMPerature register. The second column in the
table shows the corresponding bit in that register.
An event with the error number shown in the table means the condition has
been detected. When the condition is cleared, an event with the error number
plus 1000 is generated. These error numbers can be viewed in the Show Errors
screen, along with the DETECTED and CLEARED indicators.
For example, error 801 indicates that the Ref Osc Oven Cold condition has
been detected; error 1801 indicates that condition has been cleared.
This register is summarized as bit 4 of the STATus:QUEStionable register, as
described in the section “Condition Errors 601 to 699, Error Summaries” on
page 133.

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

801 0 Reference Oscillator Oven W (not currently in use)

Cold

135
 Instrument Messages
Condition Messages

Err# Bit in Message Error or More Information

status Warning
register

803 1 unused

805 2 unused

807 3 unused

809 4 unused

811 5 unused

813 6 unused

815 7 unused

817 8 unused

819 9 unused

821 10 unused

823 11 unused

825 12 unused

827 13 unused

829 14 unused

136
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

4 RF Section Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is found in this chapter:
1. Theory of operation of the RF section
2. Isolating the cause of an hardware problem by verifying the functionality
of assemblies in the RF section signal path.

Each section describes how the assembly works and gives information to
help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description covers the purpose
of the assembly, describes the main components, and lists external
connections to the assembly.

This following descriptions are found in this chapter:

RF Section Description on page 138
Troubleshooting on page 146
Quick Check to Verify the Low Band Signal Path on page 146
Troubleshooting a Low Band Problem on page 150
Quick Check to Verify High Band RF Path #1 on page 173
Troubleshooting a High Band Problem on page 177
High Band Preamp (Option P08, P13, P26) on page 202
High Band Mixing Equations on page 202
Microwave Preselector Bypass (Option MPB) on page 203

137
 RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

RF Section Description

Purpose
This section covers only those optional frequency ranges listed below for the
N9020A, Signal Analyzer.
— Option 503, 3.6 GHz Frequency Range
— Option 508, 8.4 GHz Frequency Range
— Option 513, 13.6 GHz Frequency Range
— Option 526, 26.5 GHz Frequency Range
The RF input signal can be routed through three different front end signal
paths. These various paths are switched in and out based on where the signal
analyzer center frequency is tuned.
1. Low band RF path is used when the input frequency is ≤ 3600 MHz
2. High band RF path #1 is used when the input frequency is > 3.6 GHz to
13.6 GHz
3. High band RF path #2 is used when the input frequency is > 13.6 GHz to
26.5 GHz
The RF section is designed to convert RF input signals to an intermediate
frequency (IF) that is present at the RF output of the A13 Front End assembly.
This IF depends on installed options and the IF path selected. This chapter will
assume the default operation in Spectrum Analyzer mode. Therefore, the IF will
be 322.5 MHz.

IF Path IF Mode

10 MHz (standard) 322.5 MHz Spectrum Analyzer or

IQ Analyzer

25 MHz (Option B25) 322.5 MHz IQ Analyzer

40 MHz (Option B40) 250 MHz IQ Analyzer

138
RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

The RF section is comprised of the following major assemblies:

— A9 Input Attenuator A
— A10 Input Attenuator B
— A11 Low Band Switch Assembly
— A12 YTF Preselector
— A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly
— A13 RF Front End Assembly
— A15 Front End Control Assembly
— SW1 and SW2 - Option MPB Microwave Preselector Bypass

SW1 and SW2 and their associated cables are the microwave preselector
bypass hardware. This hardware is present in analyzers containing any or
all of the following three options:
— MPB, Microwave Preselector Bypass
— B40, 40 MHz Analysis Bandwidth
— DP2, Digital Signal Processing & 2 GB Capture Memory
However, if there is no license for Option MPB, the hardware will default to
the non-bypassed path (high band microwave signals will be routed
through the A12 YTF Preselector). If a license for Option MPB is present, it
will be possible to bypass the A12 YTF Preselector.

139
RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

1. RF input frequencies < 3600 MHz route through the low band path. Refer
to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams” for details.
The RF input signal level can be optimized by either Input Attenuator A or
Input Attenuator B. The low band switch is biased in such a way that the
signal is routed to the input of the A13 RF Front End assembly. There are
(3) different signal paths on the input of the RF Front End assembly that
the signal can be routed through depending on installed options and front
panel settings.
— Electronic Attenuator path, 0-24 dB (Option EA3)
— Low Band Preamplifier path, 20 dB nominal gain (Option P03)
— Direct to Mixer #1

The RF input signal can route through the Electronic Attenuator section or
the Preamplifier, but not both. All RF input frequencies < 3600 MHz go to
Mixer #1.

The RF input signal is then mixed with the 1st L.O. from the A14 L.O.
Synthesizer assembly in Mixer #1 to a 1st intermediate frequency of
5122.5 MHz. Since the RF input signal is <3600 MHz for low band, this RF
input signal is upconverted in Mixer #1 to the 1st I.F. This 1st I.F. signal is
then downconverted in Mixer #2 using the 4800 MHz 2nd L.O. generated
on the A16 Reference assembly to a 2nd intermediate frequency of 322.5
MHz (5122.5 MHz (1st I.F.) − 4800 MHz (2nd L.O.)). The 2nd I.F. output is
at A13J7 on the A13 RF Front End Assembly. This signal path is used for all
frequency range options when the RF input frequencies are < 3600 MHz.
The control voltages and biasing for these assemblies come from the A15
Front End Control assembly.
2. RF input frequencies from 3.6 GHz to 13.6 GHz go through high band path
#1. Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams” for details.
This signal level can be optimized by either Input Attenuator A or Input
Attenuator B. The signal is then routed to the low band switch, which will
route the signal to the A12 YTF Preselector.
The signal then routes to the A12 YTF Preselector before going to the A13
RF Front End Assembly. The input switch in the RF Front End Assembly
routes the RF input signal to Mixer #2. The RF input signal is then mixed
with the 1st L.O. from the A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly in Mixer #2 to a
1st intermediate frequency of 322.5 MHz. The 322.5 MHz I.F. output is at
A13J7 of the RF Front End Assembly. This is the signal path for Option
508, 8.4 GHz Frequency Range, Option 513, 13.6 GHz Frequency Range,
and Option 526, 26.5 GHz Frequency Range (up to 13.6 GHz). The control
voltages and biasing for these assemblies come from the A15 Front End
Control Assembly.

140
RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

3. RF input frequencies from 13.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz go through high band
path #2. Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams” for details.
This signal level can be optimized by either Input Attenuator A or Input
Attenuator B. The signal is then routed to the low band switch, which will
route the signal to the A12 YTF Preselector.
The low band switch is biased by the A15 Front End Control Assembly. The
signal then routes to the A12 YTF Preselector before going to the A13 RF
Front End Assembly. The input switch in the RF Front End Assembly routes
the RF input signal to Mixer #3. The RF input signal is then mixed with the
1st L.O. from the A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly in Mixer #3 to a 1st
intermediate frequency of 322.5 MHz. The LO is doubled at tuned
frequencies above 17 GHz. The 322.5 MHz I.F. output is at A13J7 of the RF
Front End Assembly. This is the signal path for Option 526, 26.5 GHz
Frequency Range (for frequencies ≥13.6 GHz). The control voltages and
biasing for these assemblies come from the A15 Front End Control
Assembly.

141
 RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

RF Section Theory of Operation

A9 Input Attenuator A
This assembly has two 2 dB attenuator sections, a DC block and a cal signal
input port. With the DC block switched in (AC coupled mode), the low end
minimum frequency range increases from 20 Hz to 10 MHz due to capacitive
effects.

A10 Input Attenuator B

This assembly has a total of 66 dB of attenuation to control the RF level going
to the mixer assemblies in the A13 RF Front End Assembly. There is a 6 dB, 10
dB, 20 dB, and 30 dB section in the A10 assembly. Total input attenuation with
the A9 and the A10 combined is 70 dB in 2 dB steps.

A11 Low Band Switch

This assembly operates across the entire frequency range of the analyzer. The
switch has 3 main functions:
— Switch RF input frequencies from 20 Hz to 3.59 GHz RF Output to A13 RF
Front End Assembly.
— Switch RF input frequencies from 3.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz Microwave RF
Output to A12, YTF Preselector.
— Optional high band preamplifier, which has a typical gain of 30 dB and a
noise figure from 9-12 dB up to 18 GHz.

A12 YTF Preselector

The YTF Preselector is used for input frequencies greater than 3.6 GHz. Signals
less than 3.6 GHz bypass the YTF assembly and are routed directly to the A13
RF Front End Assembly. The YTF Preselector is a YIG tunable bandpass filter
whose main purpose is to filter out unwanted spurious or image response
signals. When the YTF is calibrated, the tunable bandpass will track the RF
input signal. The YTF Preselector has a 3 dB bandwidth greater than 40 MHz
and an insertion loss of ~ 6.5 dB.
The preselector requires centering for optimum amplitude accuracy. The Auto
Align routine will perform a rough centering during the preselector two-point
tuning algorithm. However, when troubleshooting, press Amplitude,
Preselector Center to manually center the preselector.
The YTF Preselector is not present in most analyzers with Option 503, 3.6 GHz
frequency range.

142
 RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

The L.O. Synthesizer Assembly provides the 1st L.O. power that is required for
the A13 RF Front End Assembly. The 1st L.O. has a frequency range from 3.80
to 8.70 GHz. Harmonics of the 1st L.O. are used to down convert RF input
signals up to 26.5 GHz. Table 4-1 provides some examples of how the L.O. is
multiplied for the given center frequency of the analyzer and which high band
mixer is being used on the A13 RF Front End assembly. The output power is
+13 to +18 dBm. In order to maximize the conversion efficiency, sufficient L.O.
power must be supplied to the mixer in the A13 RF Front End Assembly from
this assembly.
Table 4-1 X-Series Signal Analyzers

Analyzer 1st L.O. Desired 1st L.O. Harmonic

Center Frequencya @ A14J740 @ Mixer 2 or 3

5 GHz 5.3225 GHz 5.3225 GHzb

10 GHz 5.16125 GHz 10.3225 GHzb

13.5 GHz 6.91125 GHz 13.8225 GHzb

14.5 GHz 7.41125 GHz 14.8225 GHzc

22 GHz 5.5806250 GHz 22.3225 GHzc

a. Set span to Zero Span to measure 1st L.O.

b. A13 Mixer 2 (refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams.”)
c. A13 Mixer 3 (refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams.”)

143
 RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

A13 RF Front End Assembly

This assembly is a self-contained microcircuit that is repaired at the assembly
level. See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 A13 RF Front End Assembly View from Front Panel

(Option EXM only)

This assembly contains the following circuits:

— Input Low-pass filter (RF input signals < 3.6 GHz)
— Low Band Limiter
— Optional Electronic Attenuator (0-24 dB attenuation control)
— Optional Low Band Preamplifier
— RF Mixer #1 (RF input signals < 3.6 GHz)
— 1st L.O. Sub-system (3.8 GHz to 8.7 GHz)
— 1st I.F. Amplifier (5122.5 MHz)
— I.F. Band pass filter (5122.5 MHz)
— I.F. Low-pass filter (5122.5 MHz)
— Mixer #2 (RF input signals 3.6 GHz to 13.599 GHz)
— Microwave Input Amplifier
— Mixer #3 (RF input signals 13.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz)
— 2nd I.F. Amplifier (322.5 MHz)
— Microwave L.O. Sub-system (3.8 GHz to 8.7 GHz)
— L.O. Doubler

144
 RF Section Troubleshooting
RF Section Description

— External Mixing Diplexer (units with Option EXM only)

Table 4-2 A13 RF Front End Signals

Signal Name Description From To

RF Input 20 Hz to 3.59 GHz RF Input A11J2, Low Band Switch A13J2

Microwave Input 3.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz YTF Output or SW1 A13J9
U-wave RF Input

E-cal Input Cal Signal Port A16J705, Ref. Bd A13J6

1st L.O. Input 3.8225 to 8.7225 GHz 1st L.O. A14J40, Synth. Bd A13J4

2nd L.O. Input 4.8 GHz 2nd L.O. A16J702, Ref Bd A13J1

I.F. Output 322.5 MHz I.F. Signal A13J7 A2J100, AIF or

A15J902, EFEC

To Band Pass Filter Filter Port, 1st I.F. A13J10 5.1225 GHz Cavity
Amplifier Output Input

From Band Pass Filter Filter Port, 2nd Mixer Input 5.1225 GHz Cavity Output A13J11

Front End Control Assembly

Provides the correct biasing and switch control logic to the following RF
assemblies:
— Input Attenuator A
— Input Attenuator B
— Low Band Switch
— YTF Preselector (Input signals > 3.6 GHz)
— RF Front End Assembly
— (Optional) High Band Preamplifier
— (Optional) Low Band Preamplifier
— (Optional) Electronic Attenuator (0-24 dB)
— (Optional) Microwave Preselector Bypass

Refer to Chapter 5, “Front End Control Troubleshooting.” for detailed

descriptions & troubleshooting procedures

145
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Quick Check to Verify the Low Band Signal Path

The analyzer has an internal 50 MHz amplitude reference signal that is used to
verify the low band path. Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams” for details.
Equipment needed:
Functioning Spectrum Analyzer
DVM
Cables & Connectors

To perform the following checks, it will be necessary to remove the outer

cover and the top brace. See Chapter 14 for removal procedures.

Turn the analyzer on and allow it to complete its full boot up process to
Spectrum Analyzer mode. Use the internal 50 MHz, −25 dBm calibrator signal
as a reference for troubleshooting by pressing Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF
Calibrator, 50 MHz on the analyzer. Now press FREQ (Channel), 50 MHz,
SPAN (X Scale), 1 MHz, Peak Search. The 50 MHz reference signal should
measure 50 MHz @ −25 dBm ± 2 dB on the analyzer display. If the power level
is within tolerance, the low band path is functioning correctly at 50 MHz. To
verify the high band path go to “Quick Check to Verify High Band RF Path #1”
on page 173.
If the power level is not within tolerance, press SPAN (X Scale), Zero Span,
AMPTD (Y Scale), Attenuation, 10 dB.

IMPORTANT Turn off auto align by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.

146
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Disconnect the W15 or W36 cable from A13J7 on the RF Front End Assembly
(1) 322.5 MHz output. See Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 W15 or W36 Location

147
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Connect A13J7 output to a functioning spectrum analyzer and verify the

322.5 MHz intermediate frequency is measuring −28.5 ± 3 dB using the same
analyzer settings as in Figure 4-3.

Figure 4-3 322.5 MHz Intermediate Frequency

If this power level is correct the RF assembly from the A9 50 MHz Reference
signal input port to A13J7, 322.5 MHz I.F. Output is operating correctly using a
50 MHz input calibrator signal. Reconnect the W15 or W36 cable to A13J7.

Flatness issues or power level problems at other input frequencies below

3600 MHz may exist. This type of problem can be diagnosed using the
suspect RF input frequency.

148
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If this power level is incorrect, the following assemblies need to be verified in

the order listed using the 50 MHz internal calibrator signal. Be sure the 50 MHz
calibrator is turned on Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz when verifying the
performance.
1. A16 Reference Assembly
2. A14 L.O. Synthesizer
3. A15 Front End Control Assembly
4. A9 Input Attenuator A
5. A10 Input Attenuator B
6. A11 Low Band Switch
7. A12 YTF Preselector
8. A13 RF Front End Assembly

In order to gain access to the front end components, remove the side
chassis (1) by removing the 10 screws (2). Refer to Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-4 Remove the Side Chassis

149
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting a Low Band Problem

1. Reference Assembly Verification
Remove cable W19 from A9 Input Attenuator A (1) and measure the 50 MHz
calibrator signal on the cable end with a functioning Spectrum Analyzer. Refer
to Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 W19 Location

150
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If the Reference assembly calibrator is functioning properly the 50 MHz

calibrator signal will measure 50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dB. See Figure 4-6. If
this level is incorrect, the Reference assembly is most likely defective.
Reconnect W19 at A9 Input Attenuator A.

Figure 4-6 50 MHz Calibrator Signal

151
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

2. L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Verification

Press the following keys on the analyzer:
FREQ (Channel), 1 GHz
SPAN (X Scale)
Zero Span
Refer to Figure 4-7. Disconnect cable W4 at A14J740 of the L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly (1).

Figure 4-7 W4 and W6 Location

152
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Connect the functioning Spectrum Analyzer and appropriate high frequency

cable and connector to A14J740. Adjust the functioning Spectrum Analyzer to
measure a signal at 6122.5 MHz at +16 dBm ± 4 dB as seen in Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Measure 1st L.O.

153
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If this power level is incorrect remove W6 at A14J200. Refer to Figure 4-7.

Adjust the functioning spectrum analyzer to measure a signal at 4.800 GHz at
+4.5 dBm ± 2 dB. See Figure 4-9.

Figure 4-9 4.800 GHz Signal at A14J200

If this power level is incorrect, the most probable cause is the A16 Reference
Assembly. If this level is correct and yet the signal previously measured at
A14J740 is incorrect, the most probable cause is the A14 L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly. Reconnect W4 cable to A14J740. Reconnect W6 cable to A14J200.

154
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

3. Front End Control Assembly Verification

Verifying the Front End Control Assembly requires the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board E4410-60115 or kit number N9020-60005. The kit
includes the troubleshooting board and associated interconnect cables. The
troubleshooting board and cables will help verify the control logic from this
assembly to Input Attenuator A, Input Attenuator B, Low Band Switch, YTF
Preselector, (Optional) Low Band Preamplifier, (Optional) High Band
Preamplifier, (Optional) Electronic Attenuator and the RF Front End Assembly.
The control logic should be verified going to each assembly while the Front End
Troubleshooting board is connected.

Even though the YTF Preselector is not used in low band (input frequencies
< 3.59 GHz), it is easy to test the switch control logic with the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board installed in case there is a high band problem. The
Low Band Preamplifier (Option P03), High Band Preamplifier, and
Electronic Attenuator (Option EA3) logic should be tested if these options
are installed in the analyzer.

— Turn off the instrument.

— Connect the E4410-60115 Front End Troubleshooting board to the A15
Front End Control Assembly as shown in Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-10 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

155
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-11 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

— Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its full boot up process to
the signal analyzer application.
— Turn Auto Align off by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off on the
analyzer.

Resistors on the board can get very hot.

— Verify all power supply LED's on the Front End Troubleshooting board are
turned on. Under the J2 connector, the supplies are +15 VDC, +9 VDC, +5.2
VDC, and −15 VDC. Under the J1 connector, the supplies are +15 VDC, −15
VDC, +9 VDC and +5.2 VDC. Verify both input attenuator power supplies.
DS9 under J3 should be on if the +25V supply is up for Attenuator A. DS10
under J4 should be on if the +25V supply is up for Attenuator B. If any of the
power supply LED's are not turned on, see Chapter 2, “Boot Up and
Initialization Troubleshooting”.

The analyzer will display an error dialogue box when booting up. Simply
click “OK” so the instrument can complete its boot process. Additionally,
the analyzer noise floor will be near the top of the display since the RF
assemblies are not powered up. This is normal with the Front End
Troubleshooting board connected to the A15 Front End Driver Assembly

156
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

4. Input Attenuator A Control Logic Verification

— Press AMPTD, Attenuation 0 dB
All the attenuation LED's on the Front End Troubleshooting board should be off
except for DS9 and DS10, +25V supply for Attenuator A and Attenuator B.
Refer to Figure 4-12.

157
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-12 Front End Troubleshooting Board Attenuation LEDs

158
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

When the input attenuation is changed from 0 dB to 2 dB, the 2 dB Step LED
DS15 should illuminate. When the input attenuation is changed from 2 dB to 4
dB, DS15 and DS16 should be illuminated as per Table 4-3.
Table 4-3 Attenuator A Logic

Attenuator Setting (dB) DS15 DS16

2 dB 2 dB
Step LED Step LED

2 X

4 X X

The analyzer default setting for RF Coupling is AC mode. Verify the AC Select
LED DS14 is illuminated at this time. Set Input/Output, RF Input, RF Coupling
to DC. DS14 turns off, DS11 DC Select yellow LED should illuminate. Switch
the RF Coupling back to AC. If the LED's illuminate correctly, the switch control
logic to Input Attenuator A from the A15 Front End Control Assembly is correct.
If the LED's are not illuminating as expected, the most probable cause is the
A15 Front End Control Assembly.

159
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

5. Input Attenuator B Control Logic Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation 6 dB and verify the 6 dB Step LED DS17 is
illuminated. Enter the input attenuation settings found in Table 4-4 and verify
the proper LED's illuminate on the Front End Troubleshooting board according
to Table 4-4.
Table 4-4 Attenuator B Logic

Attenuator Setting (dB) DS20 DS19 DS18 DS17

30 dB 20 dB 10 dB 6 dB
Step LED Step LED Step LED Step LED

10 X

16 X X

20 X

30 X

40 X X

50 X X

60 X X X

66 X X X X

Set the input attenuator back to 10 dB by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB

on the analyzer. If the LED's illuminate correctly, the switch control logic for the
input attenuators from the A15 Front End Control Assembly is correct. If the
LED's are not illuminating as expected, the most probable cause is the A15
Front End Control Assembly.

160
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

6. Low Band Switch Control Logic Verification

Press Mode Preset on the analyzer. Press FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 2 MHz on the
analyzer. Connect the DVM positive lead to one of the In1A test points, and the
negative lead to the bottom of R46 (blue resistor near the bottom) on the Front
End Troubleshooting board. Verify the voltages in Table 4-5.
Table 4-5

In1A −9.85

In2A −9.85

In1B +9.75

In2B +9.75

Press Freq 5 GHz on the analyzer. Verify the voltages in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6

In1A +9.72

In2A −9.84

In1B −9.84

In2B +9.72

If the voltages are not correct, the most probable cause is the A15 Front End
Control Assembly.

161
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

7. YTF Preselector Control Logic Verification

(All except Option 503)

In order to properly measure the preselector tune output from the A15
Front End Control Assembly, the following items are required:
— E9637A Banana plug to BNC (f) adapter
— E9632A BNC (M) to SMA (f)
— 8120-1460 Small coaxial cable SMA (m) to mmcx (m)

Connect the mmcx end of the cable to A15J300, preselector tune output at the
upper left corner of A15 Front End Control Assembly.
Press Single on the analyzer. Verify the voltages in Table 4-7 as the center
frequency of the analyzer is changed.
Table 4-7 YTF Tune Voltages

Center Frequency ~ Tune Vol tage Tolerance

(GHz) (VDC) (VDC)

5.0 1.6 ±0.5

10a 3.228 ±1.0

15b 4.85 ±1.0

20b 6.5 ±1.0

26b 8.45 ±1.0

a. Options 513 and 526

b. Option 526

Tolerances can be used as a guideline. The true test is whether or not the
analyzer will function and meet published specification.

If any of the preselector tune voltages do not match the levels shown in Table
4-7, the most probable causes are a misaligned YTF or the A15 Front End
Control Assembly. Perform the YTF characterization (press System,
Alignments, More, Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector).
To further test the YTF control current, select Amps on the DVM and place the
positive lead of the DVM on one of the YTF Coil Current P8 pins and the other
DVM lead to the other Coil Current pin.

In order to measure the control current correctly, press Single on the

analyzer in between each measurement.

162
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If any of the preselector control currents do not match the levels shown in
Table 4-8, the most probable causes are a misaligned YTF or the A15 Front End
Control Assembly. Perform the YTF characterization (press System,
Alignments, More, Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector) and re-check the
control current at various center frequencies.
Table 4-8 YTF Tune Current

Center Frequency Control Current Tolerance

(GHz) (mA) (mA)

5.0 106 ±20

10a 215 ±25

15b 324 ±30

20b 430 ±40

26b 560 ±50

a. Options 513 and 526

b. Option 526

Tolerances should be used as a guideline. The true test is whether or not

the analyzer will function and meet published specification.

163
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

8. Front End Assembly Control Logic Verification

Since the RF Front End Troubleshooting board is connected, now is a good
time to test out the remaining control circuits from the A15 Front End Control
Assembly.
Table 4-9 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S2A Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.67 ±0.5
on

S2B Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.83 ±0.5
on

S3A Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S3B Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S4A Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S4B Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S5A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S5B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S6A Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S6B Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S7A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S7B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S8A Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S8B Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S9A Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.83 ±0.5

S9B Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.67 ±0.5

S11A Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

S11B Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

S12A Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S12B Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S13A Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz −9.67 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz +9.67

S13B Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz +9.83 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz −9.83

164
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Table 4-9 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S14A Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz −9.83 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz +9.83

S14B Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz +9.67 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz −9.67

VCC1 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC2 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC3 Voltage always on 7.85 ±0.5

VCC4 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

VCC5 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

TWAD1 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD2 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD3 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD4 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD5 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

Tolerances should be used as a guideline.

If any of the voltages measured do not match the levels shown in Table 4-9,
the most probable cause is the A15 Front End Control Assembly. Once the
switch control logic has been verified, turn off the instrument, disconnect the
RF Front End Troubleshooting board cables, and reconnect the analyzer cables
to the A15 Front End Control Assembly. Turn the instrument on and allow it to
complete its full boot up process to Spectrum Analyzer mode.

165
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Input Attenuator A Power Level Verification

Press Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz, AMPTD,

Attenuation, 0 dB on the analyzer. Refer to Figure 4-13, remove cable W11
from A9 (1) Output. Measure the 50 MHz calibrator signal on the output of the
attenuator using a functioning Spectrum Analyzer.

Figure 4-13 Cable W11

166
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

The level should be −25 dBm ± 2 dB as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 50 MHz Calibrator Signal on Output of Attenuator A

Press Mech Atten and enter 2 dB. The 50 MHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 2 dB lower than the
previous step (~−27 dBm). Press Mech Atten and enter 4 dB. The 50 MHz
calibrator signal measured on the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should
measure an additional 2 dB lower than the previous step (~−29 dBm). If the
power levels measure correctly, reconnect W11 cable. If either of these levels is
incorrect, Input Attenuator A is the most probable cause, provided the control
logic from the A15 Front End Control Assembly was previously verified.

167
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Input Attenuator B Power Level Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation, 0 dB. Remove output cable W9 from A10 (2).
Refer to Figure 4-13. Measure the 50 MHz calibrator signal on the output of
the attenuator using a functioning Spectrum Analyzer.
The level should be −25 dBm ± 2 dB as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 50 MHz Calibrator Signal on Output of Attenuator B

168
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Press Mech Atten and enter 6 dB. The 50 MHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 6 dB lower than the
previous step (~−31 dBm) as shown in Figure 4-16.

Figure 4-16 50 MHz Calibrator Signal on Output of Attenuator B

(with 6 dB Attenuation)

Press Mech Atten and enter 10 dB. The 50 MHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 10 dB lower than the first
step (~−35 dBm). Continue testing all the attenuation settings as described in
Table 4-10.
Table 4-10

Attenuator Setting (dB) Expected Level Tolerance

(dBm @ 50 MHz)

16 −41 ±3 dB

20 −45 ±3 dB

30 −55 ±3 dB

40 −65 ±4 dB

50 −75 ±4 dB

60 −85 ±4 dB

66 −91 ±4 dB

169
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

1. It may be difficult to measure the higher attenuator settings using the

-25 dBm internal calibrator signal. Use an external source with the
frequency set to 50 MHz and adjust the output level to 0 dBm. This will
increase the measured power levels noted in the table above by 25 dB.
2. Tolerances should be used as a guideline.

If the power levels measure correctly, reconnect the W9 cable and reset the
input attenuation to 10 dB by pressing Mech Atten, 10 dB on the analyzer.
If either of these levels measure incorrectly, Input Attenuator B is the most
probable cause, provided the switch control logic has been verified.

Low Band Switch Power Level Verification

Refer to Figure 4-17. Disconnect the W3 cable at A11J2 of the A11 Low Band
Switch (1).

170
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-17 Cable W3 Location

When the analyzer is tuned to a center frequency of 50 MHz, the Low Band
switch should have minimal loss. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz,
AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer. Measure the 50 MHz calibrator
signal on the output of A11J2 using a functioning Spectrum Analyzer. The level
should be −35 dBm ± 5 dB as shown in Figure 4-18.

171
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-18 50 MHz Calibrator Signal at Output of W3 Cable

If the power level is incorrect the most probable cause is the low band switch
assembly. Reconnect W3 cable.
The following Low Band path items have been verified in the RF section:
— 50 MHz Calibrator signal power level from the A16 Reference Assembly
— 1st L.O. power level from the A14 L.O. Synthesizer
— Switch control logic from the A15 Front End Control Assembly to:
• Input Attenuator A
• Input Attenuator B
• Low Band Switch
• Front End Assembly
— Input Attenuator A power level check
— Input Attenuator B power level check
— Low Band Switch logic and power level check
If all the power levels and biasing from the A15 Front End Control Assembly
measure correctly up to this point, the most probable cause would be the A13
RF Front End Assembly.

172
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Quick Check to Verify High Band RF Path #1

(RF Input Frequencies > 3600 MHz and < 13.6 GHz)
Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams.” for details.
Equipment needed:
Functioning Spectrum Analyzer
Functioning Signal Generator to 15 GHz
DVM
Cables & Connectors

To perform the following checks, it will be necessary to remove the outer

cover and the top brace. See Chapter 14 for removal procedures.

Turn the analyzer on and allow it to complete its full boot up process to Signal
Analyzer mode. Use the internal 4.8 GHz, −28 dBm calibrator signal as a
reference for troubleshooting by pressing Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF
Calibrator, 4.8 GHz on the analyzer. Now press FREQ (Channel), 4.8 GHz,
SPAN (X Scale), Zero Span, AMPTD (Y Scale), Attenuation 10 dB on the
analyzer.

IMPORTANT Turn off auto align by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.

173
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Disconnect cable W15 or W36 at A13J7, 322.5 MHz output on the Front End
Assembly (1). See Figure 4-19.

Figure 4-19 W15 or W36 Location

174
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Connect A13J7 output to a functioning spectrum analyzer and verify the

322.5 MHz intermediate frequency is measuring −32 ± 4 dB as shown in Figure
4-20.

Figure 4-20 322.5 MHz Intermediate Frequency

If this power level is correct the entire RF section is operating correctly in high
band. If this power level is incorrect verify the following assemblies in the order
listed using the 4.8 GHz internal calibrator signal.
1. A16 Reference Assembly
2. A14 L.O. Synthesizer
3. A15 Front End Control Assembly
4. A9 Input Attenuator A
5. A10 Input Attenuator B
6. A11 Low Band Switch
7. A12 YTF Preselector
8. A13 RF Front End Assembly

175
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

High Band #2 RF signal path utilizes a high band mixer internal to the A13
RF Front End Assembly for RF input frequencies from 13 GHz to 26.5 GHz.
Since all the control voltages and biasing were already fully tested, failures
from 13 GHz - 26.5 GHz will most likely be caused by the A13 RF Front End
Assembly. If the failure is amplitude related, proper adjustments such as
frequency response and the YTF Preselector adjust should be performed
first before changing the A13 RF Front End Assembly. Refer to Chapter 11,
“Block Diagrams.” for details.

In order to gain access to the front end components, remove the side chassis
(1). See Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 Remove the Side Chassis

176
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting a High Band Problem

1. Reference Assembly Verification
Refer to Figure 4-22. Remove cable W19 from A9 Input Attenuator A (1).
Measure the 4.8 GHz calibrator signal on the cable end with a functioning
Spectrum Analyzer.

Figure 4-22 W19 Location

177
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If the Reference Assembly calibrator is functioning properly the 4.8 GHz

calibrator signal will measure 4.8 GHz at −28 dBm ± 3 dB as shown in Figure
4-23. If this level is incorrect, the Reference Assembly is most likely defective.
Reconnect W19 at A9 (1).

Figure 4-23 4.8 GHz Calibrator Signal

178
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

2. L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Verification

Press the following keys on the analyzer:
Mode Preset
FREQ (Channel), 5 GHz
SPAN (X Scale), Zero Span
Refer to Figure 4-24. Disconnect cable W4 at A14J740 of the L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly (1).

Figure 4-24 W4 and W6 Location

179
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Connect the functioning Spectrum Analyzer and appropriate high frequency

cable and connector to A14J740. Adjust the analyzer to measure a signal at
5322.5 MHz at +16 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in Figure 4-25.

Figure 4-25 Measure 1st L.O.

If this power level is incorrect remove W6 at A14J200. Refer to Figure 4-24.

Connect the functioning spectrum analyzer to the cable output using the
appropriate high-frequency cable.

180
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Adjust the functioning spectrum analyzer to measure a signal at 4.8 GHz at

+4.5 dBm ± 2 dB as shown in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26 4.8 GHz Signal

If this power level is incorrect, the most probable cause is the A16 Reference
Assembly. If this level is correct and yet the signal previously measured at
A14J740 is incorrect, the most probable cause is the A14 L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly. Reconnect W4 cable to A14J740. Reconnect W6 cable to A14J200.

181
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

3. Front End Control Assembly Verification

IMPORTANT If the Front End Control Assembly logic was verified in the 'Low Band Quick
Check' section above, skip to “Input Attenuator A Power Level Verification”
step below.

Verifying the Front End Control Assembly requires the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board E4410-60115 or kit number N9020-60005. The kit
includes the troubleshooting board and associated interconnect cables. The
troubleshooting board and cables will help verify the control logic from this
assembly to Input Attenuator A, Input Attenuator B, Low Band Switch, YTF
Preselector, (Optional) Low Band Preamplifier, (Optional) High Band
Preamplifier, (Optional) Electronic Attenuator and the RF Front End Assembly.
The control logic should be verified going to each assembly while the Front End
Troubleshooting board is connected.
— Turn off the instrument.
— Connect the E4410-60115 Front End Troubleshooting board to the A15
Front End Control Assembly as shown in Figure 4-27 and Figure 4-28.

182
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-27 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

Figure 4-28 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

183
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

— Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its full boot up process to
the signal analyzer application.
— Turn Auto Align off by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off on the
analyzer.

Resistors on the board can get very hot.

— Verify all power supply LED's on the Front End Troubleshooting board are
turned on. Under the J2 connector, the supplies are +15 VDC, +9 VDC,
+5.2 VDC, and −15 VDC. Under the J1 connector, the supplies are +15 VDC,
−15 VDC, +9 VDC and +5.2 VDC. Verify both input attenuator power
supplies. DS9 under J3 should be on if the +25V supply is up for Attenuator
A. DS10 under J4 should be on if the +25V supply is up for Attenuator B. If
any of the power supply LED's are not turned on, see Chapter 2, “Boot Up
and Initialization Troubleshooting”.
— Press AMPTD, Attenuation 0 dB

The analyzer will display an error dialogue box when booting up. Simply
click “OK” so the instrument can complete its boot process. Additionally,
the analyzer noise floor will be near the top of the display since the RF
assemblies are not powered up. This is normal with the Front End
Troubleshooting board connected to the A15 Front End Driver Assembly

4. Input Attenuator A Control Logic Verification

All the attenuation LED's on the Front End Troubleshooting board should be off
except for DS9 and DS10, +25V supply for Attenuator A and Attenuator B.

184
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Figure 4-29 Front End Troubleshooting Board Attenuation LEDs

185
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

When the input attenuation is changed from 0 dB to 2 dB, the 2 dB Step LED
DS15 should illuminate. When the input attenuation is changed from 2 dB to 4
dB, DS15 and DS16 should be illuminated as per Table 4-11.
Table 4-11 Attenuator A Logic

Attenuator Setting (dB) DS15 DS16

2 X

4 X X

The analyzer default setting for RF Coupling is AC mode. Verify the AC Select
LED DS14 is illuminated at this time. Set Input/Output, RF Input, RF Coupling
to DC. DS14 turns off, DS11 DC Select yellow LED should illuminate. Switch
the RF Coupling back to AC. If the LED's illuminate correctly, the switch control
logic to Input Attenuator A from the A15 Front End Control Assembly is correct.
If the LED's are not illuminating as expected, the most probable cause is the
A15 Front End Control Assembly.

186
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

5. Input Attenuator B Control Logic Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation 6 dB and verify the 6 dB Step LED DS17 is
illuminated. Enter the input attenuation settings found in Table 4-12 and verify
the proper LED's illuminate on the Front End Troubleshooting board according
to Table 4-12.
Table 4-12 Attenuator B Logic

Attenuator DS20 DS19 DS18 DS17

Setting (dB) 30 dB 20 dB 10 dB 6 dB
Step LED Step LED Step LED Step LED

10 X

16 X X

20 X

30 X

40 X X

50 X X

60 X X X

66 X X X X

Set the input attenuator back to 10 dB by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB

on the analyzer. If the LED's illuminate correctly, the switch control logic for the
input attenuators from the A15 Front End Control Assembly is correct. If the
LED's are not illuminating as expected, the most probable cause is the A15
Front End Control Assembly.

187
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

6. Low Band Switch Control Logic Verification

Press Mode Preset on the analyzer. Press FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 2 MHz on the
analyzer. Connect the DVM positive lead to one of the In1A test points, and the
negative lead to the bottom of R46 (blue resistor near the bottom) on the Front
End Troubleshooting board. Verify the voltages in Table 4-13.
Table 4-13

Test Point Vol tage

In1A −9.85

In2A −9.85

In1B +9.75

In2B +9.75

Press Freq 5 GHz on the analyzer. Verify the voltages in Table 4-14.
Table 4-14

Test Point Vol tage

In1A +9.72

In2A −9.84

In1B −9.84

In2B +9.72

If the voltages are not correct, the most probable cause is the A15 Front End
Control Assembly.

188
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

7. YTF Preselector Control Logic Verification

In order to properly measure the preselector tune output from the A15
Front End Control Assembly, the following items are required:
— E9637A Banana plug to BNC (f) adapter
— E9632A BNC (M) to SMA (f)
— 8120-1460 Small coaxial cable SMA (m) to mmcx (m)

Connect the mmcx end of the cable to A15J300, preselector tune output at the
upper left corner of A15 Front End Control Assembly.
Press Single on the analyzer. Verify the voltages in Table 4-15 as the center
frequency of the analyzer is changed.
Table 4-15 YTF Tune Voltages

Center Frequency ~ Tune Vol tage Tolerance

(GHz) (VDC) (VDC)

5.0 1.6 ±0.5

10a 3.228 ±1.0

15b 4.85 ±1.0

20b 6.5 ±1.0

26b 8.45 ±1.0

a. Options 513 and 526

b. Option 526

Tolerances can be used as a guideline. The true test is whether or not the
analyzer will function and meet published specification.

If any of the preselector tune voltages do not match the levels in Table 4-15,
the most probable causes are a misaligned YTF or the A15 Front End Control
Assembly. Perform the YTF characterization (press System, Alignments, More,
Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector).
To further test the YTF control current, select Amps on the DVM and place the
positive lead of the DVM on one of the YTF Coil Current P8 pins and the other
DVM lead to the other Coil Current pin.

189
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

In order to measure the control current correctly, press Single on the

analyzer in between each measurement.

If any of the preselector control currents do not match the levels in Table 4-16,
the most probable causes are a misaligned YTF or the A15 Front End Control
Assembly. Perform the YTF characterization (press System, Alignments, More,
Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector) and re-check the control current at
various center frequencies.
Table 4-16 YTF Tune Current

Center Frequency Control Current Tolerance

(GHz) (mA) (mA)

5.0 106 ±20

10a 215 ±25

15b 324 ±30

20b 430 ±40

26b 560 ±50

a. Options 513 and 526

b. Option 526

Tolerances should be used as a guideline. The true test is whether or not

the analyzer will function and meet published specification.

190
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

8. Front End Assembly Control Logic Verification

Since the RF Front End Troubleshooting board is connected, now is a good
time to test out the remaining control circuits from the A15 Front End Control
Assembly.
Table 4-17 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S2A Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.67 ±0.5
on

S2B Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.83 ±0.5
on

S3A Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S3B Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S4A Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S4B Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S5A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S5B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S6A Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S6B Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S7A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S7B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S8A Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S8B Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S9A Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.83 ±0.5

S9B Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.67 ±0.5

S11A Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

S11B Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

S12A Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S12B Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S13A Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz −9.67 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz +9.67

S13B Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz +9.83 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz −9.83

191
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Table 4-17 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S14A Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz −9.83 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz +9.83

S14B Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz +9.67 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz −9.67

VCC1 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC2 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC3 Voltage always on 7.85 ±0.5

VCC4 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

VCC5 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

TWAD1 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD2 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD3 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD4 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD5 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

192
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Tolerances should be used as a guideline.

If any of the voltages measured do not match the levels in Table 4-17, the most
probable cause is the A15 Front End Control Assembly. Once the switch control
logic has been verified, turn off the instrument. Disconnect the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board cables, and reconnect the analyzer cables to the A15
Front End Control Assembly. Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete
its full boot up process to Spectrum Analyzer mode.

Input Attenuator A Power Level Verification

Press Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 4.8 GHz, AMPTD,

Attenuation, 0 dB on the analyzer. Refer to Figure 4-30, remove cable W11
from A9 (1) Output. Measure the 4.8 GHz calibrator signal on the output of the
attenuator using the proper high frequency cables and connect to the
functioning Spectrum Analyzer.

Figure 4-30 W9 and W11 Location

193
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

The level should be −28 dBm ±2 dB as shown in Figure 4-31.

Figure 4-31 4.8 GHz Calibrator Signal on Output of Attenuator A

Press Mech Atten and enter 2 dB. The 4.8 GHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 2 dB lower than the
previous step (~−30 dBm). Press Mech Atten and enter 4 dB. The 4.8 GHz
calibrator signal measured on the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should
measure an additional 2 dB lower than the previous step (~−32 dBm). If the
power levels measure correctly, reconnect W11 cable. If either of these levels is
incorrect, Input Attenuator A is the most probable cause, provided the control
logic from the A15 Front End Control Assembly was previously verified.

Input Attenuator B Power Level Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation, 0 dB. Remove output cable W9 from A10 (2).
Refer to Figure 4-30. Measure the 4.8 GHz calibrator signal on the output of
the attenuator using a functioning Spectrum Analyzer.

194
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

The level should be −28 dBm ± 2 dB as shown in Figure 4-32.

Figure 4-32 4.8 GHz Calibrator Signal on Output of Attenuator B

Press Mech Atten and enter 6 dB. The 4.8 GHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 6 dB lower than the
previous step (~−34 dBm).
Press Mech Atten and enter 10 dB. The 4.8 GHz calibrator signal measured on
the functioning Spectrum Analyzer should measure 10 dB lower than the first
step (~−38 dBm). Continue testing all the attenuation settings as described in
Table 4-18.
Table 4-18

Attenuator Setting Expected Level Tolerance

dBm @ 4.8 GHz

16 −44 ±3 dB

20 −48 ±3 dB

30 −58 ±3 dB

40 −68 ±4 dB

50 −78 ±4 dB

60 −88 ±4 dB

66 −94 ±4 dB

195
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

1. It may be difficult to measure the higher attenuator settings using the

-28 dBm internal calibrator signal. Use an external source with the
frequency set to 4.8 GHz and adjust the output level to 0 dBm. This will
increase the measured power levels noted in the table above by 28 dB.
2. Tolerances should be used as a guideline.

If the power levels measure correctly, reconnect the W9 cable and reset the
input attenuation to 10 dB by pressing Mech Atten, 10 dB on the analyzer.
If either of these levels measure incorrectly, Input Attenuator B is the most
probable cause, provided the switch control logic has been verified.

196
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Low Band Switch Power Level Verification

(for High Band)
Refer to Figure 4-33. Carefully disconnect both ends of the W8 cable at A11J3
and A12 (1) input. If the microwave preselector bypass hardware is installed,
disconnect both ends of W31 at A11J3 and SW2 port C.

Figure 4-33 W8 Location

Be careful not to short out components on the front panel interface board
or the components on top of the A12 YTF Preselector when removing W8
or W31.

Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 4.8 GHz, AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB,

FREQ, 4.8 GHz, SPAN, Zero Span on the analyzer.

197
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

IMPORTANT Turn off auto align by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.

Measure the 4.8 GHz calibrator signal on the output of A11J3 Low Band
Switch high band output port using a functioning Spectrum Analyzer. The level
should be −46 dBm ± 3 dB as shown in Figure 4-34. There is ~8 dB of loss
through the A11 Low Band Switch when using the 4.8 GHz reference signal.

Figure 4-34 4.8 GHz Calibrator Signal at Output of W8 Cable

198
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

If the power level is correct, do not reconnect W8 or W31 at this time. Refer to
Figure 4-35, disconnect W7 at A12 (1) output and install a connector such
that the A12 YTF Preselector output can be measured. If the preselector bypass
hardware is installed, disconnect W33 at A12.

Figure 4-35 Cable W7 at A12 Output

Once the connector is installed, carefully reconnect W8 or W31to make the

measurement. If the power level is incorrect, the most probable cause is the
A12, YTF Preselector.

199
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

A12 YTF Preselector Power Level Verification

Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 4.8 GHz, AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB,
SPAN (X Scale), Zero Span on the analyzer. Measure the 4.8 GHz calibrator on
the output of either the W7 (or, if the microwave preselector bypass hardware
is installed, W34) cable using a functioning spectrum analyzer. When the
4.8 GHz calibrator signal is used, there will be ~ 5 dB (~8 dB if microwave
preselector bypass hardware is installed) ± 4 dB of insertion loss through the
YTF Preselector. The tolerance is large because the A12 YTF loss varies
between devices, and the YTF might not be perfectly aligned, or the frequency
response adjustment may be required.
If the signal level is incorrect, and Option MPB, Microwave Preselector Bypass
is installed and licensed, press AMPTD, More, uW Path Control, uW
Preselector Bypass. If the signal level is now ~ − 51 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in
Figure 4-36, suspect the A12 YTF is either out of adjustment or faulty.
To perform the YTF alignment, reconnect W7 or W34 and press System,
Alignments, More, Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector. The routine may take
several minutes to align the YTF. Display the 4.8 GHz calibrator on screen as
explained in the quick check section. If the signal level is still incorrect, suspect
all assemblies, cables, and switches between the W7 (or W34) cable and the
output of the A11 Low Band Switch.
Reconnect W7 and W8 cables (or W31 and W34 cables).

Figure 4-36 4.8 GHz Calibrator Signal at Output of W7 Cable

If the power level is incorrect, the most probable cause is the YTF Preselector.
Reconnect W7 and W8 cables (or W31 and W34 cables).

200
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

The following High Band path items have been verified in the RF section:
— 4.8 GHz Calibrator signal power level from the A16 Reference Board
— 1st L.O. power level from the A14 L.O. Synthesizer
— Switch control logic from the A15 Front End Control Board to:
• Input Attenuator A
• Input Attenuator B
• Low Band Switch
• YTF Preselector
• RF Front End Assembly
— Input Attenuator A
— Input Attenuator B
— Low Band Switch
— YTF Preselector
If all the power levels and biasing from the A15 Front End Control board
measure correctly up to this point, the most probable cause would be the A13
Front End Assembly.

High Band #2 RF signal path utilizes a high band mixer internal to the A13
RF Front End Assembly for RF input frequencies from 13.6 GHz to
26.5 GHz. Since all the control voltages and biasing were already fully
tested, failures from 13.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz will most likely be caused by the
A13 RF Front End Assembly. If the failure is amplitude related, proper
adjustments such as frequency response and the YTF Preselector adjust
should be performed first before changing the A13 RF Front End Assembly.
Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams.” for details.

201
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

High Band Preamp (Option P08, P13, P26)

If any of the preamp options listed above is installed, the High Band preamp
can be verified as follows:
View the 4.8 GHz calibrator signal on screen. Press AMPTD, More, Internal
Preamp, Full Range to activate the preamp. The expected operation is the
signal level will not change more than ± 0.5 dB and the noise floor will increase
due to the fact the input attenuation was automatically increased.
If the amplitude error when switching the preamp on and off is greater than
0.5 dB, assure that any other internal alignment failures are resolved since the
System Gain alignment must run before optimum performance is possible. The
amplitude error could be caused by poor frequency response, and performing
the high band frequency response adjustment (using the calibration software)
will adjust the preamp on, high band path. Assure you have evaluated all
causes including A15 Front End Controller switching problems, before you
replace the Front End assembly.

High Band Mixing Equations

For input signal frequencies from 3.6 GHz to 8.4 GHz and 13.6 GHz to 17 GHz:
RF = LO x N − IF
IF = LO x N − RF
LO x N = IF + RF
where RF is the input signal at the signal analyzer
where N is the harmonic mixing mode:
N = 1 for 3.5 GHz to 8.4 GHz
N = 2 for 13.5 GHz to 17 GHz
For input signal frequencies above 8.4 GHz to 13.6 GHz and 17 GHz to
26.5 GHz:
RF = LO x 2 x N − IF
IF = LO x 2 x N − RF
LO x 2 x N = IF + RF
where RF is the input signal at the signal analyzer
where N is the harmonic mixing mode:
N = 1 for 8.4 GHz to 13.6 GHz
N = 2 for 17 GHz to 26.5 GHz

202
 RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Microwave Preselector Bypass (Option MPB)

Allows the YTF to be bypassed, improving amplitude accuracy.
Assure start frequency is 3.6 GHz or greater. Press Amplitude, uW Path
Control, uW Preselector Bypass.
When the bypass switches Switch 1 and Switch 2 change state you will hear a
click. Depending on the signal source connected, you may see many “signals”
appear on screen because without pre-filtering, the analyzer will display image
and multiple responses. The real input signal should not change amplitude
when you switch the uW Preselector Bypass on and off.

203
RF Section Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

204
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

5 Front End Control Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is found in this chapter:
A15 Front End Control Description on page 206
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting on page 210

205
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Description

A15 Front End Control Description

Purpose
The A15 Front End Controller board functionality can be broken down into (3)
main categories
1. Provides switch control logic and bias voltages to the major RF front end
assemblies in the analyzer.
2. Contains on board circuitry providing various signal outputs to other
locations within the analyzer.
3. Provides control logic for various instrument options within the analyzer.
These signals are routed to and from the A15 via ribbon cables, wiring
harnesses and coaxial cables. The RF front end assemblies require the correct
control logic and bias in order to function properly. If the voltages from the A15
are not correct, the RF input signals will most likely be displayed at an incorrect
power level if they even get displayed at all.
Depending upon the options installed, one of two different A15 Front End
Control board assemblies may be installed. The standard A15 Front End
Control assembly (“FEC”) can only control the high band preamplifier options
(P08, P13 and P26) and the electronic attenuator option (EA3). The A15
Enhanced Front End Control assembly (“EFEC”) can also control the IF Out
options (CR3 and CRP), the microwave preselector bypass option (MPB), and
provide the IF signal for analysis bandwidth options ≥ 40 MHz (B40, B85, B1A,
and B1X).

206
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Description

Standard RF Assemblies Controlled by the A15:

— A9 Input Attenuator A (4 dB total)
— A10 Input Attenuator B (66 dB total)
— A11 Low Band Switch
— A12 YIG Tuned Filter
— A13 RF Front End Assembly

A15 On Board Circuits:

— RF Burst Trigger (When set to Relative Trigger or when center frequency is
< 300 MHz.)
— YTF Tune Ramp
— Preselector Tune Out (Provides output voltage, not specified, reserved for
future use)
— Mixer Bias
— Amplifier Bias
— Switch Control
— Sweep Ramp (reserved for future use)
Refer to Table 5-1 for details regarding which options are supported by the two
choices of A15 assemblies.
Table 5-1 A15 Option Related Control

Option Description Physical Location in Analyzer A15 Support

P03 Preamplifier, 3.6 GHz A15 to A13 FEC or EFEC

P08 Preamplifier, 8.4 GHz A15 to A11 FEC or EFEC

P13 Preamplifier, 13.6 GHz A15 to A11 FEC or EFEC

P26 Preamplifier, 26.5 GHz A15 to A11 FEC or EFEC

CRP Arbitrary IF Output A15 to AUX IF OUT (rear panel) EFEC

CR3 Second IF Output A15 to AUX IF OUT (rear panel) EFEC

MPB Microwave Preselector Bypass A15 to SW1 and SW2 EFEC

EA3 Electronic Attenuator, 3.6 GHz A15 to A13 FEC or EFEC

B40 40 MHz Analysis Bandwidth A15 to A3 EFEC

DP2 Digital Signal Processing & A15 to A3 EFEC

2 GB Capture Memory

B85, B1A, 85, 125, and 160 MHz Analysis A15 to A25 EFEC
or B1X Bandwidths

207
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Description

Figure 5-1 A15 Front View, Physical Connectors (EFEC)

Figure 5-2 A15 Front View, Physical Connectors (standard FEC)

208
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Description

The table below describes the connector location and the final destinations of
the RF signal, switch control logic or bias voltage.
Table 5-2 A15 Connectors and Destinations

A15 Connector
Designation Description Destination

FEC EFEC

N/A J900 Narrowband I.F. Out To A2

N/A J901 Wideband I.F. Out To A3 or A25

N/A J902 322.5 MHz I.F. In From A13

N/A J1100 Aux I.F. Out To Rear Panel

N/A J1300 Switched I.F. Filter Out Reserved for future use

N/A J801 YTF Bypass Out To SW1 & SW3 (Option MPB with Option
513 or 526)

J103 J700 Low Band Switch Logic Out To A11

J801 J800 Mechanical Attenuator Logic Out To A9 & A10

J302 J301 Sweep Out Reserved for future use

J104 J102 R.F. Front End Logic Out To A13

J300 J302 Preselector Tune Out N/A (test point only)

J301 J300 YTF Bias Control Out To A12

N/A J802 Low Noise Bypass Switch Logic Out Reserved for future use

J100 J100 Motherboard Connector From A8

209
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Verifying the Front End Control Assembly requires the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board E4410-60115 or kit number N9020-60005. The kit
includes the troubleshooting board and associated interconnect cables. The
troubleshooting board and cables will help verify the control logic from this
assembly to Input Attenuator A, Input Attenuator B, Low Band Switch, YTF
Preselector, (Optional) Low Band Preamplifier, (Optional) High Band
Preamplifier, (Optional) Electronic Attenuator and the RF Front End Assembly.
The control logic should be verified going to each assembly while the Front End
Troubleshooting board is connected.
If the EFEC is installed, the remaining control voltages and RF signals can be
measured directly with a voltmeter, oscilloscope, or functioning spectrum
analyzer.
In order to verify the wide bandwidth I.F.'s and Aux I.F. output frequencies and
power levels the following specialty cables and connector will be needed:
MMCX (m) to SMB (f) cable, p/n 8121-0655
MMCX (f) to MMCX (f) barrel. Huber & Suhner 31_mmcx-50-0-1/111_0E
Visit: http://www.hubersuhner.com/de/ie70/hs-index
Other standard cables and connectors need to be used to adapt to the
voltmeter or the RF input of the functioning spectrum analyzer.

210
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Verifying Input Attenuator A, Input Attenuator B, Low Band Switch

Logic and Power Supplies

Even though the YTF Preselector is not used in low band (input frequencies
< 3.59 GHz), it is easy to test the switch control logic with the RF Front End
Troubleshooting board installed in case there is a high band problem. The
Low Band Preamplifier (Option P03), and Electronic Attenuator (Option
EA3) logic should be tested if these options are installed in the analyzer.

1. Turn off the instrument.

2. Connect the E4410-60115 RF Front End Troubleshooting board to the A15
Front End Control Assembly as shown in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4.

Figure 5-3 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

211
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 5-4 RF Front End Troubleshooting Board

3. Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its full boot up process to
the signal analyzer application.
4. Turn Auto Align off by pressing System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off on
the analyzer.

Resistors on the test board can get very hot. Handle with care.

212
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Power Supply Verification

Looking at the test board, verify power supply green LED's DS5, DS6, DS7 and
DS8 located under the J2 connector are turned on. Additionally red LED's DS9
and DS10 should also be on. The power supply voltages are listed in the table
below.
Table 5-3 Power Supply Voltages

LED Power Supply

DS5 +15 VDC

DS6 +9.0 VDC

DS7 +5.2 VDC

DS8 -15 VDC

DS9 +25 VDC (for Attenuator A)

DS10 +25 VDC (for Attenuator B)

If any of the power supply LED's are not turned on, see Chapter 2, “Boot Up
and Initialization Troubleshooting”.

Input Attenuator A Control Logic Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation 0 dB on the analyzer.
Attenuation LED's DS15-20 on the test board should be off.
When the input attenuation is changed from 0 dB to 2 dB, the 2 dB Step LED
DS15 should illuminate. When the input attenuation is changed from 2 dB to 4
dB, DS15 and DS16 should be illuminated as per Table 5-4.
Table 5-4 Input Attenuator A LED’s

Attenuator Setting (dB) DS15 DS16

0 OFF OFF

2 ON OFF

4 ON ON

If this is incorrect, the most probable cause is the A15, Front End Control
board.
The analyzer default setting for RF Coupling is AC mode. Verify the AC Select
LED DS14 is illuminated at this time. Press Input/Output, RF Input, RF
Coupling, AC/DC to DC on the analyzer. DS14 should turn off and DS11, DC
Select LED should illuminate. Switch the RF Coupling back to AC. If the LED's
do not illuminate correctly, the most probable cause is the A15 Front End
Control Assembly.

213
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Input Attenuator B Control Logic Verification

Press AMPTD, Attenuation 6 dB on the analyzer and verify the 6 dB Step LED
DS17 is illuminated. Change to the input attenuation settings found in Table
5-5 and verify the proper LED's illuminate on the Front End Troubleshooting
board according to Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 Input Attenuator B LED’s

Attenuator DS20 DS19 DS18 DS17

Setting (dB) 30 dB 20 dB 10 dB 6 dB
Step LED Step LED Step LED Step LED

6 OFF OFF OFF ON

10 OFF OFF ON OFF

16 OFF OFF ON ON

20 OFF ON OFF OFF

30 ON OFF OFF OFF

40 ON OFF ON OFF

50 ON ON OFF OFF

60 ON ON ON OFF

66 ON ON ON ON

If the LED's illuminate correctly, the switch control logic for the input
attenuators from the A15 Front End Control Assembly is correct. If the LED's
are not illuminating as expected, the most probable cause is the A15 Front End
Control Assembly.
Set the input attenuator back to 10 dB by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB
on the analyzer.

Low Band Switch Control Logic Verification

(all except Option 503)
Press Mode Preset on the analyzer. Press FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 2 MHz on the
analyzer. Make sure the auto alignments are turned off by pressing System,
Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Connect the voltmeter positive lead to test point
listed in the table below and the negative lead to the instrument chassis. These
test points are located under the J2 connector. Verify the voltages in Table
5-6.
Table 5-6

Test Board Vol tage

Test Point (VDC)

In1A −9.90

214
Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Table 5-6

Test Board Vol tage

Test Point (VDC)

In2A −9.90

In1B +10.0

In2B +10.0

Press FREQ, 5 GHz on the analyzer. Verify the voltages in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7

Test Board Vol tage

Test Point (VDC)

In1A +10.0

In2A −9.90

In1B −10.0

In2B +10.0

If the voltages are not correct, the most probable cause is the A15 Front End
Control board.
You do not need the RF front end troubleshooting board to test out the
remaining front end hardware components. At this point it is advisable to
shutdown the analyzer and disconnect the test board and cables. Be sure to
reconnect the Low Band switch ribbon cable and the input attenuator ribbon
that were originally plugged into the Front End Control board before testing the
input attenuator and low band switch logic.

215
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Preselector Tune Output

The Presel Tune connector A15J300 (FEC) or A15J302 (EFEC) is a test point
used to verify the internal A12, YIG Tuned Filter drive voltage variations with
center frequency. The YTF is used in the high band path (3.6 GHz to the
analyzer’s maximum frequency). Connect Presel Tune to a voltmeter. Use the
MMCX (m) to SMB (f) to connect to Presel Tune on the A15 board and
appropriate adapters to connect to the voltmeter. Refer to Figure 5-1 or Figure
5-2 or Presel Tune location. You may also need a Banana plug to BNC (f)
adapter, part number E9637A for the Voltmeter. The preselector tune output
voltage can be measured to verify this portion of the A15 is functioning.
Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off on the analyzer once it has fully
booted to the spectrum analyzer application. Press Span, Zero Span on the
analyzer. The preselector tune output voltage in high band should change
when the center frequency of the analyzer is changed.

Preselector tune output measurements are not valid for Option 503, 3 GHz
frequency range.

Table 5-8 Preselector Tune Output Voltages

Center Frequency ~ Tune Vol tage Valid Frequency

(GHz) (VDC) Range Option

5.0 1.6 508, 513, 526

10.0 3.3 513, 526

15.0 4.85 526

20.0 6.5 526

26.0 8.45 526

Even if the voltages listed in the table are correct it does not guarantee the
proper control current is getting to the YTF. There is not a convenient way to
measure the control current, so if a high band issue is suspect it is
recommended that the A15 is changed out first before changing the YTF since
the A15 board has easy access.
To further test the YTF control current, select Amps on the DVM and place the
positive lead of the DVM on one of the YTF Coil Current P8 pins and the other
DVM lead to the other Coil Current pin.

In order to measure the control current correctly, press Single on the

analyzer in between each measurement.

216
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

If any of the preselector control currents do not match the levels shown in
Figure 5-9, the most probable causes are a misaligned YTF or the A15 Front
End Control Assembly. Perform the YTF characterization (press System,
Alignments, More, Ad vanced, Characterize Preselector) and re-check the
control current at various center frequencies.

Table 5-9 YTF Tune Current

Center Frequency Control Current Tolerance

(GHz) (ma) (ma)

5.0 106 ± 20

10 215 ± 25

15 324 ± 30

20 430 ± 40

26 560 ± 50

Tolerances should be used as a guideline. The true test is whether or not

the analyzer will function and meet published specification.

Front End Assembly Control Logic Verification

Since the RF Front End Troubleshooting board is connected, now is a good
time to test out the remaining control circuits from the A15 Front End Control
Assembly.
Table 5-10 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S2A Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.67 ±0.5
on

S2B Sets switch for Low Band/preamp path CF 50 MHz preamp +9.83 ±0.5
on

S3A Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S3B Sets E-atten to 5 dB preamps off E-atten = 5 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S4A Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S4B Sets E-atten to 10 dB preamps off E-atten = 10 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S5A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S5B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S6A Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.67 ±0.5

217
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Table 5-10 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

S6B Sets E-atten to 1 dB preamps off E-atten = 1 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S7A Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S7B Sets E-atten to 2 dB preamps off E-atten = 2 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S8A Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.67 ±0.5

S8B Sets E-atten to 20 dB preamps off E-atten = 20 dB +9.83 ±0.5

S9A Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.83 ±0.5

S9B Controls in & out to low band preamps off E-atten = off +9.67 ±0.5

S11A Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

S11B Sets path for 1st or 2nd L.O. CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

S12A Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.83 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S12B Sets path for L.O. normal or CF 1 GHz +9.67 ±0.5

x2 for band 4

S13A Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz −9.67 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz +9.67

S13B Sets path for L.O. to either of the high band CF 5 GHz +9.83 ±0.5
mixers and L.O. output CF 20 GHz −9.83

S14A Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz −9.83 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz +9.83

S14B Sets path to either band 1 & 2 mixer or band CF 5 GHz +9.67 ±0.5
3 & 4 mixer CF 20 GHz −9.67

VCC1 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC2 Voltage always on 4.8 ±0.5

VCC3 Voltage always on 7.85 ±0.5

VCC4 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

VCC5 Voltage always on 5.0 ±0.5

TWAD1 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD2 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD3 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

218
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Table 5-10 Front End Control Logic

Test Point Description Instrument Vol tage Tolerance

Settings (VDC) (VDC)

TWAD4 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

TWAD5 Amplifier bias to A13 RF Front End 6.0 ±0.5

Assembly

Tolerances should be used as a guideline.

If any of the voltages measured are incorrect, the most probable cause is the
A15 Front End Control Assembly. Once the switch control logic has been
verified, turn off the instrument. Disconnect the RF Front End Troubleshooting
board cables, and reconnect the analyzer cables to the A15 Front End Control
Assembly. Turn the instrument on and allow it to complete its full boot up
process to Spectrum Analyzer mode.

Verifying SW1 and SW2 (Option MPB only)

SW1 and SW2 can be verified three different ways:
— “Click” Test
— Oscilloscope
— R.F. Signal Tracing

“Click” Test
This test changes between two different path modes. When this is done a
distinct “click” noise from SW1 and SW2 can be heard. Since both switches
switch at the same time, it is difficult to decipher if one is switching and the
other is not.
Press Mode, Preset on the analyzer. Press FREQ, 5 GHz, SPAN, 1 MHz,
AMPTD, More 1 of 2, uW Path Ctrl. Standard Path is the default. Select uW
Preselector Bypass and you should hear a distinct “click” noise if the control
logic from the A15 Front End Control board is getting to SW1 and SW2.

219
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Oscilloscope Test
Measurements can be made to verify the correct logic is getting to SW1 and
SW2 from the A15. In order to perform this measurement, the outer cover and
chassis RF bracket on the right hand side of the instrument must be removed.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures” for the removal
procedures.
Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 illustrate the measurement location
where the oscilloscope probe should be used to measure the logic. There are
two connector bodies (1) with three wires each (green, black and purple). One
connector goes to SW1 and the other to SW2, 3 wires to each switch.

Figure 5-5 SW1 and SW2 Connector Location

220
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 5-6 Connector Close-up

To verify the control logic, press Mode Preset on the analyzer. Press FREQ,
5 GHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, AMPTD, More 1 of 2, uW Path Ctrl. Standard Path is
selected by default. Carefully place the scope probe tip on the conductive
portion where the green wire goes into the connector, see Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7 Connector Detail

The voltage should be ~21.5 VDC steady state at this point. When you switch
from Standard Path to uW Preselector Bypass, you should see a negative going
pulse to 0 VDC on the oscilloscope for ~15 mS before the voltage returns to
~21.5 VDC steady state. The oscilloscope triggering may need to be adjusted
to see the negative going pulse. This can be tested on both connectors that
contain the green wire.

221
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Monitor the purple wires on each connector, one at a time. The purple wire
starts at ~21.5 VDC. When switching from uW Preselector Bypass to Standard
Path, you should see a negative going pulse to 0 VDC on the oscilloscope for
~15 mS before the voltage returns to ~21.5 VDC steady state.
If both the green wires and the purple wires measure this pulse correctly, the
control logic from the A15, Front End Controller board is operating correctly.
The black wire is ground.

RF Signal Tracing
Refer to Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” for this method of
troubleshooting if you are unable to use an oscilloscope

Verifying Narrowband IF Out (A15J900)

The outer cover and top shield need to be removed to verify A15J900 I.F.
output to the A2 Analog IF assembly. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” for the removal procedure. Press Mode, Spectrum
Analyzer, Mode Preset on the analyzer. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50
MHz, Freq, 50 MHz, Span, 0 Hz, Amptd, Attenuation, 10 dB, Amptd, More 1
of 2, Internal Preamp Off, System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Disconnect
the cable marked J900 that plugs into the top of the A15, Front End Controller
board and connect a functioning spectrum analyzer where the cable was
plugged in. J900's output should be 322.5 MHz at ~-28 dBm on the
functioning spectrum analyzer if the Front End Controller board is switching
this level correctly. If -28 dBm is not being measured correctly, remove the
cable labeled J902 from the Front End Controller board and measure the
output of that cable. This should also measure 322.5 MHz at ~-28 dBm. If the
output of the J902 cable measures correctly and yet the output of J900 is
incorrect, the most probable cause is the A15, Front End Controller board.
Reconnect all cables to their correct location when finished with the
measurements.

IMPORTANT When plugging in an mmcx connector, a distinct “snap” should be heard

when the cable is seated correctly.

222
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Verifying Wideband IF Out (A15J901, Options B40, B85, B1A, or B1X)

The outer cover and top shield need to be removed to verify A15J901 output.
Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement Procedures” for the removal
procedure. Press Mode, IQ Analyzer (Basic), Mode Preset on the analyzer.
Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz, Freq, 50 MHz, Amptd,
Attenuation, 10 dB, Amptd, More 1 of 2, Internal Preamp Off, System,
Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Disconnect the cable marked J901 that plugs
into the Front End Controller board and connect a functioning spectrum
analyzer where the cable was plugged in. J901's I.F. output will vary
depending on the I.F. path that is chosen. Press Mode Setup, IF Path and
select 40 MHz. If the switch path is working correctly in the A15 Front End
Controller board, the functioning spectrum analyzer should measure 250 MHz
at approximately -30 dBm.
If Options B85, B1A, or B1X are also present, press Mode Setup, IF Path and
select either 85 MHz, 125 MHz, or 140 MHz (whichever is present). If the
switch path is working correctly in the AI5 Front End Controller board, the
functioning spectrum analyzer should measure 300 MHz at approximately -30
dBm.
In order for these I.F. levels to measure correctly, the I.F. input at A15J902
must be correct. Refer to Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting”. Reconnect
all cables to their correct location when finished.

Verifying Aux IF Out, Rear Panel (Option CR3, CRP only)

The Aux I.F. output connector on the rear panel is installed on all analyzers
equipped with the EFEC version of the A15, however the actual Aux I.F. output
frequency will vary depending on the options installed. These options are all
enabled with a license key. The first step in verifying the Aux I.F. output is the
make sure the option is licensed by pressing System, Show, System on the
analyzer and make sure the option identifies itself in the table.
The I.F. switch path and frequency generation occurs on the A15, Front End
Controller board. This troubleshooting procedure provides the instrument
setups to verify options CR3 and CRP. Test the Aux I.F. output based on the
options installed in the analyzer.

Standard Analyzer
No test to perform.

223
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Verifying Option CR3

Press the following keys on the analyzer:
Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50
MHz, Freq, 50 MHz, Span, 0 Hz, System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off,
Input/Output, More 1 of 2, Output Config, Aux IF Out, Second IF
Connect the Aux I.F. Output on the rear panel to the RF Input of a functioning
spectrum analyzer. If the A15 Front End Controller is switching the I.F.
correctly, you should measure 322.5 MHz at −35 dBm ±3 dB as per Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 322.5 MHz

224
 Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

Verifying Option CRP

Press the following keys on the analyzer:
Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset, Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50
MHz, Freq, 50 MHz, Span, 0 Hz, System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off,
Input/Output, More 1 of 2, Output Config, Aux IF Out, Arbitrary IF.
The default is 70 MHz, which can be measured on a functioning spectrum
analyzer. The amplitude level should be −35 dBm ±3 dB as per Figure 5-9.
With the Arbitrary IF as the active function, you can vary the I.F. from 10 MHz
to 70 MHz in 500 kHz steps and measure the Aux IF output. The amplitude
level should remain fairly flat across the entire arbitrary IF output range.

Figure 5-9 70 MHz

225
Front End Control Troubleshooting
A15 Front End Control Assembly Troubleshooting

226
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

6 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is presented in this chapter:
1. Theory of operation of the IF section.
2. Isolating the cause of a hardware problem by verifying the functionality of
assemblies in the IF section signal path.
The analyzer can have one of three sets of IF hardware installed. The standard
25 MHz BW IF hardware supports analysis bandwidths up to 25 MHz. The
optional 40 MHz BW IF hardware supports analysis bandwidths up to 40 MHz.
The 40 MHz IF hardware is installed if any of the following options are installed:
— B40, 40 MHz Analysis Bandwidth
— MPB, Microwave Preselector Bypass
— DP2, Digital Processor & 2 GB Capture Memory
The ≥ 85 MHz BW IF hardware supports analysis bandwidths up to 160 MHz. It
also includes the 40 MHz BW IF hardware.

The following sections provide for each assembly a description of how the
assembly works and then gives information to help you troubleshoot the
assembly. Each description explains the purpose of the assembly,
describes the main components, and lists external connections to the
assembly.

227
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
What You Will Find in This Chapter

This following sections are found in this chapter:

25 MHz BW IF Section
A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Description on page 229
A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation on page 230
A2 Analog I.F. Troubleshooting on page 233
A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Description on page 240
A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation on page 241
A3 Digital I.F. Troubleshooting on page 243

40 MHz BW IF Section
A2 Analog IF Assembly Description on page 248
A2 Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation on page 249
A2 Analog IF Troubleshooting on page 252
A3 Digital IF Assembly Description on page 259
A3 Digital IF Assembly Theory of Operation on page 260
A3 Digital IF Troubleshooting on page 262

≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section
A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Description on page 270
A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation on page 270
A25 Wideband Troubleshooting on page 272
A26 140 MHz Wideband Digital IF Troubleshooting on page 275

228
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

25 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Description

The analyzer’s RF input signal is down converted to a 322.5 MHz intermediate
frequency in the A13 RF Front End Assembly. This 322.5 MHz signal is the
input to the A2 Analog I.F. Assembly. The Analog I.F. down converts the 322.5
MHz signal to a final 22.5 MHz intermediate frequency. In order to obtain
optimal dynamic range and minimize unwanted spurious signals, this signal is
filtered, amplified and attenuated throughout this assembly. The final 22.5
MHz signal goes through a series of variable band pass filters each having a
specific bandwidth. Three things determine the signal path and which filters
are chosen:
— Instrument resolution bandwidth (RBW) setting
— Application used
— Mode applied
This assembly contains the burst carrier trigger circuitry for performing mobile
communication measurements. The output of the assembly is a filtered 22.5
MHz signal that goes to the ADC on the A3 Digital I.F. Assembly.
Inputs to the A2
322.5 MHz signal (from either the A13 RF Front End Assembly or the A15
Front End Control Assembly)
LO Input (300 MHz signal from A16 Reference Assembly)
22.5 MHz Cal Comb Signal (from the A3 Digital I.F. Assembly)
Outputs from the A2
22.5 MHz signal (to A3 Digital I.F. Assembly)
RF Trigger Detector (to A3 Digital I.F. Assembly)

229
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation

Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams”.

Input Switch and Filter

A 322.5 MHz input signal is received from the A13 RF Front End Assembly.
For analyzers equipped with Option CR3 and/or CRP, the 322.5 MHz input
signal is routed from the A13 Front End Assembly to the IF MUX on the A15
Front End Control Assembly and from there to the A2 Analog IF Assembly.
The signal then goes through a band pass filter centered at 322.5 MHz with
a 25 MHz bandwidth. A cal comb signal can be automatically switched in at
the input of the assembly to calibrate the prefilters.
Step Attenuator and Amplifier
A 1 dB step attenuator follows to compensate for band gain differences.
The signal then goes through a high-dynamic range amplifier.
Image Filters
One of three different filter paths will be selected automatically, depending
on the analyzer mode.
• The through path is selected in IQ Analyzer Mode and wide-band
demod.
• The 12 MHz ceramic bandpass filter is used for normal Signal
Analyzer swept and FFT operation.
• The 300 kHz Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) is used for ACP modes.
Mixer
There are two mixers that reside on this assembly. The first mixer is used to
down convert the 322.5 MHz input to the final 22.5 MHz I.F. The other mixer
is described in the I.F. Comb Cal section.
3rd LO
The 300 MHz 3rd L.O. signal comes from the A16 Reference Assembly and
conditions it for use as an L.O. in the two mixers that reside on this
assembly. The third L.O. power is ~ +10 dBm to optimize the conversion
efficiency of the first mixer.
I.F. Comb Cal
The 2nd mixer is used to mix the 300 MHz L.O. from the Reference
Assembly with the 22.5 MHz cal comb signal from the A3 Digital I.F. to
allow calibration of the prefilters and overall passband phase and
amplitude. The signal is attenuated by 20 dB if necessary. A limiter is used
to reduce amplitude variation effects.

230
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Post Down Conversion Amplification and Prefiltering

The 22.5 MHz I.F. goes through a fixed gain amplifier. Then prefilters are
switched in and out. The signal then goes through a variable gain amplifier.
The prefilters provide four single-pole filters to limit the bandwidth of the
signal reaching the ADC on the A3 Digital I.F. assembly. There are five
different signal paths for the 22.5 MHz I.F. when using Signal Analyzer
swept mode:
1. LC wide
2. LC narrow
3. Crystal wide
4. Crystal narrow
5. Through path
The LC wide signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is 180
kHz to 390 kHz.
The LC narrow signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is 30
kHz to 160 kHz.
The Crystal wide signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
4.3 kHz to 27 kHz.
The Crystal narrow signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
< 3.9 kHz.
The through path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is 430 kHz and
greater in analyzer swept mode.

In IQ Analyzer mode or in Spectrum Analyzer mode with Sweep Type of

FFT, the analyzer span setting determines the pre-filter settings.

231
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Anti-Alias Filter and Final Amplifier

The anti-alias filters attenuate unwanted out-of-band noise and distortion
products. The first anti-alias filter is centered at 22.5 MHz and is 25 MHz
wide.
The signal can bypass the second anti-alias filter when the analyzer utilizes
either the IQ Analyzer swept, or wide-band demod.
The through path is selected when the image filter is in the 25 MHz mode
(for IQ Analyzer swept and wide-band demod)
In all other cases the signal will pass through the second 12 MHz anti-alias
filter.
The step gain block provides an additional switchable 10 dB gain to
overcome the ADC noise floor and provide an additional 2 dB of analyzer
sensitivity.
Burst Carrier Trigger
The Burst Carrier Trigger detector provides a binary signal to be used as a
trigger based on the presence of an RF input signal or not. The variable gain
amplifiers drive a detector and its output drives a comparator which
generates the trigger signal.

232
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog I.F. Troubleshooting

There are three steps to verify the A2 Analog I.F. Assembly.
— Measure the input power and frequency accuracy of the 322.5 MHz signal
(from the A13 RF Front End assembly or the A15 Front End Control
Assembly).
— Measure the output power and frequency accuracy of the 22.5 MHz signal
(to the A3 Digital I.F. Assembly)
— Measure the 300 MHz input LO signal (from the A16 Reference Assembly)

Verifying the 322.5 MHz Input Power

1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Remove instrument cover. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn on the N9020A Signal Analyzer and wait for the instrument to
complete the boot up process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
6. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm on the analyzer display by pressing
FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the N9020A. The marker
readout should be 50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dBm. If this reference signal is
measuring incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting”in this
service guide.
7. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the N9020A is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify that Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the input
attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer.

233
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

8. Carefully disconnect the W15 or W36 cable at A13J7 as shown in Figure

6-1.

Figure 6-1 A13 RF Front End Assembly - RF/Microwave Instruments

9. Connect A13J7 to a functioning spectrum analyzer using the appropriate

SMA connectors and cables.
10.Press Freq, 322.5 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer
11.The analyzer should read 322.5 MHz at −30 dBm ± 3 dBm as shown in
Figure 6-2.

234
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Figure 6-2 A13 322.5 MHz Output

If the 322.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, refer to
Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service guide.

Reconnect W15 at A13J7.

IMPORTANT Measuring at this location is for convenience. The 322.5 MHz signal is an
output at A13J7. Since the W15 cable connects from this output to the input
of the Analog I.F. assembly at A2J100, the small coaxial cable has not been
tested at this point. If the analyzer is equipped with either Option CR3 and/or
CRP, the 322.5 MHz signal will also be routed from A13J7 to A15J902 via
W36 and from A15J900 to A2J100 via W37.

235
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 22.5 MHz Output Power

1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Turn the instrument over so the bottom side of the analyzer is facing up.
3. Turn on the N9020A Signal Analyzer and wait for the instrument to
complete the boot up process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
6. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dBm. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service
guide.
7. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the N9020A is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify that Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the input
attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer.
8. Refer to Figure 6-3, carefully disconnect the W13 cable at A3J15.

Figure 6-3 A3 Digital I.F. Cables

236
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

9. Connect the W13 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer to verify the 22.5 MHz I.F. and amplitude
is correct.
10.Press Freq, 22.5 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.
11.The analyzer marker should read 22.5 MHz at −25 dBm ± 4 dBm as shown
in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 A2 Analog I.F. Output

If the 22.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, do not assume
the Analog I.F. is the most probable cause until the 3rd L.O. frequency and
power level have been verified below.
If the 22.5 MHz signal is within tolerance, carefully reconnect the W13 cable.

You should hear a distinct snap when reconnecting the W13 cable. If this
cable is not installed properly, intermittent signal fluctuations may occur
on the analyzer display.

237
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 300 MHz L.O. Input Power from the A16 Reference
Assembly
1. Refer to Figure 6-5, carefully disconnect the W14 at A2J300

Figure 6-5 A2 Analog I.F. Cables

2. Connect the W14 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer.
3. Press Freq, 300 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Amplitude, 10 dBm, Peak Search on
the functioning spectrum analyzer.

238
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

4. The analyzer marker should read 300 MHz at 10 dBm ± 3 dBm as shown in
Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 300 MHz L.O.

If the 300 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, see the A16
Reference Assembly troubleshooting section in this service guide. If the
300 MHz L.O. is measuring the correct power level and frequency and the
22.5 MHz signal is low, the most probable cause is the A2 Analog I.F. assembly.

239
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Description

The A3 Digital I.F. has circuitry that is needed to analyze complex
communication signals that can occupy up to 25 MHz of information
bandwidth. It digitizes the final 22.5 MHz I.F. from the A2 Analog I.F. board, by
processing the time domain continuous data into I/Q (in-phase and
quadrature) signals before sending the data to the A4 CPU assembly for further
processing and front panel display.
The Digital I.F. has the following main functions:
— Digitizes the final 22.5 MHz Intermediate Frequency
— 14 bit ADC with a 90 MHz sample rate
— DSP for standard spectrum analysis
— Capture memory for complex signals
— Noise Source Control
— Dither for final I.F.
— Provides the alignment sequence generator for wide band alignments
— Provides wide band Comb Calibration Signal
— Trigger interpolation and associated alignment

240
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital I.F. Assembly Theory of Operation

Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams.”.

Data Acquisition
The 22.5 MHz IF comes from the A2 Analog IF assembly. The input level to
the A3 Digital IF assembly is −25 dBm. The IF input has a 25 MHz
bandwidth centered at 22.5 MHz. The analog circuitry leading to the ADC
converts the singled ended signal from the Analog IF to differential required
by the ADC. In addition, it is part of a filter, part of which is on the AIF,
which improves distortion. Finally, it couples in the dither signal. The ADC is
a 14 bit device sampling continuously at 90 Ms/Second.
Rear Panel Triggers
The board has two trigger inputs and two trigger outputs all used via a BNC
connector. The trigger inputs are used when an external device has a
trigger signal and the user wants to use that external trigger to trigger the
signal analyzer. The trigger outputs are used to synchronize other pieces of
test equipment to the analyzer. These outputs are configurable through the
Input/Output menu via the front panel of the instrument.
The trigger inputs each allow trigger levels to be set from −5 to +5 volts
using the control DAC. The circuits have relatively high input impedance.
The trigger outputs have 50 Ω source impedance with TTL drive levels into
no load.
Control DAC
The control DAC is used to set trigger levels and the gain of the
reconstruction system. All three outputs can be adjusted from −2.5 to +2.5
volts.
Sample Rate Generator
The 10 MHz reference signal comes from the A16 Reference Assembly. This
signal is fairly high power at +10 dBm. The signal goes through a 10 MHz to
30 MHz tripler. A 0 to 5V 10 MHz square wave is generated. Capacitors
form a single-pole band pass filter to select the 3rd harmonic, 30 MHz.
The signal then passes through a 30 MHz to 90 MHz tripler. A 0 to 5V
30 MHz square wave is generated. Capacitors form a single-pole band pass
filter to select the 3rd harmonic, 90 MHz.

241
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

Noise Source Voltage Regulator

Various external noise sources can be connected to the rear panel of the
analyzer. These noise sources require a very accurate 28 volt DC power
supply.
The 28 volt BNC output connector is used with the 346 series noise sources.
The Smart Noise Source (SNS) interface includes power switching for the
28 volt and 15 volt power supply. In addition, it has buffers to interface to
the SNS I2C bus for control and read back of ENR data automatically. The
SNS connector is used with the SNS series noise sources.
DSP
The signal from the ADC is sent to the Digital Signal Processor.
Digital Bus Common Mode Filtering
The Digital Bus is a real time digital interface. It is sometimes referred to as
Messenger or LVDS. The implementation on the Digital IF is unidirectional,
meaning it can only source data, not receive it. Common mode filtering is
required to translate the digital ground referenced signals to analog ground
at the rear panel.

242
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital I.F. Troubleshooting

Verifying the 22.5 MHz Input Power
1. Perform an instrument shut down.
2. Remove the cover of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this service guide.
3. Turn the instrument over so that the bottom is facing up.
4. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
5. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off
6. Press Input, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz
7. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dBm. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting”, on page 137 in
this service guide.
8. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. (Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify Atten: 10 dB)

If the analyzer is not in 10 dB of input attenuation press AMPTD,

Attenuation, 10 dB.

243
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

9. Refer to Figure 6-7, carefully disconnect W13 at A3J15.

Figure 6-7 A3 Digital I.F. Cables

10.Connect the W13 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer.
11.Press Freq, 22.5 MHz Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

244
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

12.The analyzer should read 22.5 MHz at −25 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in Figure
6-8.

Figure 6-8 A3 Digital I.F. Input

If the 22.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, see “A2
Analog I.F. Troubleshooting” on page 233 in this service guide.

Verifying the 10 MHz Reference Input

1. Perform an instrument shut down.
2. Remove the cover of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures”, on page 435 in this service guide.
3. Turn the instrument over so that the bottom is facing up.
4. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
5. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
6. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
7. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dBm. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting”, on page 137 in
this service guide.

245
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

8. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. (Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify Atten: 10 dB)

If the analyzer is not in 10 dB of input attenuation press AMPTD,

Attenuation, 10 dB.

9. Refer to Figure 6-9, carefully disconnect W12 at A3J14.

Figure 6-9 A3 Digital I.F. Cables

10.Connect the W12 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer.
11.Press Freq, 10 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

246
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
25 MHz BW IF Section

12.The analyzer should read 10 MHz at +5 dBm ± 3 dBm as shown in Figure

6-10.

Figure 6-10 A3 Digital I.F. Reference Input

If the 22.5 MHz and 10 MHz signals measure the correct frequency and
amplitude and yet the display is not processing the signal properly, the
most probable causes are the A3 Digital IF or the A4 CPU. It is difficult to
separate these two assemblies given the architecture of the analyzer. Each
assembly will have to be tried to see which one is causing the failure.

247
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

40 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog IF Assembly Description

When the 10 MHz or 25 MHz IF Path is selected, or when any swept
measurement is made, the analyzer's RF input signal is down converted to a
322.5 MHz intermediate frequency in the A13 RF Front End Assembly. This
322.5 MHz signal is routed through the IF MUX on the A15 Front End Control
Assembly and then input to the A2 Analog I.F. Assembly.
The Analog I.F. down converts the 322.5 MHz signal to a final 22.5 MHz
intermediate frequency. In order to obtain optimal dynamic range and
minimize unwanted spurious signals, this signal is filtered, amplified and
attenuated throughout this assembly. The final 22.5 MHz signal goes through a
series of variable band pass filters each having a specific bandwidth. Three
things determine the signal path and which filters are chosen:
— Instrument resolution bandwidth (RBW) setting
— Application used
— Mode applied
This assembly contains one of the two burst carrier trigger (BCT) circuits for
performing mobile communication measurements. The BCT on the A2
assembly is relatively narrowband. The other BCT circuit is part of the IF MUX
on the A15 Front End Control Assembly and has a much wider bandwidth.
The output of the A2 assembly is a filtered 22.5 MHz signal that goes to one of
the two ADCs on the A3 Digital I.F. Assembly.
Inputs to the A2
322.5 MHz signal (from A15 Front End Control Assembly)
LO Input (300 MHz signal from A16 Reference Assembly)
22.5 MHz Cal Comb Signal (from the A3 Digital IF Assembly)
Outputs from the A2
22.5 MHz signal (to A3 Digital IF Assembly)
RF Trigger Detector (to A3 Digital IF Assembly)

248
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation

Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams”.

Input Switch and Filter

A 322.5 MHz input signal is received from the A15 Front End Control
Assembly. The signal then goes through a band pass filter centered at
322.5 MHz with a 25 MHz bandwidth. A comb cal signal can be
automatically switched in at the input of the assembly to calibrate the
prefilters.
Step Attenuator and Amplifier
A 1 dB step attenuator follows to compensate for band gain differences.
The signal then goes through a high-dynamic range amplifier.
Image Filters
One of three different filter paths will be selected automatically, depending
on the analyzer mode.
• The through path is selected in IQ Analyzer Mode and wide-band
demod.
• The 12 MHz ceramic bandpass filter is used for normal Signal
Analyzer swept and FFT operation.
• The 300 kHz Surface Acoustic Wave (SAW) is used for ACP modes.
Mixer
There are two mixers that reside on this assembly. The first mixer is used to
down convert the 322.5 MHz input to the final 22.5 MHz IF. The other mixer
is described in the IF Comb Cal section.
3rd LO
The 300 MHz 3rd LO signal comes from the A16 Reference Assembly and
conditions it for use as an LO in the two mixers that reside on this assembly.
The third LO power is ~ +10 dBm to optimize the conversion efficiency of the
first mixer.
IF Comb Cal
The 2nd mixer is used to mix the 300 MHz LO from the Reference Assembly
with the 22.5 MHz cal comb signal from the A3 Digital IF to allow
calibration of the prefilters and overall passband phase and amplitude. The
signal is attenuated by 20 dB if necessary.

249
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Post Down Conversion Amplification and Prefiltering

The 22.5 MHz IF goes through a fixed gain amplifier. Then prefilters are
switched in and out. The signal then goes through a variable gain amplifier.
The prefilters provide four single-pole filters to limit the bandwidth of the
signal reaching the ADC on the A3 Digital IF assembly. There are five
different signal paths for the 22.5 MHz IF when using Signal Analyzer swept
mode:
1. LC wide
2. LC narrow
3. Crystal wide
4. Crystal narrow
5. Through path
The LC wide signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
180 kHz to 390 kHz.
The LC narrow signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
30 kHz to 160 kHz.
The Crystal wide signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
4.3 kHz to 27 kHz.
The Crystal narrow signal path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is
< 3.9 kHz.
The through path is used when the analyzer Res BW setting is 430 kHz and
greater in analyzer swept mode.

In IQ Analyzer mode or in Spectrum Analyzer mode with Sweep Type of

FFT, the analyzer span setting determines the pre-filter settings.

250
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Anti-Alias Filter and Final Amplifier

The anti-alias filters attenuate unwanted out-of-band noise and distortion
products. The first anti-alias filter is centered at 22.5 MHz and is 25 MHz
wide.
The signal can bypass the second anti-alias filter when the analyzer utilizes
either the IQ Analyzer swept, or wide-band demod.
The through path is selected when the image filter is in the 25 MHz mode
(for IQ Analyzer swept and wide-band demod)
In all other cases the signal will pass through the second 12 MHz anti-alias
filter.
The step gain block provides an additional switchable 10 dB gain to
overcome the ADC noise floor and provide an additional 2 dB of analyzer
sensitivity.
Burst Carrier Trigger
The Burst Carrier Trigger detector provides a binary signal to be used as a
trigger based on the presence of an RF input signal or not. The variable gain
amplifiers drive a detector and its output drives a comparator which
generates the trigger signal.

251
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

A2 Analog IF Troubleshooting
There are three steps to verify the A2 Analog IF Assembly.
— Measure the input power and frequency accuracy of the 322.5 MHz signal
(from the A13 RF Front End assembly)
— Measure the output power and frequency accuracy of the 22.5 MHz signal
(to the A3 Digital IF Assembly)
— Measure the 300 MHz input LO signal (from the A16 Reference Assembly)

Verifying the 322.5 MHz Input Power

1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Remove instrument cover. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly Replacement
Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
6. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm on the analyzer display by pressing
FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker
readout should be 50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dB. If this reference signal is
measuring incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this
service guide.
7. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify that Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the input
attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer.

252
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

8. Carefully disconnect W37 cable at A15J900 as shown in Figure 6-11.

Figure 6-11 A15 RF Front End Control Assembly

9. Connect A15J900 to a functioning spectrum analyzer using the

appropriate MMCX connectors and cables.
10.Press Freq, 322.5 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

253
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

11.The analyzer should read 322.5 MHz at −23 dBm ± 3 dB as shown in Figure
6-12.

Figure 6-12 A15 322.5 MHz Output

If the 322.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, refer to
Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service guide.

Reconnect W37 to A15J900.

IMPORTANT Measuring at this location is for convenience. The 322.5 MHz signal is an
output at A15J900. Since the W37 cable connects from this output to the
input of the Analog I.F. assembly at A2J100, the small coaxial cable has not
been tested at the A2J100 end.

254
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 22.5 MHz Output Power

1. Perform an instrument shutdown.
2. Turn the instrument over so the bottom side of the analyzer is facing up.
3. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
6. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dB. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service
guide.
7. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify that Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the input
attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer.
8. Refer to Figure 6-13, carefully disconnect the W41 cable at A3J19.

Figure 6-13 A3 Digital IF Cables

255
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

9. Connect the W41 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer to verify the 22.5 MHz I.F. and amplitude
is correct.
10.Press Freq, 22.5 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.
11.The analyzer marker should read 22.5 MHz at −25 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in
Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14 A2 Analog IF Output

12.If the 22.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, do not
assume the Analog IF is the most probable cause until the 3rd LO
frequency and power level have been verified below.
13.If the 22.5 MHz signal is within tolerance, carefully reconnect the W41
cable to A3J19.

You should hear a distinct snap when reconnecting the W41 cable. If this
cable is not installed properly, intermittent signal fluctuations may occur
on the analyzer display.

256
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 300 MHz LO Input Power from the A16 Reference
Assembly
1. Refer to Figure 6-15, carefully disconnect the W14 at A2J300.

Figure 6-15 A2 Analog IF Cables

2. Connect the W14 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female adapter. Use
an appropriate cable to go from the SMA adapter to the RF input of a
functioning spectrum analyzer.
3. Press Freq, 300 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Amplitude, 10 dBm, Peak Search on
the functioning spectrum analyzer.

257
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

4. The analyzer marker should read 300 MHz at 10 dBm ± 3 dB as shown in

Figure 6-16.

Figure 6-16 300 MHz LO

5. If the 300 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, see the
A16 Reference Assembly troubleshooting section in this service guide.
6. If the 300 MHz LO is measuring the correct power level and frequency and
the 22.5 MHz signal is low, the most probable cause is the A2 Analog IF
assembly.

258
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital IF Assembly Description

The A3 Digital I.F. has circuitry that is needed to analyze complex
communication signals that can occupy up to 40 MHz of information
bandwidth. This assembly has two inputs:
1. The final 22.5 MHz I.F. from the A2 Analog I.F. for IF bandwidth paths up
to 25 MHz wide. This input is used for swept and FFT spectrum analysis.
2. The 250 MHz IF from the A15 Front End Control Assembly for IF
bandwid th of 40 MHz. If Option B85, B1A, or B1X is also installed, the 250
MHz IF will be routed to A3 via W53, A25, and W52.
Each input has a separate ADC that processes the time domain continuous
data into I/Q (in-phase and quadrature) signals before sending the data to the
A4 CPU assembly for further processing and front panel display.
The Digital I.F. has the following main functions:
— Digitizes the 22.5 MHz and the 250 MHz IF signals
— 16 bit ADC with a 100 MHz sample rate to digitize the 22.5 MHz IF
— 12 bit ADC with a 200 MHz sample rate to digitize the 250 MHz IF
— DSP for standard spectrum analysis
— Capture memory for complex signals
— Noise Source Control
— Dither for final I.F
— Provides the alignment sequence generator for wide band alignments
— Provides wide band Comb Calibration Signal
— Trigger interpolation and associated alignment

259
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital IF Assembly Theory of Operation

Refer to Chapter 11, “Block Diagrams”.

Data Acquisition
The 22.5 MHz IF comes from the A2 Analog IF assembly. The input level to
the A3 Digital IF assembly is −25 dBm when observing the 50 MHz
calibrator signal. The IF input has a 25 MHz bandwidth centered at
22.5 MHz. The analog circuitry leading to the ADC converts the singled
ended signal from the Analog IF to differential required by the ADC. In
addition, it is part of a filter, part of which is on the AIF, which improves
distortion. Finally, it couples in the dither signal. The ADC is a 16 bit device
sampling continuously at 100 Ms/second.
The 250 MHz IF comes from the A15 Front End Control assembly. The input
level is approximately -25 dBm when observing the 50 MHz calibrator
signal. The IF input has a 40 MHz bandwidth centered at 250 MHz. The
analog circuitry leading to the ADC converts the single-ended signal from
the Front End Control to differential required by the ADC. Finally, it couples
in the dither signal. The ADC is a 12-bit device sampling continuously at
200 Ms/second.
Rear Panel Triggers
The board has two trigger inputs and two trigger outputs all used via BNC
connectors on the rear panel. The trigger inputs are used when an external
device has a trigger signal and the user wants to use that external trigger to
trigger the signal analyzer. The trigger outputs are used to synchronize
other pieces of test equipment to the analyzer. These outputs are
configurable through the Input/Output menu via the front panel of the
instrument.
The trigger inputs each allow trigger levels to be set from −5 to +5 volts
using the control DAC. The circuits have relatively high input impedance.
The trigger outputs have 50 Ω source impedance with TTL drive levels into
no load.
DSP
The outputs of the ADCs go to the T2 digital FPGA. T2 links the ADC with
memory and the Feldspar DSP. T2 does all the swept SA DSP and
orchestrates measurements. It also provides outputs to the reconstruction
system. Feldspar is a DPSP ASIC which performs all the DSP for wide-band
applications.
Reconstruction

260
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Analog data from the digital FPGA, T2, is fed into a DAC that recreates an
analog signal. It can be either video or the demodulated audio. The signal
can be routed to the analyzer’s audio system (to listen to the demodulated
signals) or to the ANALOG OUT connector on the rear panel.
Clock Distribution
The 100 MHz reference from the A16 Reference Assembly feeds a power
divider. One output of the divider is buffered, doubled, and filtered to
generate the 200 MHz clock needed for ADC2, the ADC for the 40 MHz BW
path,. The remaining output of the power divider is attenuated and buffered
before being fed to the clock distribution IC. This IC generates all the other
clocks needed by the A3 Digital I.F. Assembly as well as the 10 MHz OUT
connector on the rear panel.
Noise Source Voltage Regulator
Various external noise sources can be connected to the rear panel of the
analyzer. These noise sources require a very accurate 28 volt DC power
supply.
The 28 volt BNC output connector is used with the 346 series noise sources.
The Smart Noise Source (SNS) interface includes power switching for the
28 volt and 15 volt power supply. In addition, it has buffers to interface to
the SNS I2C bus for control and read back of ENR data automatically. The
SNS connector is used with the SNS series noise sources.
Digital Bus Common Mode Filtering
The Digital Bus is a real time digital interface. It is sometimes referred to as
Messenger or LVDS. The implementation on the Digital IF is unidirectional,
meaning it can only source data, not receive it. Common mode filtering is
required to translate the digital ground referenced signals to analog ground
at the rear panel.

261
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

A3 Digital IF Troubleshooting
Verifying the 22.5 MHz Input Power
1. Perform an instrument shutdown.
2. Remove the cover of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn the instrument over so that the bottom side of the analyzer is facing
up.
4. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
5. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off
6. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz
7. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dB. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service
guide.
8. To continue verifying press SPAN, Zero Span. Verify the input attenuator
on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display near the
center and verify Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the input
attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer.

262
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

9. Refer to Figure 6-17, carefully disconnect W41 cable at A3J19.

Figure 6-17 A3 Digital IF Cables

10.Connect the W41 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female connector.
Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the RF input of
a functioning spectrum analyzer to verify the 22.5 MHz I.F. signal
frequency and amplitude is correct.
11.Press Freq, 22.5 MHz Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

263
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

12.The analyzer should read 22.5 MHz at −25 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in Figure
6-18.

Figure 6-18 22.5 MHz IF Input

13.If the 22.5 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, see “A2
Analog I.F. Troubleshooting” on page 233 in this service guide.
14.If the 22.5 MHz signal is within tolerance, carefully reconnect the W41
cable to A3J19.

264
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 250 MHz IF Input Power (Option B40 only)

Perform this procedure only if the analyzer is equipped with Option B40,
Analysis Bandwidth, 40 MHz

1. Perform an instrument shutdown.

2. Remove the cover of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn the instrument over so that the bottom side of the analyzer is facing
up.
4. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
5. Press Mode, IQ Analyzer (Basic), Mode Setup, IF Path, 40 MHz.
6. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
7. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
8. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm by pressing FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN,
1 MHz, Peak Search on the analyzer. The marker readout should be
50 MHz at −25 dBm ± 3 dB. If this reference signal is measuring
incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this service
guide.
9. To continue verifying press Meas, IQ Waveform. Verify the input
attenuator on the analyzer is set to 10 dB. Look near the top of the display
near the center and verify Atten: 10 dB is visible. If needed change the
input attenuator by pressing AMPTD, Attenuation, 10 dB on the analyzer

265
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

10.Refer to Figure 6-19, carefully disconnect W38 or W52.

Figure 6-19 A3 Digital IF Cables

11.Connect the W38 or W52 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female
connector. Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the
RF input of a functioning spectrum analyzer to verify the 250 MHz I.F.
signal frequency and amplitude is correct.
12.Press Freq, 250 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

266
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

13.The analyzer marker should read 250 MHz at −30 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in
Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20 250 MHz IF Input

14.If the 250 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level and neither
of Options B85, B1A, or B1X are present, see Chapter 5, “Front End Control
Troubleshooting” in this service guide. If the 250 MHz signal is not
measuring the correct power level and either Option B85, B1A, or B1X is
installed, see “A25 Wideband Troubleshooting” later in this chapter.
15.If the 250 MHz signal is within tolerance, carefully reconnect the W38 or
W52 cable to A3J15.

You should hear a distinct snap when reconnecting the cable. If this cable
is not installed properly, intermittent signal fluctuations may occur on the
analyzer display.

267
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

Verifying the 100 MHz Reference Input

1. Perform an instrument shutdown.
2. Remove the cover of the analyzer. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn the instrument over so that the bottom side of the analyzer is facing
up.
4. Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
5. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
6. Press Input/Output, RF calibrator, 50 MHz.
7. Refer to Figure 6-21, carefully disconnect W42 or W54 cable at A3J14.

Figure 6-21 A3 Digital IF Cables

8. Connect the W42 or W54 cable to the MMCX female to SMA female
connector. Use an appropriate cable to go from the SMA connector to the
RF input of a functioning spectrum analyzer to verify the 100 MHz
reference frequency and amplitude is correct.
9. Press AMPTD, Ref Level, 20 dBm, Freq, 100 MHz, Span, 1 MHz, Peak
Search on the functioning spectrum analyzer.

268
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
40 MHz BW IF Section

10.The analyzer marker should read 100 MHz at +10 dBm ± 4 dB as shown in
Figure 6-22.

Figure 6-22 100 MHz Reference Input

11.If the 100 MHz signal is measuring incorrectly, see Chapter 7, “L.O.
Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting” in this service guide.
12.If the 22.5 MHz IF, 250 MHz IF (if appropriate) and 100 MHz reference
signals measure the correct frequency and amplitude and yet the display
is not processing the signal properly, the most probable causes are the A3
Digital IF or the A4 CPU. It is difficult to separate these two assemblies
given the architecture of the analyzer. Each assembly will have to be tried
to see which one is causing the failure.

269
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Description

The analyzer's RF input signal is down converted to a 300 MHz intermediate
frequency by the A13 Front End assembly and routed through the A15 Front
End controller to A15J901. Cable W53 connects A15J901 to the input of the
A25 Wideband Analog IF at J101. The signal is filtered, attenuation and gain
applied based upon the instrument settings. This signal is then sampled by the
ADC and the resultant data is the sent to the A26 Wideband Digital IF for
processing via the J2 ribbon cable. The A26 Wideband Digital IF has no service
accessible locations and should be troubleshot from the front panel controls.
Inputs to the A25 Assembly
A25J101 300 MHz IF signal (from A15J901 Front End Controller)
A25J301 2400 MHz reference from A16 Reference Assembly via W34 cable
A25J805 Step Calibrator from A3J17 40 MHz Digital IF via W45 cable
Outputs from the A25 Assembly
A25J302 2400 MHz Reference Out
A25J102 300 MHz IF Out to A3J15 of the 40 MHz Digital IF
A25J806 50 MHz Comb Out to A16 Reference assembly A16J726 via W56
cable
A25J2 ADC Data to 140 MHz Digital IF A26J504 via W44 cable

A25 Wideband Analog IF Assembly Theory of Operation

The A25 Wideband Analog IF assembly primary role is to properly filter and
apply attenuation or gain to optimize the level going to the ADC and provide
sufficient pre-filtering to reject images that would otherwise interfere with the
signal of interest. Precision alignments are used to calibrate the filters,
attenuators and gain of this assembly. It is not uncommon that the reported
failure will come from failures reported when an alignment fails for this
assembly. The alignment history file is a good indicator of a failure for this
assembly. This file is a text file that can be edited with Notepad. The file is
located in the following location:
E:\AlignDataStore\AlignmentHistory.txt
This file will list all alignments that have passed or failed. Alignments reporting
a failure of the WBAIF assembly can in many cases be attributed to failure of
this assembly. If however these errors follow errors in the RF section of the
instrument, it is possible that additional WBAIF error will appear due to
missing RF Calibration signals and not related to the A25 Wideband IF
assembly.

270
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

Manually troubleshooting the assembly is basically verifying the 300 MHz IF

signal is present and at the proper level. In addition you will want to verify input
and output levels of the various calibration and reference signals.
Additionally, the A25 Analog IF has a built in RF Burst Trigger that is available
when either the 85 MHz, 125 MHz, 140 MHz, or 160 MHz IF path is selected

271
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

A25 Wideband Troubleshooting

Verify the 300 MHz IF Input level
1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn on the N9020A Signal Analyzer and wait for the instrument to
complete the boot up process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Mode, IQ Analyzer
6. Press Meas, Complex Spectrum
7. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz
8. Press Mode Setup, IF Path, 85, 120, or 140 MHz
9. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm on the analyzer display by pressing
FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the N9020A. The marker
readout should be 50 MHz at −25 dBm ±3 dB. If this reference signal is
measuring incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this
service guide.
10.Connect A25J02 to a known good spectrum analyzer. Tune the spectrum
analyzer to 300 MHz.This port switches the 300 MHz IF that is input to the
A25 Wideband Analog IF to be routed to the A3J16 40 MHz Digital IF. If

272
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

this −30 dBm ±3 dB signal is present, you have verified the 300 MHz IF
from the A15J901 Front End Controller. If this signal is not present, verify
the signal is present on A15J901 of the A15 Front End Controller.

273
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

Verify the 2400 MHz Frequency Reference

1. Turn the instrument off.
2. Remove the instrument cover. Refer to Chapter 14, “Assembly
Replacement Procedures” in this service guide.
3. Turn on the N9020A Signal Analyzer and wait for the instrument to
complete the boot up process.
4. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
5. Press Mode, IQ Analyzer
6. Press Meas, Complex Spectrum
7. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz
8. Press Mode Setup, IF Path, 85, 125, or 140 MHz
9. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm on the analyzer display by pressing
FREQ, 50 MHz, SPAN, 1 MHz, Peak Search on the N9020A. The marker
readout should be 50 MHz at −25 dBm ±3 dB. If this reference signal is
measuring incorrectly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section Troubleshooting” in this
service guide.
10.Connect a known good spectrum analyzer to A25J302. Verify reference
signal at 2400 MHz at a level of −30 dBm.

274
 Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

A26 140 MHz Wideband Digital IF Troubleshooting

Verify the 300 MHz IF Input level
The A26 Digital IF has a single accessible input at A25J2. It is not advisable to
disconnect this cable and make measurements. Normally failure of this
assembly will occur during extensive alignments. Verify if there are alignment
error related to the WBDIF located in the
E:\AlignDataStore\AlignmentHistrory.txt files.
If errors are found related to WBDIF replace the A26 Wideband Digital IF
assembly. To troubleshoot this module set the instrument up as below:
1. Turn on the N9020A Signal Analyzer and wait for the instrument to
complete the boot up process.
2. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off.
3. Press Mode, IQ Analyzer
4. Press Meas, Complex Spectrum
5. Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz
6. Press Span, 10 MHz
7. Press Mode Setup, IF Path, 85, 125, or 140 MHz
8. Verify the 50 MHz signal is at −25 dBm on the analyzer display by pressing
Peak Search on the N9020A. The marker readout should be 50 MHz at
−25 dBm ±3 dB.
9. If this signal is not present, determine if the issue is only present with the
Wideband 85, 125, or 140 MHz path. Press Mode Setup, IF Path, 40 MHz.
If the signal is now present, there is a likely failure of the A26 Wideband
Digital IF or the A25 Wideband Analog IF

275
Analog/Digital IF Troubleshooting
≥ 85 MHz BW IF Section

276
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

7 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is found in this chapter:
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Description on page 278
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Theory of Operation on page 279
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting on page 280
A16 Reference Assembly Description on page 288
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting on page 291

277
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Description

A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Description

Purpose
The L.O. Synthesizer assembly provides the 1st Local Oscillator to the A13 RF
Front End Assembly for RF conversion. This assembly has the following inputs
and outputs:
— Power Supply inputs
— Serial Bus input for L.O. Control
— Sweep input for L.O. Control
— 4800 MHz input signal from A16 Reference Assembly
— 1st L.O. output signal to A13 RF Front End Assembly
The input signal to the L.O. Synthesizer Assembly is a 4800 MHz signal that is
generated on the A16 Reference Assembly. The 1st L.O. is then phase locked
to this 4800 MHz reference, which is then phase locked back to the 10 MHz
reference located on the A16 Reference Assembly. The quality of the phase
lock design that locks the 1st L.O. has a direct relationship on the overall
stability of the analyzer. Users can also provide their own external reference.
The frequency accuracy of the user frequency reference is directly related to
the overall frequency accuracy of the signal analyzer.
The 1st L.O. has a tuning range from 3.8 GHz to 8.7 GHz and an output power
from +13 to +18 dBm. The RF input signal mixes with the 1st L.O. in one of
three possible mixers on the RF Front End Assembly. For more detailed
description on the RF Front End Assembly, see Chapter 4, “RF Section
Troubleshooting” in this service guide.

278
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Theory of Operation

A14 L.O. Synthesizer Theory of Operation

The main oscillator is a low frequency Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO) that
has a frequency range from 570 MHz to 1150 MHz. This VCO has low-phase
noise that is multiplied to the desired 1st LO frequency range.
This VCO/Multiplier technology uses built-in filters after each multiplier to
suppress the undesired harmonics. The resultant output has enough power
with a wide enough frequency range to measure RF input signals up to
26.5 GHz.

Brief Description of the Major Blocks:

— The Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) L.O. Controller has the
capability to perform automatic pretune update, unlock detection, reference
signal phase adjustment, and automatic segment sequencing using block
RAM and its segment state machine.
— The fractional-N divider performs frequency division of the feedback VCO
signal.
— The VCO is a low noise, voltage control oscillator multiplied up to the actual
LO frequency. This wide-band oscillator features isolated input ports,
allowing the main tune port and the FM tune port to be formed. It has more
than an octave of tuning range with relatively flat tuning sensitivity.
— The LO Multiplier is a frequency multiplier with switched filters and
amplifiers to produce the required output frequency.

279
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process. There are (6) processes to perform, which will verify the L.O.
Synthesizer Assembly is functioning properly:
— Press Freq, 50 MHz, SPAN, Zero Span. LED's DS1-DS3 located near the top
of the board next to J10 should all be off. See LED location in Figure 7-1
below.
— Press System, Alignments, Align Now, All. If the alignment functions
correctly with no error messages on the analyzer display, most of the board
is working properly.
— Measure 4800 MHz Input frequency (from A16 Reference Assembly)
— Measure 4800 MHz Input Power (from A16 Reference Assembly)
— Measure L.O. Output Power.
— Measure L.O. Output Frequency.
These items can be checked with a functioning spectrum analyzer using cables
and connectors that function well up to 10 GHz.

Figure 7-1 A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

280
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Verifying the 4800 MHz Input Power & Frequency Stability:

— Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
— Press FREQ, 4.2 GHz, SPAN, Zero Span.
— Disconnect A14W6 cable at A14J200 (see Figure 7-2).

DS2 and DS3 will illuminate when the W6 cable is removed. This is normal.

— Connect A14W6 cable end to the RF input of the functioning spectrum

analyzer.

Figure 7-2 W4 and W6 Location

281
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

— The analyzer marker should read 4800 MHz at +4.5 dBm ± 2 dB as shown in
Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 4800 MHz Wide Span

282
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

— Verify the 4800 MHz input signal from the A16 Reference Assembly is stable
by pressing SPAN, 50 kHz, BW, 1 kHz. The signal on the functioning
spectrum analyzer should be very stable both in frequency and power as
shown in Figure 7-4.
— Reconnect the W6 cable to A14J200.

Figure 7-4 4800 MHz Narrow Span

If the 4800 MHz signal is not measuring the correct power level, see the
“A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting” section later in this chapter.

283
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Verifying the 1st L.O. Output Power:

— Turn on the analyzer and wait for the instrument to complete the boot up
process.
— If the analyzer has Option 503, press FREQ, 600 MHz, Span, Zero Span.
If the analyzer does not have Option 503 press FREQ, 4.2 GHz, SPAN, Zero
Span.
— Refer to Figure 7-1, disconnect A14W4 cable at A14J740.
— Connect A14J740 1st LO output to the RF input of the functioning spectrum
analyzer using a cable that will function up to 10 GHz.
— Press Frequency, 4.5225 GHz (if the analyzer does not have Option 503) or
Frequency 5.7225 GHz (if the analyzer has Option 503), Span, 5 MHz, Peak
Search on the functioning spectrum analyzer. If the functioning spectrum
analyzer has a preselector peak or preselector centering function, perform
that operation to guarantee the preselector is optimized for the
measurement.
— The analyzer marker should read 4.5225 GHz or 5.7225 GHz at +16.55 dBm
± 3 dB as shown in Figure 7-5.

284
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Figure 7-5 4.5225 GHz 1st L.O. Measurement

If the 4.5225 GHz or 5.7225 GHz signal is not measuring the correct power
level, the LO Synthesizer assembly is the most probable cause.

Continue changing the center frequency of the analyzer as per Table 7-1 and
measure the LO output expected frequency and power using the functioning
spectrum analyzer.

Perform the preselector peak or preselector centering on the functioning

spectrum analyzer if any of the expected 1st L.O. power levels are not
within tolerance.

285
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Table 7-1

Center Frequency of analyzer Expected 1st L.O. Frequency Expected 1st L.O. Power (dBm)
(MHz) (GHz) @A14J704 @A14J704

4200a 4.5225 +16.5 ± 3 dB

4300a 4.6225 +16 ± 3 dB

600 5.7225 +16 ± 3 dB

700 5.8225 +16 ± 3 dB

(see Figure 7-6)

2100 7.2225 +16 ± 3 dB

2200 7.3225 +16 ± 3 dB

(see Figure 7-7)

a. Does not apply to analyzers with Option 503.

286
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A14 L.O. Synthesizer Troubleshooting

Figure 7-6 5.8225 GHz 1st L.O. Measurement

Figure 7-7 7.3225 GHz 1st L.O. Measurement

287
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Description

A16 Reference Assembly Description

Purpose
The A16 Reference Assembly provides the fundamental reference signals from
which all instrument local oscillator and synchronous timing signals are
derived The reference board also uses these same signals to generate CW and
modulated RF calibration signals and a 10 MHz time base signal for the
instrument
For analyzers with serial prefixes ≥ MY/SG/US5233, or any with Option B85,
B1A, or B1X the Reference assembly must be replaced as a single assembly,
although it is constructed of two boards, the A16 Reference Main board and
A16A1 Reference Daughter board. These boards are listed individually in the
Show Hardware screen, allowing identification of the individual board part
numbers comprising the complete assembly.
The reference signals and local oscillators can be phase locked to a timebase
in one of two ways:
1. The internal 10 MHz reference located on the A16 Main Board.
2. An externally provided reference such as a house standard or the reference
from another instrument or a base transceiver system. The external
reference can be any RF signal in the range of 1 MHz to 50 MHz, -5 dBm to
+10 dBm.
If an external reference signal is within 200 Hz of the specified external
reference frequency and Freq Ref In is set to Sense, the analyzer will
automatically switch from SENSE:INT to SENSE:EXT.
The frequency accuracy of the analyzer is directly tied to the accuracy of the
frequency reference that is being used.
Diagnostic LEDs monitor the status of the various PLLs on the A16 Reference
Assembly.

288
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Description

Table 7-2 A16 Reference Assembly Signals

Signal Description From Location Originates From To Location Purpose

External Reference Input Input from User n/a A16704 Phase Lock analyzer with
(1 to 50 MHz, user reference.
-5 dBm to +10 dBm)

10 MHz Out DIF A16J710 10 MHz Reference A3J14a Used as a reference to

other assemblies
throughout the
instrument.

50 MHz Align Signal A16J701 100 MHz VCXO/2 A9, Cal Signal 50 MHz Low band
Input, Input alignment signal.
Attenuator A.

4800 MHz Align Signal A16J701 2.4 GHz VCXO x 2 A9, Cal Signal 4.8 GHz High band
or 100 MHz VCXO Input, Input alignment signal
x 48 Attenuator A.

50 MHz Ecal/300 MHz A16J705 100 MHz A13J6, RF 50 MHz Cal Signal or
Comb Output VCXO/2, 100 MHz Front End 300 MHz Comb for
VCXO x 3 Assembly wideband I.F. phase
linearity

100 MHz A16J706 100 MHz A3J14b Used as a reference to

1st LO VCXO other assemblies
throughout the
instrument.

100 MHz A16J707 100 MHz Not used Reserved for future use.
Ref A VCXO

100 MHz A16J716 100 MHz A3J14c Frequency reference for

Ref B VCXO A3 Digital IF (DIF)
assembly. Divided by 10
on DIF to provide 10 MHz
OUT on rear panel.

100 MHz A16J707 100 MHz Not used Reserved for future use.
Ref Cd VCXO

300 MHz LO AIF A16J711 100 MHz A2J300 Used as 3rd LO on A2

VCXO x 3 Analog IF (AIF) assembly

2.4 GHz Ref A16J718d or 2.4 GHz VCXO or A25J301 Reference for A25
100 MHz VCXO x Wideband Digital IF
A16J715e
24 (WDIF)

4.8 GHz 2nd LO A16J702 2.4 GHz VCXO x 2 A13J1 2nd LO for A13 Front End
or 100 MHz VCXO assembly, downconvert
x 48 low band 1st IF to 322.5
MHz 2nd IF

289
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Description

Table 7-2 A16 Reference Assembly Signals

Signal Description From Location Originates From To Location Purpose

4.8 GHz 1st LO Ref A16J703 2.4 GHz VCXO x 2 A14J4 4GHz reference for Offset
or 100 MHz VCXO Loop, only used in
x 48 Dual-Loop operation

a. The 10 MHz signal from A16J713 is used a reference for the standard A3 Digital IF, which supports
analysis bandwidths up to 25 MHz.
b. The 100 MHz signal from A16J706 is used as the reference for the optional A3 Digital IF which sup-
ports analysis bandwidths up to 40 MHz on analyzers with serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233. This A3 is
used on analyzers with Options B40, MPB, or DP2.
c. The 100 MHz signal from A16J716 is used as the reference for the optional A3 Digital IF which sup-
ports analysis bandwidths up to 40 MHz on analyzers with serial prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233. This A3 is
used on analyzers with Options B40, B85, B1A, B1X, MPB, or DP2.
d. Serial prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233 or any with Option B85, B1A, or B1X.
e. Serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233 and none of the following options; B85, B1A, or B1X.

290
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

In order to measure signals on analyzers with serial prefix <
MY/SG/US5233, you will need to remove the rear panel. Refer to “Rear
Panel” removal procedure on page 485 for details.

If the A16 Reference Assembly is suspect, verify the reference signals, local
oscillator output frequencies, and power levels as per Table 7-2 using a
functioning spectrum analyzer.
The board layout in Figure 7-8, Figure 7-9, and Figure 7-10 (depending on
serial prefixes) below identifies the input and output connectors and LEDs on
the A16 Reference Assembly.
If these outputs measure correctly, the A16 Reference Assembly is functioning
correctly. If not, the Reference Assembly is the most probable cause provided
the power supply is operating correctly. Refer to “A7 Midplane Assembly
Troubleshooting” on page 325 if the power supplies are suspect.

Figure 7-8 A16 Reference Assembly, Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US/5233

291
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-9 A16 Reference LEDs, Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US5233

Figure 7-10 A16 Reference Assembly Layout, Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233

292
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Table 7-3 A16 Reference Assembly Signal Measurement Details

Signal Signal Expected Expected Power Special Instrument Figure

Description Location Frequency Level Cond itions
(MHz) (dBm)

50 MHz A16J705 50 MHz −26 to −29 dBm While monitoring A16J705 Figure
Ecal Out typical output, place functioning 7-11
spectrum analyzer in Max
Hold. Press System,
Alignments, Align
Now, All on MXA.
4.8 GHz A16J702 4800 MHz +10 dBm ± 2 dB Press Freq, 1 GHz, Figure
2nd LO Out Span, Zero Span on 7-12
MXA

4.8 MHz A16J703 4800 MHz +4 dBm Press Freq, 50 MHz, Figure
1st LO Ref Out Span, Zero Span, 7-13
Meas Setup, PhNoise
Opt, Best Close in
PNoise on MXA
50 MHz Ref Out A16J701 50 MHz −25 dBm Press Input/Output, RF Figure
Calibrator, 50 MHz on 7-14
MXA

4.8 GHz Ref A16J701 4800 MHz −28 dBm Press Input/Output, RF Figure
Out Calibrator, 4.8 GHz on 7-15
MXA

2.4 GHz Ref A16J718 2400 MHz +10 dBma or Figure

Out -12.5 to 7-16 or
-15.5 dBmb Figure
7-17
300 MHz A16J711 300 MHz +10 dBm Figure
LO AIF 7-18
100 MHz Ref A16J706 100 MHz +13 dBm Figure
b 7-19
Output

100 MHz Ref B A16J716 100 MHz +13 dBm Figure

Outa 7-20
10 MHz A16J710 10 MHz +7 dBm Figure
Outputc 7-21
a. Use on units serial prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233 with any of the following options: B40, MPB, DP2 or any
units with any of the following options: B85, B1A, B1X
b. Used on units serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233 with any of the following options: B40, MPB, DP2 and
without any of the following options: B85, B1A, B1X
c. Used in units without any of the following options: B40, DP2, MPB

293
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-11 50 MHz Ecal Out

Figure 7-12 4.8 GHz 2nd LO Out

294
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-13 4.8 GHz 1st LO Ref Out

Figure 7-14 50 MHz Ref Out

295
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-15 4.8 GHz Ref Out

Figure 7-16 2.4 GHz Ref Output (Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233)

296
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-17 2.4 GHz Reference Out (Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233)

Figure 7-18 300 MHz LO AIF

297
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-19 100 MHz Ref Out

Figure 7-20 100 MHz Ref B Out

298
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Figure 7-21 10 MHz Output

299
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Diagnostic LEDs
Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233
There are two sets of diagnostics LEDs on the A16 Reference Assembly. Six
LEDs are on the right side of the A16 Reference Main board and five LEDs are
on the A16A1 Reference Daughter board. Refer to Figure 7-9. Table 7-4 lists
the diagnostic LEDs and what their status indicates.
A blinking red LED typically indicates that an unleveled condition exists. The
number of blinks indicates what circuitry is unleveled, as indicated in Table
7-4.
Table 7-4 A16 Reference Assembly Diagnostic LEDs

LED Number Color Description Status

A16DS1 Yellow When Program Code is loading On=Loading code from EEPROM
Off=Ready

A16DS6 Red 100 MHz Unlocked On=100 MHz VCXO is unlocked

1 Blink = 4.8 GHz calibrator unleveled
2 Blinks = 50 MHz calibrator unleveled
3 Blinks = 300 MHz LO_AIF unleveled
Off=Normal (locked)

A16DS7 Green Is the 100 MHz PLL Unlocked? On=Normal (locked)

Off=Fault (unlocked)

A16DS8 Green Is the 100 MHz VCXO working? On=Yes (alive)

Off=Fault (not alive)

A16DS9 Green Is Internal 10 MHz Reference On? On=Yes (enabled)

Off=No (disabled; Ext Ref Mode)

A16DS10 Green Is the +15V Standby supply working? On=Yes (+15 Standby supply is on)
Off=No

A16A1DS2 Red When 2.4 or 4.8 GHz frequency is low On=Fault (output frequency is low)
2 Blinks = 2.4 GHz Ref ALC unleveled
3 Blinks = 300 MHz Ref ALC unleveled
Off=Normal

A16A1DS3 Red When 2.4 or 4.8 GHz frequency is high On=Fault (output frequency is high)
2 Blinks = 4.8 GHz LO ALC unleveled
3 Blinks = 2.4 GHz LO ALC unleveled
Off=Normal

A16A1DS4 Green Is the 2.4 GHz reference PLL locked? On=Normal (locked)
Off=Fault (unlocked)

A16A1DS5 Green Is the 2.4 GHz VCXO working? On=Yes (alive)

Off=Fault (not alive)

A16A1DS6 Yellow When Program Code is loading On=Loading code from EEPROM
Off=Ready

300
 L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233

The diagnostic LEDs are located near the oven oscillator near the right side of
the board. Refer to Figure 7-10. Table 7-5 lists the diagnostic LEDs and what
their status indicates.
Table 7-5 LED Activity

LED Number Description Status

DS1 When Program Code is Loading On=Loading code from EEPROM

Off=Ready

DS2 When 4.8 GHz Frequency is Low On=Fault (Output Frequency too low)
Off=Normal

DS3 When 4.8 GHz Frequency is High On=Fault (Output Frequency too high)
Off=Normal

DS4 Is the 4.8 GHz Reference PLL Locked? On=Normal

Off=Fault

DS5 Is the 4.8 GHz Vtune Optimized? On=Vtune centered in range

Off=Vtune off center. No real fault

DS6 Is the 100 MHz PLL Unlocked? On=Fault

Off=Normal

DS7 Is the 100 MHz PLL Locked? On=Normal

Off=Fault

DS8 Is the 100 MHz Out being properly On=Normal

Detected? Off=Fault

DS9 Opt. PFR Out Enabled On=Internal PFR enabled

Off= Internal PFR disabled (Ext. Ref. Mode)

301
L.O. Synthesizer/Reference Troubleshooting
A16 Reference Assembly Troubleshooting

302
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

8 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

Each section first describes how the assembly works, then gives
information to help you troubleshoot the assembly. Each description
explains the purpose of the assembly, describes the main components,
and lists external connections to the assembly.

This following sections are found in this chapter:

A4 CPU Description on page 304
A5 Disk Drive on page 306
Troubleshooting software related issues on page 308
Reloading the X-Series Software on page 309
Disk Drive Recovery Process on page 310
Replacing the instrument disk drive on page 311

303
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
A4 CPU Description

A4 CPU Description
If the CPU board is suspect in an instrument failure, a full description of the
instrument boot process is described in Chapter 2, “Boot Up and Initialization
Troubleshooting”.

Disk Drive
The A5 Disk Drive assembly is contained within the A4 CPU board assembly
and is replaced as an individual assembly. Also, when the A4 CPU board
assembly is replaced the existing A5 Disk Drive assembly will be used.

Front Panel Interface

The instrument USB bus is the electrical interface to the instrument front
panel. One of the USB ports on the host controller hub located on the A4 CPU
board assembly is routed to the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board for this use.
The port is a High Speed USB (2.0) compliant port.

Graphics Controller
The entire graphics subsystem is contained within a single chip, along with the
interface logic to map memory from main system memory for the video RAM.
There are two outputs of the graphics controller that are used by the
instrument. One provides the LCD video data to drive the internal instrument
LCD display and the other supplies the rear panel VGA output.

Power Supply Control

The power control line from the front panel momentary power switch connects
to the A4 CPU board assembly. When the front panel power switch is turned on
the A4 CPU board assembly pulls the PS_ON line to the A6 Power Supply
assembly to a TTL low level, which tells the power supply to turn on. Once the
+12V D, +5.1V D, and +3.35V D supplies are all on and within specification the
A6 Power Supply assembly pulls the PWROK_H line to a TTL high state, which
then causes the A4 CPU board to come out of reset and boot-up.
Outputs from the A4 CPU board assembly also drive the two front panel power
state LEDs.
Provisions have also been made to allow the CPU board to remember which
power state it was in when a power failure occurs. The instrument will return to
the same power state after a power failure.

304
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
A4 CPU Description

Rear Panel Connectivity

The A4 CPU board assembly has direct access to the rear panel of the
instrument. The external connections provided on the A4 CPU board assembly
include:
— External VGA
— LAN (RJ45) 10/100 based-T Ethernet port
— USB
— 4 x Type-A ports (USB 2.0 compatible)
— 1 x Type-B port (USB 2.0 compatible) MXA behaves like a USB device
(client)
— GPIB

System Memory
The type and amount of system RAM in the instrument may vary depending on
the age and options installed in an instrument.
Earlier instruments had either 1 or 2 GBytes of DDR DRAM, in either one or two
184-pin DIMM memory modules, while current instruments will have 4 GBytes
of DDR SDRAM in two 200-pin SODIMM memory modules.
While the memory controller chips do support a wide range of DDR memory
types, only memory fully qualified by Keysight Technologies is supported. Full
qualification includes mechanical vibration and shock, thermal and power
dissipation and the basic electrical characteristics.
While the A4A1 SRAM Module system memory can be obtained separate from
the A4 CPU board assembly for older instruments with the 184-pin DIMM
memory modules, the 200-pin SODIMM memory modules are not field
replaceable.
All replacement A4 CPU board assemblies come with the appropriate memory
modules installed.

System Processor
The A4 CPU board assembly uses an Intel Pentium-M series processor chip.

305
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
A5 Disk Drive

A5 Disk Drive
There are two different types of A5 Disk Drives available. The standard drive is a
typical hard disk drive, while the option SSD drive is a solid state (FLASH)
drive. There are also different drive capacities and interface types that have
been, and are being used, and due to continual changes being made by the
drive manufacturers these will continue to change from time to time.
The A5 Disk Drive is physically connected to the CPU assembly. Failures of this
disk drive can be either hardware or software related. The first step in trouble
shooting is to determine if the failure is software related. If software is found
not to be the issue, the disk drive should be replaced.

Before replacing the A5 disk drive it is highly recommended that the

factory calibration data be backed up to an external drive if at all possible.
If this data is not backed up prior to replacing the disk drive all instrument
adjustments and performance verification tests will need to be run after
the drive is replaced.
For information on how to backup this data see the “Calibration Data
Backup and Restore” section in Chapter 15 of this manual.

306
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
A5 Disk Drive

Overview
The A5 Disk Drive assembly has been divided up into four different partitions.
They are:
Table 8-1

C. This partition contains the operating system and software installed by Keysight. This is
an open system which means you can install additional software, which should be
installed on the C: drive. However, only a limited set of software applications are tested
for use with the instrument software. The installation and/or use of other software is not
warranted, and could interfere with the operation of the instrument software. If the
Agilent Recovery process is ever run, the original version of the C: drive, as shipped from
the factory, will be restored. The user will need to reload any other software that was
previously installed into the instrument.
Do not save any user data to the C: drive partition, as any data saved in this partition will
be lost if the Agilent Recovery process is run.

D. This partition is reserved for data storage. The User Accounts that are preconfigured by
Keysight and their My Documents folder are mapped to the D: drive. This is for the
convenience of backing-up the user data. You should always back-up the data on the D:
drive. This allows you to restore the data if the A5 Disk Drive assembly ever needs to be
replaced.
Data saved in this partition will not be lost if the Agilent Recovery process is run.

E. This partition is reserved for Keysight's use. The primary use of the E: drive is for storing
of the instrument Calibration and Alignment data. Do not change or overwrite the files
on this drive. This could cause your instrument to not meet specifications, or even to
stop functioning correctly. It is also recommended that you back up the contents of this
drive. This allows you to restore the data if the A5 Disk Drive assembly ever needs to be
replaced, which could otherwise require that all instrument adjustments be performed.
NOTE: For information on how to backup this data, see the Calibration Data Backup and
Restoresection in Chapter 15of this manual.
While data saved in this partition will not be lost if the Agilent Recovery process is run,
do not use this drive for data storage.

In addition, a hidden recovery partition is located on the drive. This partition

contains an image of the C: drive as it was when the instrument was shipped
from the factory. To restore the C: drive using the image stored in this recovery
partition see the section titled “Disk Drive Recovery Process” on page 310.

307
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting software related issues

Troubleshooting software related issues

The C: drive contains the operating system, either Windows XP or Windows
Embedded Standard 7 (WES 7) and the X-Series software. Boot problems can
be caused by either a failure of the Windows operating system or the X-Series
software. The failure could have occurred due to a failed installation procedure,
X-Series software update failure or a virus.
To correct these issues there are two procedures that can be initiated to resolve
a software related issue.
— Reload the X-Series software.
— Use the Recovery Process to reinstall the Windows operating system and
X-Series software as it was when it left the factory.

308
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
Reloading the X-Series Software

Reloading the X-Series Software

The X-Series software contains all the required components for the signal
analyzer application as well as all software options. If the X-Series software has
become corrupt the Windows operating system will boot but the X-Series
software application will fail to start. In these cases go to Chapter 17,
“Instrument Software.” for information on how to update the X-Series
software. This procedure will not affect the instrument’s calibration or user
files.
If this does not resolve the boot issue, or the instrument never boots the
Windows operating system proceed to the “Disk Drive Recovery Process”.

309
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
Disk Drive Recovery Process

Disk Drive Recovery Process

The Agilent Recovery System can be used to repair software errors on the
instrument's disk drive, or to restore the original factory configuration of the
system software. The Agilent Recovery System is stored in a separate hidden
disk drive partition. Repairing errors on the disk drive may result in loss of data
or files. Restoring the original factory system software does not restore any of
the following items:
— Windows system configurations that were made after the instrument was
shipped from the factory. For example, Windows and Service Pack updates,
user accounts, and windows configuration settings. After an Agilent
Recovery, these configurations will have to be redone by the end user.
— Additional software that was installed after the instrument was shipped
from the factory. After an Agilent Recovery, that software will need to be
re-installed by the end user.
— Any data or programs saved on the D: or E: drives. This data will be retained
on the drive and not altered by the recovery process.
— Any updates that were made to the Keysight measurement application
software.
Calibration data is not lost during this process because it resides on the E drive
partition.

Agilent Recovery System

The instrument disk drive recovery system is stored in a separate disk drive
partition. It can be used to attempt to repair errors or restore the original
factory instrument system on the disk drive.

310
 CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
Disk Drive Recovery Process

Using the Instrument Recovery System

1. Make sure the instrument is turned off.
2. Turn on the instrument.
3. After the “Agilent Technologies” screen is displayed the following screen
contents will be displayed for 5 seconds.

Figure 8-1

4. Press the down arrow key to move the highlight to “Agilent Recovery
System”, press the Enter key.
5. When the Agilent Recovery System has booted, follow the on-screen
instructions to recover the image of the C drive.
6. After exiting the Agilent Recovery System, the instrument will reboot a few
times.
7. Update the X-Series software to the latest version by downloading it from
the following URL:

http://www.keysight.com/find/xseries_software

Replacing the instrument disk drive

If the above two procedures did not resolve the booting issue. The disk drive
should be replaced. Please refer to the “Disk Drive” replacement section on
page 497.

311
CPU/Disk Drive Troubleshooting
Disk Drive Recovery Process

312
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

9 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is found in this chapter:
A6 Power Supply Description on page 314
A6 Power Supply Basic Troubleshooting (Cover On) on page 320
A7 Midplane Description on page 322
A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting on page 325

313
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

A6 Power Supply Description

Purpose
The A6 Power Supply assembly provides all the necessary DC voltages for the
entire signal analyzer to operate correctly. If any of the power supplies are not
within their operating voltages, the analyzer will not function. The power
supply outputs provide power to all the printed circuit boards, microcircuit
assemblies, front panel display and fans, any of which can cause an over
current condition if not operating correctly. The power supply will remain on in
an over current state for a minimum of 0.1 second. The power supply will turn
off no later than 0.4 seconds after the beginning of the over current state. Any
one output over current condition will latch the supply off until the line voltage
is removed from the rear panel AC power input connector and then
reconnected. The power supply assembly plugs into the A7 Midplane Assembly
from the rear of the instrument. (see Figure 9-1.)

Figure 9-1 Power Supply and Midplane

314
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

Power Supply Theory of Operation

The A6 Power Supply assembly is serviced as an assembly only; no component
level repair is supported.
The A6 Power Supply assembly provides most all of the necessary DC voltages
for the signal analyzer. If any of the power supplies are not within their
operating voltages, the instrument will not function properly.
The A6 Power Supply assembly is a switching supply that operates at a
frequency of ~120 kHz.
The A6 Power Supply assembly is an auto ranging supply, requiring no user
selection of the input voltage. The input AC voltage and frequency
requirements for the A6 Power Supply assembly are printed on the rear panel
of the instruments as well as on the power supply itself.
While there are no test points or status LEDs accessible for troubleshooting on
the A6 Power Supply assembly, there are both test points and status LEDs for
all of the different power supply voltages, as well as other power supply status
lines, on the A7 Midplane Board assembly. See the “A7 Midplane Description”
on page 322 for detailed information on the location of each

Supply Voltages
The following voltage levels are produced by the A6 Power Supply assembly:

Vol tage Ground A7 Midplane Vol tage Ground A7 Midplane

Level Reference Connector Level Reference Connector

+15V SB ACOM J101 +12V D DCOM J111

+5.1V SB DCOM J111/J112 +5.1V D DCOM J109/J110

+32V A ACOM J101 +3.35V D DCOM J107/J108

+15V A ACOM J103/J104 -15V A ACOM J105

+9V A ACOM J104 -7V A ACOM J105

+5.2V A ACOM J102 FAN POS FAN NEG J101

FAN NEG FAN POS J101

315
Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

Control Inputs
There are a number of control inputs for the A6 Power Supply assembly. They
are:

PS_ON
PS_ON is a signal that when pulled low tells the A6 Power Supply assembly to
turn on all of its outputs. This signal comes from the A4 CPU board assembly
and is initiated by pressing the front panel power button.

DITHER
DITHER is an AC coupled analog signal going to the supply that is used to
frequency modulate the power supply switching frequency for the purpose of
lowering any power supply related interference.

OFFn
OFFn is an input that is to be used only as a “Panic Stop”. This signal can be
used for such functions as an emergency over temperature shut down. This
type of shut down is a last resort and does not perform the recommended
operating system shut down of the instrument.

TEMP_SEN
TEMP_SEN is an analog input to the fan speed control circuit. The fan runs at a
slow speed at room temperature to reduce noise and then will ramp up to full
speed as the temperature increases.

Control/Status Outputs
There are a number of control and status outputs for the A6 Power Supply
assembly. They are:

PWROK_H
PWROK_H is used to verify that the +12V D, +5.1V D, and +3.35V D are all on
and within specification. A TTL high level on this output brings the CPU out of
reset and initiates the instrument boot up process.

LINE_TRIG
LINE_TRIG is a TTL level signal that is synchronous to the AC line input. This
signal is typically used in signal analyzers to trigger an instrument sweep
synchronous to the AC power line.

PS_TEMP
PS_TEMP is a read out of the internal temperature of the power supply.

PS_FAULT
PS_FAULT will be a TTL low level signal to indicate that the supply is
experiencing an over voltage, over current, or over temperature condition.

316
Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

Fuse
The A6 Power Supply has no user replaceable fuse. While there is a fuse
internal to the supply this is not meant for field replacement. If the internal fuse
is blown, the power supply has experienced a major failure and should be
replaced.

Standby Supplies
The A6 Power Supply assembly has two standby supplies that should always
be on if the AC input voltage requirements are met. These are the +15V STBY
and the +5.1V STBY supplies. These supplies are used by the instrument to
keep certain circuits alive even when the power is turned off.

Over Current Protection

The A6 Power Supply assembly has built in over current protection that will
shut down the supply if current draw from the instrument is too great. The
power supply will remain on in an over current state for a minimum of 1
second. The power supply shall turn off no later than 5 seconds after beginning
the over current state. The power supply shall remain off until the line voltage
is removed and then reconnected or the front panel power switch is cycled.
Over current shut down does not apply to the standby supplies, the fan
voltage, and the +32V A supply.

Thermal Protection
The A6 Power Supply assembly will protect itself by shutting down if it
overheats. It will also reset itself with no user interaction after the temperature
is reduced by approximately 10 degrees C.

317
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

Power Supply Output Signals

Table 9-1 describes the output signals from the Power Supply assembly.
Table 9-1 Power Supply Output Signals

Signal Name Description Maximum Test Load

Output Current (Amps)
(Amps)

+32A 32 Volt Analog power supply. 1.8 0.5

+15A 15 Volt Analog power supply 4.25 1.3

+15SB 15 Volt Standby power supply -- --

+9A 9 Volt Analog power supply 4.0 1.4

+9A_Sense

+5.2A 5.2 Volt Analog power supply 11.5 3.7

+5.2_Sense

-7A -7 Volt Analog power supply 4.5 1.5

-7A_Sense

-15A -15 Volt Analog power supply 1.5 0.5

ACOM Analog Ground. Connected to common ground -- --

inside power supply.

ACOM_Sense Remote sense for analog ground. -- --

PS_Faultn Power supply fault output, active low. -- --

PS_Temp Analog temperature output. -- --

Control element for fan speed.

Line_Trig Line Trigger Output. -- --

Dither Dither input from A7 Midplane for switching -- --

frequency modulation.

Temp_Sense External temperature input for fan speed -- --

control.

Offn Off input, active low. Used to turn off all -- --

non-standby supplies.

Fan_P Positive fan power supply. 1.0 0.5

Fan_N Negative fan power supply. 1.0 0.5

+12D 12 Volt Digital power supply. 8.0 2.6

+5.1D 5.1 Volt Digital power supply. 8.5 2.7

+5.1D_Sense Remote sense for +5.1 digital supply. -- --

318
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Description

Table 9-1 Power Supply Output Signals

Signal Name Description Maximum Test Load

Output Current (Amps)
(Amps)

+5.1SB 5.1 Volt Standby power supply. 0.5 0.2

+3.35D 3.35 Volt Digital power supply. 6.5 2.0

+3.35D_Sense Remote sense for +3.35 digital supply. -- --

DCOM Digital ground. -- --

Connected to the common ground point inside
the power supply.

DCOM_Sense Remote sense for DCOM. -- --

PWR_OK Power OK Output. -- --

PS_ONn Power supply turn on input, active low. -- --

ChassisCOM Power supply outer case. Connected to common -- --

ground point inside the power supply.

319
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Basic Troubleshooting (Cover On)

A6 Power Supply Basic Troubleshooting

(Cover On)
There are no user replaceable fuses on the power supply. If the internal
fuse is blown, the power supply has experienced a major failure and should
be replaced. If you determine that the power supply is the failed assembly,
replace the power supply. If the power supply is suspect, perform the
following quick checks before removing the instrument cover.

1. Ensure the instrument is plugged into a known good AC power source and
the yellow standby LED near the power on switch is illuminated. A lit
yellow LED indicates the +5.1 SB VDC power supply voltage is providing
enough voltage to light the LED.
2. Power on the instrument and verify that the green LED on the front panel
is lit. A lit LED indicates the power supply has received an “ON” command
from the A4, CPU assembly and that the +5.2A VDC supply is on.
3. Verify both fans are operating on the side panel of the instrument. The fans
can be heard once the analyzer is powered up. If the fans are operating,
the fan power supply is functioning.
4. The front panel probe power connector can be used to check the +15 VDC
(+/- 7%) and -12.5 VDC (+/-10%) supplies. The -12.5 VDC is produced by
post regulating the -15 VDC supply. A voltmeter can be used to verify
these supplies. Refer to Figure 9-2 for a diagram of the probe power
connector.

Exercise great care when measuring voltages on the Probe Power

connector. Accidentally shorting the +15V or -12.6V supply to ground can
cause damage to the A1A2 or A1A5 assemblies.

Figure 9-2 Probe Power Connector

If these initial checks are functioning properly and yet the signal analyzer will
not boot up properly, or the display is not turning on, refer to Chapter 2, “Boot
Up and Initialization Troubleshooting” in this service manual.

320
Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A6 Power Supply Basic Troubleshooting (Cover On)

It is possible that some portion of the initial troubleshooting check may fail.
Chapter 2 should also be referenced if this is the case. As an example, the A15
Front End Control Assembly may be pulling down the +15 volt supply that is
used for the probe power on the front panel. Chapter 2 describes the entire
instrument boot process, from initial power on to a successful signal analyzer
sweep. If any portion of the boot process fails, Chapter 2 describes a
step-by-step troubleshooting procedure to help isolate the root cause of the
failure.

321
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A7 Midplane Description

A7 Midplane Description

Purpose
The Midplane links the following major assemblies:
— A4 CPU Assembly
— A6 Power Supply Assembly
— A8 Motherboard
— A16 Reference Assembly
Refer to Figure 9-3. The Midplane Assembly (7) plugs into the Motherboard.
The CPU, Power Supply, and Reference Assemblies plug directly into the
Midplane board from the rear of the instrument. The Analog and Digital I.F.
Assemblies plug into the analyzer from the rear of the instrument into the
Motherboard itself.

Instrument Power Supply LEDs and Test Points

While the A6 Power Supply assembly has no user accessible LEDs or test
points the A7 Midplane board assembly does provide these for all of the
different instrument power supplies as well as many of the power supply status
lines. A complete list of these can be found in Table 9-3 and the location of
each can be seen in Figure 9-4.

Additional Power Supply Regulation

There are two analog power supply regulators on the A7 Midplane board
assembly. They are the +3.3VA and -5.2VA supplies. The +3.3VA supply is
regulated down from the instrument +5.1VA supply while the -5.2VA supply is
regulated down from the -7VA instrument supply. Both of these supply
voltages have test points and LEDs on the A7 Midplane board assembly as
seen in Figure 9-4.

Instrument Secure Storage

This is Non-volatile storage of instrument model number, serial number, and
software license keys. While the license keys are also contained on the C: drive
of the instrument, the model and serial numbers are only saved in this secure
memory. There is no way for the user to access this memory in any way. This is
reserved for the factory and field software when needed for instrument
initialization, as well as the instrument software when installing an option
license key. If for some reason any of these cannot be remembered by the
instrument there could be a problem with this memory and the A7 Midplane
board assembly would need to be replaced.

322
Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A7 Midplane Description

Power Supply Dithering

A triangle wave of approximately 100 Hz is generated and goes directly to the
A6 Power Supply assembly. This is used to frequency modulate the power
supply switching frequency for the purpose of lowering any power supply
related interference. If for some reason the level of the power supply related
interference is higher than normal this circuitry, or the A6 Power Supply
assembly, could be suspect.

Miscellaneous Circuitry
Other circuitry on the A7 Midplane include a circuit to phase lock the CPU
clock to the analyzer's 10 MHz reference and a Complex Programmable Logic
Device (CPLD) used as an Instrument Local Bus (ILB) buffer to A16 Reference
Assembly connector at J21.

323
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A7 Midplane Description

Figure 9-3 Midplane

Table 9-2

Item Description

1 A2 Analog I.F. Assembly

A3 Digital I.F. Assembly

2 A4 CPU Replacement Kit (w/o disk drive)

3 A6 Power Supply

4 A16 Reference Assembly

5 A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

6 A15 Front End Control Assembly

7 A7 Midplane Assembly

The L.O. Synthesizer, Front End Control Assembly, Analog IF, and Digital IF
plug into the Motherboard. All other assemblies mentioned plug into the
Midplane from the rear of the instrument.

324
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting

A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting

If there is an analyzer function such as a boot up issue where the power
supplies are suspect, view the power supply LED's on the Midplane Assembly
by removing the instrument outer cover. See Figure 9-4.

Figure 9-4 Midplane Assembly

As shown above, the Midplane Assembly has test points for each power supply
that can be used as measurement points. These DC voltages can be verified
with a voltmeter. Continuity measurements can also be performed on each
power supply if a shorted condition is suspect. Refer to the table below for
measurement details.

325
 Power Supply/Midplane Troubleshooting
A7 Midplane Assembly Troubleshooting

Voltage readings are referenced to ACOM (TP4). All ohmmeter

measurements were taken from the power supply test point to ACOM. Due
to capacitive effects, wait for the ohmmeter readings to stabilize.

Table 9-3 A7 Midplane Board Test Points

Power Test Description Expected Expected

Supply Point Vol tmeter Read ing Ohmmeter Read ing
(VDC) (KΩ)
Power ON Power OFF

+32A TP3 32 Volt Analog supply +32 ± 2.0 1.3 kΩ

+15A TP6 15 Volt Analog supply +15 ± 1.0 260 Ω

+15SB TP2 15 Volt Standby supply +15 ± 1.0 264 Ω

+12D TP16 12 Volt Digital supply +12 ± 1.0 264 Ω

+9A TP7 9 Volt Analog supply +9 ± 1.0 120 Ω

+5.2A TP5 5.2 Volt Analog supply +5.2 ± 0.75 3.6 kΩ

+5.1D TP15 5.1 Volt Digital supply +5.1 ± 0.75 40 Ω

+5.1SB TP17 5.1 Volt Standby +5.1 ± 0.75 228 Ω

+3.35D TP13 3.35 Volt Digital supply +3.35 ± 0.75 47 Ω

+3.3A TP10 3.3 Volt Analog supply +3.3 ± 0.75 36 Ω

-5.2A TP11 -5.2 Volt Analog supply -5.2 ± 0.75 1.9 Ω

-7A TP8 -7 Volt Analog supply -7 ± 1.0 445 Ω

-15A TP9 -15 Volt Analog supply -15 ± 1.0 390 Ω

n/a TP1 Fan Positive supply 8.5 to 13.5 VDC 490 Ω

~8.8 VDC @ 25C

n/a TP4 Analog Common n/a n/a

n/a TP14 Digital Common n/a n/a

n/a TP12 Power OK +3.9 ± 0.75 9.2 kΩ

326
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

10 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following information is found in this chapter:
A8 Motherboard Description on page 328
A1 Front Panel Assembly on page 330
Option BBA Description on page 331

327
 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting
A8 Motherboard Description

A8 Motherboard Description

Purpose
The Motherboard is an electrical link between many of the electrical
assemblies in the instrument. The main functions of this PC board include:
— Distribute power
— Control and common signals between all the measurement PC boards
including the A7 Midplane and the Front Panel Assembly
— Circuitry for fan speed control
— 10 MHz Reference distribution

Figure 10-1 Motherboard

The Motherboard is a horizontally mounted, located near the bottom of the

analyzer. The Motherboard has the following connector types:

328
 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting
A8 Motherboard Description

— (6) Analog Card Cage Connectors (J1, J11, J31, J41, J51, J61)
— (4) Digital Card Cage Signals and voltages using PCI connectors (J4, J12,
J32, J42)
— (1)Analog Power (J2)
— (1) Mixed Power (J3)
— (2) Front Panel Connectors (J5 and J9)
— (2) Fan Connector (J6 and J7)

Figure 10-2 Motherboard Connectors

Table 10-1

Motherboard What Plugs In? Motherboard What Plugs In?

Connector Connector

J1 A7, Midplane J11 A3, Digital I.F, analog signals

J2 A7, Midplane J12 A3, Digital I.F, analog signals

J3 A7, Midplane J31 Option Slot

J4 A7, Midplane J32 Option Slot

J5 A7, Midplane J41 Option Slot

J6 B2, Fan #2 J42 Option Slot

J7 B1, Fan #1 J51 A14, L.O. Synthesizer

J9 Front Panel J61 A15, Front End Control

A8 Motherboard Troubleshooting
There are no troubleshooting procedures for this assembly. If the Motherboard
is suspect, it must be replaced.

329
 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting
A1 Front Panel Assembly

A1 Front Panel Assembly

The major components of the A1 Front Frame Assembly are the A1A2 Front
Panel Interface Board, A1A3 LCD, A1A4 LCD Inverter Board/DC-DC Converter,
and the A1A5 Front Panel USB Interface Board, all of which are serviceable as
individual components.
The A1 assembly is used to display the measurement results, accept user input
via the keyboard, and connect USB peripheral devices.

A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

The A1A2 Front Panel Interface board is serviced as an assembly only; no
component level repair is supported.
The Front Panel Interface Board contains LCD control, Inverter drive, audio
amplifiers, internal speaker, a 4 port USB hub, and a USB keyboard
microcontroller.
The two different front panel rubber keypads attach to the back side of the
board, which has the keyboard contacts printed on the reverse side.
The 4 ports from the USB hub contained on this board go to the 2 front panel
USB connectors, the keyboard microcontroller, and the fourth port is unused.

A1A3 LCD
The LCD used is an 8.4 inch XGA TFT display, which as a resolution of 1024 x
768. It has two backlights that are not individually replaceable.

A1A4 LCD Inverter Board/DC-DC Converter

The Inverter Board provides the high voltage required by the LCD backlights
used on older MXA’s. Newer MXA’s us a DC-DC Converter to power the LED
backlights.

A1A5 Front Panel USB Interface Board

The Front Panel USB Interface Board provides the front panel USB
connections.

330
 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting
Option BBA Description

Option BBA Description

The Analog Baseband I/Q inputs is a hardware option for the N9020A, Signal
Analyzer. The option can be ordered at the time of sale as N9020A-BBA or as a
post sale upgrade as N9020AK-BBA. This option requires a license key to be
fully operational.
The BBIQ option consists of 4 main components:
— LED board
— BBIQ Interface board
— BBIQ Main board
— Low noise ribbon cable that connects the BBIQ Interface board to the BBIQ
Main board

A17 LED Board

— Contains two edge connectors; J2 and J1 that plug into J20 and P100 edge
connectors on the BBIQ Interface board
— Five visible LEDs for user information
— Probe interface contact signals for all four channels I, I, Q, and Q

A18 BBIQ Interface Board

— Allows switching between Single Ended (SE) and Differential (Balanced) for
the two input channels.
— Accommodates 1 M Ω and 50 Ω input paths
— Converts all signals to a differential format with a 2.5V common-mode
voltage to route to the BBIQ Main board over a 60-pin micro coaxial
connector at J1
— Power and control for the BBIQ Interface board are provided from the BBIQ
Main board via a ribbon cable, though some of the power supplies are
locally regulated on the BBIQ Interface board to minimize spurious
responses
— A square wave calibration signal is provided to the user via a BNC Cal Out
connector on the BBIQ Interface board. This signal originates on the BBIQ
Main board and is buffered and attenuated on the BBIQ Interface board
— Passes signals for the LED board and Infinimax probe ID and power from the
60-pin connector from the BBIQ Main board to a pair of edge connectors
that interface to the LED board. ESD protection is provided on the BBIQ
Interface board
— EEPROM is used to identify the board and relay drivers to accommodate the
input path switching. Some of the relay drivers that require fast switching
(for over voltage protection) are on the BBIQ Main board

331
 Front Panel/Motherboard Troubleshooting
Option BBA Description

— Shields are on the board to minimize spurious responses

A19 BBIQ Main Board

— Provides probe power to the BBIQ Interface board
— Power Supply filtering and regulation
— Contains FPGA (field programmable gate arrays)
— Provides LED control to the LED board
— Receives I, I, Q, and Q data from BBIQ Interface board
— Controls (9) relays on the BBIQ Interface board
— Provides probe identification for system use
— Overload detection
— On board relay control for various gain stages
— Variable gain stages
— Provides square wave calibrator output signal to BBIQ Interface board
— Dither
— 10 MHz input from the Reference board
— Onboard 16 bit 100Ms/S ADC
— Triggering Circuits

332
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

11 Block Diagrams

What You Will Find in This Chapter

The following sections are found in this chapter:
RF Lowband Path Block Diagram
RF Highband Path #1 Block Diagram
RF Highband Path #2 Block Diagram
25 MHz Bandwidth I.F. System Block Diagram
40 MHz Bandwidth I.F. System Block Diagram
≥ 85 MHz Bandwidth IF System Block Diagram
Reference and Synthesizer Block Diagram (Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233
without Option B85, B1A, or B1X)
Reference and Synthesizer Block Diagram (Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233
and all with Option B85, B1A, or B1X)
MXA Computer Block Diagram
BBIQ System Block Diagram

333
 Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams

Block Diagrams

334
 OPTION 503, 508, 513, 526 RF/m W MXA RF BLOCK DIAGRAM
(Lowband Path - Input signals < 3.6 GHz) A15 FRONT END CONTROLLER
W16 J800
ATTENUATOR CONTROL

W18 J700
LOW BAND SWITCH CONTROL
SW2 5 SW1 5
(Option MPB) (Option MPB) W30 J801
AT1 PRESELECTOR BYPASS CONTROL
1 6 dB W35 1 C
C J300 J302
PRESELECTOR DRIVER CONTROL
2 2
3
A12 YTF J900 W37
W31 P/O Enhanced to AIF
322.5 MHz
W32 Front End -29 dBm
W8
W33
Controller 3
5
W7 W38
W22 Option B40
Preselector to Digital IF
Mode = I/Q Analyzer
A11 LOWBAND J4 W34 J901 IF Path 40 MHz
To A2 250 MHz, -35 dBm
SWITCH Analog IF
4
or
Burst W53 (Opt B85/B1A/B1X)
A13 FRONT END Mixer 3
DAC Trigger to WB AIF
-32 dBm 13.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz Path W15 Mode = I/Q Analyzer
3.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz
A9 INPUT J3 IF Path = 85/125/140 MHz
RF A10 INPUT J7 300 MHz, -35 dBm
J9 IF In
Input ATTENUATOR A ATTENUATOR B J902 LOG
DET
2 dB 2 dB -25 dBm 30 dB 20 dB 6 dB 10 dB -35 dBm IF OUT 1 3
J1 322.5 MHz W36
W10 -28 dBm 1, 2, 3
W11 W9 Preamp AUX
3.6 GHz - 13.6 GHz Path
+30 dB Mixer 2 IF OUT
Ext
J8 1st LO OUT IF In W39
BIAS J1100
W19 TEE to rear
J903 panel
J Cal Signal J2 120 MHz Option CR3
From A16 Reference LPF 2nd IF
4800 MHz, -28 dBm +10 to 260 MHz - 400 MHz -35 dBm
or J13 DAC -10 mA
W26
50 MHz, -25 dBm
(Opt EXM)
W3 VCO
J12
4 GHz Mixer 1
Thru Path
3 Hz - 3.6 GHz
-37 dBm MIXER BIAS, AMP BIAS,
Electronic Attenuator 2nd LO W17 PREAMP BIAS, E-ATTEN CONTROL, SWEEP
J2 SWITCH CONTROL, 1st LO POWER OPTIMIZATION RAMP
0 - 24 dB 4800 MHz J102 J301
3 - 15 dBm

W5
J1 from A16
Reference Bd
X2
Preamp +8 dBm
+20 dB
8.3 - 14 GHz
LO
DISTRIBUTION FOOTNOTES

1
IF OUT from A13 NOTE: Power levels based on these settings:
ALIGNMENT
W4 +15 dBm J4 THERMOMETER IF Path IF Freq.
Mode: Spectrum Analyzer unless specified differently
10 MHz 322.5 MHz
from A14 Input Signal 50 MHz Calibrator (Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 50 MHz)
25 MHz 322.5 MHz Center Frequency 50 MHz
LO Synthesizer
J5 J3 J6 J10 J11 40 MHz 250 MHz Span 0 Hz
>85 MHz 300 MHz Input Attenuation 10 dB
AUX LO AUX LO ECAL In Preamp OFF
+10 dBm +3 dBm A13W1 IF OUT IF IN
Auto Align OFF after initial Auto Align
6 7
W40 W20
Signal levels above 3 GHz include cable loss
A13A1 BANDPASS FILTER 2 AUX IF OUT is only available of measurement system
with Option CR3 and/or CRP
A13W2 3 Units with any of the following options:
CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 IF
Center: 5.1 GHz 4 Units without any of the following options:
Out
3 dB BW: 150 MHz CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 (Opt EXM) 5 Units with any of the following options:
EXT W27 (Opt EXM) W28 (Opt EXM) B40, MPB, DP2
MIXER 6 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 with any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2
7 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 without any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2 or S/N > MY/SG/US52330000

blockm40_rf_low RF (Low Freq)

BLOCK DIAGRAM
 OPTION 508, 513, 526 m W MXA RF BLOCK DIAGRAM
(Highband Path #1 - Input signals 3.6 GHz to 13.6 GHz) A15 FRONT END CONTROLLER
W16 J800
ATTENUATOR CONTROL

W18 J700
LOW BAND SWITCH CONTROL
SW2 5 SW1 5
(Option MPB) (Option MPB) W30 J801
AT1 PRESELECTOR BYPASS CONTROL
1 6 dB W35 1 C
C J300 J302
PRESELECTOR DRIVER CONTROL
2 2
3
A12 YTF J900 W37
W31 P/O Enhanced to AIF
322.5 MHz
W32 Front End -33 dBm
W8
W33
Controller 3
5
W7 W38
W22 Option B40
Preselector to Digital IF
Mode = I/Q Analyzer
A11 LOWBAND J4 W34 J901 IF Path 40 MHz
To A2 250 MHz, -39 dBm
SWITCH Analog IF
4
or
Burst W53 (Opt B85/B1A/B1X)
A13 FRONT END Mixer 3
DAC Trigger to WB AIF
-46 dBm 13.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz Path W15 Mode = I/Q Analyzer
3.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz
A9 INPUT J3 IF Path = 85/125/140 MHz
RF A10 INPUT J7 300 MHz, -39 dBm
J9 IF In
Input ATTENUATOR A ATTENUATOR B J902 LOG
DET
2 dB 2 dB -28 dBm 30 dB 20 dB 6 dB 10 dB -38 dBm -52 dBm IF OUT 1 W36
3
J1 322.5 MHz
If Option MPB
W10 and bypassed, -32 dBm 1, 2, 3
W11 W9 Preamp AUX
-55 dBm 3.6 GHz - 13.6 GHz Path
+30 dB Mixer 2 IF OUT
Ext
J8 1st LO OUT IF In W39
BIAS J1100
W19 TEE to rear
8.3 GHz - J903 panel
J Cal Signal J2 14 GHz 120 MHz Option CR3
From A16 Reference +18 dBm LPF 2nd IF
4800 MHz, -28 dBm +10 to 260 MHz - 400 MHz -37 dBm
or J13 DAC -10 mA
W26
50 MHz, -25 dBm
(Opt EXM)
3 Hz - 3.6 GHz VCO
J12
4 GHz Mixer 1 Switch position shown
W3
for input signals
8.4 - 13.6 GHz MIXER BIAS, AMP BIAS,
Electronic Attenuator 2nd LO W17 PREAMP BIAS, E-ATTEN CONTROL, SWEEP
J2 SWITCH CONTROL, 1st LO POWER OPTIMIZATION RAMP
0 - 24 dB 4800 MHz J102 J301
3 - 15 dBm

W5
J1 from A16
Reference Bd
X2
Preamp
+20 dB
8.3 - 14 GHz
LO
DISTRIBUTION FOOTNOTES

1
IF OUT from A13 NOTE: Power levels based on these settings:
ALIGNMENT
W4 +15 dBm J4 THERMOMETER IF Path IF Freq.
Mode: Spectrum Analyzer unless specified differently
10 MHz 322.5 MHz
from A14 Input Signal 4.8 GHz Calibrator (Press Input/Output, RF Calibrator, 4.8 GHz)
25 MHz 322.5 MHz Center Frequency 4.8 GHz
LO Synthesizer
J5 J3 J6 J10 J11 40 MHz 250 MHz Span 0 Hz
>85 MHz 300 MHz Input Attenuation 10 dB
AUX LO AUX LO ECAL In Preamp OFF
+10 dBm +3 dBm A13W1 IF OUT IF IN
Auto Align OFF after initial Auto Align
6 7
W40 W20
Signal levels above 3 GHz include cable loss
A13A1 BANDPASS FILTER 2 AUX IF OUT is only available of measurement system
with Option CR3 and/or CRP
A13W2 3 Units with any of the following options:
IF CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 Center: 5.1 GHz
Out 4 Units without any of the following options:
3 dB BW: 150 MHz CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 (Opt EXM) 5 Units with any of the following options:
EXT W27 (Opt EXM) W28 (Opt EXM) B40, MPB, DP2
MIXER 6 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 with any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2
7 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 without any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2 or S/N > MY/SG/US52330000

blockm40_rf_hi1 RF (High Freq)

BLOCK DIAGRAM
 OPTION 526 m W MXA RF BLOCK DIAGRAM
(Highband Path #2 - Input signals 13.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz) A15 FRONT END CONTROLLER
W16 J800
ATTENUATOR CONTROL

W18 J700
LOW BAND SWITCH CONTROL
SW2 5 SW1 5
(Option MPB) (Option MPB) W30 J801
AT1 PRESELECTOR BYPASS CONTROL
1 6 dB W35 1 C
C J300 J302
PRESELECTOR DRIVER CONTROL
2 2
3
A12 YTF J900 W37
W31 P/O Enhanced to AIF
322.5 MHz
W32 Front End -19 dBm
W8
W33
Controller 3
5
W7 W38
W22 Option B40
Preselector to Digital IF
Mode = I/Q Analyzer
A11 LOWBAND J4 W34 J901 IF Path 40 MHz
To A2 250 MHz, -25 dBm
SWITCH Analog IF
4
or
Burst W53 (Opt B85/B1A/B1X)
A13 FRONT END Mixer 3
DAC Trigger to WB AIF
-32 dBm 13.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz Path W15 Mode = I/Q Analyzer
3.6 GHz - 26.5 GHz
A9 INPUT J3 IF Path = 85/125/140 MHz
RF A10 INPUT J7 300 MHz, -25 dBm
J9 IF In
Input ATTENUATOR A ATTENUATOR B J902 LOG
DET
2 dB 2 dB -11 dBm 30 dB 20 dB 6 dB 10 dB -23 dBm -38 dBm IF OUT 1 W36
3
J1 322.5 MHz
If Option MPB
W10 and bypassed, -18 dBm 1, 2, 3
W11 W9 Preamp AUX
-41 dBm 3.6 GHz - 13.6 GHz Path
+30 dB Mixer 2 IF OUT
Ext
J8 1st LO OUT IF In W39
BIAS J1100
W19 TEE to rear
8.3 GHz - J903 panel
J Cal Signal J2 14 GHz 120 MHz Option CR3
From A16 Reference +18 dBm LPF 2nd IF
4800 MHz, -28 dBm +10 to 260 MHz - 400 MHz -24 dBm
or J13 DAC -10 mA
W26
50 MHz, -25 dBm
(Opt EXM)
3 Hz - 3.6 GHz VCO
J12
4 GHz Mixer 1 Switch position shown
W3
for input signals
17 - 26.5 GHz MIXER BIAS, AMP BIAS,
Electronic Attenuator 2nd LO W17 PREAMP BIAS, E-ATTEN CONTROL, SWEEP
J2 SWITCH CONTROL, 1st LO POWER OPTIMIZATION RAMP
0 - 24 dB 4800 MHz J102 J301
3 - 15 dBm

W5
J1 from A16
Reference Bd
X2
Preamp
+20 dB
8.3 - 14 GHz
LO
DISTRIBUTION FOOTNOTES

1
IF OUT from A13
ALIGNMENT NOTE: Power levels based on these settings:
W4 +15 dBm J4 THERMOMETER IF Path IF Freq.
10 MHz 322.5 MHz Mode: Spectrum Analyzer unless specified differently
from A14 Input Signal 20 GHz, -10 dBm
25 MHz 322.5 MHz
LO Synthesizer Center Frequency 20 GHz
J5 J3 J6 J10 J11 40 MHz 250 MHz Span 0 Hz
>85 MHz 300 MHz Input Attenuation 10 dB
AUX LO AUX LO ECAL In
A13W1 IF OUT IF IN Preamp OFF
+10 dBm +3 dBm
Auto Align OFF after initial Auto Align
6 7
W40 W20
A13A1 BANDPASS FILTER 2 AUX IF OUT is only available Signal levels above 3 GHz include cable loss
with Option CR3 and/or CRP of measurement system
A13W2 3 Units with any of the following options:
IF CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 Center: 5.1 GHz
Out 4 Units without any of the following options:
3 dB BW: 150 MHz
CR3, CRP, MPB, B40, DP2
J2 (Opt EXM) 5 Units with any of the following options:
EXT W27 (Opt EXM) W28 (Opt EXM) B40, MPB, DP2
MIXER 6 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 with any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2
7 S/N < MY/SG/US52330000 without any of the following options:
B40, MPB, DP2 or S/N > MY/SG/US52330000

blockm40_rf_hi2 RF (High Freq)

BLOCK DIAGRAM
 REFERENCE and SYNTHESIZER BLOCK DIAGRAM
(Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233 without Option B85, B1A, or B1X)

To A13J1
N A14 LO SYNTHESIZER
J1 571 MHz to
Serial Bus 1154 MHz
(from A8) Symv/Int_Swp FPGA FRAC-N
2nd LO W5 LO CONTROLLER X2
A16 REFERENCE LOOP GAIN 4800 MHz CONTROLLER
ALC
ALC J702 W6 VCO
600 MHz 2400 MHz 4800 MHz J200
DRO 1st LO Ref

O J703
X2 X4 X2 ALC
f 4800 MHz 1142 MHz - 2308 MHz
4800 MHz DC Cal In Cal W19 To A13J4
DC Force Signal
Cal
DAC 50 MHz Combiner J To A9
J701 4.6 - 5.8 GHz
ALC 1.15 - 1.95 GHz 2.30 - 2.90 GHz
100 MHz 300 MHz DC Sense
300 MHz
W14 W4
Comb 300 MHz 3rd LO J711
X3 To A2J300
5.8 - 7.3 GHz
(1) 1.45 - 1.82 GHz 2.90 - 3.65 GHz
W42 J740
100 MHz 1st LO (1) X2
NF To A3J14 1st
J706 X2 3.8 - 8.7 GHz
ALC
to system 1st LO Out
(3)
/2 7.3 - 9.2 GHz 13 - 18 dBm
1.82 - 2.30 GHz 3.65 - 4.60 GHz
ALC to system
O 50 MHz (2)
f W12
10 MHz to AIF/DIF (2)
To A3J14 block_hibandpath2
J704 /5
Re-sync M/B dist J710
R
CombSig
Ext Ref IN AM Mod to systemA
1 - 30 MHz DAC 300 MHz
(from SyncAlignment J709 (2)
Rear Panel) O to systemB W20
f (2)
Timebase J708 To A13J6
10 MHz 22.54 MHz comb
steering 50 MHz Ecal (1)
from DIF F J705 To A3J18
(1)
W43

FOOTNOTES

(1) Units with any of the following options: B40, DP2, MPB

(2) Units without any of the following options: B40, DP2, MPB

(3) The Tuning Equations below show the relationship between

the A14 LO Synthesizer output and the Tuned Frequency in SA mode.

Band Tuning Equation

0 - 3.6 GHz LO Synth Output = Tuned Freq + 5.1225 GHz
3.6 - 8.4 GHz LO Synth Output = Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz
8.4 - 13.6 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/2
13.6 - 17.1 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/2
17.1 - 26.5 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/4

REFERENCE and SYNTHESIZER

BLOCK DIAGRAM
blockm40_refsynth
REFERENCE and SYNTHESIZER BLOCK DIAGRAM
(Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US5233 and all with Option B85, B1A, or B1X)

To A13J1
A16 REFERENCE
N
A14 LO SYNTHESIZER
A16A1 REFERENCE DAUGHTER
J1 571 MHz to
4.8 GHz W5 Serial Bus 1154 MHz
2nd LO (from A8) Symv/Int_Swp FPGA FRAC-N
2nd LO J702 4800 MHz LO CONTROLLER X2
X2 CONTROLLER
W6 VCO
J200
2400 MHz 2nd LO J703
2400 MHz
SAW VCO
W51 (4)
X8
O 2.4 GHz Ref J718 1142 MHz - 2308 MHz
f To A25J301
(Opt B85/B1A/B1X) To A13J4

ALC ALC 4.6 - 5.8 GHz

1.15 - 1.95 GHz 2.30 - 2.90 GHz

W4

5.8 - 7.3 GHz

1.45 - 1.82 GHz 2.90 - 3.65 GHz
HARMONIC J740
4.8 GHz HP HP GEN 1st X2
J724 J725 X2
W19 ALC 3.8 - 8.7 GHz
300 MHz LP LP CAL OUT J701 1st LO Out
To A9 7.3 - 9.2 GHz (3)
13 - 18 dBm
1.82 - 2.30 GHz 3.65 - 4.60 GHz
(1)
EXT FE CAL INPUT J726 W50 to A3J17 or (4)
J723 W56 to A25J806
block_hibandpath2
50 MHz
W20
ECAL OUT J705
2 To A13J6

COMB
SER COMB
ALC LVDS GEN J714
MOD 10 dB
EXT ECAL IN
300 MHz
W14
100 MHz X3 +10 dBm 300 MHz LO_AIF J711
to A2J300

300 MHz
SAW +13 dBm 100 MHz LO_SYNTH J706

O NF 10 FOOTNOTES
f W25
+10 dBm 100 MHz REF_A J707
to A19J101 (Opt BBA) (1) Units with any of the following options: B40, DP2, MPB

W54 (2) Units without any of the following options: B40, DP2, MPB
R O +13 dBm 100 MHz REF_B J716 (1)
1 to 16 f to A3J14
(3) The Tuning Equations below show the relationship between
1 - 50 MHz the A14 LO Synthesizer output and the Tuned Frequency in SA mode.

J704 100 MHz REF_C J717

EXT REF INPUT 10 MHz Band Tuning Equation
(rear panel) 10 MHz
10 MHz W12 0 - 3.6 GHz LO Synth Output = Tuned Freq + 5.1225 GHz
W23
DAC 10 MHz OUT_DIF J710 (2) 3.6 - 8.4 GHz LO Synth Output = Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz
to A3J14
Card Cage 8.4 - 13.6 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/2
Connector 13.6 - 17.1 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/2
17.1 - 26.5 GHz LO Synth Output = (Tuned Freq + 322.5 MHz)/4

(4) Units with any of the following options: B85, B1A, B1X

REFERENCE and SYNTHESIZER

BLOCK DIAGRAM
blockm40_refsynth2
 25 MHz BW IF SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

A3 DIGITAL IF
W12
J14 10 MHz J13 10 MHz OUT
From
A16J710 (BNC)
W15 (1)
From A13J7
(2)
From A15J900 Capture IF 10 MHz REF
Memory
W37 10 MHz LVDS
X3 X3
J11 NOISE SOURCE
To A3 DRIVE +28V
Noise (BNC)
300 kHz/800 kHz
A2 ANALOG IF 12 MHz LC
Source
Drive SNS NOISE
SOURCE
322.5 MHz IN
J100 1 dB 25 MHz
Step 22.5 MHz +13 dB J601 J15 Recon J5 ANALOG OUT
22.5 MHz 22.5 MHz IF
Sum ADC DAC
(BNC)
+13 dB 22.5 MHz W13 Digital
25 MHz to mux +4 dBm Signal Comb (to A16 via P1)
IF COMB CAL Processing
12 MHz Dither
300 kHz DIGITAL BUS
XTAL
9 kHz/60 kHz

20 dB TRIGGER 1 J10
IN (BNC) J7 TRIGGER 1 OUT
TRIG
(BNC)
TRIGGER 2 J9
IN (BNC) Gate Arm J6
GAIN TRIGGER 2 OUT
LVL (BNC)
BURST CARRIER Line Trig Gate Trigger
TRIGGER Sweep
P/O 300 MHZ LO AIF TRIG Trig 1 Trigger
MUX Orchestration
J820 COMB IN J300 +10 dBm P/O J820 Sweep Arm
Trig 2 INT_SWP
AIF TRIG Sweep Trigger
P/O W2 SETTLED
Pulse Stretcher

INTERP TRIG
Interp Cal
W14
From
A16J711 ILB
SPI Engine

PCI
PCI
COMB
P/O
P/O W2
J100 AIF TRIG J8 SYNC
(BNC)
FOOTNOTES

(1) Units without any of the following options: CR3, CRP

(2) Units with any of the following options: CR3, CRP

25 MHz BW IF SYSTEM
blockm40_if25 BLOCK DIAGRAM
 40 MHz BW IF SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

5
W55
To A25J805
5
W40
ECAL IN
To A13J6
5
W50
From A15J926

From A15J705
4 A3 DIGITAL IF STEP
J17
1 W43 ALIGN OUT
W38 WB_ALIGN_DATA CAL
J18
From A15J901
N.C.
ST GT 40 MHz BW J16
From A25J102 250 MHz CF PECL -> ECL FELDSPAR_CLK
W52
2 J15
ADC2 FELDSPAR J11 Noise Source
ADC2
DRIVE DSP clock Drive +28V
300 kHz/800 kHz (12 bit) Noise
250 MHz (BNC)
A2 ANALOG IF 12 MHz LC IF 125 MHz Source
DITHER ADC2 SNS
Clk Noise Source
322.5 MHz 1 dB STEP ADC1 T2 Rx Memory Capture
25 MHz
IN J100 Step GAIN 22.5 MHz Clk Module Controller Memory
W37 22.5 MHz +13 dB W41
+4 dBm J19
From ADC1 ADC1 J4
A15J900 22.5 MHz J601 22.5 MHz (16 bit) Digital Bus
+13 dB IF
25 MHz to mux Recon (15.0) RECONSTRUCTION
200 MHz 200 MHz CA6/AUDIO
to mux (P1-C6)
12 MHz Lockn
300 kHz Analog Out
XTAL 100 MHz X2 Recon
IF COMB CAL 9 kHz/60 kHz REF J14 Gain DAC J5 (BNC)
ADC2p/n_CLK
Diag_to_adc 200 MHz
Notch 6 dB Clock ADC1 Clk
Distribution SYS Clk
BURST CARRIER TRIGGER FELDSPAR Clk
AFPGA_100MHz IF 10M REF 10MHz
HI/ TRIG J820 OUT
TRIG +
LO J13 (BNC)
- INTERPOLATOR INTERP_CAL_TRIG
DAC
P/O CAL TRIGGER AFPGA_10 MHz
To mux W43 ANALOG FPGA AFPGA_100 MHz
GAIN ribbon cable J10
THERMOMETER LEVEL TRIGGER 1 IN
22.5 MHz 300 MHz LO EXT_TRIG_1
(BNC) GATE_ARM
COMB J300 +10 dBm DAC
J820 Trig1_Lev GATE_TRIG
J9 T2
TRIGGER 2 IN SWEEP_ARM (TRIGGER MODULE)
P/O EXT_TRIG_2 SWEEP_TRIG
W2 (BNC) DAC
Trig2_Lev SETTLED
ribbon cable TRIG_1
TRIG_2 TEMPERATURE
LINE_TRIG SENSOR
3 COMB_1
W42
INT_SWP
W14 From A16J706 SETTLED
AIF_TRIG
From A16J711 From A15J716 COMB_2
W54
3 ASG/COMB GEN J7 TRIGGER1
T2
TRIG_OUT1 ILB Module OUT
TRIG_OUT2 (BNC)
FOOTNOTES INT_SWP
EXT SYNC TRIGGER2
TRIG_OUT1 TSTRETCH PART_SAMP J6
OUT

to Reference Bd
(1) Analyzers without any of the following options: B85, B1A, B1X

IF_10M_REF
TRIGGER TRIG_OUT2

LINE_TRIG
(BNC)

SETTLED

AIF_TRIG
INT_SWP
PULSE

COMB_1

COMB_2
TRIG_1

TRIG_2
LOCKn
BUFFER INT_SWP
(2) Analyzers with any of the following options: B85, B1A, B1X STRETCHER ILB Bus PCI Bus

(3) W42 is used on serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233 ; J8 SYNC

W54 is used on serial prefix > MY/SG/US5233 and all analyzers with Option B85, B1A, or B1X (BNC)
(4) This cable only used on analyzers with serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233

}
without any of the following options;: B85, B1A, B1X
J20
(5) Connection depends upon option and serial prefix.
P/O W2 Ribbon Cable
Serial Prefix Option Cable
<MY/SG/US5233 B40, DP2, or MPB W40
any B85, B1A, B1X W55
>MY/SG/US5233 B40, DP2, or MPB W50

blockm40_if40 40 MHz BW IF SYSTEM

BLOCK DIAGRAM
 Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams

≥ 85 MHz Bandwidth IF System Block Diagram

349
 Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams

MXA Computer Block Diagram

350
 Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams

BBIQ System Block Diagram

351
Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams

352
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

12 Service and Diagnostics Menus

Overview
The Service capabilities described below are accessed via the Service and
Diagnostic menus in the System menu. The Service capabilities are intended
for field service technicians. These technicians may be at an Keysight Service
Center or at a self-maintaining customer site.
There are two types of Service capabilities:
1. Diagnostics - These are available to any user and will assist in initial
troubleshooting of instrument malfunctions. Examples are the ability to
read the mechanical relay cycles.
2. Service Functions - These are for use by the factory or field repair
technicians, access is controlled. Examples are the ability to band lock the
analyzer and control the DAC which sets the 10 MHz Reference frequency.

Controlling Access
There are two levels of service and diagnostics capabilities:
1. “Regular access” to diagnostic capabilities that everyone is allowed
access. Care may be required to use a feature appropriately. This is the
“Diagnostic” type of Service capability defined above.
2. “Secure service access” to the Service menu. This prevents the casual user
from accessing and using these features. It is intended to provide this
access to Keysight Service Centers or any customer who purchases the
Service Guide. The “Service Functions” type of Service capability is
defined above.
To access secured service capabilities the technician is required to enter a
specific numeric Service Code that is controlled by the instrument software
and, for older instrument software versions, Windows® Authentication (login).
The Service Code is defined to be easily entered via the front panel; an external
keyboard or mouse will not be required. Once access has been gained, it
persists within the execution of the instrument application. If the user exits the
instrument application, they must re-enter the Service Code to gain access.

353
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Overview

Secure Service Access, Software Versions A.01.xx through A.03.xx

Secure service access is the Windows® login of “advanceduser”. The
“advanceduser” must be a member of the Power Users group. This account
has not been pre-configured on the instrument. The administrator must create
the login and make “advanceduser” a member of the Power Users group (refer
to Windows XP Help and Support Center). Keysight recommend using the
password “service4u” to ensure the analyzer can be supported by multiple
people. The Service Code is “-2061”.

Summary of Requirements for Service Menu Access, Software

Versions A.01.xx through A.03.xx:
— User login name: advanceduser
— Recommended Password: service4u
— User is member of “Power Users” group
— Service Code: -2061

Secure Service Access, Software Version ≥ A.04.00

To access the secure service capabilities press System, More, Service with the
instrument application running. At this point you will see the window shown in
Figure 12-1. Enter the Service Code and press Enter.
The Service Code is: -2061

Figure 12-1 Service Code Entry

354
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Menus

Menus
The menus shown on the following pages represent instrument software
versions ≥ A.13.00. The menus for earlier software versions are similar, but
lack some of the features shown below.

355
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Menus

356
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Menus

357
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Menus

358
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

Service Key Descriptions

Timebase
Allows the technician to adjust the 10 MHz reference (“timebase”) manually.

If the Timebase DAC value has been changed, but no Save operation
performed before exiting this menu, a warning is provided to the user that
they have not saved their setting:

Timebase DAC
Allows the technician the ability to adjust the 10 MHz reference (“timebase”).
The adjustment is performed by changing the DAC setting controlling the
reference. Once the reference is adjusted to the proper frequency, the DAC
value can be saved in non-volatile memory by pressing the Save menu key.

Save
Saves the current Timebase DAC setting in the appropriate cal file. The
operator is presented a prompt to confirm the operation:

359
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

Corrections
The Corrections menu allows the technician to activate and deactivate specific
amplitude correction sets. With this capability, the technician can determine if
an anomaly is a result of raw hardware performance or incorrect correction
data. It also allows the technician the ability to measure the raw hardware
performance when all corrections are set to Off.
RF Flatness
Displays a menu which allows the technician to activate and deactivate the
corrections unique to the RF flatness of the analyzer. RF Flatness
corrections consist of two major parts: raw flatness corrections and
temperature corrections. These corrections are summed together and
applied by using RF gain, IF gain, and/or “video shift” (post-digitized
mathematical offset). The selections in this menu allow the corrections to
be applied or not applied to facilitate troubleshooting the cause of
flatness-related problems.
Flatness Video Shift On/Off
The Flatness Video Shift turns off the corrections for gain vs.
frequency. It does not turn off the corrections for changes in the
analog IF gain that accompany flatness changes. This function turns
both the gain and video shift on or off, but does not affect the
temperature corrections. When set to off, it is possible to measure
the raw flatness of the spectrum analyzer while maintaining the
temperature corrections.
When Flatness Video Shift is Off, the Advisory Event “Flatness Video
Shift OFF” will be displayed.
When Flatness Video Shift is ON, the Advisory Event “Flatness Video
Shift OFF” will be cleared.
Temperature Gain & Tilt On/Off
This function controls both temperature adjustment mechanisms:
overall gain vs. temperature, and the temperature-proportional tilt of
the gain vs. frequency.
When Temperature Gain & Tilt is OFF, the Advisory Event “Flatness
Temperature Gain & Tilt OFF” will be displayed.
When Temperature Gain & Tilt is ON, the Advisory Event “Flatness
Temperature Gain & Tilt OFF” will be cleared.

360
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

IF Flatness
This function turns the corrections related to IF flatness On or Off.
When IF Flatness is OFF, the Advisory Event “IF Flatness corrections OFF”
will be displayed.
When IF Flatness is ON, the Advisory Event “IF Flatness corrections OFF”
will be cleared.
Snapshot Alignments On/Off
During normal auto alignment operation, the firmware will perform an RBW
and IQ alignment when the analyzer RBW state is changed, and every 10
minutes thereafter. These alignments can hinder troubleshooting the
analyzer since they can change correction factors when the state is
changed. Turning snapshot alignments off disables the RBW portion of
these alignments for more accurate troubleshooting. (Use IF Flatness
ON/OFF to control the IQ alignment.)
When Snapshot Alignments are OFF, the Advisory Event “Snapshot OFF”
will be displayed.
When Snapshot Alignments are ON, the Advisory Event “Snapshot OFF”
will be cleared.

361
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

Band Lock
Provides the ability to tune the analyzer over as large a range as can be
accommodated by the specified harmonic number and 1st LO frequency range.
As a result, this feature can be used to check performance in the frequency
band overlap regions. By definition, multi-band sweeps are not allowed.
When band lock is in effect the Advisory Event “Band Locked: Band <x>” where
“x” is a value between 0 and 6.
When band lock is not in affect the Advisory Event “Band Locked: Band <x>” is
cleared.
Dependencies/Couplings:
1. Band Lock is only available on analyzers with frequency range options
beyond 3.6 GHz
2. The individual bands available for selection also depends upon the
particular frequency range option.
Off or value of -1
Turns Band Lock to Off. Analyzer will tune from band to band
normally.
Band 0 or value of 0
Locks the analyzer to Band 0.
Band 1 or value of 1
Locks the analyzer to Band 1.
Band 2 or value of 2
Locks the analyzer to Band 2.
Band 3 or value of 3
Locks the analyzer to Band 3.
Band 4 or value of 4
Locks the analyzer to Band 4.
Band 5 or value of 5
Locks the analyzer to Band 5.
Band 6 or value of 6
Locks the analyzer to Band 6.

362
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

LO Band Lock
Provides the ability to tune the analyzer over as large a range as can be
accommodated by the specified LO Band. As a result, this feature can be used
to check performance in the LO band overlap regions. By definition, multi-band
sweeps are not allowed.
When band lock is in effect the Advisory Event “LO Band Locked: Band <x>”
where “x” is a value between 0 and 6.
When band lock is not in affect the Advisory Event “LO Band Locked: Band
<x>” is cleared.
Dependencies/Couplings:
LO Bandlock will be grayed-out if Bandlock is OFF. If Harmonic Bandlock is any
setting other than OFF, LO Bandlock menu key is enabled. If LO Bandlock is
other than OFF, and the Harmonic Bandlock is transitioned to OFF, the LO
Bandlock is set to OFF.
Off
Turns LO Band Lock to Off. Analyzer will tune from LO band to LO band
normally.
Band 0
Locks the analyzer to LO Band 0.
Band 1
Locks the analyzer to LO Band 1.
Band 2
Locks the analyzer to LO Band 2.
Band 3
Locks the analyzer to LO Band 3.
Band 4
Locks the analyzer to LO Band 4.

LO Control
Provides keys that allow you to control the LO. This is only present on analyzers
equipped with Option EXM, External Mixing.

2nd LO Gain DAC

This parameter provides the ability to adjust the output gain of the 2nd LO
DAC. The range is from 0 to 4095 where 0 is the minimum gain and 4095 is the
maximum gain. Setting a value of 4096 or greater returns control to the
instrument. In External Mixing, this DAC controls the level of the 1st LO signal
at the front panel EXT MIXER connector.

363
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

External LO Turnoff
Disconnects the 1st LO path which will minimize the effect of the 1st LO signal
at the front panel EXT MIXER connector.

Align
The Align Menu allows accessing Diagnostic capabilities of Alignment, and
invoking alignments for individual subsystems.
Diagnostic
The Diagnostic menu contains items for controlling the operating behavior
of Alignment and the Alignment reporting capabilities.
Visible Align
Controls the state of Visible Align. Visible Align replaces the “Aligning
1 or 10” messages with descriptive messages describing the
alignment piece begin executed.
Align Log…
Invokes Notepad with the Alignment Log loaded. The log can be
viewed or saved to an external media or drive. Notepad can be closed
without a mouse or external keyboard by pressing ALT front-panel
key, then arrow down to highlight Exit, then press Enter.
Align Log Mode
The Alignment System places information about the last alignment
performed into a log. The log can be configured to operate in clear or
append mode. In clear mode the log only contains information on the
last alignment performed; the log is cleared with each alignment
performed. In append mode each new alignment appends to the log.
In append mode, care must be taken by the operator to not allow the
log to grow to a size so large as to inhibit system operation.
Subsystem
The Subsystem menu allows invoking individual components of the internal
alignments.
ADC
Immediately executes an alignment of the ADC subsystem. The
instrument will stop any measurement currently underway, perform
the alignment, then restart the measurement from the beginning.
A failure of ADC will set the Error Condition “Align ADC failed”. A
failure will not employ new ADC alignment data.
Successful completion of ADC will clear the Error Condition “Align
ADC failed”.

364
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

The Advisory Event “Alignment complete” is displayed when the

alignment is complete.
Align ADC can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC)
front-panel key. When this occurs, no new ADC alignment data will
be employed.
LO
Immediately executes an alignment of the LO subsystem. The
instrument will stop any measurement currently underway, perform
the alignment, then restart the measurement from the beginning.
A failure of LO will set the Error Condition “Align LO failed”. A failure
will not employ new LO alignment data.
Successful completion of LO will clear the Error Condition “Align LO
failed”.
The Advisory Event “Alignment complete” is displayed when the
alignment is complete.
Align LO can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel
key. When this occurs, no new LO alignment data will be employed.
IF
Immediately executes an alignment of the IF subsystem. The
instrument will stop any measurement currently underway, perform
the alignment, then restart the measurement from the beginning.
A failure of IF will set the Error Condition “Align IF failed”. A failure will
not employ new IF alignment data.
Successful completion of IF will clear the Error Condition “Align IF
failed” and clear bit 6 in the Status.
The Advisory Event “Alignment complete” is displayed when the
alignment is complete.
Align IF can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel (ESC) front-panel
key. When this occurs, no new IF alignment data will be employed.
Current IF Flatness
Immediately executes an alignment of the Current IF Flatness, for the
purpose of improving the absolute amplitude accuracy within FFT
Sweeps and improving the group delay in some digital demodulation
measurements. The instrument will stop any measurement currently
underway, perform the alignment, then restart the measurement
from the beginning.
The Advisory Event “Alignment complete” is displayed when the
alignment is complete.

365
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

Align Current IF Flatness can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel

(ESC) front-panel key. When this occurs, no new Current IF Flatness
alignment data will be employed.
RF
This is exactly the same as the customer accessible Align Now, RF
with one exception: the alignment can be invoked even if a previous
Align Now, All has not been executed (this key is not grayed-out if
using default alignment data). See description of Align Now, RF in the
User's Guide.
Current Gain System
Immediately executes an alignment of the Current System Gain, for
the purpose of improving small amplitude variations that occur as
resolution bandwidth is switched. This alignment is done by
measuring the response of the current system state configuration to
the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal. All subsequent
measurements are then compensated appropriately for absolute
amplitude accuracy. The instrument will stop any measurement
currently underway, perform the alignment, then restart the
measurement from the beginning.
The Advisory Event “Alignment complete” is displayed when the
alignment is complete.
Align Current System Gain can be interrupted by pressing the Cancel
(ESC) front-panel key. When this occurs, no new Current System
Gain alignment data will be employed.
LO Phase Noise Ad justment (software versions ≥ A.04.00)
Immediately executes an optimization LO for Phase Noise. When the
optimization is finished the value is stored in non-volatile memory.
The instrument will stop any measurement currently underway,
perform the alignment, and then restart the measurement from the
beginning (similar to pressing the Restart key).
Diagnostics (software versions ≥ A.04.00)
Pressing Diagnostics in the Service Menu brings up the Service
Diagnostics submenu. The functions in this menu allow the
technician to do more detailed, lower-level troubleshooting.
Show Software
The Show Software screen displays revision information for Keysight
internal software that comprises the embedded application and
programmable hardware devices (FPGAs and PLDs).

366
 Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

Figure 12-2 Example Screen

The software name is left justified, with the revision information right
justified. This is a multi-page list with Next Page and Previous Page
menu key control in accordance with other text screens (Show
Systems, Show Errors, etc.).

367
Service and Diagnostics Menus
Service Key Descriptions

368
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

13 Replaceable Parts

What You Will Find in This Chapter

1. Part number tables for assemblies, mechanical parts, cables, front panel
connectors, and labels.
2. Part location diagrams for the following:
Figure 13-1, “Major Assemblies,”
Figure 13-2, “External Hardware (Benchtop Configuration),”
Figure 13-3, “External Hardware and Bail Handle (Option PRC),”
Figure 13-4, “External Hardware (Option PRC),”
Fig 13-5 and Fig 13-6 CPU Assembly on page 392 and page 393
Figure 13-7, “Disk Drive Tray Assembly,”
Figure 13-8, “Top Brace and Reference Bracket,”
Figure 13-9, “RF Area - Standard Instrument,”
Figure 13-10, “RF Area - Options B40, MPB, or DP2,”
Figure 13-11, “RF Area - Options B40, MPB, or DP2 (switch detail),”
Figure 13-12, “Front End Parts - Standard Instruments,”
Figure 13-13, “Front End Parts - Options MPB, B40, DP2, CR3, or CRP,”
Figure 13-14, “Front End Control Cables - early serial numbers,”
Figure 13-15, “Front End Control Cables - later serial numbers,”
Figure 13-16, “Front End Control Cables - Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or
CRP,”
Figure 13-17, “Reference Board Cables - Instruments without Option B40,
MPB, DP2, B85, B1A, or B1X Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000,”
Figure 13-18, “Reference Board Cables - Options B40, MPB, DP2 Serial
Number < MY/SG/US52330000 without Options B85, B1A, or B1X,”
Figure 13-21, “AIF/DIF Cables - Standard Instruments,”
Figure 13-22, “AIF/DIF Cables, bottom - Standard Instruments,”
Figure 13-23, “AIF/DIF Cables - Options MPB, B40, or DP2,”

369
Replaceable Parts
What You Will Find in This Chapter

Figure 13-24, “AIF/DIF Cables, bottom - Options MPB, B40, or DP2,”

Figure 13-25, “AIF/DIF Assemblies - Standard Instruments,”
Figure 13-26, “AIF/DIF Assemblies - Option DP2, MPB, B40,”
Figure 13-27, “Chassis,”
Figure 13-28, “Motherboard,”
Figure 13-29, “Fan Hardware,”
Figure 13-30, “Input Connector,”
Figure 13-31, “Front Frame Parts - LCD,”
Figure 13-32, “Front Frame Parts - LED,”
Figure 13-33, “Front Frame Parts (shields off) - LED,”
Figure 13-34, “Front Frame Exploded View - LCD,”
Figure 13-35, “Front Frame Exploded View - LED,”
Figure 13-36, “Option BBA Parts,”

370
 Replaceable Parts
What You Will Find in This Chapter

How to Order Parts

To order an assembly or mechanical part listed in this chapter, go to:
http://www.keysight.com/find/parts
If you do not have web access, or the parts you are interested in cannot be
found in the parts list provided, contact your local Keysight Technologies sales
and service office with the following information:
— Product model number
— Product serial number
— Description of where the part is located, what it looks like, and its function
(if known)
— Quantity required
For a list of Keysight Technologies sales and service office locations, refer to
“Contacting Keysight Technologies” on page 39.

371
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Replaceable Parts
Some of the assemblies listed in the following table are related to options that
are available with the MXA Signal Analyzer. These options are described below.
Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A1A1 Front Frame Assembly Replacement Kita N9020-60110

A1A1MP1 Front Frame W1312-20108b

A1A1MP2 Main Keypad Overlayb

Serial Number > MY/SG51240000 N9020-60137

Serial Number < MY/SG51240000 E4410-80108

A1A1MP3 Connector Overlay E4410-80109

A1A1MP4 Front Frame Ground Spring W1312-00021

A1A1MP5 Braided Gasket -----

A1A1MP6 Chromeric Gasket -----

A1A1MP7 Front Frame Top Trim Strip (Use with Option PRC, Portable) W1312-40004

A1A1MP8 Front Frame Top Trim Strip W1312-40019

(Use with standard Bench analyzer)

A1A1MP9-10 Front Frame Side Trim Strip W1312-40005

A1A1MP11-12 Vinyl Side Trim (Use with standard Bench Analyzer) 5041-9172

A1A1MP13-17 Hole Plug 6960-0525

A1A1MP18 Cover Plate N9020-00002

A1A1MP19 Overlay, Left Display N9020-80026

A1A1MP20 Overlay, BBIQ Bottom N9020-80013

A1A1MP21 Overlay, BBIQ Top N9020-80014

A1A1MP22-23 Hole Plug, for 0.25 inch hole 6960-0076

A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60137

Serial Number ≥ MY48030101, ≥ SG48030001, ≥ US48010001 to W1312-60042

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

Serial Number < MY48030101, SG48030001, US48010001c N9020-60033

A1A2MP1 Speaker 9164-0453

372
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam W1312-40016

A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG51240000 2090-0997

Serial Number < MY/SG51240000 2090-0911

A1A4 DC-DC Converter (LED display backlight power) 0950-5235

Serial Number > MY/SG/US51240000

Inverter Board (Display Backlight Power) 0950-4635

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board N9020--63193d

A1MP1 Main Keypad E4410-40100

A1MP2 Display Keypad E4410-40101

A1MP3 Frequency Label, 3.6 GHz

Standard Instrument N9020-80093

Option RT1 or RT2 N9020-80122

A1MP4 Frequency Label, 8.4 GHz

Standard Instrument N9020-80094

Option RT1 or RT2 N9020-80123

A1MP5 Frequency Label, 13.6 GHz

Standard Instrument N9020-80095

Option RT1 or RT2 N9020-80124

A1MP6 Frequency Label, 26.5 GHz

Standard Instrument N9020-80096

Option RT1 or RT2 N9020-80125

A1MP7 LCD Glass Filter 1000-1513

A1MP8 LCD Lens Gasket W1312-40006

A1MP9 Knob W1312-40017

A1MP10-13 Cable Clamp (Front Panel Cables) 1400-2225

A1MP14 Display Bracket

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-00145

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-00023

373
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A1MP15 Inverter Board Shield W1312-00024

A1MP16 Inverter Top Shield (Option BBA) N9020-00010

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

A1MP17 Inverter Bottom Shield (Option BBA) N9020-00011

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA) N9020-00012

A1MP19-20 Grommet (Option BBA) 0400-0385

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

A1MP21 Channel Grommet (Option BBA) 0400-0018

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

A1MP22 Cable Clamp (Option BBA) 1400-1439

A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket N9020-00028

A1MP24 Magnetic Shield (Display Bracket to Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket) N9020-00029

A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60122

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60010

A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Inverter Board W1312-60011

A1W3 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface board to DC-DC Converter W1312-60130
Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000

A1W4 Power Cable, DC-DC Converter to Display W1312-60131

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000

A2 Analog I.F. Assembly

Standard Instruments, Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 E4410-60104

Standard Instruments, Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60011

Options B40, MPB, or DP2 N9020-60011

A3 Digital I.F. Assembly

Standard Instruments N9020-60119

Options B40, MPB, or DP2, Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60165

without Option B85, B1A, or B1X

Options B40, MPB, or DP2, Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60016

and all with Option B85, B1A, or B1X

374
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A3W1 Cable Assembly, Smart Noise Source (Wire Harness)

Standard Instruments E4410-60163

Options B40, MPB, or DP2 N9020-60090

A4 CPU Replacement Kit (w/o disk drive)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US49100000 (Single Core) N9020-60031

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US49100000 to < MY/SG/US52090000 or N9020-60081

Option PC2 (Dual Core)e

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52090000 to < MY/SG/US55320000 or N9020-60135

e
Option PC4 (High Performance Dual Core)

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US55320000 or Option PC6 (High Performance N9020-60247

e
Quad Core)

A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect Board (PC2 and PC4 CPUs only) W1312-63079

A4A2 Memory card, SD 1819-1069

Serial prefix number ≥ MY/SG/US5532 and any with Option PC6

A4BT1 CPU Board Battery (CR2032) 1420-0356

A5 Disk Drive Replacement Kit

Serial Number < MY/SG/US49100000 (IDE) N9020-60066

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US49100000 or Option PC2, or Option PC4 with N9020-60125

WinXP OSe

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52090000 or Option PC4 with WES7 OSe N9020-60202

A5MP1 Disk Drive Traye W1312-40078

A5MP2 Disk Drive Rear Panele W1312-00103

A5MP3 Disk Drive Assembly Handlee 1440-0421

A5W1 Disk Drive Ribbon Cable (used only with IDE drives) 8121-1611

A6 Power Supply

Standard Instruments 0950-4894

Options B85, B1A, or B1X 0950-5012

A7 Midplane Assembly N9020-63120

A8 Motherboard Assembly N9000-66404

375
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A9 RF Attenuator A (0 to 4 dB) 33360-60008

A10 RF Attenuator B (0 to 66 dB) 33321-60083

A11 Low Band Switch Assembly

Option 503 E4410-60121f

Options 508, 513, 526 E4410-60121

A12 YTF Preselector (except Option 503) 5087-7828

A12MP1 Gap Pad YTF Base 5022-7179

A13 RF Front End Assembly

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60189g

Serial Number MY/SG/US52330000 to MY/SG/US52339999 N9020-60183

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US53280000 except Option EXM N9020-60189g

Option EXM N9020-60183

A13A1 Bandpass Filter

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 without Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, 0955-1719
or CRP

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 with Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or 0955-2176
CRP and all Serial Numbers ≥ MY/SG/US52330000

A13W1 Cable Assembly, A13J10 to A13A1 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 without Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, E4410-20176
or CRP

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 with Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or E6607-21178
CRP

Serial Number MY/SG/US52330000 to MY/SG/US52339999 N9020-20229

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US53280000 except Option EXM E6607-21178

Option EXM N9020-20229

376
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

A13W2 Cable Assembly, A13J11 from A13A1 Output (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 without Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, E4410-20177
or CRP

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 with Option B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or E6607-21179
CRP

Serial Number MY/SG/US52330000 to MY/SG/US52339999 N9020-20231

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US53280000 except Option EXM E6607-21179

Option EXM N9020-20231

A13MP1 Spacer, Bandpass Filter Mounting Adapter E6607-25005

(Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or CRP)

A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 E4410-60187

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 except Option HP2 N9020-60118

Option HP2 E4410-60187

A15 Front End Control Assembly

Standard Instruments, Serial Number ≥ MY51240512 or ≥ SG51240029 N9020-60098

Standard Instruments, Serial Number < MY51240512 or < SG51240029 N9020-60127c

Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, CRP N9020-60172

A16 Reference Assembly

Serial Numbers < MY/SG/US52330000 without Option B85, B1A, or B1X E4410-60108

Serial Numbers < MY/SG/US52330000 with Option B85, B1A, or B1X N9020-60200

Serial Numbers ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60200

A17 BBIQ LED Board (Option BBA)h N9020-63095

A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA) N9020-60094

A19 BBIQ Main Board (Option BBA) N9020-60093

A25 Wide-Band Analog IF Assembly (Option B85/B1A/B1X) N9020-60044

A26 Wide-Band Digital IF Assembly (Option B85/B1A/B1X) N9020-60047

AT1 Fixed Attenuator, 6 dB 08493-60026

(Options B40, MPB, or DP2)
(connects to SW2)

B1-B2 Fan 3160-4199

377
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

J1 Type-N (f) RF Input Connector Assembly 5002-0702

EMI O-Ring 18.75 mm ID 8160-1637

(used between RF Input Connector and Front Frame)

J2 EXT MIXER Connector (discard washer and nut, if supplied) 1250-1666

(Option EXM)

MP1 Chassis Base

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 E4410-00102

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-00032

MP2 Chassis Side, Right (inner)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00046

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00135

MP3 Chassis Side, Left (inner)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00047

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00136

MP4 Midplane Bracket W1312-00048

MP5 Chassis Front Bracket

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00049

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00098

MP6 Fan Bracket

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00133

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 W1312-00137

MP7 Top Brace (includes foam strips) N9020-60018

MP8 Chassis Side, Right (Outer, attaches to Low Band Switch bracket, Attenuator
brackets, and Chassis bottom)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US50510001i E4410-00101

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US50510001 to < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-00031

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-00034

378
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

MP9 Rear Panel Replacement Kit (includes foam strip)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 except Option B85, B1A, or B1X N9020-60028

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 Option B85, B1A, or B1X N9020-60149

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 except Option B85, B1A, or B1X N9020-60142

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 Option B85, B1A, or B1X N9020-60149

MP10 Label, AUX IF OUT (rear panel) N9020-80081

MP11-12 Coax Cable Clips 5041-9690

MP13-15 Tie Wrap (For long semi-rigid cables) 1400-0249

MP16 Dress Cover (includes magnetic gasket)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60020

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60141

MP17-20 Rear Feet (Benchtop Configuration) 5041-9611

MP21-22 Strap Handles (Benchtop Configuration) N9020-60002

MP25-26 Fan Guard 3160-0281

MP27-34 Rivet, Fan Mounting (8 pieces) 0361-1272

MP35 Z-Bracket Power Supply to Chassis W1312-00016

MP36-37 Attenuator Bracket N9020-00052

MP38 Low Band Switch Assembly Bracket

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-00109

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-00023

MP39 O-ring, Type N (f) RF Input Connector 8160-1637

MP40 PC Board Plastic Guides (10 pieces) W1312-40001

MP41-44 Front Bumpers (Option PRC, Portable Configuration) W1312-40020

MP45-48 Rear Bumpers (Option PRC, Portable Configuration) W1312-40021

MP49 Bail Handle (Option PRC, Portable Configuration) W1312-60036

MP50 Front Panel Protective Cover (Option CVR) W1312-40025

n/a Front End Troubleshooting Kit N9020-60005

n/a Front End Troubleshooting Bd. E4410-60115

MP51 CPU & Power Supply Guide Pin Grommets (8 pieces) 0400-0353

379
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

MP52 50 Ω Termination (for A13) 1810-0118

MP53 Spiral Wrap 0890-0025

MP54 Rear Frame Lock Washer (External Reference Cable) 2190-0102

MP55 Rear Frame Lock Nut (External Reference Cable) 0590-2332

MP57-60 Bottom Feet Hole Plugs (Option PRC, Portable Configuration) W1312-40032

MP61-64 Strap Handle Plugs (Option PRC, Portable Configuration) W1312-40024

MP65 Top Bracket, Reference Assembly N9000-00104

(not used on Serial Numbers ≥ MY/SG/US52330000)

MP66-69 Bottom Feet (Benchtop Configuration) 5041-9167

MP70-71 Tilt Stands (Benchtop Configuration) 1460-1345

MP72-75 Bottom Feet Key Locks (Benchtop Configuration) 5021-2840

MP76 Vibration Mount (Option BBA Core Bracket) 0460-2725

MP77 BBIQ Main Board Warning Label N9020-80036

MP78 Cable Hold Down, 41 mm 5023-2095

MP79 Bracket, Preselector Bypass Switch 1 E4410-00104

(Option MPG, on top of bottom switch)

MP80 Bracket, Preselector Bypass Switch 2 E4410-00110

(Option MPB, on top of top switch)

MP81 Reserved

MP82 Reserved

MP83 Gusset, Chassis (near RF Input connector) W1312-00093

MP84 Bracket, Reference Support E4410-00108

SW1 & 2 Coaxial Switch N1810-60069

(Options B40, MPB, or DP2)

W1 Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Motherboard (Ribbon)

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG48010101, US48010001j N9020-60036

Serial Number < MY/SG48010101, US48010001k E4410-60171

W2 Cable, Interconnect from A2J820 to A3J20

Standard Instruments E4410-60162

Option B40, MPB, DP2 N9020-60046

380
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

W3 Cable Assembly, A11J2 to A13J2 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-20162

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20101

W4 Cable Assembly, A14J740 to A13J4 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20156

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20155

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20064

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20154

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20033

W7 Cable Assembly, A12 Output to A13J9 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20124

W8 Cable Assembly, A11J3 to A12 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-20160

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20123

W9 Cable Assembly, A10 Output to A11J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-20159

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20153

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W11 Cable Assembly, A9 Output to A10 Input (Semi Rigid) N9020-20142

W12 Cable Assembly, A16J710 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W13 Cable Assembly, A2J601 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1411

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W15 Cable Assembly, A13J7 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W16 Cable Assembly, A9 & A10 to A15J801 or A15J102 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60157

W17 Cable Assembly, A13J12 to A15J104 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60156

W18 Cable Assembly, A11J4 to A15J103 or A15J700 E4410-60160

(Ribbon Cable)

381
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2

(Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20157

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20065

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W21 Reserved

W22 Cable Assembly, A15J301 or A15J300 to A12J1 (Wire Harness)

Standard Instruments, Options 508, 513, 526 with E4410-60158

Serial Numbers < MY51240512, < SG51240029, < US51240101

Standard Instruments, Options 508, 513, 526 with N9020-60059

Serial Numbers ≥ MY51240512, ≥ SG51240029, ≥ US51240101

Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or CRP N9020-60059

W23 Cable Assembly, Ext. Reference Cable (rear frame) to A16J704 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1402

W24 Cable Assembly, A18J1, BBIQ Interface Board to A19J1, BBIQ Main Board 8121-1683
(Ribbon Cable) (Option BBA)

W25 Cable Assembly, A19J101, BBIQ Main Board to A16J707 Reference Board 8121-1401
(Flexible Coax) (Option BBA)

W26 Cable Assembly, A13J13 to A15J903 (Flexible Coax) Option EXM 8121-2027

W27 Cable Assembly, J2 (front panel) to W28 (Semi Rigid) Option EXM N9020-20166

W28 Cable Assembly, W27 to A13J8 (Semi Rigid) Option EXM N9020-20241

W29 Reserved

W30 Cable Assembly, A15J801 to SW1 and SW2 (Wire Harness) E4410-60159

W31 Cable Assembly, SW2 Center Port to A11J3 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20161

W32 Cable Assembly, SW2 Port 2 to A12J2 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20163

W33 Cable Assembly, SW1 Port 2 to A12J1 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20165

W34 Cable Assembly, SW1 Center Port to A13J9 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20164

W35 Cable Assembly, AT1 to SW1 Port 1 (Semi-rigid) N9020-20210

W36 Cable Assembly, A15J902 to A13J7 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1862

W37 Cable Assembly, A15J900 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W38 Cable Assembly, A15J901 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1861

W39 Cable Assembly, A15J1100 to Rear Panel Port 9 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2028

382
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-1 All Replaceable Parts

Reference
Description Part Number
Designator

W40 Cable Assembly,A13J6 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1940

W41 Cable Assembly, A2J601 to A3J19 (Flexible Coax) 8120-8868

W42 Cable Assembly, A16J706 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W43 Cable Assembly, A16J705 to A3J18 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W44 Cable Assembly, A25J2 to A26J504 (Flex cable) 8121-1854

W45 Reserved

W46 Reserved

W47 Reserved

W48 Reserved

W49 Reserved

W50 Cable Assembly, A16J726 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W51 Cable Assembly, A16J718 to A25J301 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W52 Cable Assembly, A25J102 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2288

W53 Cable Assembly, A15J901 to A25J101 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2292

W54 Cable Assembly, A16J716 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2288

W55 Cable Assembly, A25J805 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2290

W56 Cable Assembly, A16J726 to A25J806 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2291

a. Frequency range label not included in kit. See A1MP3 - A1MP6

b. Non-orderable item, see A1A1
c. Replacement Kit
d. Serial prefix < MY/SG/US5011 order N9020-60110 due to fit issue.
e. Disk drive removable through rear panel.
f. The E4410-60121 is the preferred replacement for the N9020-60255, Low Band Switch that may be
installed in some N9020As with Option 503.
g. This kit replaces RF Front End Assemblies with part numbers E4410-60154, E6607-61002, and
E6607-61004.
h. Does not include A1A1MP20 or A1A1MP21 overlays.
i. Refer to part number for S/N > MY/SG 50510001 if the analyzer is equipped with Option B40, MPB,
or DP2.
j. Locking connector on both ends
k. Locking connector, Motherboard only

383
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-2 Attaching Hardware

Attach To Qty Part Number Type Tool Torque

Analog IF Digital IF 3 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Analog IF (Top Shield) Analog IF (Bottom 16 0515-0664 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Shield) (12 mm long)

Attenuators Attenuator Bracket 2 per 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Attenuators Chassis 2 per 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Bail Handle Front Frame 4 0515-0435 M4 X 0.7 Torx T-20 21 inch-lbs

(14 mm long)

Bandpass Filter Bandpass Filter Spacer 3 0515-0661 M2 X 0.4 Torx T-6 3 inch-lbs
(6 mm long)

Bandpass Filter Spacer RF Front End Assembly 4 0515-0658 M2 X 0.4 Torx T-6 3 inch-lbs
(6 mm long)

BBIQ Flex Ribbon BBIQ Interface Board 2 N9020-2001 Hex Shoulder 1/4” socket 4 inch-lbs
(Option BBA) 7 Screw 4-40

BBIQ Core Bracket BBIQ Inverter Shield 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(Option BBA) Top (8 mm long)

BBIQ LED Board Front Frame 2 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(Option BBA) (8 mm long)

BBIQ Interface Board Front Frame (side) 1 0515-1035 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(Option BBA) (8 mm long)

Bracket, Preselector Low Band Switch 2 0515-1992 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 6 inch-lbs
Bypass SW1 Bracket (20 mm long)

Bracket, Preselector Low Band Switch 2 0515-1992 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 6 inch-lbs
Bypass SW2 Bracket (20 mm long)

Chassis Bottom Chassis Sides, 15 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

Midplane (8 mm long)
& Front Bracket

Chassis Side Low Band Switch 7 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(Right Outside) Bracket, Attenuator (8 mm long)
Brackets, Chassis
bottom

CPU Assembly Chassis 6 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

CPU Shielda CPU & Hard Disk Drive 19 0515-5074 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(6 mm long)

384
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-2 Attaching Hardware

Attach To Qty Part Number Type Tool Torque

CPU Shield CPU Assembly 3 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

19 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(6 mm long)

DC-DC Converter Display Bracket 2 0515-0430 M3 X 6.0 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

Serial Number
> MY/SG51240000

Digital IF LVDS Connector 2 0515-4439 M2.5 X 6.0 Small Pozi 5 inch-lbs

Display Display Bracket 4 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

Serial Number (8 mm long)
> MY/SG51240000

Display Display Bracket 4 0515-1934 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 5 inch-lbs

Serial Number (6 mm long)
MY/SG51240000

Display Bracket & Front Front Frame 7 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Panel (8 mm long)
Interface/Speaker
Bracket

Disk Drive Disk Drive Tray 4 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(8 mm long)

Disk Drive Interconnect CPU Assembly 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(8 mm long)

Disk Drive Handle Disk Drive Rear Panel 2 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(6 mm long)

Disk Drive Rear Panel Disk Drive Tray 4 0515-2219 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 9 inch-lbs
(5 mm long)

External Reference Rear Panel 1 2190-0102 Lock Washer n/a n/a

BNC

External Reference Rear Panel 1 0590-2332 Hex Nut 9/16” Nut 21 inch-lbs
BNC Driver

Fan Assembly Chassis 5 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Fan Fan Bracket 8 0361-1272 Rivets n/a n/a

Front Bumpers Front Frame 8 0515-0435 M4 X 0.7 Torx T-20 21 inch-lbs

(Opt. PRC) (14 mm long)

Front Chassis Bracket Chassis Sides 10 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
& Midplane Bracket (8 mm long)

385
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-2 Attaching Hardware

Attach To Qty Part Number Type Tool Torque

Front Frame Chassis 8 0515-1035 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Front Frame Bottom Chassis 2 per 0515-1035 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(8 mm long)

Front Panel Assy. Chassis 6 0515-1035 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Front Panel Daughter Front Frame 3 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Board (8 mm long)

Front Panel Interface Front Frame 13 0515-1521 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch lbs.
(5 mm long)

Inverter Board Inverter Bracket 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Inverter Board Display Bracket 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(Option BBA) (8 mm long)

Inverter Shield Top Inverter Shield Bottom 8 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(Option BBA) (8 mm long)

Low Band Switch Assy. Chassis 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
(8 mm long)

Low Band Switch Assy. Low Band Switch 4 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Bracket (8 mm long)

Low Band Switch Bracket, Preselector 1 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Bracket. Bypass SW2 (8 mm long)

Midplane Assembly Midplane Bracket 6 0515-0375 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(16 mm long)

Motherboard Chassis Base 4 0515-0372 M3 X0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Power Supply 'Z' Chassis Sides 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Bracket (8 mm long)

Power Supply 'Z' Power Supply 3 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Bracket (8 mm long)

Rear Bumper Feet (Opt. Rear Panel 4 0515-1619 M4 X 0.7 Torx T-20 21
PRC) (25 mm long) inch-lbs.

Rear Bumper Feet (Opt. Rear Panel 4 3050-0893 Flat Washer n/a n/a
PRC)

Rear Feet Rear Panel 4 0515-1619 M4 X 0.7 Torx T-20 21 inch-lbs

(25 mm long)

Rear Feet Rear Panel 4 3050-0893 Flat Washer n/a n/a

386
 Replaceable Parts
Replaceable Parts

Table 13-2 Attaching Hardware

Attach To Qty Part Number Type Tool Torque

Rear Frame Chassis 18 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Rear Frame Top Bracket, Reference 4 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Assembly (8 mm long)

RF Front End Assembly Chassis 4 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

RF Input Connector Chassis 2 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(8 mm long)

Strap Handle Plugs Instrument Cover 4 0515-5209 M5 X 0.8 Torx T-20 21 inch-lbs
(Opt. PRC) (14 mm long)

Strap Handles Chassis Side 2 per 0515-0710 M4 X 0.8 Torx T-20 21 inch-lbs
(18 mm long)

SW1 Bracket SW1 2 0515-1992 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 6 inch-lbs

(20 mm long)

SW2 Bracket SW2 2 0515-1992 M2.5 X 0.45 Torx T-8 6 inch-lbs

(20 mm long)

SW2 Bracket Low Band Switch 1 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Bracket (8 mm long)

Top Brace Top Bracket, Reference 4 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Assembly (6 mm long)

Top Brace Board Assemblies 6 0515-1227 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(6 mm long)

Top Brace & Reference Chassis Components 12 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs
Assembly Bracket (8 mm long)

YTF Preselector Chassis 4 0515-0372 M3 X 0.5 Torx T-10 9 inch-lbs

(except (8 mm long)
Option 503)

a. Prior to serial number MY/SG/US49100000

387
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Hardware
Figure 13-1 Major Assemblies

Table 13-3

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A2 Analog I.F. Assembly See Table 13-1

A3 Digital I.F. Assembly

2 A4 CPU Replacement Kit (w/o disk drive) See Table 13-1

3 A6 Power Supply

Standard Instruments 0950-4894

Options B85, B1A, or B1X 0950-5012

4 A16 Reference Assembly See Table 13-1

5 A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly See Table 13-1

6 A15 Front End Control Assembly See Table 13-1

7 A7 Midplane Assembly N9020-63120

8 A19 BBIQ Main Board (Option BBA) N9020-60093

388
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-2 External Hardware (Benchtop Configuration)

Table 13-4

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1, 2 MP21-22 Strap Handles (Benchtop N9020-60002

Configuration) (includes screws)

3 Screw M4 X 0.7 (25 mm long) 0515-1619

4 MP17-20 Rear Feet (Benchtop Configuration) 5041-9611

5 MP16 Dress Cover (includes magnetic gasket)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60020

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60141

389
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-3 External Hardware and Bail Handle (Option PRC)

Table 13-5

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 Screw M4 X 0.7 (14 mm long) 0515-0435

2 MP49 Bail Handle (Option PRC, Portable W1312-60036

Configuration)

3 Screw M4 X 0.7 (14 mm long) 0515-0435

4 MP41-44 Front Bumpers (Option PRC, Portable W1312-40020

Configuration)

5 MP61-64 Strap Handle Plugs (Option PRC, Portable W1312-40024

Configuration)

6 Screw M5 X 0.8 (14 mm long) 0515-5209

390
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-4 External Hardware (Option PRC)

Table 13-6

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 Screw M4 X 0.7 (25 mm long) 0515-1619

2 MP45-48 Rear Bumpers (Option PRC, Portable W1312-40021

Configuration) (includes screws)

3 MP16 Dress Cover (includes magnetic gasket)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60020

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-60141

391
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-5 CPU Assembly (Serial Number < MY/SG/US49100000)

Table 13-7

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A4BT1 CPU Board Battery (CR2032) 1420-0356

2 Disk Drive Ribbon Cable (used only with IDE 8121-1611

drives)

3 Hard Disk Drive N9020-60066

392
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-6 CPU Assembly (Serial Number > MY/SG/US49100000)

Table 13-8

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A4 CPU Replacement Kit Refer to Service Note

N9020A-01

2 A4BT1 CPU Board Battery (CR2032) 1420-0356

3 A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect Board (PC2 and PC4 W1312-63079

CPUs only)

4 Screw M3 x 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

393
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-7 Disk Drive Tray Assembly

Table 13-9

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A5 Disk Drive Replacement Kit

Serial Number < MY/SG/US49100000 (IDE) N9020-60066

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US49100000 or Option PC2 or Option PC4 with N9020-60125

WinXP OS

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52090000 or Option PC4 with WES7 OS N9020-60202

2 A5MP1 Disk Drive Tray W1312-40078

3 A5MP2 Disk Drive Rear Panel W1312-00103

4 A5MP3 Disk Drive Assembly Handle 1440-0421

394
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-9

Item Description Keysight Part Number

5 Screw M3 x 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

(For rev 6 and earlier of drive tray. For rev 7 and later, us 0515-1035 M3 (8 mm
Flat-HD))

6 Screw M2.5 x 0.45 (5 mm long) 0515-2219

7 Screw M3 x 0.5 (6 mm long) 0515-1227

395
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-8 Top Brace and Reference Bracket

Table 13-10

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 MP7 Top Brace (includes foam strips) N9020-60018

2 MP65 Top Bracket, Reference Assembly (not N9000-00104

used on Serial Numbers ≥
MY/SG/US52330000)

3 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

4 Screw M3 X 0.5 (6 mm long) 0515-1227

5 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

6 Screw M3 X 0.5 (6 mm long) 0515-1227

7 Screw M3 X 0.5 (6 mm long) 0515-1227

8 Screw M3 X 0.5 (6 mm long) 0515-1227

396
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-9 RF Area - Standard Instrument

Table 13-11

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A9 RF Attenuator A (0 to 4 dB) 33360-60008

2 A10 RF Attenuator B (0 to 66 dB) 33321-60083

3 A11 Low Band Switch Assembly E4410-60121

4 A12 YTF Preselector (except Option 503) 5087-7828

W3 Cable Assembly, A11J2 to A13J2 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20162

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20101

W7 Cable Assembly, A12 Output to A13J9 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20124

W8 Cable Assembly, A11J3 to A12 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20160

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20123

397
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-11

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W9 Cable Assembly, A10 Output to A11J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20159

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20153

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W11 Cable Assembly, A9 Output to A10 Input (Semi Rigid) N9020-20142

W18 Cable Assembly, A11J4 to A15J103 or A15J700 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60160

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi

Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20157

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20065

398
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-10 RF Area - Options B40, MPB, or DP2

Table 13-12

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A9 RF Attenuator A (0 to 4 dB) 33360-60008

2 A10 RF Attenuator B (0 to 66 dB) 33321-60083

3 A11 Low Band Switch Assembly E4410-60121

4 A12 YTF Preselector (except Option 503) 5087-7828

5 SW1 Coaxial Switch (Options B40, MPB, or DP2) N1810-60069

6 SW2 Coaxial Switch (Options B40, MPB, or DP2) N1810-60069

7 AT1 Fixed Attenuator, 6 dB 08493-60026

W3 Cable Assembly, A11J2 to A13J2 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20162

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20101

W9 Cable Assembly, A10 Output to A11J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20159

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20153

399
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-12

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W11 Cable Assembly, A9 Output to A10 Input (Semi Rigid) N9020-20142

W18 Cable Assembly, A11J4 to A15J103 or A15J700 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60160

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi

Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20157

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20065

W32 Cable Assembly, SW2 Port 2 to A12J2 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20163

W33 Cable Assembly, SW1 Port 2 to A12J1 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20165

400
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-11 RF Area - Options B40, MPB, or DP2 (switch detail)

Table 13-13

Item Description Keysight Part Number

5 SW1 Coaxial Switch (Options B40, MPB, or DP2) N1810-60069

6 SW2 Coaxial Switch (Options B40, MPB, or DP2) N1810-60069

7 AT1 Fixed Attenuator, 6 dB 08493-60026

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W31 Cable Assembly, SW2 Center Port to A11J3 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20161

W32 Cable Assembly, SW2 Port 2 to A12J2 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20163

W33 Cable Assembly, SW1 Port 2 to A12J1 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20165

W34 Cable Assembly, SW1 Center Port to A13J9 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20164

W35 Cable Assembly, AT1 to SW1 Port 1 (Semi-rigid) N9020-20210

401
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-12 Front End Parts - Standard Instruments

Table 13-14

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A13 RF Front End Assembly Refer to Table 13-1

2 A13A1 Bandpass Filter Refer to Table 13-1

A13W1 Cable Assembly, A13J10 to A13A1 Input (Semi Rigid) Refer to Table 13-1

A13W2 Cable Assembly, A13J11 from A13A1 Output (Semi Rigid) Refer to Table 13-1

3 A12 YTF Preselector (except Option 503) 5087-7828

4 J1 Type-N (f) RF Input Connector Assembly 5002-0702

5 A11 Low Band Switch Assembly

W3 Cable Assembly, A11J2 to A13J2 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20162

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20101

W4 Cable Assembly, A14J740 to A13J4 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20156

402
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-14

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20155

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20064

W7 Cable Assembly, A12 Output to A13J9 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20124

W8 Cable Assembly, A11J3 to A12 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20160

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20123

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W15 Cable Assembly, A13J7 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W17 Cable Assembly, A13J12 to A15J104 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60156

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

403
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-13 Front End Parts - Options MPB, B40, DP2, CR3, or CRP

Table 13-15

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A13 RF Front End Assembly Refer to Table 13-1

2 A13A1 Bandpass Filter Refer to Table 13-1

A13W1 Cable Assembly, A13J10 to A13A1 Input (Semi Rigid) Refer to Table 13-1

A13W2 Cable Assembly, A13J11 from A13A1 Output (Semi Rigid) Refer to Table 13-1

3 A12 YTF Preselector (except Option 503) 5087-7828

4 J1 Type-N (f) RF Input Connector Assembly 5002-0702

5 A11 Low Band Switch Assembly

W3 Cable Assembly, A11J2 to A13J2 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20162

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20101

W4 Cable Assembly, A14J740 to A13J4 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20156

404
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-15

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20155

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20064

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001 E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

W17 Cable Assembly, A13J12 to A15J104 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60156

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W32 Cable Assembly, SW2 Port 2 to A12J2 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20163

W33 Cable Assembly, SW1 Port 2 to A12J1 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20165

W34 Cable Assembly, SW1 Center Port to A13J9 (Semi-rigid) E4410-20164

W36 Cable Assembly, A15J902 to A13J7 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1862

405
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-14 Front End Control Cables - early serial numbers

Figure 13-15 Front End Control Cables - later serial numbers

406
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-16

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A15 Front End Control Assembly

Standard Instruments, Serial Number ≥ MY51240512 N9020-60098

or ≥ SG51240029

Standard Instruments, Serial Number < MY51240512 N9020-60127

or < SG51240029

Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, CRP N9020-60172

2 A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 E4410-60187

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 except Option N9020-60118

HP2

Option HP2 E4410-60187

W4 Cable Assembly, A14J740 to A13J4 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20156

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20154

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 N9020-20033

W16 Cable Assembly, A9 & A10 to A15J801 or A15J102 E4410-60157

(Ribbon Cable)

W17 Cable Assembly, A13J12 to A15J104 (Ribbon Cable) E4410-60156

W18 Cable Assembly, A11J4 to A15J103 or A15J700 E4410-60160

(Ribbon Cable)

W22 Cable Assembly, A15J301 or A15J300 to A12J1 (Wire

Harness)

Standard Instruments, Options 508, 513, 526 with E4410-60158

Serial Numbers < MY51240512, < SG51240029, <
US51240101

Standard Instruments, Options 508, 513, 526 with N9020-60059

Serial Numbers ≥ MY51240512, ≥ SG51240029, ≥
US51240101

Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or CRP N9020-60059

407
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-16 Front End Control Cables - Options B40, MPB, DP2, CR3, or CRP

The Front End Control Assembly used in Options MPB, B40, DP2, CR3,
and CRP has these additional cables:
Table 13-17

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W36 Cable Assembly, A15J902 to A13J7 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1862

W37 Cable Assembly, A15J900 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W38 Cable Assembly, A15J901 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1861

W39 Cable Assembly, A15J1100 to Rear Panel Port 9 8121-2028

(Flexible Coax)

408
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-17 Reference Board Cables - Instruments without Option B40, MPB, DP2, B85,
B1A, or B1X
Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000

Table 13-18

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A16 Reference Assembly E4410-60108

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20155

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20154

W12 Cable Assembly, A16J710 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi N9020-20157

Rigid)

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W23 Cable Assembly, Ext. Reference Cable (rear frame) to A16J704 8121-1402
(Flexible Coax)

409
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-18 Reference Board Cables - Options B40, MPB, DP2

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 without Options B85, B1A, or B1X

Table 13-19

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A16 Reference Assembly E4410-60108

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20155

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20154

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi N9020-20157

Rigid)

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W23 Cable Assembly, Ext. Reference Cable (rear frame) to A16J704 8121-1402
(Flexible Coax)

W42 Cable Assembly, A16J706 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W43 Cable Assembly, A16J705 to A3J18 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

410
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-19 Reference Board Cables -

without Options B40, MPB, DP2, B85, B1A, or B1X
Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000

Table 13-20

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A16 Reference Assembly N9020-60200

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20064

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20033

W12 Cable Assembly, A16J710 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi N9020-20065

Rigid)

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W23 Cable Assembly, Ext. Reference Cable (rear frame) to A16J704 8121-1402
(Flexible Coax)

W25 Cable Assembly A16J707 to A19J101 (Flexible Coax) Option BBA only 8121-1401

411
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-20 Reference Board Cables -

Serial Number < MY/SG/US52330000 with Options B85, B1A, or B1X
Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US52330000 with Options B40, MPB, DP2, B85,
B1A, or B1X

Table 13-21

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A16 Reference Assembly N9020-60200

W5 Cable Assembly, A16J702 to A13J1 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20064

W6 Cable Assembly, A16J703 to A14J200 (Semi Rigid) N9020-20033

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W19 Cable Assembly, A16J701 to A9 Cal Signal Input/Port 2 (Semi N9020-20065

Rigid)

W20 Cable Assembly, A13J6 to A16J705 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

W23 Cable Assembly, Ext. Reference Cable (rear frame) to A16J704 8121-1402
(Flexible Coax)

W25 Cable Assembly A16J707 to A19J101 (Flexible Coax) Option BBA only 8121-1401

W51 Cable Assembly, A16J718 to A25J301 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W54 Cable Assembly, A16J716 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2288

W56 Cable Assembly, A16J726 to A25J806 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2291

412
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-21 AIF/DIF Cables - Standard Instruments

Figure 13-22 AIF/DIF Cables, bottom - Standard Instruments

413
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-22

Item Description Keysight Part Number

A3W1 Cable Assembly, Smart Noise Source (Wire Harness)

Standard Instruments E4410-60163

Options B40, MPB, or DP2 N9020-60090

W12 Cable Assembly, A16J710 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W13 Cable Assembly, A2J601 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1411

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W15 Cable Assembly, A13J7 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1400

414
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-23 AIF/DIF Cables - Options MPB, B40, or DP2

Figure 13-24 AIF/DIF Cables, bottom - Options MPB, B40, or DP2

415
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-23

Item Description Keysight Part Number

W14 Cable Assembly, A16J711 to A2J300 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W37 Cable Assembly, A15J900 to A2J100 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W38 Cable Assembly, A15J901 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1861

W40 Cable Assembly,A13J6 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1940

W41 Cable Assembly, A2J601 to A3J19 (Flexible Coax) 8120-8868

W42 Cable Assembly, A16J705 to A3J18 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W50 Cable Assembly, A16J726 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-1401

W52 Cable Assembly, A25J102 to A3J15 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2288

W54 Cable Assembly, A16J716 to A3J14 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2288

W55 Cable Assembly, A25J805 to A3J17 (Flexible Coax) 8121-2290

416
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-25 AIF/DIF Assemblies - Standard Instruments

Table 13-24

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A2 Analog I.F. Assembly

Standard Instruments, Serial Number < E4410-60104

MY/SG/US52330000

Standard Instruments, Serial Number ≥ N9020-60011

MY/SG/US52330000

2 A3 Digital I.F. Assembly N9020-60119

3 Screw, M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

W2 Cable, Interconnect from A2J820 to A3J20 E4410-60162

A3W1 Cable Assembly, Smart Noise Source (Wire Harness) E4410-60163

417
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-26 AIF/DIF Assemblies - Option DP2, MPB, B40

Table 13-25

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A2 Analog I.F. Assembly N9020-60011

2 A3 Digital I.F. Assembly

Options B40, MPB, or DP2, Serial Number < N9020-60165

MY/SG/US52330000 without Option B85, B1A, or B1X

Options B40, MPB, or DP2, Serial Number ≥ N9020-60016

MY/SG/US52330000 and all with Option B85, B1A, or
B1X

3 Screw, M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

W2 Cable, Interconnect from A2J820 to A3J20 N9020-60046

A3W1 Cable Assembly, Smart Noise Source (Wire Harness) N9020-60090

418
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-27 Chassis

Table 13-26

Keysight Keysight
Part Number Part Number
Item Description
Serial Number Serial Number
< MY/SG/US5233 ≥ MY/SG/US5233

MP1 Chassis Base E4410-00102 N9020-00032

MP2 Chassis Side, Right (inner) W1312-00046 W1312-00135

MP3 Chassis Side, Left (inner) W1312-00047 W1312-00136

MP4 Midplane Bracket W1312-00048

MP5 Chassis Front Bracket W1312-00049 W1312-00098

MP6 Fan Bracket W1312-00133 W1312-00137

MP8 Chassis Side, Right (Outer, attaches to Low Band

Switch bracket, Attenuator brackets, and Chassis
bottom)

Serial Number < MY/SG/US50510001a E4410-00101

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US50510001 to < N9020-00031 N9020-00034

MY/SG/US52330000

419
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-26

Keysight Keysight
Part Number Part Number
Item Description
Serial Number Serial Number
< MY/SG/US5233 ≥ MY/SG/US5233

MP9 Rear Panel Replacement Kit (includes foam strip) Refer to Table 13-1

MP36- Attenuator Bracket N9020-00052

37

a. Use N9020-00031 if Option B40, MPB, or DP2 is installed.

420
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-28 Motherboard

Table 13-27

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A8 N9000-66404

2 Screw M3 X0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

421
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-29 Fan Hardware

Table 13-28

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 B1 Fan 3160-4199

2 B2 Fan 3160-4199

3 MP25-26 Fan Guard 3160-0281

4 MP27-34 Rivet, Fan Mounting (8 pieces) 0361-1272

422
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-30 Input Connector

Table 13-29

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

2 J1 Type-N (f) RF Input Connector Assembly 5002-0702

3 EMI O-Ring 18.75 mm ID (used between RF 8160-1637

Input Connector and Front Frame)

4 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

W10 Cable Assembly, J1 to A9 Input (Semi Rigid)

Serial Number < MY/SG50510001i E4410-20156

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG50510001 N9020-20141

5 MP83 Gusset, Chassis (near RF Input W1312-00093

connector)

423
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-31 Front Frame Parts - LCD

Table 13-30

Item Description Keysight Part Number

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY48030101, ≥ SG48030001, ≥ W1312-60042

US48010001 to Serial Number <
MY/SG/US51240000

Serial Number < MY48030101, SG48030001, N9020-60033

US48010001

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker 9164-0453

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam W1312-40016

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display 2090-0911

13 A1A4 Inverter Board (Display Backlight Power) 0950-4635

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board N9020--63193

23 A1MP10-13 Cable Clamp (Front Panel Cables) 1400-2225

24 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel W1312-60010

Interface Board

424
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-30

Item Description Keysight Part Number

25 A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board W1312-60011

to Inverter Board

26 W1 Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to

Motherboard (Ribbon)

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG48010101, US48010001 N9020-60036

Serial Number < MY/SG48010101, US48010001 E4410-60171

28, 28, 30 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

31 Screw M3 X 0.5 (5 mm long) 0515-1521

425
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-32 Front Frame Parts - LED

Table 13-31

Item Description Keysight Part Number

12 A1MP14 Display Bracket W1312-00145

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board N9020--63193

25 A1MP24 Magnetic Shield (Display Bracket to N9020-00029

Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket)

26 A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket N9020-00028

30 Screw Front Panel Daughter Board 0515-0372

426
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-33 Front Frame Parts (shields off) - LED

Table 13-32

Item Description Keysight Part Number

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60137

Serial Number ≥ MY48030101, ≥ SG48030001, ≥ W1312-60042

US48010001 to Serial Number <
MY/SG/US51240000

Serial Number < MY48030101, SG48030001, N9020-60033

US48010001

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker 9164-0453

11 Speaker Foam W1312-40016

21 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel

Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60122

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60010

23 A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board W1312-60011

to Inverter Board

427
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-34 Front Frame Exploded View - LCD

428
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-33

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A1A1MP1 Front Frame W1312-20108a

2 A1A1MP2 Main Keypad Overlayb N9020-60137

3 A1A1MP3 Connector Overlay E4410-80109

4a A1A1MP7 Front Frame Top Trim Strip (Use with W1312-40004

Option PRC, Portable) (Illustrated)

4b A1A1MP8 Front Frame Top Trim Strip (Use with W1312-40019

standard Bench analyzer) (Not Illustrated)

5 A1A1MP9-10 Front Frame Side Trim Strip W1312-40005

6 A1A1MP4 Front Frame Ground Spring W1312-00021

7 A1A1MP5 Braided Gasket --

8 A1A1MP6 Chromeric Gasket --

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60137

Serial Number ≥ MY48030101, ≥ SG48030001, ≥ W1312-60042

US48010001 to Serial Number <
MY/SG/US51240000

Serial Number < MY48030101, SG48030001, N9020-60033

US48010001

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker 9164-0453

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam W1312-40016

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG51240000 2090-0997

Serial Number < MY/SG51240000 2090-0911

13 A1A4 Inverter Board (Display Backlight Power) Serial 0950-4635

Number < MY/SG/US51240000

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board N9020--63193

15 A1MP1 Main Keypad E4410-40100

16 A1MP2 Display Keypad E4410-40101

17 A1MP9 Knob W1312-40017

18 A1MP3 Frequency Label, 3.6 GHz

A1MP4 Frequency Label, 8.4 GHz Refer to Table 13-1
A1MP5 Frequency Label, 13.6 GHz
A1MP6 Frequency Label, 26.5 GHz

429
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-33

Item Description Keysight Part Number

19 A1MP7 LCD Glass Filter 1000-1513

20 A1MP8 LCD Lens Gasket W1312-40006

21 A1MP14 Display Bracket

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-00145

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-00023

22 A1MP15 Inverter Board Shield W1312-00024

23 A1MP10-13 Cable Clamp (Front Panel Cables) 1400-2225

24 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface

Board

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60122

Serial Number < MY/SG/US51240000 W1312-60010

25 A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to W1312-60011

Inverter Board

26 W1 Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to

Motherboard (Ribbon)

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG48010101, US48010001 N9020-60036

Serial Number < MY/SG48010101, US48010001 E4410-60171

27 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

28, 29, 30 Screw M3 X 0.5 (8 mm long) 0515-0372

31 Screw M3 X 0.5 (5 mm long) 0515-1521

32 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA) N9020-60094

33 A17 BBIQ LED Board (Option BBA) N9020-63095

34 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA) N9020-00012

36 A1MP16 Inverter Top Shield (Option BBA) Serial N9020-00010

Number < MY/SG/US51240000

37 A1MP17 Inverter Bottom Shield (Option BBA) Serial N9020-00011

Number < MY/SG/US51240000

a. Non-orderable item, see A1A1.

430
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-35 Front Frame Exploded View - LED

431
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-34

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 Front Frame ---a

2 A1A1MP2 Main Keypad Overlayb N9020-60137

3 A1A1MP3 Connector Overlay E4410-80109

4 A1A1MP18 Cover Plate N9020-00002

5 A1A1MP9-10 Front Frame Side Trim Strip W1312-40005

6 A1A1MP4 Front Frame Ground Spring W1312-00021

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board Refer to Table 13-1

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker 9164-0453

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam W1312-40016

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display 2090-0997

13 MP76 Vibration Mount (Option BBA Core Bracket) 0460-2725

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board N9020--63193

15 A1MP1 Main Keypad E4410-40100

16 A1MP2 Display Keypad E4410-40101

17 A1MP9 Knob W1312-40017

18 A1MP3 Frequency Label, 3.6 GHz

A1MP4 Frequency Label, 8.4 GHz Refer to Table 13-1
A1MP5 Frequency Label, 13.6 GHz
A1MP6 Frequency Label, 26.5 GHz

19 A1MP8 LCD Lens Gasket W1312-40006

20 A1MP7 LCD Glass Filter 1000-1513

22 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA) N9020-00012

24 A1A4 DC-DC Converter (LED display backlight power) 0950-5235

25 A1MP24 Magnetic Shield (Display Bracket to Front N9020-00029

Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket)

26 A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket N9020-00028

30 A1MP14 Display Bracket W1312-00145

32 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA) N9020-60094

33 A17 BBIQ LED Board (Option BBA) N9020-63095

34 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface W1312-60122

Board

432
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Table 13-34

Item Description Keysight Part Number

35 A1W3 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface board to W1312-60130

DC-DC Converter Serial Number ≥
MY/SG/US51240000

36 A1W4 Power Cable, DC-DC Converter to Display W1312-60131

Serial Number ≥ MY/SG/US51240000

a. Non-orderable item, see A1A1.

433
 Replaceable Parts
Hardware

Figure 13-36 Option BBA Parts

Table 13-35

Item Description Keysight Part Number

1 A19 BBIQ Main Board (Option BBA) N9020-60093

2 W25 Cable Assembly, A19J101, BBIQ Main Board to 8121-1401

A16J707 Reference Board (Flexible Coax) (Option BBA)

3 W24 Cable Assembly, A18J1, BBIQ Interface Board to 8121-1683

A19J1, BBIQ Main Board (Ribbon Cable) (Option BBA)

4 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA) N9020-00012

5 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA) N9020-60094

434
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

14 Assembly Replacement Procedures

What You Will Find in This Chapter

Procedures in this chapter enable you to locate, remove, and replace the
following major assemblies in your instrument.
Refer to Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.” for part numbers, assembly
descriptions, and ordering information.
“Instrument Outer Case” on page 439
“Top Brace and Reference Bracket” on page 444
“RF Area” on page 446
“RF Front End Assembly” on page 478
“Front End Control Assembly” on page 480
“L.O. Synthesizer Assembly” on page 483
“Rear Panel” on page 485
“Reference Assembly” on page 486
“Power Supply Assembly” on page 491
“CPU Assembly” on page 494
“Disk Drive” on page 497
“Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly” on page 510
“Wide Band Analog IF and Digital IF Assemblies” on page 515
“Midplane Assembly” on page 517
“Motherboard Assembly” on page 520
“Fan Assembly” on page 525
“Input Connector Assembly” on page 528
“Front Frame Assembly” on page 530
“Display Assembly - LCD” on page 536
“Display Assembly - LED” on page 545
“Inverter Board” on page 549
“Option BBA” on page 551

435
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
What You Will Find in This Chapter

Before Starting
Before starting to disassemble the instrument:
— Check that you are familiar with the safety symbols marked on the
instrument. And, read the general safety considerations and the safety note
definitions given in the front of this guide.
— The instrument contains static sensitive components. Read the section
entitled “ESD Information” on page 21.

Safety

The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose

dangerous voltages. Disconnect the product from all voltage
sources while it is being opened.

The instrument contains potentially hazardous voltages. Refer to the

safety symbols on the instrument and the general safety
considerations at the beginning of this service guide before
operating the unit with the cover removed. Failure to heed the safety
precautions can result in severe or fatal injury.

436
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Tools you will need

Tools you will need

Figure 14-1 TORX Tool

Table 14-1

Description Keysight Part Number

TORX Hand Driver - Size T-10 8710-1623

TORX Hand Driver - Size T-20 8710-1615

9/16 inch nut driver 8720-0008

5/16 inch open-end wrench source locally

cable puller 5021-6773

Adjustments Tests after an instrument repair

Refer to Table 15-1 on page 559 for information about post-repair procedures.
If one or more instrument assemblies have been repaired or replaced, perform
the related adjustments and performance verification tests.

437
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Major Assembly Locations

Major Assembly Locations

Figure 14-2 Major Assemblies

Table 14-2

Item Description

1 A2 Analog I.F. Assembly/A3 Digital I.F. Assembly

2 A4 CPU Assembly

3 A6 Power Supply

4 A16 Reference Assembly

5 A14 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

6 A15 Front End Control Assembly

7 A7 Midplane Assembly

8 A19 BBIQ Main Board (Option BBA)

438
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Instrument Outer Case

Instrument Outer Case

If the instrument is placed on its face during any of the following
procedures, be sure to use the front panel protective cover (MP50), a soft
surface, or soft cloth to avoid damage to the front panel, keys, or input
connector.

If the analyzer has Option PRC, Portable Configuration, refer to the “Option
PRC” section on page 441 to remove the outer case.

Standard Instrument
Removal
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
2. Refer to Figure 14-3. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws (two
on each side) (1) that attach the handle strap (2) on each side of the
instrument.
3. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws (including washers) (3)
(two on each side) that hold the rear feet (4) (two on each side) in place.
4. Pull the instrument cover (5) off towards the rear of the instrument.

439
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Instrument Outer Case

Figure 14-3 Standard Instrument Outer Case Removal

Replacement
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
2. Slide the instrument cover back onto the deck from the rear. The seam on
the cover should be on the bottom. Be sure the cover seats into the gasket
groove in the Front Frame Assembly.
3. Replace the four rear feet to the rear of the instrument (two on each side).
Torque the rear feet screws to 21 inch pounds.
4. Replace the handle straps on both sides of the instrument. Torque the
handle strap screws to 21 inch pounds.

440
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Instrument Outer Case

Option PRC
Removal
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
Refer to Figure 14-4. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws (two
on each side) (1) that hold the bail handle (2) to the front frame.

Figure 14-4 Bail Handle Removal

2. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws (two on each side) (6) that
hold the strap handle plugs (5) in place.

441
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Instrument Outer Case

3. Refer to Figure 14-5. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws
including washers (1) that hold the rear bumpers (2) (two on each side)
in place.

Figure 14-5 Option PRC Instrument Outer Case Removal

4. Pull the instrument cover (3) off towards the rear of the instrument.

442
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Instrument Outer Case

Replacement
1. Disconnect the instrument from ac power.
2. Slide the instrument cover back onto the deck from the rear. The seam on
the cover should be on the bottom. Be sure the cover seats into the gasket
groove in the Front Frame Assembly.
3. Refer to Figure 14-4. Replace the strap handle plugs (5) in place and
attach using the T-20 driver to replace the four screws (two on each side)
(6). Torque to 21 inch pounds.
4. Place the bail handle into position on the front frame and using the T-20
driver, replace the four screws (two on each side) (1) that hold the bail
handle (2) to the front frame. Torque to 21 inch pounds.
5. Refer to Figure 14-5. Replace the four rear bumpers to the rear of the
instrument. Torque to 21 inch pounds.

443
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Top Brace and Reference Bracket

Top Brace and Reference Bracket

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Refer to Figure 14-6. On analyzers with serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233,
both the Top Brace (1) and the Reference Bracket (2) will be present. On
analyzers with serial prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233 or any analyzer with Option
B85, B1A, or B1X only the Top Brace (1) will be present.
3. To remove the Top Brace, use the T-10 driver to remove the eight screws
(3) (0515-0372) attaching the Top Brace to the chassis. Remove the six
flathead screws (4) (0515-1227) attaching the Top Brace to the A7
Midplane, A14 LO Synthesizer, and A15 Front End Controller assemblies.
Remove the four flathead screws (7) (0515-1227) securing the Top Brace
to either the Reference Bracket or the A16 Reference assembly.
4. If Option BBA is installed, remove the flathead screw (8) (0515-1227)
securing the Top Brace to the BBIQ Main Board.
5. If either Option B85, B1A, or B1X is installed, remove the two flathead
screws (6) (0515-1227) securing the Top Brace to the A25 Wideband
Analog IF and A26 Wideband Digital IF assemblies.
6. To remove the Reference Bracket (2) (if present), use the T-10 driver to
remove the six screws (5) (including two at the rear panel) attaching the
Reference Bracket to the instrument.

444
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Top Brace and Reference Bracket

Figure 14-6 Top Brace and Reference Bracket Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-6. To replace the Top Brace or the Reference Bracket,
place them into the correct position and attach the appropriate screws.
Torque to 9 inch-pounds.

445
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

RF Area
Refer to Figure 14-7 and Figure 14-8. The RF area consists of RF attenuator A
(1), RF attenuator B (2), low band switch assembly (3), and YTF Preselector
(4).
Instruments with Options DP2, MPB, or B40 will also have coaxial switch #1
(5), coaxial switch #2 (6), and 6 dB fixed attenuator (7) (Figure 14-8).

The YTF Preselector is not typically installed in instruments with Option

503.

Figure 14-7 RF Area Components and Cables - Standard Instruments

446
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Figure 14-8 RF Area Components and Cables - Options DP2, MPB, B40

447
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

To gain access to any of these parts, follow these steps:

1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
removal procedure.
3. Remove the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” removal
procedure.
4. Refer to Figure 14-9. Remove the chassis side, right (1) by removing the
thirteen screws (2) using the T-10 driver.

Figure 14-9 RF Bracket Removal

448
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Low Band Switch -

Standard Instruments with Serial Number < MY/SG50510001
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-10. Remove the ribbon cable W18.
2. Remove the semi-rigid cables W3, W8, and W9 using the 5/16 inch
wrench.

W8 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

3. Remove the two screws (2) using the T-10 driver. The low band switch
(1) can now be removed from the chassis.

449
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Figure 14-10 Low Band Switch Removal

450
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

4. Refer to Figure 14-11. To separate the switch from the bracket, remove the
four screws (3) using the T-10 driver.

Figure 14-11 Low Band Switch and Bracket Separation

451
Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-11. Place the switch onto the bracket and replace the
four screws (3). Torque to 9 inch-pounds in the sequence shown, starting
with #1.
2. Place the switch/bracket into place into the chassis and replace the two
screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds starting with the screw closest to the
front of the instrument.
3. Refer to Figure 14-10. Replace the semi-rigid cables W3, W8, and W9.
Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

W8 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

4. Replace the ribbon cable W18.

5. Refer to Figure 14-9. Position the chassis side, right onto the chassis and
replace the thirteen screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
6. Replace the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” replacement
procedure.
7. Replace the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
replacement procedure.
8. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

452
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Low Band Switch -

Standard Instruments with Serial Number > MY/SG50510001
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-12. Remove the ribbon cable W18.
2. Remove the semi-rigid cables W3, W8, and W9 using the 5/16 inch
wrench.

W8 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

3. Remove the two screws (2) using the T-10 driver. The low band switch
(1) can now be removed from the chassis.

453
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Figure 14-12 Low Band Switch Removal

454
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

4. Refer to Figure 14-13. To separate the switch from the bracket, remove the
four screws (3) using the T-10 driver.

Figure 14-13 Low Band Switch and Bracket Separation

455
Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-13. Place the switch onto the bracket and replace the
four screws (3). Torque to 9 inch-pounds in the sequence shown, starting
with #1.
2. Place the switch/bracket into place into the chassis and replace the two
screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds starting with the screw closest to the
front of the instrument.
3. Refer to Figure 14-12. Replace the semi-rigid cables W3, W8, and W9.
Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

W8 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

4. Replace the ribbon cable W18.

5. Refer to Figure 14-9. Position the chassis side, right onto the chassis and
replace the thirteen screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
6. Replace the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” replacement
procedure.
7. Replace the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
replacement procedure.
8. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

456
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Low Band Switch and Coaxial Switches

Options DP2, MPB, B40
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-14. Remove semi-rigid coax cables W32 and W33.

Figure 14-14 Remove W33 and W32

457
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

2. Refer to Figure 14-15. Remove semi-rigid coax cables W31 and W34.

Figure 14-15 Remove W34 and W31

458
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

3. Refer to Figure 14-16. Remove semi-rigid coax cable W35 and the fixed
attenuator (1).

Figure 14-16 W35 and Attenuator Removal

4. Remove ribbon cable W18 from J4 of the A11 Low Band Switch.

459
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

5. Refer to Figure 14-17. Disconnect the two wire harness connectors W30
from the switches (1).

Even though the wire colors on W30 harness are different, it does not
matter which one plugs into which switch.

Figure 14-17 Wire Harness Disconnect

460
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

6. Refer to Figure 14-18. Using the T-10 driver, remove the single screw (4)
to separate the switch 2/bracket assembly (1)/(2) from the low band
switch bracket. To separate switch 2 (1) from it’s bracket (2), remove the
two 0515-1992 screws (3) using the T-8 driver.

Figure 14-18 Switch 2 Removal

461
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

7. Refer to Figure 14-19. Using the T-8 driver, remove the two 0515-1992
screws (3) to separate the #1 switch/bracket assembly (1)/(2) from the
low band switch bracket (4).

Figure 14-19 Switch 1 Removal

462
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

8. Refer to Figure 14-20. Remove the semi-rigid cables W3, W9, and W10.

Figure 14-20 Removing Coax Cables

9. Refer to Figure 14-21. Using the T-10 driver, remove the two screws (1) to
separate the low band switch/bracket from the chassis.

Figure 14-21 Low Band Switch/Bracket Removal

463
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

10.Refer to Figure 14-22. To separate the low band switch from the bracket,
use the T-10 driver to remove the four screws (3).

Figure 14-22 Low Band Switch and Bracket Separation

464
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-22. Place the switch onto the low band switch bracket
and replace the four screws (3). Torque to 9 inch-pounds in the sequence
shown, starting with #1.
2. Refer to Figure 14-23. Place the switch/bracket into place onto the
chassis and replace the two screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds starting with
the screw closest to the front of the instrument.

Figure 14-23 Bracket Installation

3. Refer to Figure 14-24. Install W9 between the output of the A10 Input
Attenuator and A11J1. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

465
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Figure 14-24 Installing New Coax Cables

4. Install W3 between J2 of the A13 Front End Assembly and J2 of the A11
Low Band Switch. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.
5. Install W10 between the Type N input connector and the input of the A9
Input Attenuator. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.
6. Refer to Figure 14-25. Place one of the two coaxial switches (1) and the
Switch 1 Bracket (2) onto the low band switch bracket. Mount the switch
with the Keysight label facing up. Attach the bracket and switch to the low
band switch bracket using two 0515-1992 screws (3) using the T-8 driver.
Do not torque the screws at this time

466
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Figure 14-25 Switch 1 Placement

467
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

7. Refer to Figure 14-26. Place the second switch/bracket assembly (1)/(2)

on the bracket previously installed. Assure Keysight label on switch is
facing up. Attach the bracket and switch using two 0515-1992 screws (3)
using the T-8 driver. Secure the bracket to the low band switch bracket
with a single screw (4) using the T-10 driver. Do not torque.

Figure 14-26 Switch 2 Placement

8. Align switches so they are parallel with the side of the instrument then
torque the four screws (3) securing the switches to the brackets to 6
inch-pounds using the T-8 driver. Torque the screw (4) that secures the
switch brackets together to 9 inch-pounds using the T-10 driver.

468
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

9. Refer to Figure 14-27. Connect the two wire harness connectors W30 to
the switches (1). Once connected, position the connections along side the
switches.

Even though the wire colors on W30 harness are different, it does not
matter which one plugs into which switch.

Figure 14-27 Wire Harness Routing

10.Connect ribbon cable W18 to J4 of the A11 Low Band Switch.

469
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

11.Refer to Figure 14-28. Attach the coaxial fixed attenuator (1) Switch 2
port 1. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

Figure 14-28 Attenuator Installation

12.Connect W35 semi-rigid coax cable between the coaxial fixed attenuator
(1) and port 1 of Switch 1 (the lower switch). Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

470
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

13.Refer to Figure 14-29. Connect W34 semi-rigid coax cable between the
center port of Switch 1 (the lower switch) and J9 of the A13 Front End
Assembly. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.
14.Connect W31 semi-rigid coax cable between the center port of Switch 2
(the upper switch) and J3 of the A11 Low Band Switch. Torque to 10
inch-pounds.

Figure 14-29 Install W34 and W31

471
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

15.Refer to Figure 14-30. Connect W33 semi-rigid coax cable between port 2
of Switch 1 (the lower switch) and the output of the A12 YTF Preselector.
Torque the cable at the A12 end first to 10 inch-pounds and then torque
the cable at the Switch 1 end to 10 inch-pounds.
16.Connect W32 semi-rigid coax cable between port 2 of Switch 2 (the upper
switch) and the input of the A12 YTF Preselector. Torque the cable at the
A12 end first to 10 inch-pounds and then torque the cable at the Switch 2
end to 10 inch-pounds.

Figure 14-30 Install W33 and W32

472
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Attenuators
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-31. To remove Attenuator A (1) or Attenuator B (2),
remove the semi-rigid cables W9, W10, W11 and W19 attached to the
attenuator using the 5/16 inch wrench.
2. Remove the W16 ribbon cable attached to the attenuator.
3. Remove the two screws (3) or (4) for each attenuator bracket to remove
from the chassis using the T-10 driver.
4. Remove the two screws to separate the attenuator from the bracket.

Figure 14-31 Attenuators Removal

473
Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-31. Position the attenuator in the bracket so that the
ribbon connector end is “up”.
2. Replace the two screws that attach the attenuator to the bracket. Torque
to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Position the attenuator and bracket into the chassis and attach with the
two screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the ribbon cable and semi-rigid cables W9, W10, W11 and W19
to the attenuator. Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch-pounds.

474
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

YTF Preselector
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-32. Remove cables W7 and W8 from the YTF
Preselector (1).

Figure 14-32 YTF Preselector Removal

2. Remove the wire harness W22.

475
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

3. Refer to Figure 14-33. From the bottom of the instrument, remove the four
screws (2). The YTF Preselector can now be removed from the chassis.

Figure 14-33 YTF Preselector Screws

476
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Area

Replacement
1. Inspect the chassis where the YTF Preselector mounts and remove the gap
pad if present (see Figure 14-34, item (1)). The gap pad may remain
attached to the faulty YTF Preselector.
2. Refer to Figure 14-34. Install the replacement gap pad (1) into the recess
in the base of the replacement YTF Preselector (2) Refer to A12MP1 in
Chapter 13, “Replaceable Parts.” for the gap pad part number. Peel back
one corner of the clear plastic backing on the pink side of the gap pad.
Remove the blue backing from the other side of the gap pad. Install the
gap pad as shown with the pink side exposed. Carefully peel off the clear
plastic backing and smooth the gap pad into the recess.

Figure 14-34 Gap Pad Installation

3. Refer to Figure 14-33. Place the YTF Preselector into the chassis with the
connectors toward the front of the instrument. Replace the four screws
(2). Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Figure 14-32. Replace the cables W7 and W8. Torque to 10 inch-pounds.
5. Replace the wire harness W22.
6. Refer to Figure 14-9. Position the chassis side, right onto the chassis and
replace the thirteen screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
7. Replace the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” replacement
procedure.
8. Replace the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
replacement procedure.
9. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

477
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Front End Assembly

RF Front End Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” removal procedure.
3. Remove the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” removal
procedure.
4. Refer to Figure 14-35. Using the 5/16 inch wrench, remove the cables W3,
W4, W5, W7, W15 or W36, and W20 attached to the RF Front End
Assembly (1).

W7 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

5. Remove the ribbon cable W17 from the RF Front End Assembly.
6. Remove the four screws (2) using the T-10 driver. The RF Front End
Assembly can now be removed from the chassis.

478
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
RF Front End Assembly

Figure 14-35 RF Front End Assembly Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-35. Place the RF Front End Assembly into the chassis.
Replace the four screws (2). Torque to 9 inch-pounds in the sequence
shown, starting with #1.
2. Reattach ribbon cable W17 to the RF Front End Assembly.
3. Reattach the cables W3, W4, W5, W7, W15 or W36, and W20 to the RF
Front End Assembly (1). Torque the semi-rigid cables to 10 inch-pounds.

W7 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

4. Replace the front panel. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly” replacement
procedure.
5. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” replacement procedure.
6. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

479
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front End Control Assembly

Front End Control Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-36. Remove the ribbon cables W16, W17, and W18 and
the wire harness W22 from the Front End Control assembly (1).

W22 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

Instruments with Options DP2, MPB, B40, CR3, or CRP will have the
Enhanced Front End Control Assembly which will have additional cables as
shown in Figure 14-37.

4. The Front End Control assembly can now be unplugged from the
motherboard by leveraging up on the ejector and lifting the board up on
the other side.

480
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front End Control Assembly

Figure 14-36 Front End Control Assembly Removal

Figure 14-37 Enhanced Front End Control Assembly Cables

481
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front End Control Assembly

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-36. Install the Front End Control assembly into slot 6 in
the chassis securing with the ejector.
2. Reattach the ribbon cables W16, W17, and W18 and the wire harness
W22 to the Front End Control assembly (1). If the instrument has the
Enhanced Front End Control Assembly, reattach the additional cables as
shown in.Figure 14-37.

W22 will not be present in instruments with Option 503.

3. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” replacement procedure.
4. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

482
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-38. Remove the cables W4 and W6 from the L.O.
Synthesizer assembly (1) using the 5/16 inch wrench.
4. The L.O. Synthesizer assembly can now be unplugged from the
motherboard by pulling up on the board and lifted out of the chassis.

Figure 14-38 L.O. Synthesizer Assembly Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-38. Install the L.O. Synthesizer assembly into slot 5 in
the chassis and press down to plug it into the motherboard.
2. Reattach the cables W4 and W6 to the L.O. Synthesizer assembly (1).
Torque to 10 inch-pounds.

483
Assembly Replacement Procedures
L.O. Synthesizer Assembly

3. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” replacement procedure.
4. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

484
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Rear Panel

Rear Panel

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Refer to Figure 14-39. Using the T-10 driver, remove the twenty screws
(2) attaching the rear panel (1) to the chassis and to the reference
bracket. The rear panel can now be removed.
3. Refer to “Reference Assembly” on page 486. Remove W23 cable from the
A16 Reference Assembly (1) at A16J704.

If the rear panel is being replaced with a new rear panel, remove W23 at
the rear panel using a 9/16-inch nut driver. Instruments with Option CR3
or CRP will have an additional cable W39 that is attached to the rear
panel.

Figure 14-39 Rear Panel Removal

Replacement
1. Reattach W23 cable to A16J704 or to the rear panel depending on how
you removed it.
2. Refer to Figure 14-39. Place the rear panel (1) into position in the chassis.
Replace the twenty screws (2) to attach the rear panel to the chassis.
Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

485
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Reference Assembly

Reference Assembly

Removal
(Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233
without Option B85, B1A, or B1X)
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” removal procedure.
3. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
4. For standard instruments, refer to Figure 14-40. Remove cables W5, W6,
W12, W14, W19, W20, W23, and W25 (Option BBA only) from the
reference assembly (1). Use the 5/16 inch wrench where necessary.

Figure 14-40 Reference Board Cables - Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233

without Option B40, MPB, or DP2

486
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Reference Assembly

5. For instruments with Option B40, MPB, or DP2, refer to Figure 14-41.
Remove cables W5, W6, W14, W19, W23, W42, W43, and W25 (Option
BBA only) from the reference assembly (1). Use the 5/16 inch wrench
where necessary.

Figure 14-41 Reference Board Cables - Serial Prefix < MY/SG/US5233

with Options B40, MPB, DP2

6. The reference assembly can be removed from the chassis by leveraging up

on the ejector and pulling the board out on the other side.

Removal
(Serial Prefix ≥ MY/SG/US5233
and any with Option B85, B1A, or B1X)
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the four flathead screws securing the top brace to the Reference
Assembly.
3. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
4. For standard instruments, refer to Figure 14-42. Remove cables W5, W6,
W12, W14, W19, W20, W23, and W25 (Option BBA only) from the
reference assembly (1). Use the 5/16 inch wrench where necessary.

487
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Reference Assembly

Figure 14-42 Reference Board Cables - Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US5233

without Option B40, MPB, or DP2

488
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Reference Assembly

5. For instruments with Option B40, MPB, or DP2 but without Option B85,
B1A, or B1X, refer to Figure 14-43. Remove cables W5, W6, W14, W19,
W20, W42, W50, and W25 (Option BBA only) from the reference assembly
(1). Use the 5/16 inch wrench where necessary.

Figure 14-43 Reference Board Cables - Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US5233 with Option B40,
MPB, or DP2 and without Option B85, B1A, or B1X

6. For instruments with Option B85, B1A, or B1X, refer to Figure 14-44.
Remove cables W5, W6, W14, W19, W20, W23, W25 (Option BBA only),
W51, W54, and W56 from the reference assembly (1). Use the 5/16 inch
wrench where necessary.

Figure 14-44 Reference Board Cables - Serial Prefix > MY/SG/US5233 with Option B85,
B1A, B1X

7. Refer to Figure 14-45. Remove the reference support bracket (2) by

removing the pan-head screw (3) (0515-0372) securing the bracket to the
Reference assembly (1).

489
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Reference Assembly

Figure 14-45 Reference Support Bracket Removal

8. The reference assembly can be removed from the chassis by leveraging up

on the ejector and pulling the board out on the other side.

Replacement
1. Slide the reference assembly into the slot at the rear of the instrument and
push on the assembly to mate the connectors to the midplane assembly.
Secure with the ejector.
2. If the serial prefix is ≥ MY/SG/US5233 or Option B85, B1A, or B1X is
installed, refer to Figure 14-45. Secure the reference support bracket (2)
to the Reference assembly (1) using a pan-head screw (3) (0515-0372).
3. Refer to Figure 14-40, Figure 14-41, Figure 14-42, Figure 14-43, or Figure
14-44 as appropriate. Reconnect the cables to the correct locations.
Torque the semi-rigid coax cables to 10 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” replacement procedure.
5. Replace the reference bracket (serial prefix < MY/SG/US5233 or secure
the A16 Reference assembly to the top brace (serial prefix
≥ MY/SG/US5233). Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
replacement procedure.
6. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

490
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Power Supply Assembly

Power Supply Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
3. Remove the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” removal procedure.
4. Remove the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
removal procedure.
5. Remove the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” removal
procedure.
6. Refer to Figure 14-46. Remove the three screws (1) attaching the power
supply (2) to the power supply bracket (3).
7. The power supply assembly can be removed from the chassis by pulling
straight out the back.

491
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Power Supply Assembly

Figure 14-46 Power Supply Assembly Removal

492
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Power Supply Assembly

Replacement
1. Slide the power supply assembly into the slot at the rear of the instrument
and push on the assembly to mate the connectors to the midplane
assembly.
2. Refer to Figure 14-46. Replace the three screws (1) through the power
supply bracket (3) and into the power supply (2). Torque to
9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” replacement
procedure.
4. Replace the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
replacement procedure.
5. Replace the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” replacement procedure.
6. Replace the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” replacement procedure.
7. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

493
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
CPU Assembly

CPU Assembly

Removal
Depending on the vintage of your instrument, the CPU assembly will look
either like Figure 14-47 or Figure 14-48.

Figure 14-47 Current CPU Assembly - Rear Panel View

Figure 14-48 Old CPU Assembly - Rear Panel View

1. Refer to Figure 14-49 or Figure 14-50. Remove the six screws (1)
attaching the CPU assembly to the chassis.
2. The CPU assembly can be removed from the chassis by pulling straight out
the back. Use the two ejectors to pull the CPU assembly out from the
chassis.

If the A4BT1 CPU board battery was changed, refer to Chapter 15,
“Post-Repair Procedures.” for setup instructions.

494
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
CPU Assembly

Figure 14-49 New CPU Assembly Removal

Figure 14-50 Old CPU Assembly Removal

495
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
CPU Assembly

Replacement
1. Slide the CPU assembly into the slot at the rear of the instrument and
push on the assembly to mate the connectors to the midplane assembly.
Secure the board with the ejectors.
2. Refer to Figure 14-49 or Figure 14-50. Replace the six screws (1) that
attach the CPU assembly to the chassis. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.

496
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

Disk Drive
There are two different types of disk drive installations that have been used in
the X-Series Signal Analyzers. Originally the drive was located inside of the A4
CPU assembly, which would need to be removed and opened up in order to
replace the drive. However, starting with serial number MY/SG/US49100000
the disk drive has been relocated such that it can be removed through the rear
panel of the instrument. Of course, instruments that originally had their disk
drive located inside of the A4 CPU assembly could have been upgraded with
Option PC2 and would now have a rear panel removable disk drive as well.
If the A5 Disk Drive is being replaced on an instrument with a serial number
greater than MY/SG/US49100000, or has had an Option PC2 upgrade, follow
the procedure below under the heading “Rear Panel Removable Disk Drive”. If
the instrument has a serial number prior to MY/SG/US49100000, and has not
had an Option PC2 upgrade, follow the procedure below under the heading
“Internally Mounted Disk Drive” for instructions on replacing the A5 Disk Drive.

Refer to Figure 14-47 and Figure 14-48 for illustrations of the difference
between the new CPU and old CPU assemblies.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage or destroy electronic

components. All work on electronic assemblies should be performed at a
static-safe workstation. Refer to the documentation that pertains to your
instrument for information about static-safe workstations and ordering
static-safe accessories.

Rear Panel Removable Disk Drive

Drive Removal and Replacement
1. Before replacing the A5 disk drive it is highly recommended that the
factory calibration data be backed up to an external drive if at all possible.
If this data is not backed up prior to replacing the disk drive all instrument
adjustments and performance verification tests will need to be run after
the drive is replaced.
For information on how to backup this data see the “Calibration Data
Backup and Restore” section in Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” of
this manual.
If this data cannot be backed up because the instrument will not fully
boot, go ahead and change the A5 Disk Drive and perform all adjustments
listed in Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” for the A5 assembly.
2. Turn the instrument off and remove the AC power cord.

497
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

3. Refer to Figure 14-51. Locate and remove the existing disk drive carrier
assembly (2) from the instrument by loosening the rear panel screw (1).

Figure 14-51 Removing the Disk Drive Carrier Assembly

498
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

4. Refer to Figure 14-52. Remove the 4 machine screws (1) from the disk
drive carrier assembly that secure the drive (2).

Figure 14-52 Disk Drive Screws

499
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

5. Remove the disk drive (2) from the carrier assembly.

6. Place the new disk drive onto the carrier assembly and attach with the 4
machine screws (1). Torque to 9 in-lbs.
7. Refer to Figure 14-51. Replace the disk drive carrier assembly (2) into the
instrument and tighten the screw to 9 in-lbs.
8. Locate the Windows Vista License Sticker from the kit and apply the
sticker to the rear of the instrument as shown in Figure 14-53, covering
the existing license sticker.

Figure 14-53 Windows License Sticker Rear Panel Location

While the replacement disk drive has the Windows XP operating system
loaded onto it, the license that accompanies it in this kit is for Windows
Vista. This is being done within the scope of our license agreement with
Microsoft and is necessary at this time, as the instrument applications
software is not supported or qualified with any operating system other
than Windows XP.

9. Refer to Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” and perform all of the

specified tasks for replacing the A5 Disk Drive assembly.

500
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

Internally Mounted Disk Drive

Drive Removal and Replacement
1. Before replacing the A5 disk drive it is highly recommended that the
factory calibration data be backed up to an external drive if at all possible.
If this data is not backed up prior to replacing the disk drive all instrument
adjustments and performance verification tests will need to be run after
the drive is replaced.
For information on how to backup this data see the “Calibration Data
Backup and Restore” section in Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” of
this manual.
If this data cannot be backed up because the instrument will not fully
boot, go ahead and change the A5 Disk Drive and perform all adjustments
listed in Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” for the A5 assembly.
2. Turn the instrument off and remove the AC power cord.

501
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

3. Refer to Figure 14-54. Locate and remove the existing CPU assembly from
the instrument by removing the 6 rear panel screws(1). The CPU assembly
can be removed from the chassis by pulling straight out the back. Use the
two ejectors to pull the CPU assembly out from the chassis.

Figure 14-54 CPU Assembly Removal

502
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

4. Refer to Figure 14-55. Remove and discard the 15 machine screws (1)
from the CPU assembly. The screws need to be discarded because dried
precoated screws can cause cross threading.

Do not remove the 4 Hard Drive screws yet.

Figure 14-55 CPU Top Shield Screws

503
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

5. Refer to Figure 14-56. Carefully lift up the CPU top shield and unlock the
Hard Drive ribbon cable from the CPU Board by pressing down and out on
the two locking tabs located on the sides of the connector as shown.

Figure 14-56 Hard Drive Ribbon Cable

504
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

6. Refer to Figure 14-57. Uninstall the existing Hard Drive from the Top
Shield by removing and discarding the 4 machine screws (1) from the
CPU assembly. Screws need to be discarded because dried precoated
screws can cause cross threading.

Figure 14-57 CPU/Hard Drive Parts

7. Remove the ribbon cable from the Hard Disk Drive and set the ribbon
cable aside. Discard the defective Hard Disk Drive.
8. Locate the Programmed Hard Disk Drive.
9. Connect the Hard Drive ribbon cable to the Programmed Hard Disk Drive.

505
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

10.Install the Programmed Hard Disk Drive to the Top Shield using precoated
four Machine Screws (0515-5074) as shown in Figure 14-58. Torque
screws to 9 inch-pounds.

Figure 14-58 Top Shield/Hard Drive Assembly

11.Connect the Hard Drive ribbon cable from the Top Shield/Hard
Drive/Ribbon Cable assembly to the CPU assembly. When the ribbon
cable is fully seated the two locking tabs will grip the sides of the ribbon
cable connector.
12.Install the Top Shield/Hard Drive/Ribbon Cable assembly to the CPU
assembly using fifteen precoated Machine Screws (0515-5074). Torque
screws to 9 inch-pounds.
13.Refer to Figure 14-54. Replace the CPU assembly in the instrument with 6
screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.

506
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

14.Locate the Windows Vista License Sticker that came with the replacement
hard drive and apply the sticker to the rear of the instrument as shown in
Figure 14-59, covering the existing sticker if present.

Figure 14-59 Windows License Sticker Rear Panel Location

While the replacement disk drive has the Windows XP operating system
loaded onto it, the license that accompanies it in this kit is for Windows
Vista. This is being done within the scope of our license agreement with
Microsoft and is necessary at this time, as the instrument applications
software is not supported or qualified with any operating system other
than Windows XP.

15.Refer to Chapter 15, “Post-Repair Procedures.” and perform all of the

specified tasks for replacing the A5 Disk Drive assembly.

507
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

Disk Drive Interconnect

Removal
1. Remove the A5 Disk Drive assembly for the instrument. Refer to the
“Internally Mounted Disk Drive” removal procedure.
2. Remove the A4 CPU assembly from the instrument. Refer to the “CPU
Assembly” removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-60. Remove the A4 CPU assembly cover (1) by first
removing the 19 flat-head screws (2) and 3 pan-head screws (3). The 19
flat-head screws need to be discarded and replaced since they are
precoated with a thread locking compound and new screws will need to be
used when the cover is re-installed.

Figure 14-60 A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect Board Removal

508
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive

4. Remove the 2 screws (4) that attached the A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect
board (5) to the A4 CPU assembly.
5. Unplug and remove the A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect board from the A4
CPU assembly by carefully sliding the board out towards the disk drive
bay opening (6).

Installation
1. Refer to Figure 14-60. Plug the A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect board (5)
into the A4 CPU assembly by carefully sliding it into place from the disk
drive bay opening (6).
2. Install the 2 screws (4) that secure the A4A1 Disk Drive Interconnect
board to the A4 CPU assembly and torque them to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the A4 CPU assembly cover (1) and attach it with 19 new
flat-head screws (2) and the 3 pan-head screws (3). Torque all screws to
9 inch-pounds.
4. Re-install the A4 CPU assembly into the instrument. Refer to the CPU
Assembly installation procedure.
5. Re-install the A5 Disk Drive assembly into the instrument. Refer to the
Disk Drive installation procedure.

509
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-61 and Figure 14-62. Depending on the age of your
instrument and the installed options, remove the appropriate cables from
the bottom of the DIF assembly.

Figure 14-61 W12, W13 Removal - Standard Instruments

510
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

Figure 14-62 W38, W40, W41, W42 Removal - Option B40, MPB, or DP2

511
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

4. Refer to Figure 14-63. Pull the AIF/DIF assembly part way out of the
chassis. Remove cables W13, W14, and W15 or W37 from the AIF
assembly.
5. The AIF/DIF assembly can be removed from the chassis by pulling straight
out the back.

Figure 14-63 AIF/DIF Assembly Removal

512
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

Separate AIF/DIF Assembly

1. To separate the AIF (1) from the DIF (2), unplug ribbon cable W2 from
the AIF assembly.
2. Refer to Figure 14-64. From underneath the assembly, remove the three
screws (3).

Figure 14-64 AIF/DIF Separation

AIF/DIF Pre-installation
1. Set the DIF in position over the AIF. Reinstall the three screws removed
before. Torque to 9 inch-pounds, starting with the middle screw.
2. To reconnect the AIF and the DIF, reconnect the ribbon cable W2.

513
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F. (DIF) Assembly

Replacement
1. Slide the AIF/DIF assembly into the slot at the rear of the instrument and
push on the assembly to mate the connectors to the midplane assembly.
2. Refer to Figure 14-63. Replace cables W13, W14, and W15 or W37 to the
AIF assembly.
3. Refer to Figure 14-61 and Figure 14-62. Replace the appropriate cables to
the bottom of the DIF assembly.
4. Replace the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” replacement procedure.
5. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

514
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Wide Band Analog IF and Digital IF Assemblies

Wide Band Analog IF and Digital IF Assemblies

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-65. Locate the Wideband Analog IF and Wideband
Digital IF assemblies.

Figure 14-65 Wideband I.F. Assemblies Location

4. Refer to Figure 14-66. Remove cables W51, W52, W53, W55, and W56
from the Wideband Analog IF assembly (2).
5. Remove ribbon cable W44.

515
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Wide Band Analog IF and Digital IF Assemblies

Figure 14-66 Option B1X Cables

6. The Wideband Analog IF (2) and Wideband Digital IF (1) assemblies can
now be removed by pulling up on the ejectors to remove from the chassis.

Replacement
1. Slide the Wideband Analog IF assembly into slot 3 in the chassis and use
the ejectors to push into place into the motherboard.
2. Slide the Wideband Digital IF assembly into slot 5 in the chassis and use
the ejectors to push into place into the motherboard.
3. Refer to Figure 14-66. Reinstall cables W51, W52, W53, W55, and W56 to
the Wideband Analog IF assembly (2).
4. Reconnect ribbon cable W44.
5. Replace the instrument top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference
Bracket” replacement procedure.
6. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

516
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Midplane Assembly

Midplane Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
3. Remove the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” removal procedure.
4. Remove the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
removal procedure.
5. Remove the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” removal
procedure.
6. Remove the power supply assembly. Refer to the “Power Supply
Assembly” removal procedure.
7. Refer to Figure 14-67. Remove the power supply support bracket (1) by
removing the two screws (2).

Figure 14-67 Power Supply Bracket

517
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Midplane Assembly

8. Refer to Figure 14-68. Remove the six screws (2) attaching the midplane
assembly (1) to the midplane bracket. The midplane assembly can now
be pulled up from the chassis by leveraging up on the ejectors.

Figure 14-68 Midplane Assembly Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-68. Install the midplane assembly into the chassis and
attach to the midplane bracket using the six screws (2) removed earlier.
Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
2. Replace the power supply support bracket with the two screws. Torque to
9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the power supply assembly. Refer to the “Power Supply
Assembly” replacement procedure.
4. Replace the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” replacement
procedure.
5. Replace the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
replacement procedure.

518
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Midplane Assembly

6. Replace the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” replacement procedure.
7. Replace the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” replacement procedure.
8. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

519
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Motherboard Assembly

Motherboard Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” removal procedure.
3. Remove the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” removal procedure.
4. Remove the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
removal procedure.
5. Remove the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” removal
procedure.
6. Remove the power supply assembly. Refer to the “Power Supply
Assembly” removal procedure.
7. Remove the AIF/DIF assembly. Refer to the “Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F.
(DIF) Assembly” removal procedure.
8. Remove the Front End Control assembly. Refer to the “Front End Control
Assembly” removal procedure.
9. Remove the L.O. Synthesizer assembly. Refer to the “L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly” removal procedure.
10.Remove the Midplane assembly. Refer to the “Midplane Assembly”
removal procedure.
11.Remove the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly”
removal procedure.
12.Remove the RF bracket. Refer to Figure 14-9 on page 448.
13.Remove the fan assembly. Refer to the “Fan Assembly” removal
procedure.
14.Refer to Figure 14-69 and Figure 14-70. Remove the midplane bracket (1)
by removing the eight screws (2) (two on each side and four on the
bottom).

520
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Motherboard Assembly

Figure 14-69 Midplane Bracket Removal

Figure 14-70 Bottom Screws

521
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Motherboard Assembly

15.Refer to Figure 14-71. Remove the left side chassis (same side as the fan)
by removing the seven screws (four on the bottom).

Figure 14-71 Chassis Side Removal

522
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Motherboard Assembly

16.Refer to Figure 14-72. Remove the motherboard (1) by removing the four
screws (2).

Figure 14-72 Motherboard Assembly Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-72. Place the motherboard (1) into position in the
chassis and replace the four screws (2). Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
2. Refer to Figure 14-71. Replace the left side chassis by replacing the seven
screws. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Refer to Figure 14-69. Replace the midplane bracket (1) by replacing the
eight screws (2). Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the fan assembly. Refer to the Fan Assemblyreplacement
procedure.
5. Replace the RF bracket. Refer to Figure 14-9 on page 448. Torque the
screws to 9 inch-pounds.

523
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Motherboard Assembly

6. Replace the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly”
replacement procedure.
7. Replace the Midplane assembly. Refer to the “Midplane Assembly”
replacement procedure.
8. Replace the L.O. Synthesizer assembly. Refer to the “L.O. Synthesizer
Assembly” replacement procedure.
9. Replace the Front End Control assembly. Refer to the “Front End Control
Assembly” replacement procedure.
10.Replace the AIF/DIF assembly. Refer to the “Analog I.F. (AIF)/Digital I.F.
(DIF) Assembly” replacement procedure.
11.Replace the power supply assembly. Refer to the “Power Supply
Assembly” replacement procedure.
12.Replace the CPU assembly. Refer to the “CPU Assembly” replacement
procedure.
13.Replace the reference assembly. Refer to the “Reference Assembly”
replacement procedure.
14.Replace the top brace and reference bracket. Refer to the “Top Brace and
Reference Bracket” replacement procedure.
15.Replace the rear panel. Refer to the “Rear Panel” replacement procedure.
16.Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

524
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Fan Assembly

Fan Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
removal procedure.
3. Remove the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly”
removal procedure.
4. Refer to Figure 14-73. Remove the eight screws (1) that attach the fan
assembly to the chassis.

Figure 14-73 Fan Assembly Removal

5. Unplug the fan wires from the motherboard. The fan assembly can now be
lifted from the chassis.

525
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Fan Assembly

Replacing a Fan
1. Refer to Figure 14-74. To replace a fan, it is necessary to remove the 4
plastic rivets (4) that attach the fan (1) and guard (3) to the fan bracket.
To do this use a small screwdriver to unscrew the rivet and remove it from
the bracket.

Figure 14-74 Fan Replacement

2. Position the new fan on the work surface with the arrows pointing to the
right and down.
3. Orient the fan guard so that the rings are on the outside, and that the “V”
of the support legs are pointing to the neighboring fan.
4. With the rivets center posts raised, snap the rivets into place through the
fan grill and fan bracket and into the fan. Screw the center posts into
place.

526
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Fan Assembly

Replacement
1. Plug the fan wires into the motherboard.
2. Refer to Figure 14-73. Place the fan assembly into position in the chassis.
Replace the eight screws (1) to attach the fan assembly to the chassis.
Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly”
replacement procedure.
4. Replace the top brace. Refer to the “Top Brace and Reference Bracket”
replacement procedure.
5. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

527
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Input Connector Assembly

Input Connector Assembly

Removal
1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.
2. Remove the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the “Front Frame Assembly”
removal procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-75. Disconnect the semi-rigid cable W10 from the Input
Connector Assembly (2).

Figure 14-75 Input Connector Assembly Removal

4. Remove the two screws (1) that attach the Input Connector Assembly
(2) to the chassis. The connector assembly can now be lifted from the
chassis.
5. To remove the gusset (5) remove the three screws (4), one on the side of
the chassis and two on the bottom.

528
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Input Connector Assembly

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-75. Place the Input Connector Assembly (2) into
position in the chassis. Replace the two screws (1) to attach the Input
Connector Assembly to the chassis. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.

Make sure that the O-ring (3) is installed correctly on the input connector.

2. Reconnect the semi-rigid cable W10 to the Input Connector Assembly.

Torque to 10 inch-pounds.
3. Place the gusset (5) in position and replace the three screws (4) that
attach it to the chassis. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the Front Frame Assembly. Refer to the "Front Frame Assembly."
replacement procedure.
5. Replace the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
replacement procedure.

529
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Front Frame Assembly

Removal

Make sure any connectors on the front panel are removed.

1. Remove the instrument outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case”
removal procedure.

If the analyzer has Option PRC, Portable Configuration, and you want to
remove the bail handle and bumpers from the front frame, refer to the “Bail
Handle Removal (Option PRC)” section on page 532.

2. Refer to Figure 14-76. Using the T-10 driver, remove the eight screws (1),
four on each side, to detach the Front Frame Assembly from the chassis.

Figure 14-76 Front Frame Assembly Removal

530
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

3. Refer to Figure 14-77. Pull the Front Frame Assembly carefully away from
the chassis. Remove the ribbon cable W1 from the mother board.
4. If the instrument has Option BBA (BBIQ inputs), there will be an additional
cable (W24) that will need to be removed. W24 connects to the A18 BBIQ
Interface Board. Pull the Front Frame Assembly carefully away from the
chassis. Remove the ribbon cable W1 from the mother board.

Figure 14-77 Front Panel Cable

Replacement
1. Reattach the ribbon cable W1.
2. Reattach the ribbon cable W24 for instruments with Option BBA.
3. Refer to Figure 14-76. Carefully position the Front Frame Assembly onto
the chassis. Ensure no cables are crushed. Replace the eight screws (1),
four on each side of the chassis. Torque to 9 inch pounds.
4. Replace the outer case. Refer to the “Instrument Outer Case” replacement
procedure.

531
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Bail Handle Removal (Option PRC)

1. Refer to Figure 14-78. Using the T-20 driver, remove the four screws (1),
two on each side, to detach the Bail Handle Assembly (2) from the front
frame.
2. Using the T-20 driver, remove the two screws (3) on each front bumper
(4) and remove from the front frame.
3. When replacing these parts, torque to 21 inch-pounds.

Figure 14-78 Bail Handle and Front Bumpers Removal

532
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Front Frame Assembly Components - LCD

Access to any of the Front Frame assemblies requires removal of the Front
Frame Assembly from the chassis.

Figure 14-79 Front Frame Assembly Parts Locator - LCD

Table 14-3

Item Reference Designator Description

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display

13 A1A4 Inverter Board

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board

23 A1MP10-13 Cable Clamp (Front Panel Cables)

24 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface Board

25 A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Inverter Board

26 W1 Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Motherboard (ribbon)

28, 29, 30 - Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head)

31 - Screw - M3 X 5 mm (TORX Flat Head)

533
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Figure 14-80 Front Frame Assembly Exploded View - LCD

534
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Table 14-4

Item Reference Designator Description

1 A1A1 Front Frame

2 A1A1MP2 Main Keypad Overlay

3 A1A1MP3 Connector Overlay

4 A1A1MP7 Front Frame Top Trim Strip (use with standard Bench analyzer)

5 A1A1MP9-10 Front Frame Side Trim Strip

6 A1A1MP4 Front Frame Ground Spring

7 A1A1MP5 Braided Gasket

8 A1A1MP6 Chromatic Gasket

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display

13 A1A4 Inverter Board

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board

15 A1MP1 Main Keypad

16 A1MP2 Display Keypad

17 A1MP9 Knob

18 A1MP3 Frequency Label, 3.6 GHz

A1MP4 Frequency Label, 8.4 GHz
A1MP5 Frequency Label, 13.6 GHz
A1MP6 Frequency Label, 26.5 GHz

19 A1MP7 LCD Glass Filter

20 A1MP8 LCD Lens Gasket

21 A1MP14 Display Bracket

22 A1MP15 Inverter Board Shield

23 A1MP10-13 Cable Clamp (Front Panel Cables)

24 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface Board

25 A1W2 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Inverter Board

26 W1 Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to Motherboard (ribbon)

27 - Screw - M2.5 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head)

535
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Table 14-4

Item Reference Designator Description

28 - Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head)

29 - Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head)

30 - Screw - M3 X 8 mm (TORX Pan Head)

31 - Screw - M3 X 5 mm (TORX Flat Head)

32 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA)

33 A17 BBIQ LED Board (Option BBA)

34 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA)

36 A1MP16 Inverter Top Shield (Option BBA)

37 A1MP17 Inverter Bottom Shield (Option BBA)

37 W24 Cable Assembly, A18J1, BBIQ Interface Board to A19J1, BBIQ Main Board
(ribbon cable (Option BBA)

Display Assembly - LCD

Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-79. Ribbon cable W1 (26) must be separated from the
display by pulling up to separate the velcro that is used to adhere the
cable to the bracket.
2. Refer to Figure 14-80. Disconnect W24 (38) from A16 if Option BBA is
installed in the instrument.
3. Refer to Figure 14-79. Disconnect the cable A1W2 (25) from the LCD
Inverter board (13) and unclip the cable from the cable clamps.
4. Disconnect the flex circuit A1W1 (24) from the front panel interface board
(9).
5. Remove the four screws (30) securing the display bracket (12) to the
Front Frame Assembly. The display can now be removed from the Front
Frame Assembly.

Once the display assembly has been removed from the Front Frame
Assembly, the glass filter is no longer secured. DO NOT tip the assembly in
such a manner that would cause it to fall out of place, as this may cause
injury and/or damage to the glass.

536
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

6. Refer to Figure 14-81. Disconnect the backlight wires (2) from the
inverter board.

Figure 14-81 Inverter Board Removal

7. To remove the A1A4 LCD Inverter board (1), remove the two screws (3)
securing the inverter board to the display bracket (5).
8. To remove the A1A3 LCD (4), flip the assembly over and remove the four
screws securing the LCD to the display bracket (5).

537
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Replacement
1. To replace the A1A3 LCD (4), place it on the display bracket (5) and
replace the four screws. Torque to 9 inch pounds.
2. To replace the A1A4 Inverter board (1), place it on the display bracket (5)
and replace the two screws (3). Torque to 9 inch pounds.
3. Reattach the backlight wires (2) onto the inverter board.
4. Refer to Figure 14-79. Place the display bracket into position in the Front
Frame Assembly. Reconnect the flex circuit A1W1 (24) to the front panel
interface board (9).
5. Replace the four screws (30) that secure the display bracket to the Front
Frame Assembly. Torque to 9 inch pounds.
6. Reconnect the cable A1W2 (25) to the Inverter board (13). Reclip the
cable into the cable clamps.
7. Refer to Figure 14-80. Reconnect the cable W24 (38) of the instrument
has Option BBA.
8. Adhere the velcro on ribbon cable W1 to the display.

538
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Daughter Board, Interface Board and Keypad

Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-80. Remove the knob (17) by carefully pulling it off.
2. Remove the display. Refer to the “Display Assembly - LCD” removal
procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-79. Remove the A1A5 Front Panel Daughter board (14)
by removing the three screws (28) and unplugging it from the front panel
interface board.
4. Remove the thirteen screws (31) securing the A1A2 Front Panel Interface
board to the Front Frame Assembly. The Front Panel Interface board with
the keypad attached can now be lifted from the Front Frame Assembly.
5. To separate the keypad from the Front Panel Interface board, use a push
tool or pliers to carefully separate the pull through tabs.

Replacement
1. Install the keypad onto the Front Panel Interface board using the pull
through tabs and alignment holes. Use a push tool or pliers to ensure that
all of the pull through tabs are properly captive on the board.
2. Install the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board/keypad assembly into the
Front Frame Assembly, and replace the thirteen screws (31) to secure.
Torque to 9 inch pounds.
3. Replace the A1A5 Front Panel Daughter board (14) by plugging it into the
Front Panel Interface board using the board to board connectors and
secure it with the three screws (28). Torque to 9 inch pounds.
4. Replace the display. Refer to the “Display Assembly - LCD” replacement
procedure.
5. Replace the knob by firmly pressing it on.

539
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Front Frame Assembly Components - LED

Access to any of the Front Frame assemblies requires removal of the Front
Frame Assembly from the chassis.

Figure 14-82 Front Frame Parts - LED

Table 14-5

Item Description

12 A1MP14 Display Bracket

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board

25 A1MP24 Magnetic Shield (Display Bracket to Front Panel

Interface/Speaker Bracket

26 A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket

30 Screw, Front Panel Daughter Board()

540
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Figure 14-83 Front Frame Parts (shields off) - LED

Table 14-6

Item Description

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam

21 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface Board

23 A1W3 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to DC-DC

Converter

541
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Figure 14-84 Front Frame Exploded View - LED

542
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Table 14-7

Item Description

1 Front Frame

2 Main Keyboard Overlay

3 Overlay, Left Display

4 Cover Plate

5 Front Frame Side Trim Strip (plastic)

6 Front Frame Ground Spring

9 A1A2 Front Panel Interface Board

10 A1A2MP1 Speaker

11 A1A2MP2 Speaker Foam

12 A1A3 Liquid Crystal Display

13 Vibration Mount

14 A1A5 Front Panel Daughter Board

15 A1MP1 Main Keypad

16 A1MP2 Display Keypad

17 A1MP9 Knob

18 A1MP3-6 Frequency Label

19 A1MP8 LCD Lens Gasket

20 A1MP7 LCD Glass Filter

22 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA)

24 A1A4 DC-DC Converter (LED display backlight power)

25 A1MP24 Magnetic Shield (Display Bracket to Front Panel

Interface/Speaker Bracket

26 A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket

30 A1MP14 Display Bracket

32 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA)

33 A17 BBIQ LED Board (Option BBA)

34 A1W1 Flex Circuit, Display to Front Panel Interface Board

35 A1W3 Power Cable, Front Panel Interface Board to DC-DC

Converter

36 A1W4 Power Cable, DC-DC Converter to Display

543
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Figure 14-85 Front Frame Assembly Shields - LED

Table 14-8

Item Description

1 A1MP23 Front Panel Interface/Speaker Bracket

28 Screw M3 X 0.5 (5mm long) (0515-0372)

544
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Display Assembly - LED

Removal

1. Refer to Figure 14-85. Remove the front panel shield by removing the four
screws (28).
2. Refer to Figure 14-86. Disconnect the flex circuit A1W1 (1) and A1W3 (2)
from the front panel interface board (4).

Figure 14-86 Display Removal - LED

3. Remove the screw (3) securing the display bracket to the Front Frame
Assembly. The display can now be removed from the Front Frame
Assembly.

Once the display assembly has been removed from the Front Frame
Assembly, the glass filter is no longer secured. DO NOT tip the assembly in
such a manner that would cause it to fall out of place, as this may cause
injury and/or damage to the glass.

4. Refer to Figure 14-87. To separate the LCD (2) from the display bracket
(1), remove the four screws (3). When reassembling, torque the four
screws to 5 inch-pounds.
5. To separate the DC to DC Converter (4) from the display bracket (1),
remove the two screws (5). When reassembling, torque the two screws
to 9 inch-pounds.

545
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Figure 14-87 LED and Display Bracket Separation

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-86. Place the display bracket into position in the Front
Frame Assembly. Reconnect the flex circuit A1W1 (1) and A1W3 (2) to
the front panel interface board (4).
2. Replace the screw(3) that secures the display bracket to the Front Frame
Assembly. Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the front panel shield.

546
Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Daughter Board, Interface Board and Keypad

Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-84. Remove the knob (17) by carefully pulling it off.
2. Remove the display. Refer to the “Display Assembly - LED” removal
procedure.
3. Refer to Figure 14-82. Remove the A1A5 Front Panel Daughter board (14)
by removing the three screws (30) and unplugging it from the front panel
interface board.
4. Remove the thirteen screws securing the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board
to the Front Frame Assembly. The Front Panel Interface board with the
keypad attached can now be lifted from the Front Frame Assembly.
5. To separate the keypad from the Front Panel Interface board, use a push
tool or pliers to carefully separate the pull through tabs.

Replacement
1. Install the keypad onto the Front Panel Interface board using the pull
through tabs and alignment holes. Use a push tool or pliers to ensure that
all of the pull through tabs are properly captive on the board.
2. Install the A1A2 Front Panel Interface board/keypad assembly into the
Front Frame Assembly, and replace the thirteen screws to secure. Torque
to 9 inch-pounds.
3. Replace the A1A5 Front Panel Daughter board (14) by plugging it into the
Front Panel Interface board using the board to board connectors and
secure it with the three screws (30). Torque to 9 inch-pounds.
4. Replace the display. Refer to the “Display Assembly - LCD” replacement
procedure.
5. Replace the knob by firmly pressing it on.

547
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Option BBA

Access to any of the Option BBA Front Frame assemblies requires removal
of the Front Frame Assembly from the chassis.

Figure 14-88 Option BBA Parts Locator

Table 14-9

Item Reference Designator Description

1 A19 BBIQ Main Board (Option BBA)

2 W25 Cable Assembly, A19J101, BBIQ Main Board to
A16J707 Reference Board (Flexible Coax) (Option BBA)
3 W24 Cable Assembly, A18J1, BBIQ Interface Board to
A19J1, BBIQ Main Board (Ribbon Cable) (Option BBA)
4 A1MP18 Core Bracket (Option BBA)
5 A18 BBIQ Interface Board (Option BBA)

548
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

Inverter Board
Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-89. Using a ¼-inch socket remove the two Hex screws
(1) that secure the flex ribbon into the connector.

The flex ribbon cannot have tight radial bends as this will damage the
cable.

2. Remove the eight screws (2) that secure the inverter top shield to the
bottom shield. Carefully remove the top shield with the ribbon cable
attached

Figure 14-89 Inverter Top Shield Removal

549
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

3. Refer to Figure 14-90. Disconnect the cable (1) and backlight wires (2)
from the inverter board. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the
inverter board (4) and bottom shield (5) to the display assembly.
Carefully remove the inverter board.

Figure 14-90 Inverter Board and Bottom Shield Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-90. To replace the inverter board (4), place it in the
bottom shield (5) on the display bracket. Line up the holes in the shield
base and PC assembly with front frame assembly. Replace the two screws
(3). Torque to 9 inch pounds.
2. Reconnect the cable (1) and backlight wires (2) to the inverter board.
3. Fit grommets inside the wire access slots if they were dislodged.
4. Refer to Figure 14-89. Align the top inverter shield (1) with holes in
bottom as shown.
5. Inspect to see that the wires are not pinched in both places where the
wires go through the holes.

550
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

6. Replace the eight screws (2) to secure the inverter top shield to the
bottom shield. Torque to 9 in-lbs.
7. Carefully reconnect the ribbon to the BBIQ Interface board. Install two Hex
screws (1) to secure the flex ribbon into the connector. Torque to 4 in-lbs
with the ¼-inch socket.

BBIQ Interface Board, LED Board, and Overlay

Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-91. Using a ¼-inch socket remove the two Hex screws
(1) that secure the flex ribbon into the connector.

The flex ribbon cannot have tight radial bends as this will damage the
cable.

2. Remove the two screws (2) attaching the BBIQ Interface board to the
front frame.

Figure 14-91 BBIQ Interface Board Removal

551
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

3. Refer to Figure 14-92. Remove the side screw (1) attaching the BBIQ
Interface board to the front frame.

Figure 14-92 BBIQ Interface Board Side Screw

552
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

4. Refer to Figure 14-93. Carefully pry up the top overlay to separate it from
the LED board.

Figure 14-93 Top Overlay Removal

553
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

5. Refer to Figure 14-94. Remove the two screws (2) attaching the LED
board and bottom overlay to the front frame assembly.

Figure 14-94 LED Board Installation

554
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

6. Refer to Figure 14-95. The LED board (1) can now be separated from the
LED board overlay (2).

Figure 14-95 LED Board and Overlay

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-95. Line up the holes and carefully attach the overlay
(2) to the LED board (1).
2. Refer to Figure 14-94. Install the LED board with overlay attached into the
front frame.
3. Secure the LED board with two screws (2). Torque to 9 in-lbs.
4. Refer to Figure 14-91. Install the BBIQ Interface board, into the front frame
passing the BNC connectors through the holes. Secure the board with two
screws (2). Torque to 9 in-lbs.
5. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the connector on the BBIQ Interface board.
Using a ¼-inch socket reinstall the two Hex screws (1) that secure the
flex ribbon into the connector. Torque to 4 in-lbs.
6. Refer to Figure 14-92. Secure the BBIQ Interface board to the side of the
front frame with a single screw (1). Torque to 9 in-lbs.
7. Refer to Figure 14-93. Line up and carefully attach the top overlay over the
lower overlay.
8. Press firmly down over the entire surface area of the top overlay.

555
 Assembly Replacement Procedures
Front Frame Assembly

BBIQ Main Board

Removal
1. Refer to Figure 14-96. Remove W4 and W6 from the A14 L.O. Synthesizer
board. Lift and remove the A14 (3) from the instrument. Remove the coax
cable (1) and the ribbon cable (along the side of the board) first before
lifting the board extractors to remove the A19 BBIQ Main board (2).
Otherwise damage to the ribbon cable will occur.

The flex ribbon cannot have tight radial bends as this will damage the
cable.

Figure 14-96 BBIQ Main Board Removal

Replacement
1. Refer to Figure 14-96. Install the A19 BBIQ Main board into slot 4 and use
the board extractors to secure the board into the motherboard connectors.
Reattach the coax cable (1). Carefully route the ribbon cable through the
chassis side wall and gently press the cable into place until it snaps into
the A19J1 connector off the BBIQ Main board. Re-install the A14 L.O.
Synthesizer board and re-attach W4 and W6 cables.

556
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

15 Post-Repair Procedures

What You Will Find in This Chapter

This chapter provides information that will enable you to return an instrument
to full operation following the replacement of any instrument assembly. This
information includes a table that shows which adjustments and/or
performance tests must be executed after replacing an assembly.

Before Starting
There are three things you should do before starting any of the procedures
listed or described in this chapter:
— Familiarize yourself with the safety symbols, and read the general safety
considerations and the safety note definitions in the front of this guide,
before you begin the procedures in this chapter.
— Check that the analyzer has been turned on and allowed to warm up.
— Ensure that the analyzer is operating within a temperature range of 20 °C to
30 °C.

Test equipment you will need

Refer to Table 1-1 on page 26, for a list of recommended equipment and
critical test equipment specifications for the performance verification and
adjustments.

557
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Post-Repair Procedures
Table 15-1 lists the adjustments and performance verification tests needed
after an assembly replacement.
After an assembly is replaced, find the assembly that has been replaced in the
left-hand column, and then perform the recommended adjustment and/or
performance verification test. Making the recommended adjustments and/or
performance verification tests doesn’t guarantee all published specifications
are being met. Only a full instrument calibration will do this.

Refer to the analyzer user’s guide for information on instrument warm-up

before performing any of the procedures listed in this chapter.

The following procedures are also included in the “Additional Tasks” on

page 563.
— “Calibration Data Backup and Restore”
— “BIOS Settings Verification”
— “End User License Agreement (EULA) Acceptance (Software versions ≤
A.06.08)”
— “End User License Agreement (EULA) Acceptance (Software versions ≥
A.07.00)”
— “FPGA Synchronization”
— “Programming Model and Serial Numbers”

558
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 15-1 Post-Repair Testing Requirements

Ad justments to Perform Performance Verifications to Perform After

Assembly
(in the order listed)a Ad justmentsa

A1A2 None Residual Responses

Front Panel Displayed Average Noise Level
Interface

A1A3 None Residual Responses

Liquid Crystal Displayed Average Noise Level
Display

A2 IF Frequency Responseb Power Bandwidth Accuracy

Analog I.F. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Assembly Residual Responses
Displayed Average Noise Level
I.F. Frequency Response
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Display Scale Fidelity

A3 FPGA Synchronizationc Power Bandwidth Accuracy

Digital I.F. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Assembly Residual Responses
Displayed Average Noise Level
I.F. Frequency Response
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Display Scale Fidelity

A4 BIOS Settings Verificationc Residual Responses

CPU Assembly Displayed Average Noise Level
Set Instrument Time and Dated

A4BT1 BIOS Settings Verificationc Residual Responses

Battery Displayed Average Noise Level
Set Instrument Time and Dated

A5 Accept End User License Agreement (EULA)c Residual Responses

Disk Drivee Displayed Average Noise Level
Instrument Software Updatef
Frequency Response (All Tests)
All Adjustmentse

A6 None Residual Responses

Power Supply Displayed Average Noise Level
Spurious Responses

A7 None Residual Responses

Midplane board Displayed Average Noise Level

A8 None Residual Responses

Motherboard Displayed Average Noise Level

559
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 15-1 Post-Repair Testing Requirements (Continued)

Ad justments to Perform Performance Verifications to Perform After

Assembly
(in the order listed)a Ad justmentsa

A9 & A10 Hardware Statistical Reset Utility Residual Responses

RF Attenuators 50 MHz Calibrator Adjustment Displayed Average Noise Level
Frequency Response (All Adjustments) Spurious Responses
Attenuator Slope Third Order Intermodulation
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty
Frequency Response (All Tests)

A11 Frequency Response (All Tests) Residual Responses

Low Band Switch Attenuator Slope Displayed Average Noise Level
Spurious Responses
Third Order Intermodulation
Second Harmonic Distortion
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response (All Tests)

A12 YTF Alignment (Press System, Residual Responses

YTF Preselector Alignments, Ad vanced, Displayed Average Noise Level
Characterize Preselector) Spurious Responses
Frequency Response (All Adjustments) Third Order Intermodulation
Attenuator Slope Second Harmonic Distortion
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response (All Tests)

A13 Frequency Response (All Tests) Residual Responses

Front End Attenuator Slope Displayed Average Noise Level
Assembly Spurious Responses
Third Order Intermodulation
Second Harmonic Distortion
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Frequency Response (All Tests)

A14 FPGA Synchronizationc Residual Responses

L.O. Synthesizer Displayed Average Noise Level
Assembly Spurious Responses
Phase Noise (All Tests)
Frequency Response (All Tests)

A15 FPGA Synchronizationc Residual Responses

Front End Control YTF Alignment (Press System, Displayed Average Noise Level
Assembly Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Alignments, Ad vanced,
Frequency Response (All Tests)
Characterize Preselector)
Front End Controller Attenuator Adjustment
(Option CR3 or CRP)

560
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 15-1 Post-Repair Testing Requirements (Continued)

Ad justments to Perform Performance Verifications to Perform After

Assembly
(in the order listed)a Ad justmentsa

A16 FPGA Synchronizationc Frequency Reference Accuracy

Reference 10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjust Residual Responses
Assembly 50 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Adjust Displayed Average Noise Level
4800 MHz Calibrator Amplitude Adjustment Frequency Readout Accuracy
(Option MPB) Count Accuracy
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
Phase Noise (All Tests)

A17 None Residual Responses

LED Board Displayed Average Noise Level
(Option BBA)

A18 Press Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Residual Responses

BNC Interface Calibrate Displayed Average Noise Level
Board Absolute Amplitude (Option BBA) Adjust Absolute Amplitude Accuracy at 250 kHz
(Option BBA) Frequency Response Below 250 kHz
Frequency Response Above 250 kHz
Channel Match

A19 FPGA Synchronizationc Residual Responses

BBIQ Main Board Press Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Displayed Average Noise Level
(Option BBA) Absolute Amplitude Accuracy at 250 kHz
Calibrate
Frequency Response Below 250 kHz
Absolute Amplitude (Option BBA) Adjust
Frequency Response Above 250 kHz
Channel Match

A25 IF Frequency Response Noise Density

Wide Band Analog
IF
(Option B85, B1A,
B1X)

A26 FPGA Synchronizationc

Wide Band Digital
IF
(Option B85, B1A,
B1X)

SW1 Frequency Response (all tests) Frequency Response (all)

Preselector Attenuator Slope
Bypass Hardware Statistical Reset
Switch (Opt MPB)

SW2 Frequency Response (all tests) Frequency Response (all)

Preselector Attenuator Slope
Bypass Hardware Statistical Reset
Switch (Opt MPB)

561
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Table 15-1 Post-Repair Testing Requirements (Continued)

Ad justments to Perform Performance Verifications to Perform After

Assembly
(in the order listed)a Ad justmentsa

W24 Press Input/Output, I/Q, I/Q Cable Residual Responses

BBIQ Cable Calibrate Displayed Average Noise Level
Assembly Absolute Amplitude (Option BBA) Adjust Absolute Amplitude Accuracy at 250 kHz
(Option BBA) Frequency Response Below 250 kHz
Frequency Response Above 250 kHz
Channel Match

a. Calibration Application Software is required for all performance tests and most adjustments. For
details go to http://www.keysight.com/find/calibrationsoftware
b. IF Frequency Response adjustment only performed if Option B25 and/or B40 are present and ana-
lyzer is equipped with Option MPB.
c. See the Additional Tasks section in this chapter for detailed instructions on this task.
d. To set the instrument time and date press Start, Control Panel, Date Time Language and
Regional Options, Date and Time
e. Before replacing the A5 Disk Drive, see the “Calibration Data Backup and Rest36ore” section in this
chapter for details.
f. See Chapter 17, “Instrument Software” for instructions on updating the instrument software to the
latest version.

Some Adjustment tests may be found in the Utility portion of the Test
Plan.

562
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Additional Tasks
Calibration Data Backup and Restore
Data Backup
In order for the instrument being repaired to not need all of the instrument
adjustments and performance verification tests to be run after the A5 Disk
Drive is replaced the calibration data will need to be backed up onto an
external drive prior to removing the existing disk drive.

While the backing up and restoring of the calibration data to the new disk
drive will return the instrument performance to the state that it was prior
to a repair this does not guarantee that all instrument performance
parameters meet their specified values. A full instrument calibration would
be required to verify this.

There are two different types of calibration file databases that the instrument
being repaired could be using, and three different backup procedures that
might need to be followed. Which backup procedure to be run will depend on
the software version that currently exists in the instrument being repaired.
To determine which calibration data backup procedure needs to be run
determine the current instrument software version by pressing System, Show,
System on the instrument and follow the steps outlined below for that version.
S/W Revision Less Than A.01.55
1. Close the instrument application software by pressing File, Exit, Enter
using the front panel keys.
2. Connect a USB mouse to one of the instrument front panel USB ports.
3. Connect a USB FLASH drive to the other front panel USB port.
4. Using the mouse double-click on the Windows Explorer link on the
desktop and navigate to the following folder:

E:\AlignDataStorage
5. Copy the following file onto the USB FLASH drive:

CurrentDataSet.xml

563
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

S/W Revision Greater Than or Equal To A.01.55 and Less Than A.02.00
1. Close the instrument application software by pressing File, Exit, Enter
using the front panel keys.
2. Connect a USB mouse to one of the instrument front panel USB ports.
3. Connect a USB FLASH drive to the other front panel USB port.
4. Using the mouse double-click on the Windows Explorer link on the
desktop and navigate to the following folder:

C:\Program Files\Agilent\SignalAnalysis\Physics
5. Double-click on BackupAndRestore.exe and the window shown in
Figure 15-1 will appear.

Figure 15-1 Calibration Data Backup

6. Under the “Specify Backup Folder or File Name” use the mouse to
select the “...” button to open the “Browse For Folder” dialog box.
7. Select the USB FLASH drive and press OK.

While you can use the “Make New Folder” button in the “Browse For
Folder” dialog box to create a sub-folder on the USB FLASH drive, and
you can specify a filename in the “Specify Backup Folder or File Name”
window, you can also just use the root directory on the drive and let the
instrument select a default filename for you.

8. Select “Backup” and wait for the calibration database to be backed up.
9. When the backup has completed close the Calibration Data Backup
And Restore window.

564
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

S/W Revision Greater Than or Equal To A.02.00

1. Connect a USB keyboard and mouse to two of the instrument rear
panel USB ports
2. Connect a USB FLASH drive to one of the front panel USB ports.
3. Press System, Alignments, Backup or Restore Align Data.
4. The Alignment Data Wizard window as shown in Figure 15-2 will
appear.

Figure 15-2 Alignment Data Wizard

5. Follow the on-screen instruction to backup the calibration data to the

USB FLASH drive.

565
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Data Restore (.xml File)

If the instrument being repaired was using a software version prior to A.01.55 it
would have been using an .xml database file for its calibration data, and this
data will need to be restored using the following process.
1. Close the instrument application software by pressing File, Exit, Enter
using the front panel keys.
2. Connect a USB mouse to one of the instrument front panel USB ports.
3. Locate the USB FLASH drive that was earlier used to backup the
instrument calibration file and insert it into one of the instrument front
panel USB ports.
4. Using the mouse double-click on the Windows Explorer link on the
desktop and navigate to the folder on the USB FLASH drive where you
previously saved the calibration data file.
5. Locate the following file, which was previously saved to the USB FLASH
drive:

CurrentDataSet.xml

6. Highlight the calibration data file and copy the file to the instrument
clipboard by selecting Ed it, Copy from the Windows Explorer pull-down
menu.
7. Navigate to the folder below and paste the file by selecting Ed it, Paste
from the Windows Explorer pull-down menu:

E:\AlignDataStorage

8. Verify that the CurrentDataSet.xml file was copied to the new disk drive
9. Cycle the instrument power.
When the instrument application software starts up it will see this older format
data file and convert it to the new SQL database. Any further backing up of the
data will now be done through the instrument Alignment Data Wizard
application which can be found in the instrument application software under
System, Alignments, Backup or Restore Align Data...

566
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Data Restore (SQL Database)

If the instrument being repaired was using instrument software version A.01.55
or newer prior to this repair it was already using an SQL database file for its
calibration data, so it can be easily restored with the instrument Alignment
Data Wizard using the following procedure.
1. Connect a USB mouse to one of the instrument front panel USB ports.
2. Locate the USB FLASH drive that was earlier used to backup the
instrument calibration file and insert it into one of the instrument front
panel USB ports.
3. Restore the instrument calibration data by pressing: System, Alignments,
Backup or Restore Align Data... The Alignment Data Wizard window as
shown in Figure 15-2 will appear.
4. Follow the on-screen instruction to restore the previously saved
calibration data from the USB FLASH drive.
5. Cycle the power.

567
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

BIOS Settings Verification

Whenever either the A4 CPU assembly or the A4BT1 CPU Battery is changed
there are certain BIOS settings that need to be verified. If these are not set
correctly the instrument may not boot up or operate correctly.
The BIOS settings that need to be verified, as well as the BIOS configuration
screens used, will vary depending on the A4 CPU assembly.
Selection of BIOS Settings Procedure
The MXA has had three standard CPUs:
— Single-Core Processor (standard on MXAs with serial numbers prior to
MY/SG/US49100000; identifies as Option N9020A-PC1 with instrument
software A.02.00 or later)
— Dual-Core Processor (standard on MXAs with serial numbers
≥ MY/SG/US49100000 to < MY/SG/US52090000; identifies as
N9020A-PC2; available as an upgrade for older MXAs)
— High-Performance Dual-Core Processor (standard on MXAs with serial
numbers ≥ MY/SG/US52090000; identifies as N9012A-PC4; available as an
upgrade for older MXAs.)
Each of these CPUs uses a unique BIOS.
The steps below will help you identify which BIOS settings procedure to
perform.
1. Connect an external USB keyboard to one of the front panel USB ports.
2. Turn on the analyzer power.
3. Confirm Agilent Technologies splash screen comes up within a few
seconds. “Agilent Technologies” will appear in white letters on a black
background.
4. Press “F2” and then “Delete” on the external keyboard when at the Agilent
Technologies splash screen to enter the CPU BIOS Setup Utility.The older
CPUs (N9020A-PC1 and N9020A-PC2) respond to “F2” while the newer
CPU (N9020A-PC4) responds to the “Delete” key.
5. If the CPU BIOS Setup Utility main screen appears as in Figure 15-3, follow
the procedure for the Single-Core Processor.
6. If the CPU BIOS Setup Utility main screen appears as in Figure 15-4, follow
the procedure for the Older Dual-Core Processor
7. If the CPU BIOS Setup Utility main screen appears as in Figure 15-5, follow
the procedure for the newer Dual-Core processor
8. If the CPU BIOS Setup Utility main screen appears as in Figure 15-6, follow
the procedure for the High-Performance Dual-Core Processor.

568
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Figure 15-3 Single-Core Processor BIOS Setup Utility Main Screen

Figure 15-4 Older Dual-Core Processor BIOS Setup Utility Main Screen

569
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Figure 15-5 Newer Dual-Core Processor BIOS Setup Utility Main Screen

570
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Figure 15-6 High Performance Dual-Core Processor BIOS Setup Utility Main Screen

571
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Single-Core Processor
There are two settings in the CPU BIOS that must be verified and may require
changing when the A4 CPU assembly or A4BT1 CPU battery is replaced. These
settings need to be correct in order for the analyzer to boot up and operate
correctly.
— “IDE 2” must be set to #1 in the “Boot priority order”
— “CK-408 Spread Spectrum” must be set to “Enabled”
Changing and saving these BIOS settings requires a USB external keyboard.
Changes to the BIOS are fairly straightforward and should take ~30 seconds.
Verifying Boot Priority
1. Press the Right Arrow on the external keyboard twice to highlight the
Boot tab as shown in Figure 15-7.

Figure 15-7 Boot Tab Highlighted

2. If IDE 2 is not listed 1st in the boot priority, press the Down Arrow on
the external keyboard to highlight IDE 2 as shown in Figure 15-7.

572
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

3. Press the “+” key on the external keyboard to bring IDE 2 to the top of
the list as shown in Figure 15-8.

Figure 15-8 IDE 2 at Top of List

573
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Enabling Spread Spectrum

1. Press the Left Arrow on the external keyboard to highlight the
Advanced tab as shown in Figure 15-9.

Figure 15-9 Advanced Tab Highlighted

2. Press the Down Arrow on the external keyboard to highlight CK-408

Spread Spectrum
3. Use the “+” key on the external keyboard to change the setting from
[Disabled] to [Enabled]
4. Press “F10” on the keyboard to save changes and exit.

574
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

5. Press the Enter key on the external keyboard to confirm the BIOS
configuration changes as per Figure 15-10.

Figure 15-10 Confirm BIOS Configuration

6. Perform the remaining adjustments and performance tests as per Table

15-1 for the assembly that was changed.

575
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Older Dual-Core Processor

There is one setting in the CPU BIOS that must be verified and may require
changing when the A4 CPU assembly or A4BT1 CPU battery is replaced. This
setting needs to be correct in order for the analyzer to always boot up
correctly.
— “IDE HDD” must be set to #1 in the “Boot priority order”
Changing and saving these BIOS settings requires a USB external keyboard.
Changes to the BIOS are fairly straightforward and should take ~30 seconds.
Verifying Boot Priority
1. Press the Right Arrow on the external keyboard three times to highlight
the Boot tab as shown in Figure 15-11.

Figure 15-11 Boot Tab Highlighted

2. With Boot Order highlighted as shown in Figure 15-11 press Enter on

the external keyboard to enter the Boot Order Configuration screen.

576
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Figure 15-12 IDE HDD Selected

3. If IDE HDD is not listed first in the boot priority, press the Down Arrow
on the external keyboard to highlight IDE HDD as shown in Figure
15-12.

577
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

4. Press the “+” key on the external keyboard to bring IDE HDD to the top
of the list as shown in Figure 15-13.

Figure 15-13 IDE HDD at Top of List

578
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Save Changes
1. Press “F10” on the keyboard to save changes.
2. Press the Enter key on the external keyboard to confirm the BIOS
configuration changes as per Figure 15-14.

Figure 15-14 Confirm BIOS Configuration

579
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Newer Dual-Core Processor

There is one setting in the CPU BIOS that must be verified and may require
changing when the A4 CPU assembly or A4BT1 CPU battery is replaced. This
setting needs to be correct in order for the analyzer to always boot up
correctly.
— “IDE HDD” must be set to #1 in the “Boot priority order”
Changing and saving these BIOS settings requires a USB external keyboard.
Changes to the BIOS are fairly straightforward and should take ~30 seconds.
Verifying Boot Priority
1. Press the Right Arrow on the external keyboard five times to highlight
the Boot tab as shown in Figure 15-15.

Figure 15-15 Boot Tab Highlighted

580
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

2. If “IDE 0” is not listed first in the boot priority, press the Down Arrow on
the external keyboard to highlight “IDE 0” as shown in Figure 15-16.

Figure 15-16 IDE 0 Selected

581
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

3. Press the “+” key on the external keyboard to bring IDE 0 to the top of
the list as shown in Figure 15-17.

Figure 15-17 IDE 0 at the Top of List

582
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Save Changes
1. Press “F10” on the keyboard to save changes.
2. Press the Enter key on the external keyboard to confirm the BIOS
configuration changes as per Figure 15-18.

Figure 15-18 Confirm BIOS Configuration

583
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

High-Performance Dual-Core Processor

Save Changes
1. Press “F3” on the external keyboard to select Optimized Defaults. A
dialog box will appear asking you to confirm your selection. Select
“Yes” and press the Enter key on the external keyboard.

Figure 15-19 Selecting Optimized Defaults

Save Changes
1. Press the right arrow on the external keyboard to select the “Save and
Exit” tab.
2. Press the down arrow key to select “Save Changes and Exit” as shown
in Save Changes. Press the Enter key.
3. Press the Enter key again to confirm.

584
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Figure 15-20 Save Changes

585
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

End User License Agreement (EULA) Acceptance

(Software versions ≤ A.06.08)

The Microsoft End-User License agreement will be displayed whenever the

A5 Disk Drive has been replaced, and this must be accepted.

The License Agreement screen asks you to accept the terms of the End-User
License Agreement for Windows XP. You must accept this agreement to
continue the Windows XP installation and configuration. If you do not accept
this agreement, the instrument shuts down and the next time you turn it on the
Windows XP Setup Wizard starts from the beginning again.

Accepting the End-User License Agreement (EULA) Screen

The instrument will display the Agilent Welcome Screen shown in Figure 15-21
and wait for Enter to be pressed to continue.

Figure 15-21 Agilent Welcome Screen (Software versions ≤ A.06.08)

586
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

1. Press Enter to proceed with the Windows XP setup.

2. When you see the Windows XP Setup Wizard screen as seen in Figure
15-22, press Enter to move to the License Agreement screen.

Figure 15-22 Windows XP Setup Wizard

3. When the Windows XP License Agreement window comes up, select “I

accept this agreement” and press Next.
4. The Date and Time Settings screen is used to set the appropriate date,
time and time zone. These settings will be configured later by the end
user.
Select Next to continue the Windows XP Setup Wizard.
5. Wait for the Windows XP Setup Wizard to complete. The instrument will
restart itself a few times.
6. Once the Windows XP Setup Wizard has completed the instrument is
ready for the next step of configuration.

587
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

End User License Agreement (EULA) Acceptance

(Software versions ≥ A.07.00)
Beginning with instrument software version A.07.00 and later, it is no longer
necessary to actively accept the end-user license agreement (EULA) when
replacing the A5 Disk Drive. However, a Welcome screen, as in Figure 15-23
below, will give you information about the EULA.

Accepting the End-User License Agreement (EULA) Screen

The instrument will display the Agilent Welcome Screen shown in Figure 15-23
and wait for Enter to be pressed to continue.

Figure 15-23 Agilent Welcome Screen (Software versions ≥ A.07.00)

588
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

1. Press Enter to proceed with the Windows XP setup. See Figure 15-24.

Figure 15-24 Windows XP Setup Wizard

2. The Date and Time Settings screen is used to set the appropriate date,
time and time zone. These settings may be configured later by the end
user.
Select Next to continue the Windows XP Setup Wizard.
3. Wait for the Windows XP Setup Wizard to complete. The instrument will
restart itself a few times.
4. Once the Windows XP Setup Wizard has completed the instrument is
ready for the next step of configuration.

589
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

FPGA Synchronization
There is FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) program code on many
different assemblies inside of the instrument, and all of these must be of a
compatible version with the instrument software revision. In order to ensure
that this requirement is met when either an assembly is replaced that contains
FPGA code on it, or if the A5 Disk Drive is replaced with a drive that has a
different version of software than the previous drive, you will need to take
certain steps to ensure that the instrument operates properly.

Even if an instrument appears to work properly when an assembly with

FPGA code is replaced, that does not mean that the FPGA code is
completely compatible with the software version installed in the
instrument. There could be incompatibilities that will only be seen under
certain measurement conditions.

Depending on the revision of the instrument software there are two possible
ways to synchronize the FPGA codes with the instrument software revision. To
determine which synchronization process will need to be run perform the
following:
1. Check the current instrument software revision. To determine the software
revision press System, Show, System on the instrument.
2. If the instrument software revision is prior to A.02.00 the instrument
software will need to be updated. See Chapter 17, “Instrument Software”
for instructions.
When the instrument software update is run all of the instrument FPGA
code will be updated to the revision required for the installed software.
Once the software update has been installed the FPGA code
synchronization procedure will be completed.
3. If the instrument software revision is A.02.00 or newer the FPGA code for
all of the different assemblies can be updated following the procedure
below titled “Updating the Instrument FPGA Code”.

590
 Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Updating the Instrument FPGA Code

Instruments that have software revision A.02.00 or newer have a utility
included in them that will update the FPGA code on all of the different
assemblies in the instrument that have it. When this utility is run it will detect
the assemblies that need to be updated and will update them to the correct
revision.

Once you start the FPGA programming process you MUST NOT interrupt
the process for any reason. This would include turning the instrument off
or unplugging the power cord to the instrument. Doing so will result in an
inoperative instrument, requiring the affected assembly to be replaced.

1. Close the instrument application software by pressing File, Exit, Enter

using the front panel keys.
2. Connect a USB mouse and keyboard to one of the instrument front panel
USB ports.
3. Using the mouse, click Start, Log Off, Log Off.
4. Re-login as “administrator”. The default password is “Keysight4u!”. Click
OK.
5. Using the mouse double-click on the Windows Explorer link on the
desktop and navigate to the following folder:

C:\Program Files\Agilent\SignalAnalysis\Physics
6. In this folder find and execute the file named:

FPGA_Prog.bat
7. The FPGA Programming Utility will start and a window as shown in Figure
15-25 will appear.

Figure 15-25 FPGA Programming Utility

591
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

8. To program the FPGA code enter 1 and press Enter. You will need to
confirm this selection by pressing 1 and Enter one more time.
9. The programming of the FPGA code could take a few minutes to complete.
Once it has finished the instrument will reboot itself to use the new code
and this process will then be completed.

592
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

Programming Model and Serial Numbers

Since the instrument model and serial numbers are stored only on the A7
Midplane board assembly, this information will be lost when this board
assembly is replaced. Until the instrument model and serial numbers are
restored the instrument application software will not allow any user
measurements to be made, due to the fact that all previously installed license
keys will not be accepted. However, the license files will not be automatically
deleted. Once the model and serial numbers are restored the license files will
then be recognized and accepted, returning the instrument to the capability
that was available prior to the A7 Midplane board assembly replacement.
To program the model and serial numbers into a replacement A7 Midplane
board assembly the N7814A Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Calibration
Application Software will be required.
Information regarding N7814A Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzer Calibration
Application Software can be found at:

http://www.keysight.com/find/calibrationsoftware
When the calibration software first detects the instrument it will recognize that
it does not have a valid model and serial number and will prompt the user to
enter the correct values.

Be very careful when entering the instrument serial number into the
software, because once it has been written it can no longer be changed.

Since the instrument model and serial numbers are stored on the A7 Midplane
board assembly, this should only be required when this assembly has been
replaced with a new one.

593
Post-Repair Procedures
Post-Repair Procedures

594
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

16 Functional Tests

Functional Test Versus

Performance Verification
Functional tests are tests of various instrument parameters that give a high
degree of confidence that the analyzer is operating correctly. They are
recommended as a check of analyzer operation for incoming inspection or after
a repair. Measurement uncertainty analysis is not available for functional tests,
and the analyzer is checked against limits that are wider than the published
specifications. The functional tests are designed to test an analyzer operating
within the temperature range defined by the analyzer specifications using a
minimum set of test equipment. If a test does not pass, performance
verification tests must be run to determine whether a problem exists.
Functional tests use a minimum set of test equipment to check a much smaller
range of parameters (and a limited number of data points for each parameter)
than do performance verification tests. Functional tests use limits that are
wider than the published specifications; measurement uncertainty analysis is
not available for functional tests.

If a functional test does not pass, you must run performance verification
tests to determine whether a problem exists.

Performance verification tests span a wide range of instrument parameters and

provide the highest level of confidence that the instrument conforms to
published specifications. These tests can be time consuming and require
extensive test equipment.

595
 Functional Tests
Before Performing a Functional Test

Before Performing a Functional Test

1. Ensure that you have the proper test equipment.
2. Switch on the unit under test (UUT) and let it warm up (in accordance with
warm-up requirements in the instrument specifications).
3. Allow sufficient warm-up time for the required test equipment (refer to
individual instrument documentation for warm-up specifications).
4. Ensure that the analyzer’s frequency reference is set to Internal:
a. Press the Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In keys.
b. If the Freq Ref In softkey does not show Internal, press the Freq Ref
In softkey and select Internal.
5. Following instrument warm-up, perform the auto align routine:
Press System, Alignments, Align Now, All.

Functional test accuracy depends on the precision of the test equipment

used. Ensure that all of the test equipment is calibrated before running a
functional test.

596
 Functional Tests
Test Equipment

Test Equipment
The table below summarizes the test equipment needed to perform all of the
functional tests. Alternate equipment model numbers are given in case the
recommended equipment is not available. If neither the recommended nor the
alternative test equipment are available, substitute equipment that meets or
exceeds the critical specifications listed.
Table 16-1

Analyzer Al ternate
Recommended
Option Item Critical Specifications Keysight
Keysight Model
Model

Adapters

All 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 1250-1749
(connector saver for source) 83059B
VSWR: < 1.1:1

All BNC (f) to SMA (m) Frequency: 40 MHz 1250-1200

All Type N (f) to Type N (f) Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1472 1250-0777
VSWR: < 1.05:1

All Type N (m) to 3.5 mm (m) Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1743

VSWR: < 1.1:1

All Type N (m) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1744

VSWR: < 1.1:1

All Type N (f) to 3.5 mm (f) Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1745

VSWR: < 1.1:1

All Type N (m) to BNC (f) Frequency: 10 MHz to 1 GHz 1250-1476

VSWR: < 1.05:1

Attenuators

All 10 dB Step Attenuator Frequency: 50 MHz 8495A 8496A

Range: 0 to 70 dB

All 10 dB Fixed Attenuator (2 Frequency: 50 MHz 8493C Option 010 8493A Option
required) 010
VSWR: < 1.2:1
or
8493B Option
010

Preamp 30 dB Fixed Attenuator Accuracy: < 0.05 dB @ 50 MHz 11708A

Options
(Pxx)

597
 Functional Tests
Test Equipment

Table 16-1

Analyzer Al ternate
Recommended
Option Item Critical Specifications Keysight
Keysight Model
Model

Cables

All 3.5 mm (1 meter) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11500E 8120-4921

VSWR: < 1.4:1
Loss: < 2.0 dB

All Cable, BNC (3 required) 120 cm (48 in.) BNC cable 10503A

BBA Cable, BNC 120 cm (48 in.) BNC cable 10503A

Flatness (250 kHz to 40 MHz) < 0.5 dB

BBA Cable, BNC BNC male 10502A

23 cm (9 in) max

Signal Source

All Synthesized Sweeper Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz PSGa 83630B,

Harmonic level: < − 40 dBc 83640B,
Amplitude range: 10 to − 20 dBm 83650B
Frequency Accuracy: 0.02%

BBA Signal Generator Frequency: 250 kHz to 40 MHz E4438C 33250A

Amplitude: ~ −10 dBm
Flatness: < ±0.75 dB

Power Meter

All Power Meter Power Reference Accuracy: ±1.2% E4418B E4419B

Compatible with power sensor

All Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 3.66 GHz 8481D 8487D
8485D
Amplitude Range: -70 to –10 dBm

P03 Low Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 3.6 GHz 8481D 8485D
8487D
Amplitude Range: −70 to −10 dBm

Pxx other Low Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 8485D 8487D
than P03
Amplitude Range: −70 to −10 dBm

Oscilloscope

All Keysight Infiniium Oscilloscope Cutoff Frequency: 50 MHz 54800B

Rejection at 65 MHz: > 40 dB
Rejection at 75 MHz: > 60 dB
Rejection at 80 MHz: > 60 dB
Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz

598
 Functional Tests
Test Equipment

Table 16-1

Analyzer Al ternate
Recommended
Option Item Critical Specifications Keysight
Keysight Model
Model

Miscellaneous Equipment

All Filter, 50 MHz Low Pass Cutoff Frequency: 50 MHz 0955-0306

Rejection at 65 MHz: > 40 dB
Rejection at 75 MHz: > 60 dB
Rejection at 80 MHz: > 60 dB
Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz

526 Power Splitter, 3.5 mm Nominal Insertion Loss: 6 dB 11667B

Tracking Between Ports: < 0.25 dB

503, 508, Power Splitter Nominal Insertion Loss: 6 dB 11667A 11667B

513
Tracking Between Ports: < 0.25 dB

All Termination, 50Ω Type N (m) Connector 909A Option 012

Frequency: 30 Hz to 26.5 GHz

BBA Termination, 50Ω BNC male 11593A

Frequency: 250 kHz to 40 MHz

a. PSG model numbers: E8244A, E8254A, E8247C Option 520, E8247C Option H31 or 540, E8257D
Option 520, E8257D Option 550, E8257D Option 567, E8267D Option 544.

599
 Functional Tests
Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL)

Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL)

Test Limits (with 0 dB input attenuation)
See Table 16-2 for values.
The Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL) of the signal analyzer is measured
across a 10 kHz frequency span at several center frequencies. The analyzer
input is terminated into a 50Ω load. A test is performed to assure the
measurement is not performed in the presence of a residual response. The
measurement is then averaged, and the result is normalized to a 1 Hz
bandwidth.

Table 16-2 DANL Measurement Requirements

Critical Specifications Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Termination, 50Ω Type-N (m) Frequency: DC to 18 GHz 909A Option 012

Figure 16-1 DANL Test Setup

Procedure
1. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-1
2. Press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on the analyzer.
3. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 10, MHz
Input/Output, RF Input, RF Coupling, select DC
SPAN X Scale, Span, 10, kHz
AMPTD Y Scale, -70, dBm
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Mech Atten, 0, dB
BW, Res BW, 1, kHz
BW, Video BW, 100, Hz
Meas Setup, Average/Hold, Number, 20, Enter
Trace/Detector, Trace Average
Single

600
Functional Tests
Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL)

4. Press Restart, then wait for Average/Hold to display 20/20.

5. Press View/Display, Display, then press Display Line, On.
6. Rotate the knob and set the display line at the average amplitude of the
displayed noise floor by visual inspection.
7. Confirm that the measurement is performed on the analyzer noise floor
and not on a residual response within the displayed 10 kHz span.

Ignore the residual response if one appears when taking the measurement.

8. Enter the value of the display line as the Measured Average Noise Level at
10 MHz column in Table 16-2 on page 600.
9. Normalize the measured value to a 1 Hz BW by adding –30 dB to the
measured value.

The –30 dB value is added because the formula used to calculate the
value of the noise power in a 1 Hz BW when measured with a 1 kHz BW is:
Normalized Noise = 10 Log (BW 2/BW 1) where BW 2 is the 1 kHz
BW we measure and BW 1 is 1 Hz BW to which we want to
normalize.
Therefore, 10 Log (1000) = 30 dB, so the noise floor will be 30 dB
lower in a 1 Hz BW.

10.Enter the normalized value of the displayed average noise level in

Table 16-2 on page 600.
11.The value of the normalized displayed average noise should be less than
the specification value.
12.Change the analyzer center frequency to the next value listed in
Table 16-2 on page 600. Press: FREQ Channel, Center Freq, [Table 2-1
Value], GHz
13.Repeat step 4 through step 12 to fill in the remainder of Table 16-2 on
page 600 for your analyzer frequency range.

601
 Functional Tests
Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL)

Measured Average Noise Level Normalized Average Noise Level/(1 Test Limits (dBm)
Center Frequency
(dBm) Hz BW) (dBm)

10 MHz –150

2 GHz –150

6 GHz –148

13 GHz –147

20 GHz –142

26.5 GHz –135

602
 Functional Tests
Frequency Readout Accuracy

Frequency Readout Accuracy

Test Limits
Frequency Readout Accuracy is equivalent to the following equation:

± ( 0.25% × span + 5% × RBW + 2 Hz + 0.5 × horizontal resolution )

See results table for actual values.
The frequency readout accuracy is measured in several spans and center
frequencies that allow both internal analyzer synthesizer modes and prefilter
bandwidths to be tested. Frequency reference error is eliminated by using the
same frequency standard for the analyzer and signal source.

Critical Specification Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Adapter, Type-N (m), to Frequency: 10 MHz to 1.51 GHz 1250-1744

3.5 mm (f)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Adapter, 3.5 mm (f) to Frequency: 10 MHz to 1.51 GHz 83059B

3.5 mm (f)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Cable, 3.5 mm, Frequency: 10 MHz to 1.51 GHz 11500E

1 meter
VSWR: < 1.4:1

Cable, BNC, 120 cm Frequency: 10 MHz 10503A

Synthesized Sweeper Frequency: 10 MHz to 1.51 GHz PSG

Figure 16-2 Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Setup

603
 Functional Tests
Frequency Readout Accuracy

Procedure
1. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-2. Confirm the analyzer’s
built-in auto alignment has been performed within the past 24 hours.
2. On the synthesized sweeper, press PRESET, then set the controls as
follows:
FREQUENCY, 1505, MHz
POWER LEVEL, –10, dBm
3. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Mode, Spectrum Analyzer
Mode Preset
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 1505, MHz
SPAN X Scale, Span, 2990, MHz
Trace/Detector, More, Detector, Sample
Single
4. Press Restart.
Press Peak Search on the analyzer. If the instrument is functioning
correctly, the marker reading in the active function block will be between
the values listed in Table 16-3. Record the marker value in the Marker
Frequency Readout column in Table 16-3.
5. On the signal analyzer, change the span and center frequency as listed in
Table 16-3.
6. Change the synthesized sweeper frequency to match the center frequency
of the analyzer.
7. Repeat step 4 through step 6 until the Marker Frequency Readout column
of Table 16-3 is complete.
Table 16-3 Frequency Readout Accuracy Results

Span Center
Minimum Marker Frequency Readout Maximum
(MHz) Frequency (MHz)

2990 1505 1495.9 MHz 1514.1 MHz

127.2 1505 1504.56 MHz 1505.44 MHz

54.1 1505 1504.8122 MHz 1505.1878 MHz

7.95 1505 1504.97240 MHz 1505.0276 MHz

0.106 1505 1504.999630 MHz 1505.000370 MHz

1.98 517.59 517.58316 MHz 517.59684 MHz

1.98 832.50 832.49316 MHz 832.50684 MHz

604
 Functional Tests
Second Harmonic Distortion (SHD)

Second Harmonic Distortion (SHD)

Test Limits

Applied Frequency Mixer Level Distortion

40 MHz –10 dBm < –55 dBc

This test checks the second harmonic distortion of the signal analyzer by
tuning to twice the input frequency and examining the level of the distortion
product. A low pass filter is inserted between the source and the signal
analyzer to prevent the source second harmonic from artificially raising the
second harmonic product displayed on the analyzer.
The power level at the input mixer is 20 dB higher than specified to allow the
distortion product to be seen. For example, the instrument specification may
state that with a –15 dBm signal at the input mixer, the distortion product
should be suppressed by > –60 dBc.
The equivalent Second Harmonic Intercept (SHI) is 45 dBm
(–15 dBm + 60 dBc). This test is performed with –10 dBm at the mixer and
verifies the distortion product is suppressed by –55 dBc. This ensures the SHI is
also 45 dBm (–10 dBm + 55 dBc).

Critical Specifications Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Adapter, Type-N(m) to Frequency: 10 MHz to 80 MHz 1250-1476

BNC(f)
VSWR: < 1.05:1

Adapter, BNC (f) to SMA (m) Frequency: 40 to 80 MHz 1250-1200

Adapter, Frequency: 10 MHz to 80 MHz 83059B

3.5 mm(f) to 3.5 mm(f) VSWR: < 1.1:1

Cable, BNC 120 cm (2 Frequency: 10 to 40 MHz 10503A

required)

Filter, 50 MHz Low Pass Cutoff Frequency: 50 MHz 0955-0306

Rejection at 65 MHz: > 40 dB
Rejection at 75 MHz: > 60 dB

Synthesized Sweeper Frequency: 50 MHz PSG

Spectral Purity: Better than –30 dBc

605
 Functional Tests
Second Harmonic Distortion (SHD)

Figure 16-3 Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup

Procedure
1. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-3.
2. Press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on the signal analyzer and
Preset the synthesized sweeper.
3. Set up the synthesized sweeper by pressing:
Frequency, 40, MHz
Amplitude, –10, dBm
4. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 40, MHz
SPAN X Scale, Span, 1, MHz
5. On the analyzer, press Peak Search.
6. Adjust the synthesized sweeper amplitude for a signal analyzer display of
–10 dBm ±0.1 dB.
7. On the analyzer, activate the marker delta function by pressing the Marker
and Delta keys.
8. On the signal analyzer, press:
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 80, MHz
Meas Setup, Average/Hold Number, 20, Enter
Trace/Detector, Trace Average
Single
9. Press Peak Search. Enter the displayed value under the Measured Second
Harmonic Distortion (dBc) heading in Table 16-4.

606
 Functional Tests
Second Harmonic Distortion (SHD)

Table 16-4 Second Harmonic Distortion Results

Applied Frequency Measured Second Harmonic Distortion Mixer Level Specification

(MHz) (dBc) (dBm) (dBc)

40 –10 –55

607
 Functional Tests
Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz

Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz

Test Limits
Amplitude Accuracy should remain within 1.13 dB of the measured source
value across the range of source levels and changes in resolution bandwidth.
The Preamp (option P03, P08, P13, P26) should remain within ±1.3 dB of
measured values.
A synthesized sweeper is used as the signal source for the test. The source
amplitude is varied using the signal source amplitude control. The attenuation
and resolution bandwidth are varied on the signal analyzer. The source
amplitude is measured by the power meter and signal analyzer at each setting,
and the values compared. The difference between each pair of measurements
indicates the amplitude accuracy.

Recommended
Item Critical Specifications
Keysight Model

Adapter Type-N (m), to 3.5 mm (m) 1250-1743

Adapter 3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) 83059B

Attenuator, 30 dB Accuracy: < 0.5 dB at 50 MHz 11708A

Cable 3.5 mm, 1 meter 11500E

Cable BNC, 120 cm 10503A

Power Meter Compatible with power sensor E4418B

Power Sensor Amplitude Range: -25 dBm to 10 dBm 8485A

Power Splitter 3.5 mm (f) connectors 11667B

6 dB loss

Synthesized Sweeper Typical Temperature Stability: 0.01 dBc/°C PSG

608
 Functional Tests
Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz

Figure 16-4 Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup

Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter.
2. Configure equipment as shown in Figure 16-4, with the power splitter
connected directly to the signal analyzer input through the adapter.

To minimize stress on the test equipment connections, support the power

sensor.

3. If the auto alignment for the analyzer has not been performed within the
past 24 hours, press System, Alignments, Align Now, All to perform the
auto alignment routine.
4. Press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on the analyzer.
5. Set up the synthesized sweeper by pressing:
CW, 50, MHz
Power Level, -4, dBm
RF (On)
6. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 50, MHz
SPAN X Scale, 2, MHz
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Mech Atten, 10, dB
Input/Output, RF Input, RF Coupling, select DC
Sweep/Control, Sweep Setup, Swp Time Rules, SA - Accuracy

609
 Functional Tests
Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz

Meas Setup, Average/Hold Number, 20, Enter

Trace/Detector, Trace Average
Single
7. Perform the following steps for each row listed in Table 16-5:
a. Set the synthesized sweeper amplitude to the value listed in the
Nominal Source Amplitude column in Table 16-5
b. Set the Mech Atten as indicated in the Attenuation column in Table
16-5
c. Set the Span as listed in the Span column of Table 16-5
d. Record the source amplitude, as measured by the power meter, in
the Power Meter Amplitude column of Table 16-5
e. On the signal analyzer, press Restart.
f. Wait for the signal analyzer to finish averaging.
g. Press Peak Search.
h. Record the signal amplitude, as measured by the analyzer in the
Measured Amplitude column of Table 16-5
i. Calculate the signal amplitude accuracy error using the following
equation, and record the results under the Amplitude Accuracy
Error column:
Amplitude Accuracy Error = Meas_amp - Power_meter

Table 16-5 Amplitude Accuracy Results

Nominal Attenuation Span Measured Power Meter Amplitude Test Limit

Source Amplitude (dB) (MHz) Amplitude Amplitude Accuracy (dB)
(dBm) Meas_amp Power_meter Error
(dBm) (dBm) (dB)

-4 10 2 ±1.13 dB

-9 10 1 ±1.13 dB

-14 10 0.5 ±1.13 dB

-4 20 0.1 ±1.13 dB

-14 20 0.1 ±1.13 dB

-4 30 0.1 ±1.13 dB

-14 30 0.1 ±1.13 dB

610
 Functional Tests
Amplitude Accuracy at 50 MHz

Testing Preamp Option (P03, P08, P13, P26)

Instruments containing Options P03, P08, P13, P26 must have the preamp
function turned on and tested.

Procedure
1. On the analyzer, press AMPTD Y Scale, More, Internal Preamp, Low Band.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 16-4 on page 609, using a
30 dB Pad between the adapter and the signal analyzer input.
3. Set the synthesized sweeper amplitude to the value listed in the Nominal
Source Amplitude column in Table 16-6.
4. Set the signal analyzer input attenuation to 0 dB.
5. Set the Span as listed in Table 16-6.
6. Record the source amplitude, as measured by the power meter, in the
Power Meter Amplitude column of Table 16-6.
7. On the signal analyzer, press Restart.
8. Wait for the analyzer to finish averaging.
9. Press Peak Search.
10.Record the signal amplitude as measured by the analyzer in the measured
amplitude column of Table 16-6.
11.Calculate the signal amplitude accuracy using the following equation:
Amplitude Accuracy Error = Meas_amp + 30 dB - Power_meter
12.Record the results under the Amplitude Accuracy Error column of Table
16-6

Table 16-6 Amplitude Accuracy Results (Option P03, P08, P13, P26)

Nominal Res BW Span Measured Power Meter Amplitude Test Limit

Source Low- band (kHz) (kHz) Amplitude Amplitude Accuracy (dB)
Amplitude Preamp Meas_amp Power_meter Error
(dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dB)

-13 ON 1 106 ±1.30 dB

611
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness)

Frequency Response (Flatness)

Test Limits

Frequency Range Limit Relative to 50 MHz

20 Hz to 3.6 GHz ±1.5 dB

> 3.6 GHz to 8.4 GHz ±2.5 dB

> 8.4 GHz to 13.6 GHz ±3.0 dB

> 13.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz ±3.5 dB

The frequency response test measures the signal analyzer’s amplitude error as
a function of the tuned frequency. Measurements are made ranging from 50
MHz to the maximum frequency range of your analyzer. The signal source
amplitude is measured with a power meter to eliminate error due to source
flatness. The measured value is normalized to 50 MHz.

Critical Specifications Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Adapter, Type N (m) to Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1743

3.5 mm (m)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Adapter, Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 83059B

3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f) VSWR: < 1.1:1

Cable, 3.5 mm, 1 meter Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11500E

VSWR: < 1.4:1

Cables, BNC 120 cm Frequency: 10 MHz 10503A

Power Meter Compatible with power sensor E4418B

Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 8485A

Power Splitter Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11667B

Tracking between ports: < 0.25 dB

Synthesized Sweeper Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26 GHz PSG

612
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness)

Figure 16-5 Frequency Response Test Setup

Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor as described in the
power meter operation manual.
2. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-5.

Connect the power splitter to the signal analyzer input using the
appropriate adapter. Do not use a cable.

3. Assure the signal analyzer’s built-in auto alignment has been performed
within the last 24 hours.
4. Press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on the signal analyzer, and
press Preset on the synthesized sweeper.
5. Set up the synthesized sweeper by pressing:
CW, 50, MHz
Power level, –4, dBm
6. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 50, MHz
SPAN X Scale, Span, 50, kHz
AMPTD Y Scale, Ref Level, 0, dBm
7. Adjust the synthesized sweeper output power for a power meter reading
of –10 dBm ±0.1 dB.

613
Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness)

8. On the signal analyzer, press Single.

9. Press the Peak Search key on the signal analyzer to position the marker on
the peak of the signal.
10.Refer to Table 16-7, “Frequency Response (Flatness) Results.” Enter the
amplitude of the signal displayed on the signal analyzer into the MeasAmp
column of Table 16-7.
11.Enter the power meter reading into the PowerMeter column of Table 16-7.

12.Tune the synthesized sweeper and signal analyzer to the next frequency
listed in Table 16-7.
13.Enter the power sensor calibration factor into the power meter.
14.For frequencies 3.6 GHz and above, press AMPTD Y Scale, then Presel
Center to center the preselector filter for an optimum amplitude
measurement.
15.Repeat step 7 through step 14 and complete the remainder of Table 16-7
for the frequency range of your analyzer.
16.Compute the measurement error (MeasError = MeasAmp - PowerMeter).

17.Compute the flatness error normalized to 50 MHz:

(MeasError - MeasError @ 50 MHz)

18.Enter the computed flatness error valu651e into the FlatNorm column of
Table 16-7.
19.Compare the value of FlatNorm to the test limit.

614
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness)

Table 16-7 Frequency Response (Flatness) Results

Analyzer Power Meter Meas Error Flatness Flatness Error

Center Amplitude Measurement Normalized Test Limits
Frequency to 50 MHz (dB)
Measamp Powermeter Measerror FlatNorm

50 MHz 0 Ref

1 GHz ±1.5 dB

2 GHz 1.5 dB

3 GHz ±1.5 dB

3.5 GHz ±1.5 dB

4 GHz ±2.5 dB

6 GHz ±2.5 dB

8 GHz ±2.5 dB

9 GHz ±3.0 dB

11 GHz ±3.0 dB

13 GHz ±3.0 dB

14 GHz ±3.5 dB

17 GHz ±3.5 dB

20 GHz ±3.5 dB

23 GHz ±3.5 dB

26 GHz ±3.5 dB

615
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On

Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On

Test Limits

Frequency Range Limit Relative to 50 MHz

100 kHz to 3.6 GHz ±2.0 dB

> 3.6 GHz to 8.4 GHz ±3.0 dB

> 8.4 GHz to 13.6 GHz ±3.5 dB

> 13.6 GHz to 26.5 GHz ±4.0 dB

The frequency response test, with preamplifier on, measures the signal
analyzer’s amplitude error as a function of the tuned frequency. Measurements
are made ranging from 50 MHz to the maximum frequency range of the
preamp. The signal source amplitude is measured with a power meter to
eliminate error due to source flatness. The measured value is normalized to 50
MHz.

Critical Specifications Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Adapter, Type N(m) to 3.5 Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1743

mm(m)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Adapter, Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 83059B

3.5 mm(f) to 3.5 mm(f) VSWR: < 1.1:1

Cable, 3.5 mm, 1 meter Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11500E

VSWR: < 1.4:1

Cables, BNC 120 cm Frequency: 10 MHz 10503A

Power Meter Compatible with power sensor E4418B

Attenuator, 30 dB Fixed Frequency: 50 MHz 11708A

Accuracy: ±0.05 dB

Power Sensor Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 8485D

Amplitude Range: –65 dBm to –55 dBm

Power Splitter Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11667B

Tracking between ports: < 0.25 dB

Synthesized Sweeper Frequency Range: 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz PSG

616
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On

Figure 16-6 Frequency Response Test Setup

Procedure
1. Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor as described in the
power meter operation manual.
2. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-6.

Connect the power splitter to the signal analyzer input using the
appropriate adapter. Do not use a cable.

3. Assure the signal analyzer’s built-in auto alignment has been performed
within the last 24 hours.
4. Press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on the signal analyzer, and
press Preset on the synthesized sweeper.
5. Set up the synthesized sweeper by pressing:
CW, 50, MHz
Power level, –54, dBm
6. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 50, MHz
SPAN X Scale, Span, 50, kHz
AMPTD Y Scale, More, Internal Preamp, Full Range
AMPTD Y Scale, Attenuation, Mech Atten, 0, dB
AMPTD Y Scale, Ref Level, –55, dBm

617
Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On

7. Adjust the synthesized sweeper output power for a power meter reading
of –60 dBm ±0.1 dB.
8. On the signal analyzer, press Single.
9. Press the Peak Search key on the signal analyzer to position the marker on
the peak of the signal.
10.Refer to Table 16-7, “Frequency Response (Flatness) Results.” Enter the
amplitude of the signal displayed on the signal analyzer into the MeasAmp
column of Table 16-7.
11.Enter the power meter reading into the PowerMeter column of Table 16-7.

12.Tune the synthesized sweeper and signal analyzer to the next frequency
listed in Table 16-7.
13.Enter the power sensor calibration factor into the power meter.
14.For frequencies 3.6 GHz and above, press AMPTD Y Scale, then Presel
Center to center the preselector filter for an optimum amplitude
measurement.
15.Repeat step 7 through step 14 and complete the remainder of Table 16-7
for the frequency range of your preamp.
16.Compute the measurement error (MeasError = MeasAmp - PowerMeter).

17.Compute the flatness error normalized to 50 MHz:

(MeasError - MeasError @ 50 MHz)

18.Enter the computed flatness error value into the FlatNorm column of Table
16-7.
19.Compare the value of FlatNorm to the test limit.

618
 Functional Tests
Frequency Response (Flatness), Preamp On

Table 16-8 Frequency Response (Flatness) Results

Analyzer Power Meter Meas Error Flatness Flatness Error

Center Amplitude Measurement Normalized Test Limits
Frequency to 50 MHz (dB)
Measamp Powermeter Measerror FlatNorm

50 MHz 0 Ref

1 GHz ±2.0 dB

2 GHz ±2.0 dB

3 GHz ±2.0 dB

3.5 GHz ±2.0 dB

4 GHz ±3.0 dB

6 GHz ±3.0 dB

8 GHz ±3.0 dB

9 GHz ±3.5 dB

11 GHz ±3.5 dB

13 GHz ±3.5 dB

14 GHz ±4.0 dB

17 GHz ±4.0 dB

20 GHz ±4.0 dB

23 GHz ±4.0 dB

26 GHz ±4.0 dB

619
 Functional Tests
Scale Fidelity

Scale Fidelity
Test Limits
The scale fidelity error will be £ ±1.0 dB with £ -10 dBm at the mixer.
This test checks the scale fidelity of the instrument by maintaining a constant
reference level and measuring signals of different amplitudes over most of the
display range. This test sets the input attenuator to 10 dB and the Reference
Level to 0 dBm. The external attenuator is set to 0 dB, and the amplitude of the
source is adjusted to set the displayed signal at the reference level.
The instrument’s internal marker is used to measure the reference amplitude.
The Marker Delta function is activated and the RF input is reduced using the
external precision step attenuator. Signal input levels from 0 dBm to -50 dBm
are measured.

Critical Specifications Recommended

Item
(for this test) Keysight Model

Adapter, Frequency: 10 MHz to 18 GHz 1250-1745

Type-N (m), to 3.5 mm (f)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Adapter, Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 83059B

3.5 mm (f) to 3.5 mm (f)
VSWR: < 1.1:1

Attenuator, 10 dB Step Range: 0-50 dB 8495A

Frequency: 50 MHz
Accuracy: ±0.25 dB

Attenuator, 10 dB fixed (2 required) Frequency: 50 MHz 8493C, option 010

VSWR: < 1.2:1

Cable, 3.5 mm, 1 meter (2 required) Frequency: 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz 11500E
VSWR: < 1.4:1

Cable, BNC 120 cm Frequency: 10 MHz 10503A

Synthesized Sweeper Output Level Accuracy: 0 to –15 dBm: ±1.0 dB PSG

620
 Functional Tests
Scale Fidelity

Figure 16-7 Scale Fidelity Setup

Averaging is used for all measurements to improve repeatability and

reduce measurement uncertainty.

Procedure
1. Configure the equipment as shown in Figure 16-7.
2. Preset the Source and press Mode, Spectrum Analyzer, Mode Preset on
the analyzer.
3. Set up the synthesized sweeper by pressing:
Frequency, 50, MHz
Amplitude, +5, dBm
RF On/Off, On
4. Set up the signal analyzer by pressing:
Input/Output, More, Freq Ref In, External
FREQ Channel, Center Freq, 50, MHz
SPAN X Scale, Span, 1, MHz
AMPTD Y Scale, Ref Level, 0, dBm
Meas Setup, Average/Hold Number, 10, Enter
Trace/Detector, Trace Average
Peak Search
5. Set the external 10 dB step attenuator to 0 dB.
6. Adjust the amplitude on the signal source until the marker amplitude on
the analyzer reads –15 dBm ±0.2 dB.
7. On the analyzer, press the Single, Restart to trigger a 10 sweep average.

621
Functional Tests
Scale Fidelity

8. On the analyzer, activate the Marker Delta function by pressing Peak

Search, Marker Delta.
9. Perform the following steps for each attenuator setting listed in the table
below:
a. Select the next External attenuator setting.
b. Press the Restart key to trigger a 10 sweep average.
c. Enter the delta marker value into Table 16-9.
d. Check delta marker reading against the test limits.

622
 Functional Tests
Scale Fidelity

Table 16-9 Scale Fidelity Results

Minimum Marker Del ta Value Maximum

External Attenuator Setting
(dB) (dB) (dB)

0 N/A Reference N/A

10 –11.0 –9.0

20 –21.0 –19.0

30 –31.0 –29.0

40 –41.0 –39.0

50 –51.0 –49.0

623
 Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

BBIQ Input Frequency Response

(Option BBA only)
Test Limits

Frequency Range Limit Relative to 250 kHz

Frequency Range Limit Relative to 250 kHz

250 kHz to 10 MHz (Standard) ± 1.75 dB

250 kHz to 25 MHz (Option B25) ± 1.75 dB

250 kHz to 40 MHz (Option S40 or SU1) ± 1.75 dB

This procedure tests the amplitude response of each of the BBIQ inputs versus
frequency. For each input, a reference measurement is made at 250 kHz and
then subsequent measurements are made at several frequencies up to the
maximum IQ bandwidth. The amplitude difference between the measurement
at 250 kHz and subsequent frequencies is calculated and compared to the test
limit.

Recommended
Item Critical Specifications
Keysight Model

RF Signal Generator Frequency: 250 kHz to 40 MHz E4438C

Amplitude: ~–10 dBm
Flatness: < ±0.75 dB

Cable, BNC Connectors: BNC male 10502A

Length: 23 cm (9 in) max

Cable, BNC, 120 cm Connectors: BNC male 10503A

Frequency: 250 kHz to 40 MHz

50 Ohm Termination Connector: BNC male 11593A

Frequency: 250 kHz to 40 MHz

624
 Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

Figure 16-8 BBIQ Input Frequency Response Setup (I Input)

Figure 16-9 BBIQ Input Frequency Response Setup (I Input)

Figure 16-10 BBIQ Input Frequency Response Setup (Q Input)

Figure 16-11 BBIQ Input Frequency Response Setup (Q Input)

625
 Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

Procedure
1. On the X-Series analyzer, press Mode, IQ Analyzer (Basic). Press Mode
Preset.
2. Press Input/Output, I/Q (to change to I/Q inputs), I/Q (to bring up the I/Q
input menu), I/Q Cable Calibrate. Follow the instructions on screen. Use
the short BNC cable listed above to perform the calibration. This process
has several steps and will take about 3 minutes to perform.
3. Press I/Q Path, I+jQ, I Setup, Differential (On). Press Return, Q Setup, Q
Same as I (Yes).
4. Preset the RF Signal Generator and set the controls as follows:
Frequency 250 kHz
Amplitude –10 dBm
RF On

Once the RF Signal Generator’s Amplitude is set, do not change the RF

Signal Generator’s Amplitude setting during the rest of this procedure.

5. Connect the longer BNC cable between the RF Signal Generator’s RF

OUTPUT and the I input of the X-Series analyzer, see Figure 16-7
6. Connect the 50 Ohm termination to the I input of the X-Series analyzer,
see Figure 16-7
7. Press Mode Preset on the X-Series analyzer. Press System, Show,
System. Note if either of the options listed below are present:
N9020A-B25
N9020A-S40
N9020A-SU1
8. If none of the options listed in step 7 are present, the maximum IQ
bandwid th is 10 MHz
9. If N9020A-B25 is present, but N9020A-S40 and N9020A-SU1 are not
present, the maximum IQ bandwidth is 25 MHz
10.If either N9020A-S40 or N9020A-SU1 is present, the maximum IQ
bandwid th is 40 MHz.
11.Press FREQ on the X-Series analyzer and set the Center Freq equal to one
half the maximum IQ band width determined above. For example, if the
maximum IQ bandwidth is 40 MHz, set the Center Freq to 20 MHz.
12.Press SPAN on the X-Series analyzer and set the Span equal to the
maximum IQ bandwidth determined above.
13.Press BW on the X-Series analyzer and set the Res BW to 100 kHz.
14.Press Peak Search on the X-Series analyzer. Record the marker amplitude
reading in Table 16-10 for the I Input at 250 kHz.

626
 Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

15.Set the RF Signal Generator to each of the remaining frequencies listed in

Table 1, up to the maximum IQ bandwidth of the X-Series analyzer. At
each frequency, do the following:
a. Press Peak Search
b. Record the marker amplitude reading in Table 16-10 for the I Input
at the current RF Signal Generator frequency
Table 16-10 BBIQ Input Frequency Response, I and I Inputs

RF Signal I Input I Input Test Limits

Generator
Frequency Marker Frequency Marker Frequency
Amplitude Response Amplitude Response

250 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB ±1.75 dB

2 MHz ±1.75 dB

5 MHz ±1.75 dB

7.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

9.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

Stop here if Maximum IQ Bandwidth is 10 MHz

12.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

15 MHz ±1.75 dB

17.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

20 MHz ±1.75 dB

22.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

24.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

Stop here if Maximum IQ Bandwidth is 25 MHz

30 MHz ±1.75 dB

35 MHz ±1.75 dB

39.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

16.Set the RF Signal Generator frequency to 250 kHz

17.Connect the BNC Cable between the RF Signal Generator RF Output and
the I input on the X-Series analyzer, see Figure 16-9
18.Connect the 50 Ohm termination to the I input on the X-Series analyzer,
see Figure 16-9
19.Press Peak Search on the X-Series analyzer. Record the marker amplitude
reading in Table 16-10 for the I Input at 250 kHz.

627
Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

20.Set the RF Signal Generator to each of the remaining frequencies listed in

Table 1, up to the maximum IQ bandwidth of the X-Series analyzer. At
each frequency, do the following:
a. Press Peak Search
b. Record the marker amplitude reading in Table 16-10 for the I Input
at the current RF Signal Generator frequency

Since the input is set for I + Q and the input signal is being applied to I
only, the analyzer will measure 6 dB lower than the signal generator
output; in this case

-10 dB - +6 dB = -16 dB

This will be the case for I, I, Q, and Q inputs.

This is because the Fourier transform of

Asin (w+) = Am(W-w) + 1/2 Am(W+w).

Since a signal is placed at w or -w, the result will be 20log(1/2) lower.

The transform is in voltage and not power.

21.Connect the BNC Cable between the RF Signal Generator RF Output and
the Q input on the X-Series analyzer, see Figure 16-10
22.Connect the 50 Ohm termination to the Q input on the X-Series analyzer,
see Figure 16-10
23.Set the RF Signal Generator frequency to 250 kHz.
24.Press Peak Search on the X-Series analyzer. Record the marker amplitude
reading in Table 16-11 for the Q Input at 250 kHz.
25.Set the RF Signal Generator to each of the remaining frequencies listed in
Table 16-11, up to the maximum IQ bandwid th of the X-Series analyzer. At
each frequency, do the following:
Press Peak Search
Record the marker amplitude reading in Table 16-11 for the Q Input at the
current RF Signal Generator frequency

628
 Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

Table 16-11 BBIQ Input Frequency Response, Q and Q Inputs

RF Signal I Input I Input Test Limits

Generator
Frequency Marker Frequency Marker Frequency
Amplitude Response Amplitude Response

250 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB ±1.75 dB

2 MHz ±1.75 dB

5 MHz ±1.75 dB

7.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

9.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

Stop here if Maximum IQ Band wid th is 10 MHz

12.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

15 MHz ±1.75 dB

17.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

20 MHz ±1.75 dB

22.5 MHz ±1.75 dB

24.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

Stop here if Maximum IQ Band wid th is 25 MHz

30 MHz ±1.75 dB

35 MHz ±1.75 dB

39.9 MHz ±1.75 dB

26.Set the RF Signal Generator frequency to 250 kHz

27.Connect the BNC Cable between the RF Signal Generator RF Output and
the Q input on the X-Series analyzer, see Figure 16-11
28.Connect the 50 Ohm termination to the Q input on the X-Series analyzer,
see Figure 16-11
29.Press Peak Search on the X-Series analyzer. Record the marker amplitude
reading in Table 16-11 for the Q Input at 250 kHz.
30.Set the RF Signal Generator to each of the remaining frequencies listed in
Table 16-11, up to the maximum IQ bandwid th of the X-Series analyzer. At
each frequency, do the following:
a. Press Peak Search
b. Record the marker amplitude reading in Table 16-11 for the Q Input
at the current RF Signal Generator frequency

629
Functional Tests
BBIQ Input Frequency Response (Option BBA only)

31.In Table 16-10 and Table 16-11, calculate the Frequency Response for
each input by subtracting the Marker Amplitude at 250 kHz for that input
from the Marker Amplitude for each frequency greater than 250 kHz.

Frequency Response = Marker Amplitude (Freq > 250 kHz) – Marker Amplitude (250 kHz)

32.Compare the Frequency Response values to the Test Limits.

630
 Keysight X-Series Signal Analyzers
N9020A MXA Signal Analyzer

Service Guide

17 Instrument Software

What You Will Find in This Chapter

Instrument Software Overview on page 632

Software Licensing on page 633
Software Updates on page 634
Instrument Measurement Application Software on page 634
89601 VSA Software on page 634

631
 Instrument Software
Instrument Software Overview

Instrument Software Overview

The instrument software, installed in every instrument, contains not only the
spectrum analyzer measurement application, but also all of the other currently
available measurement applications. However, only the licensed applications
will be seen and available for use.
To view the currently licensed measurement applications press System, Show,
System. In addition to listing the application model number and description
you will also see the revision of each. However, the complete package itself
also has a revision associated with it, which can also be found on this screen as
the “Firmware Revision”.
Since the instrument application software is distributed in one complete
package, when an update is installed they are all updated at the same time.
One of the benefits of this is that you cannot have revisions that are
incompatible with each other installed in an instrument. However, there is one
exception to this, which would be the 89601A/B VSA software. While the latest
revision of the 89601A/B VSA software is installed in each instrument as it left
the factory, it must be updated, and kept in sync with the rest of the instrument
application software independently.

632
 Instrument Software
Software Licensing

Software Licensing
All application software needs to have a valid license in order to be available
for use. This also includes the spectrum analyzer application (N9060A or
N9060B).

633
 Instrument Software
Software Updates

Software Updates

Instrument Measurement Application Software

Updates are installed much like most other types of commercial software
packages. The latest revision of the software, along with complete installation
instructions, can be obtained as follows:
Web Download:
The latest revision of the software can be downloaded from:

www.keysight.com/find/xseries_software

89601 VSA Software

Updates for the 89601 VSA software can be downloaded from:

http://www.keysight.com/find/89600_VSA_sw_download
The revision of the 89601 VSA software must be compatible with the revision of
the instrument measurement application software package that is installed in
the instrument. To determine what revisions are compatible, and if a further
updates are required, please see the software compatibility information on the
instrument measurement application software download web page listed
above.

634
Index

RF front end description, 331 A7 midplane assembly

see A13 RF front end assembly A19 BBIQ Main Board part number, 372
description, 332 A8 motherboard
A1A2 front panel interface board description, 328
Numerics description, 330 part number, 372
part number, 372 removal, 520
removal, 539, 547 troubleshooting, 329
50 ohm load, 17 A1A3 LCD A9 input attenuator
50 ohm/75 ohm minimum loss description, 330 description, 142
pad, 17 part number, 372 high band troubleshooting, 184
75 ohm matching transformer, 17 removal, 536, 545 low band troubleshooting, 157
troubleshooting, 59 part number, 372
A1A4 inverter board removal, 473
A part number, 372 AC probe, 17
removal, 539, 547 access to service menus, 353
A10 input attenuator A1A4 LCD Inverter Board accessories, 16
description, 142 description, 330 50 ohm load, 17
high band troubleshooting, 184 A1A5 front panel daughter board 50 ohm/75 ohm minimum loss
low band troubleshooting, 157 part number, 372 pad, 17
part number, 372 removal, 539, 547 75 ohm matching transformer, 17
removal, 473 A1A5 Front Panel USB Interface Board AC probe, 17
A11 low band switch description, 330 broadband preamplifiers, 17
description, 142 A2 analog IF assembly power splitters, 18
high band troubleshooting, 188 description, 229, 248 RF limiters, 18
low band troubleshooting, 161 part number, 372 transient limiters, 18
part number, 372 removal, 510 adjustments
removal, 449, 453, 457 troubleshooting, 233, 252 equipment, 26
A12 YTF A25 Wide Band Analog IF assembly required test equipment, 26
description, 142 removal, 515 test equipment, 26
high band troubleshooting, 189 A26 Wide Band Digital IF assembly after repairs
low band troubleshooting, 162 removal, 515 see post-repair procedures, 558
part number, 372 A3 digital IF assembly Agilent Technologies
removal, 475 description, 240, 259 Sales and Service offices, 39
A13 RF front end assembly part number, 372 splash screen, 48
description, 144 removal, 510 Align menu description, 364
removal, 478 troubleshooting, 243, 262 alignment failure, 64
A14 L.O. synthesizer assembly A4 CPU assembly Alignments key, 46
description, 143, 278 description, 304 amplifiers, 17
high band troubleshooting, 179 part number, 372 amplitude accuracy test, 608
low band troubleshooting, 152 removal, 494 option 1DS, 611
part number, 372 troubleshooting, 304 amplitude linearity test, 620
removal, 483 A4BT1 CPU board battery analog IF
troubleshooting, 280 part number, 372 see A2 analog IF assembly
A15 front end control assembly post-repair setup, 559 application updating, 632
description, 145, 206 replacement, 494 attenuators, removal, 473
high band troubleshooting, 182 A5 disk drive
low band troubleshooting, 155 description, 306
part number, 372 troubleshooting, 306 B
removal, 480 A5 hard disk drive
troubleshooting, 210 part number, 372
recovery process, 310 B1, B2 fans
A16 reference assembly part number, 372
description, 288 removal, 497
A6 power supply removal, 525
high band troubleshooting, 177 troubleshooting, 55
low band troubleshooting, 150 description, 314
part number, 372 backlights, 60
part number, 372 bail handle
removal, 486 removal, 491
troubleshooting, 320 part number, 372
troubleshooting, 291 removal, 441
A17 BBIQ LED Board A7 midplane
description, 322 Band Lock menu description, 362
description, 331 basics, troubleshooting, 46
A18 BBIQ Interface Board part number, 372
troubleshooting, 325 battery

Service Guide Index 635

Index

see A4BT1 CPU board battery

BBIQ
E G
description, 331
Interface Board description, 331 electronic attenuator path, 140 Getting Started Guide on
LED Board description, 331 electrostatic discharge, 21 CD-ROM, 16
Main Board description, 332 enabling spread spectrum, 574, 579, green LED, 48
BBIQ frequency response, 624 583, 584
BBIQ Interface Board removal, 551 entitlement certificate, 14
BBIQ Main Board, Option BBA removal equipment H
A19 Main Board, Option BBA adjustments, 26
removal functional tests, 597
performance verification tests, 26 handle
, 556 see bail handle
warm-up time, 596
BBIQ removal, 548 error messages, 46, 73 hard disk drive
before troubleshooting, 19 error queues see A5 hard disk drive
BIOS settings verification, 568 front panel, 76 hardware
blank display, 59 ESD Information, 21 external, 388, 389, 390, 391, 396,
block diagrams, 334 ESD safety accessories, 18 397, 399, 401, 402, 404, 406, 408,
boot priority, 572 external hardware, 388, 389, 390, 419, 421, 422, 423, 424, 426, 427,
boot process 391, 396, 397, 399, 401, 402, 404, 428, 431, 434, 481, 540, 541, 542
problems, 51 406, 408, 419, 421, 422, 423, 424, high band path, 138
boot up process, 47 426, 427, 428, 431, 434, 481, 540, high band signal level verification, 71
broadband preamplifiers, 17 541, 542 high band troubleshooting, 173, 177
external VGA monitor, 59
C I
F
cables IF Flatness menu description, 360
part numbers, 372 fans initial alignment failure, 64
calibration application software, 23 see B1, B2 fans initialization problem, 63
call centers, 39 firmware, 46 input attenuators
cautions and warnings, 19 firmware revision, checking, 46 see A9 and A10 input attenuator
chassis parts firmware updating, 632 input connector
part numbers, 372 frequency ranges, 138 see RF input connector
checking firmware revision, 46 frequency readout accuracy test, 603 instrument
computer block diagram, 334 frequency response return for service, 43
connector (flatness) test, 612 instrument frequency ranges, 138
see RF input connector BBIQ, 624 instrument messages, 73
contacting Keysight, 39 frequency response (flatness) test Instrument Messages Guide on
corrections menu description, 360 preamp on, 616 CD-ROM, 16
CPU assembly front end assembly instrument options, 15
see A4 CPU assembly see A13 RF front end assembly instrument packaging, 43
front end control board instrument serial number, 42
see A15 front end control assembly instrument upgrade, 15
D front end troubleshooting kit, 24 internal alignments, 64
front frame inverter board
description, 330 see A1A4 inverter board
DANL test, 600 Inverter Board, Option BBA removal
daughter board part number, 372
removal, 530 A1A4 Inverter Board, Option BBA
see A1A5 front panel daughter removal
board front panel error queue, 76
DC probes front panel interface , 549
use of, 17 see A1A2 front panel interface
diagnostics menus, 353 board, 372
digital IF functional testing K
see A3 digital IF assembly performance verification, 595
disk drive functional tests, 46
see A5 hard disk drive before performing, 596 keyboard
disk drive recovery process, 310 equipment list, 597 USB, 25
display introduction, 595 keypad
see A1A3 LCD vs performance verification part number, 372
display output, rear panel, 59 tests, 595 removal, 539, 547
displayed average noise level. See warm-up time, 596 Keysight Technologies
DANL, 600 See also individual functional contacting, 39
dress case tests, 595
see outer case Functional Tests Guide on
CD-ROM, 16 L
LCD

636 Service Guide Index

 Index

see A1A3 LCD options, 16 RPG knob

LED original instrument packing, 43 part number, 372
front panel, 46 other instrument packing, 44
green, 48 outer case (Option PRC), removal, 441
power on, 53 outer case, removal, 439 S
standby, 51 overview, MXA signal analyzer, 14
yellow, 48, 51
LED Board removal Safety Information, 436
A18 BBIQ Interface Board removal P Sales and Service offices, 39
second harmonic distortion test, 605
A17 BBIQ LED Board separate analog IF assembly and
removal, 551 packaging, 43 digital IF assembly, 513
license key, 14 parts serial number, 42
licensing software, 633 replaceable, 372 service
limiters PCI enumeration error, 58 equipment, 23
RF and transient, 18 performance verification tests returning your instrument, 43
LO Band Lock menu description, 363 equipment, 26 tools, 437
load, 50 ohm, 17 required test equipment, 26 service menus, 353
loading MXA software, 309 test equipment, 26 service strategy, 14
low band path, 138 performance verification tests vs signal level verification, 70
low band preamplifier path, 140 functional tests, 595 Snapshot Alignments menu
low band signal level verification, 70 post-repair procedures, 558 description, 360
low band switch power amplifiers, 17 software licensing, 633
see A11 low band switch power on LED, 53 specifications, 46
low band troubleshooting, 146 power splitters, 18 Specifications Guide on CD-ROM, 16
power supply splash screen, 48, 57, 58
see A6 power supply, 372 splitters, 18
M preamplifiers, 17
preload measurement
spread spectrum, 574, 579, 583, 584
standby LED, 51
applications, 47 static safety accessories, 18
major assembly locations, 438 preselector static-safe workstation, 21
manual set, 16 see A12 YTF status messages, 75
measurement application probes storage device
updating, 632 AC and DC, 17 USB, 25
Measurement Guides and support URL, 39
Programming Examples Guides on support web site, 39
CD-ROM, 16 R synthesizer
message URL see A14 L.O. synthesizer assembly
www.keysight.com/find/assist, 41
messages rear panel
error, 73 removal, 485
rear panel display output, 59
T
messages, warning, 74
midplane recovery process, 310
see A7 midplane reference assembly test equipment
midplane assembly see A16 reference assembly adjustments, 26
removal, 517 reference bracket performance verification tests, 26
midplane bracket part number, 372 post-repair, 557
part number, 372 removal, 444 troubleshooting, 26
motherboard remove tests. See functional tests
see A8 motherboard see individual assemblies timebase key description, 359
mouse repairs top brace
USB, 25 see post-repair procedures part number, 372
replace removal, 444
see individual assemblies transient limiter, 18
N replaceable parts, 372
required equipment, 26
troubleshooting
basics, 46
required test equipment before you start, 19
N7814A adjustments, 26 equipment needed, 26
see calibration application software performance verification tests, 26 high band, 173
troubleshooting, 26 low band, 146
return instrument for service, 43 see individual assemblies
O RF area components, 446
RF Flatness menu description, 360
operating system, 14
RF input connector U
part number, 372
problems, 59 removal, 528
Option BBA, 551 RF limiters, 18 updating firmware, 632
description, 331 RF path block diagram, 334 updating measurement
Option BBA removal RF section applications, 632
BBA removal, 548 description, 138 upgrades, 15

Service Guide Index 637

Index

URL, 39, 46
USB keyboard and mouse, 25
USB storage device, 25
User’s/Programmers Reference
Guides on CD-ROM, 16

V
video controller, 63
video signal path integrity, 63

W
warning messages, 74
warnings and cautions, 19
web site URL, 46
wide band analog IF
see A25 Wide Band Analog IF
assembly
wide band digital IF
see A26 Wide Band Digital IF
assembly

Y
yellow LED, 48, 51
yig filter
see A12 YTF
YTF
see A12 YTF

638 Service Guide Index

This information is subject to change
without notice.
© Keysight Technologies 2008-2017
Edition 1, May 2017

N9020-90218

www.keysight.com